Harry Browne's Campaign Journal — Complete

Monday, February 14, 2000 — Day One — Washington, D.C.

After three years of preparation, Campaign 2000 finally begins. Our effort appears to be the best prepared, best organized, best financed Libertarian presidential campaign ever. Only the next nine months can reveal how far that will take us, but I'm very excited about the possibilities.

The campaign begins with its first disappointment and its first happy outcome.

Newman Communications, our P.R. firm, had booked a week of first-class media events, beginning with the announcement of the campaign on Chris Matthews' "Hardball" TV show on CNBC this evening. Late last week, the show canceled — even though we had made concessions to give them an exclusive for the announcement.

So press secretary Jim Babka and the P.R. firm went to work to make the best of the situation. They were able to book me on C-SPAN's Washington Journal for Monday morning. And it appears the end result was better than the original plan.

Brian Lamb (C-SPAN's founder) is the host. He's a much better more tolerant interviewer than Chris Matthews, and so I'm free to tell the story my way — instead of being interrupted every other sentence. The result is powerful: our website and 800 number are flooded with inquiries. The campaign begins on a high note.

Immediately afterward, I'm on the phone with Alan Tullio at CBS Radio News in New York. We're supposed to talk for 10 minutes, but it turns out to be more like 20-25. He will pull out quotes and do a brief news item on the kickoff, to be broadcast across the country throughout the day. His friendliness reminds me how nice journalists and broadcasters were to me in 1996. He says he expects we'll be in touch throughout the year; I hope he means it and I hope we earn his continued interest.

Then we head to the Associated Press to be interviewed by Kathryn Pfleger and Douglas Kiker. This interview also runs beyond its scheduled 30 minutes. An article on the announcement is on the AP wire a few hours later. While a little condescending, it isn't hostile. I just wish it had more red meat in it — more of the message and less about how well-dressed I was. Also, the article refers to "a 12-step program that eliminates income taxes, Social Security, the War on Drugs, federal welfare and a lot of other things Washington does" — and I don't remember ever saying anything about a 12-step program.

At noon I'm on the phone for an hour with Kerry Coleman at WERE in Cleveland. He saw the C-SPAN broadcast and called immediately to have me on his show. He begins the interview by saying he never talks politics on his show, but he decided to make an exception when he saw the C-SPAN interview. Throughout the hour, he talks like a libertarian himself. At the end I realize that he hasn't taken any phone calls; he's wanted only to ask questions and air his own feelings about today's political situation.

In the afternoon, Pamela and I get to go back to the hotel to take short naps. We flew into Washington last night, in order for me to be here early Monday morning. I broadcast the final episode of my Sunday evening radio show from a Washington studio, finishing at 2am. We had trouble getting a taxi back to the hotel, and we didn't get to bed until well after 3am -- only to get up four hours later and head for C-SPAN. So we were glad to get a chance to catch up on sleep.

In the evening, I spend 40 minutes on Michael Reagan's nationally syndicated radio show by phone. He is as sympathetic as always. We disagree on some things, but he has always treated me well.

At 11pm, I'm on the Alan Colmes show, syndicated from New York. Alan, a liberal, was a great friend during the 1996 campaign and has continued to be so. He is very complimentary of me and of the Libertarian Party — saying the LP is the only party worthy to be called America's third party. We disagree on much — even on foreign policy — but the show goes well. The callers are about evenly divided between being for and against me.

Tuesday, February 15, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

Jim Babka and Steve Willis pick up Pamela and me at the hotel at 10 a.m. They bear the good news that C-SPAN has rerun yesterday's interview several times. They also tell me that the website and the 800 number are being inundated with visitors, some of whom are making donations. Later we're joined by John Moran of Newman Communications, our public relations firm.

The day begins with an interview with David Judson at Gannett News Service. We talk for about an hour. About half-way through, I realize that we have gotten bogged down in discussions of policy, philosophy, and other arcane areas. I try to bring the focus back to the message: "we want you to be free, free to live your life as you want to live it — not as the politicians think best." We get onto the drug issue, and I tell him of my pledge to pardon all non-violent drug offenders on my first day if I'm elected President. I ask him to quote me on that even if he cites nothing else I say, as I want to let the prisoners and their families know there are people out here on their side. The reporter draws a big star next to the quote. We'll see what he finally publishes.

Next comes a brief noon interview at MS-NBC. It's a situation where I have to sit in a small room alone with a TV camera, to be interviewed by someone in New York. The interview begins and the first time I speak my voice comes back into my earpiece on a two-second delay. It is almost impossible to concentrate and to speak that way without slowing down to incoherence. Pamela, watching on a monitor in the waiting room, doesn't know what's wrong with me and worries that I may have had a heart attack or stroke. Suddenly the sound disappears, and my voice speeds up — like a wind-up phonograph that had run out of steam and is cranked back up again.

The interview is only six minutes, but I get plenty of opportunity to talk. The interviewer, Lori Stokes, says, "Tell me about your 12-step program" — referring to yesterday's AP article. I say, "I don't have one; that's just something a reporter made up to describe my views." Later, I find out there is an item in our new press kit about my 12-step program. Jim Babka had taken material I've written on twelve issues and packaged it by calling it a 12-step program. Because of time constraints, Jim had to print it without my seeing it -- the first time this has happened -- and Murphy's Law reigned. We get an angry note from the two reporters who did the AP story — complaining that I had misquoted them. Imagine: public figure misquotes reporters! A true man-bites-dog story.

After eating lunch in the moving car, we arrive at the Washington Times building. First is a half-hour interview with Greg Pierce of the Times. He is friendly but non-committal. Then an interview with Jennifer Hickey of Insight Magazine, a sister publication of the Times. She seems much more sympathetic and understanding of libertarian positions. Once again, however, the discussion drifts away from the message and toward matters of process — government policies, history of the LP, and so on. I bring the conversation back to the message, but by now she has so many pages of notes I don't know what will show up in the magazine — if anything.

From the Times building, I do a 5-minute radio interview with Jim Ellis of WSM News in Nashville. He saw the AP article in the Nashville Tennessean and wants some soundbites he can play during each hourly news broadcast for the rest of the day. When I tell him what I want for Americans — the freedom to live their own lives in peace, he quotes Robert Heinlein (a favorite science-fiction author of many libertarians) saying that only one law is necessary — one to keep you from intruding on others. Imagine, he not only has read Heinlein, he remembers the libertarian parts.

In the evening on the phone from my hotel room, I have a one-hour radio show with Pat Campbell, a near-libertarian, on the Catholic Radio Network. I've been on with him before, and he's very friendly. He, too, saw the AP article and put in a hurried call to get me on immediately.

After the radio show, Campaign Manager Perry Willis and Jim Babka arrive to discuss immediate campaign plans with Pamela and me. I still haven't finished my campaign book, The Great Libertarian Offer — and it should have been to the printer long ago. We agree that I must take off most of next week, check into a hotel near home, look at no email and refuse to answer the phone, and put the finishing touches on the book. If I do that, the book should be in print by the beginning of June. If I don't, I may never finish it.

Yesterday's AP article appears to be showing up all across America — in major newspapers such as the Boston Globe, the Nashville Tennessean, the Salt Lake City Deseret News, the Charleston Post & Courier, the Spokane Spokesman-Review, the Seattle Post-Intelligencer. It also was carried on some of the main Internet political sites — such as CNN's AllPolitics.com, CBS Market Watch, and the Nando Times. WorldNetDaily carries the story on February 16, alongside my announcement article, "Why I'm Running for President." There's no way to find out how many radio and TV stations picked up the AP story.

I don't like print interviews, because I don't get to speak directly to the audience — as on radio or TV — and my message is filtered through a reporter. I often wonder whether doing print interviews is a waste of time. But then I see the number of interview requests triggered by a nationwide article such as the one the AP did, and I know it is more than worthwhile.

John Moran of Newman Communications provides some good advice on bringing print interviewers back to the message I want to convey. In the ensuing days, I find it very helpful.

Wednesday, February 16, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

I was able to get to bed at 10pm last night, and looked forward to nine hours' sleep — after two nights in a row of much too little sleep. But I awake this morning at 4:30pm, and can't get back to sleep. Just too much excitement going on. So I arise and get some writing done while waiting for the day to start.

The day begins at 7am with a short radio interview with Phil Paleologos on the Talk America radio network. He is very easy-going and apparently supportive. This is followed by about ten minutes on the phone with P.J. Maloney of the news department at KQEV in Pittsburgh, recording some soundbites to play on the news during the day.

At 9am we're at the National Press Club to record both a TV interview and a radio interview with John Wardock of Bloomberg Radio & TV. This is a financial service that plays on many cable TV systems around the country, as well as being transmitted to computers of investors and brokers. John has always been very supportive, and this time is no exception.

On the way to the next in-person interview, I spend close to an hour on the cellular phone with Larry Marino on KIEV in Los Angeles. He is a conservative who asks very tough and rational questions about the Drug War, the transition to a Libertarian America, and other topics. I get the impression that Larry wants to believe and wants help dealing with all his reservations. The callers, on the other hand, are almost uniformly hostile — something I've encountered only rarely in the last few years. One asks what he's supposed to do if his child wants to be a libertarian and take drugs. I tell him that I'm not here to create Utopia for him, he will have to take responsibility for his own family.

We arrive at the Capitol Building for an interview with John Bisney of CNN's radio network. We tape about 20 minutes, from which he will arrange short clips to air on the network. He seems very supportive, and adds examples to those I give of government folly.

At the Washington Post, I spend about a half-hour with Ben White, whose job is to cover third-party candidates. His reaction seems almost exactly opposite to most of the reporters I've encountered. He isn't hostile, just bored.

On the way to the next stop I have a 10-minute interview on the cellular phone with Jay Hamburg of the Nashville Tennessean — another media source who saw the AP article and wanted an interview. We get along fine. A surprising number of reporters seem to be more sympathetic to libertarian ideas and more actively involved in the conversation than I remember from the last campaign. Are some reporters drifting our way? Or am I becoming more easily deceived?

At the Voice of America, I tape a half-hour show with Tom Mahoney and Neal Lavon, to be aired for overseas Americans this weekend. They allow me to talk as much as I want (which I hope was not too much). Neither mentions that a Browne administration would likely put them out of jobs.

Our last interview for the afternoon is with Jay Ambrose at the Scripps Howard News Service. He is the editorial director and normally wouldn't handle such an assignment. But he says he took the test at the Select Smart site (http://www.selectsmart.com/PRESIDENT) and found my views were the closest to his of all presidential candidates. We get along fine, but who knows what the finished article will say?

After dinner, we head out again. First we're at America's Voice TV, which used to be called National Empowerment Television (NET). It is a conservative cable network. My interview is with Israel Baldaris and lasts two segments or about 20 minutes of air time. It goes well and he asks me to come back for a longer interview the next time I'm in Washington.

In the car I have a 45-minute interview with my friend Larry Elder, a top-rated host on KABC, Los Angeles. Larry has told his listeners repeatedly that he's supporting me for President and wants me in the debates so that I can "mop up the floor" with Al Gore and George W. Bush. Tonight's interview goes well enough, although we spend one entire segment in a no-win conversation with a caller who is convinced no one in the world would help him if he lost his federal food stamps. At the end of the interview, Larry closes as he usually does with, "Harry, you de Man!"

The final interview of the day is on the Jim Bohannon show, going out to 500 stations on the Westwood One Network. I was on this show in 1996. I can't remember the circumstances, but I recall going away from the show very dissatisfied. So I'm pleased to discover that there's a substitute host, Jack Burkman. Or I think I'm pleased until the show starts. His style is to deliver a monologue extolling the virtues of some federal program, such as the EPA, ask me if I'd abolish it, then interrupt me after one sentence and attack from a different direction — or even go on to another virtuous government program. The practice was valuable for me, but I don't enjoy that kind of debate. Sometimes I had to raise my voice to get him to get back to the point, and that's not very presidential. He kept telling the audience I was winning the debate (a routine I suspect he does with every guest), but the point isn't to win debates; it is to win converts. I do a fair job of getting to the message I want to deliver, but it wasn't a satisfying experience with which to end a long day of interviews.

Today WorldNetDaily, the large online political publication, runs my article, "Why I Am Running for President."

Thursday, February 17, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

Up early to talk with Dough Stephan on the Radio America network. I've been on with him before, but this was the first time I recall his referring to himself as a libertarian. The interview goes well, but because it is shorter than I had expected, I never mention the phone number or Internet address — the first such omission on a broadcast this week.

In the car I have a 20-minute phone interview on the Gene Burns show on Talk America radio network (the network that carried my own show). Gene is, of course, a beloved Libertarian and one of the finest speakers in the land. But today Jeff Santos is filling in for him. He apparently isn't a libertarian, but he likes what I say, and perhaps especially likes my going on at length without him having to ask a lot of questions. Off the air after the interview, he invites me to come back for an extended interview.

Next is a 30-minute interview with political reporter John Huiett of Newsday, a New York City daily newspaper. Huiett is a very young man, and he has a specific list of questions written out. When I stray from his agenda, his eyes glaze over and I can tell that his mind is wandering.

Political reporters often are accused of focusing too much on the "horse race" and not enough on the issues. What I'm finding this week is that the reporters want to talk about issues (as well as our strategy), but to them the issues mean policy — how a Libertarian government would do this or that. Some of that is necessary, but the message I really want them to forward to their readers is: "We want you to be free to live your life as you want to live it, not as George Bush or Al Gore thinks is best for you; we want you to be free from the income tax and from the oppressive 15% Social Security tax, free from the fear of crime generated by the insane War on Drugs." I feel that my ability to sell our message has improved considerably since 1996, but I have to discover more ways to get reporters to carry that message for us.

The next interview is with Dan Murphy and Brian Mitchell at Investors Business Daily, a financial newspaper published in Los Angeles. The paper is more libertarian than the Wall Street Journal, and these two reporters reflect that. They seem genuinely interested in everything I have to say, and they keep me a full hour. Our discussion runs the gamut — covering my message, Libertarian strategy for this year and beyond, and policy questions. The policy questions are necessary, as they need to know my assertions and proposals have been carefully thought out and I know what I'm talking about. But I must constantly be alert to bring the conversation back to the message of freedom to live your live as you think best.

Back at the hotel in the late afternoon, I have a phone interview with Massie Ritsch of the Los Angeles Times. He is very interested in all aspects of the campaign, and the call lasts a full hour instead of the scheduled 20 minutes. He's writing part of a Sunday roundup of lesser-known candidates and parties in anticipation of the California primary next month. He, too, seems to understand the libertarian approach, but I've learned never to trust my impressions of a reporter's political leanings or sincerity. He says the paper probably will send a photographer to the California convention in San Diego this weekend to take pictures during the scheduled presidential candidates panel.

Pamela and I are staying in a "suites" hotel, one of those with a kitchen and living room in addition to the bedroom. There is no restaurant, but some nights a sort of home-cooked buffet dinner is served to the guests in a section of the lobby. Tonight, however, only deserts are available. Rather than walk several blocks to a restaurant, we let our "dinner" consist of apple cobbler and banana cream pie. I guess I'll start this campaign with a build like John F. Kennedy's and end it looking like William Howard Taft.

After dinner, I have a 30-minute phone interview with Brian Higgins, a Libertarian on the Liberty Works Radio Network. He's upset from seeing the Drug Czar on C-SPAN this morning. We talk about the Drug War and Libertarian campaigning. He tells me that in 1996 his small son demanded to know of his teacher why I wasn't included in the school's mock presidential election. I can't stay on the show very long because of the next interview coming up, but we agree to do a longer interview soon.

The day's final event is a highlight for me. It's an appearance on Fox TV News' Hannity & Colmes, which is broadcast from New York. I've appeared on this show several times as the resident Drug War opponent. Whenever drugs are in the news, they get someone who loves putting people in prison, usually on remote from some other city, and they call me to join in from Nashville. It's bad enough having four people arguing, but when they're in three different cities, the chaos and unintelligibility escalate. Tonight's episode is a highlight because I finally have two segments of this program all to myself. Of course, neither conservative Sean Hannity or liberal Alan Colmes is in my camp — but at least only one person is talking at a time.

Both of them have always been very friendly and respectful toward me, and I appreciate it. The first segment goes very well; I get the opportunity to make the points I want, and the content allows me to smile more than usual. The second segment falls back into the too-common routine of a host delivering a 2-minute monologue about something, and then saying I need to respond in 2 seconds because they're about out of time. But I consider the interview overall to be a success. Afterward, Sean Hannity asks me to be on his radio show next week.

What a start to the campaign. We've had 32 interviews in four days — and most of those interviews were with national publications or broadcasts. I used to dream of schedules like this when I did book tours. And even after the nominating convention in 1996, I didn't get this kind of coverage. Perry Willis, Jim Babka, and Newman Communications have done an outstanding job of lining up these opportunities.

Most future weeks won't be this loaded with interviews, but there will be lots of good weeks. And getting this many interviews at one time will create a cumulative effect, perhaps causing some journalists seeing my name here, there, and everywhere to want to find out what's going on.

But the best part is that this isn't the climax of the campaign.

It is just the beginning.

Friday, February 18, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

Today we have the final interviews of the Washington kickoff week.

The first is with Linda Feldman at the Christian Science Monitor. Unfortunately, I allow her to make the discussion a debate over various issues. Her approach to almost everything is of the "If government doesn't do it, no one else will" variety. Although I make what I think are a lot of telling points, I'm not there to show off my brilliance, but to get her to include my main message in her article.

We then head for National Public Radio for an interview with Ken Rudin, but there's no interview. Some kind of mix-up — our first of the week. NPR wants to reschedule it but we don't know when I'll be back in Washington.

Later, I'm on Jerry Hughes' show on the 57 stations of the America Radio Network, with Paul Gonzales serving as guest host. This is pretty much a lovefest. Although he doesn't refer to himself as a libertarian, he does speak glowingly of libertarians. I have plenty of opportunity to give the phone number and the website address.

I find out that Craig Kilborn, a late-night TV comic on CBS, said in his routine on February 15: "Harry Browne, who ran for president in 1996 on the Libertarian ticket, is once again seeking the nomination of his party. The Libertarians will choose their candidate at their convention in July, which will be held at a McDonald's restroom in Anaheim." Maybe we've arrived, now that comics are taking pot-shots at us.

Late in the afternoon, Pamela and I catch a plane to San Diego, which leaves Washington an hour late. It's supposed to be a through flight with one stop in Dallas. But when we get to Dallas, we're told we must switch to a different airplane — which is leaving from a different terminal. We hurry over to the other terminal, only to be told there that the plane has already left (even though it's supposedly the flight on which we arrived in Dallas). Someone checks and discovers the plane hasn't left the area yet, so it's reopened and Pamela and I are allowed aboard. This is one time I'm glad our campaign isn't visible yet; if it were, 200 people might have recognized me, assumed it was our fault the plane was leaving late, and probably vowed not to vote Libertarian.

Saturday, February 19, 2000 — San Diego

We're here for the California Libertarian Party convention, which will choose the delegates for the national convention in Anaheim in July. I never do hear the official attendance, but it appears that about 200 people are here.

Arianna Huffington is the featured speaker at the evening banquet. She is an excellent speaker, and she talks about the corruption of the two-party system. She plugs her book "Overthrow the Government." However, I realize after the speech that she never really says what she wants to see happen once the two-party system is overthrown. From the few hints given — help the poor and have government finance political campaigns — it appears that she wants to replace a corrupt system with another one that will lead just as easily to corruption.

We have seen with ballot-access laws and closed presidential debates just how zealously the Democrats and Republicans protect the two-party system. Why would anyone think that government financing of campaigns wouldn't be used as another weapon to keep third parties out of competition? Who gets to decide which parties and candidates will get government money? Republican and Democratic politicians, of course. To whom will they choose to give the taxpayers' money? Guess.

Sunday, February 20, 2000 — San Diego

I take a taxi to KOGO radio for an appearance on the Lynn Harper show. She is very supportive, saying she voted for me in 1996. Her engineer is also a Libertarian, who says he joined the Libertarian Party to try to get the party and me to adopt a more gradualist agenda for moving to a Libertarian society. The show goes very well with calls from around the country.

Today's featured convention event is a panel/debate with four announced candidates for the Libertarian presidential nomination. Don Gorman, Barry Hess, Dave Hollist, and I are the participants, with Alan Bock of the Orange County Register moderating. C-SPAN is on hand to tape it — for showing sometime within the next few days.

The format requires that opening and closing statements and answers to questions be brief — and the show moves along crisply. I've never seen Barry Hess before, and he proves to be a very polished speaker. I use my 3-minute closing statement to address the C-SPAN cameras, drawing from my announcement article, "Why I Am Running for President."

After the panel, most everyone joins us in a nearby room for the World Premiere Showing of our 30-minute TV show, "The Great Libertarian Offer." Actually, the show was broadcast four nights earlier on the Product Information Network; but we treated that showing as a test of our ability to respond to all inquiries within 24 hours (the test was successful).

At this showing, the video is very well received. And I'm happy to be able to introduce Kristin Overn, who did a magnificent job producing the show. I say to the audience that I believe the video is evidence that Libertarian politics are entering a new, higher level. Michael Cloud gives everyone in attendance a free videocassette of the show. He then asks for donations to help air the show on cable networks and local commercial stations; the response is better than we had expected.

Monday, February 21, 2000 — San Diego

I awaken at 5am for a 10-minute interview on Daybreak USA, a syndicated radio show on 300 stations. However, the network doesn't call, so I finally call to find out what's happening. The show puts me on for about five brief minutes, and the interview ends so abruptly that I don't get a chance to give the phone number or website address. Oh well, at least I was able to get back to sleep.

Pamela and I catch a plane to Nashville. We pick up our car at the airport and Pamela drops me off at a hotel, where I will stay for the next four or five days. My mission, and I choose to accept it, is to finish The Great Libertarian Offer, my campaign book. It was due at the publisher's about four months ago, but I have been prevented from putting the finishing touches on it by one thing or another preparing for the campaign kickoff. So I will hibernate in a hotel room until it's done. I won't read any email, surf the Internet, watch TV, or play Solitaire.

I'm very pleased with the content of the book; it covers a lot of ground that wasn't in Why Government Doesn't Work. But it has become an albatross around my neck, because I haven't been able to focus on the final polishing. I'm determined that it will be finished this week. If so, it should be in print by the beginning of June.

Friday, February 25, 2000 — Nashville

Carlos Ball, editor of a group of Spanish-language newspapers, informs me that my article calling attention to America's 2 million prisoners and the need to end the Drug War has been translated into Spanish and published in two Latin-American newspapers — El Panama America and Venezuela Analitica.

News of publications that carried the AP story on my announcement continues to come in. I learn that it also was carried by the Colorado Springs Gazette, Albuquerque Journal, Cleveland Plain Dealer, Boston Globe, Boise Idaho Statesman, Champaign (Illinois) News-Gazette, Schenectady (New York) Daily Gazette, and Nashville Tennessean.

Dennis Corrigan of Massachusetts wrote to say that he heard Mike Siegal hosting a radio talk show discussing the Drug War. He said callers were 4-to-1 in favor of ending it. Dennis was able to get through to the show and pointed out that people who wanted the Drug War ended should express it politically by voting for me and also for Carla Howell, who's running for the Senate against Teddy Kennedy. Dennis mentioned that I would pardon all non-violent drug offenders on my first day in office.

Dennis' call highlights three important points.

1. When talk shows are discussing an issue that's key to Libertarian politics — such as the income tax, Social Security, or the Drug War, and many others — take advantage of the situation by calling in. Even if you write out in advance just two or three sentences to say, you can achieve a great deal.

2. Don't just voice a generalized opinion. Make a specific proposal that is uniquely Libertarian, one that can't be confused with the positions of Democrats or Republicans. For example, we want to reduce government enough to end the income tax entirely, not just rearrange the burden of big government — or we want to get the politicians' hands off your retirement, not just make cosmetic changes to Social Security — or we want to end the Drug War completely to end the crime wave, end the invasions of our civil liberties, end the imprisonment of so many non-violent people, not just try to soften the government's brutality.

3. Be sure to label your position as a Libertarian position — and, I hope, mention that Harry Browne is the only prominent presidential candidate who advocates this position. If you can, tell people where they can get detailed information about the proposal you've discussed (HarryBrowne.org and 1-800-777-2000).

Each of these three points is essential. First, your call alone will give reassurance to other listeners who feel as you do but think they're alone. Second, a specific proposal gives people even more hope, as they realize that others have already gone far enough to frame a specific proposal, and the proposal will encourage them to want to know more. Third, they will be delighted to know there's a specific candidate and a specific party that thinks as they do, and they may be motivated to contact us if they know how.

Monday, February 28, 2000 — Nashville

I emerge from a week of hibernation, during which I've tried to finish the campaign book, The Great Libertarian Offer. I have spent the week in a Nashville hotel room, focused for 12-14 hours a day on nothing but the book. At the end of the week, I have 19 of 23 chapters wrapped up, and I Fedex them off to the publisher. The final four chapters will have to be finished sometime during this busy week. The book ought to be in print by June, in time to be put to use before the final four months of the campaign.

Having a campaign book is important. We can publish issue positions on the Internet, and we will have small pieces of literature to introduce the campaign and get votes. But a book provides a thorough, integrated presentation of the Libertarian case — not just philosophically, but politically. And that kind of presentation can be very important for rousing people to go beyond voting for us to providing active support in money, time, and influence. Why Government Doesn't Work brought many people into the LP to stay. I'm hoping The Great Libertarian Offer will be even more influential — in helping the campaign to become visible and in recruiting thousands more people to the LP.

The week begins with a phone interview with a political Internet site, ConservativeHQ.com. Kelley O. Beaucar has already posted an article on the site announcing my candidacy. Today she interviews me to get the details of the campaign.

I am on Lowell Ponte's syndicated radio show for an hour. Lowell is an aggressive, articulate Libertarian who provides a polished, informative, and entertaining program. Needless to say, the show is a mutual admiration exercise. Although contentious interviews are valuable in dealing with the fears that many people have about a potential Libertarian society, there is great value in being interviewed by a strong supporter. The approach is more relaxed, allowing us to delve into some subjects in more depth than would be possible on a more argumentative show.

This evening I am on once again with Jack Burkman. I had a rough show with him the week before last when he guest-hosted on another show. He is a conservative attorney who is very aggressive — questioning me as though I were a hostile witness in the courtroom. He says he agrees with much of the Libertarian position but that we go too far. His routine is to pick an example, ask about it, and then interrupt me as I begin to answer the question. An interesting quirk is that several people call in to support me — and he allows each of them to state my case articulately without interruption.

With all the interviews I've done in the past five years, I'm still not happy with the way I handle this type of host. I need more such encounters to develop a method of controlling them to deliver the message I want to transmit.

Burkman says we would be much more successful if we continued our principled fight for smaller government, but leave the drug issue alone. He doesn't realize that you can't be principled and at the same time jump back and forth between "government doesn't work" and "government works" — between "We don't want the politicians to have the power to force people to change their behavior" and "We do want the politicians to have the power to force people to change their behavior."

And even though two or three callers from his rabidly conservative audience call in to argue in favor of the Drug War, Burkman doesn't realize how much public attitudes have changed over the past five years. Today most Americans have either turned against the Drug War or, at the least, have lost their appetite for the subject. Yes, there are people still promoting the Drug War, and they will take longer to come around than most people. But the great majority of Americans now have no strong opinion on the Drug War — even if they're afraid of their children getting access to drugs.

And what is overlooked is the growing number of people who emphatically believe the Drug War is an immense, destructive failure, and who want to see it ended. This group includes the millions of people who are related to, or acquainted with, someone who never committed violence but is sitting in prison right now. It also includes the people who have made the connection between the nation's crime wave and the Drug War, the people who have personally seen civil liberties trampled on, the people who have suffered from asset forfeiture, and the people who recognize that government never succeeds in delivering on its promises. Included among the Drug War opponents also are a number of conservative talk-show hosts, most of the liberal hosts, and apparently all the Libertarian hosts.

So everytime I stand up for ending the Drug War, even to an audience that seems rabidly opposed to my position, I must remember that the rabid people probably won't vote for me under any circumstances. I must remember, too, that there are people listening who feel so strongly that the Drug War is a failure, and who so rarely get to hear someone publicly stating their own concerns, that they might very well vote for me because of this one issue alone.

Tuesday, February 29, 2000 — Nashville

The day starts with a one-hour radio interview with Mark Scott in Detroit. Mark is a Libertarian with a large audience of conservatives and libertarians. He is complimentary and supportive of the campaign. We cover a number of topics. The program begins with a discussion of the military. I point out that America currently has a very strong national offense — our government can annihilate any country in the world and bully anyone into accepting any kind of settlement. But we have a very weak national defense — no protection whatsoever against any dictator who gets his hands on a nuclear missile. I present my plan for rewarding the first private company that can build a missile defense, discussed in detail in Why Government Doesn't Work. We go on from there to a wide range of topics with many callers.

A radio show on WBT in Charlotte with Richard Spires and Brad Krantz goes very well. The two ask valuable questions, as do the callers, and the hosts give me the time to answer before trying to rebut me. And by this time I'm fully warmed up and flying. My answers are crisp and impassioned. I hope I can sustain this for all of today's shows.

I'm still flying when I'm interviewed by Glen Galaich for 40 minutes on Between the Lines, an Internet show distributed by WorkingAssetsRadio.com. He is quite critical but an excellent interviewer. He lets me have my say, and I let him do the same, and I think each of us is interesting enough that the listeners enjoy the statements back and forth. The callers are all either positive or at least genuinely interested in getting answers.

Then there's a 10-minute radio interview with Jay Richie on Business Day, syndicated to 50 stations. The interview moves right along and I think it's very useful.

The day continues with a 30-minute interview with Jane Chastain on KLTX in Los Angeles. I've been on with her before, and I believe it's a religiously oriented political program. However, today we don't get into any social issues. She seems to be sympathetic to most of the Libertarian agenda, and we manage to cover a lot of ground.

The final interview of this long day is with Gary Nolan on the Radio America network. Gary joined the LP a year or so ago and is very supportive. We cover many issues and take calls. It's a lovefest.

Wednesday, March 1, 2000 — Nashville

The day begins with a slip-up. An interview on KSFO, a big talk station in San Francisco, falls through the cracks. Somehow I'm not informed of it, and by the time the mistake was discovered it was too late for me to be on. Brian Wilson, the guest host, is very gracious about it and we will do the interview soon. I feel badly about the mix-up because the show's producer is a wonderful Libertarian who has done a lot to help the campaign. And add to that the number of Libertarians who were informed of the broadcast and tuned in.

The day continues with three good interviews. The first is with Doug Raymond in on WTKF-FM in Moorehead, North Carolina. I've been on with him before, and he's within a hair's breadth of joining the LP. He says he agrees with us on all the issues, but he wonders how strong the LP's commitment to the 2nd Amendment is. I tell him that when a Republican says he supports the 2nd Amendment, he means he won't give in and vote for a gun-control bill until the last moment. By contrast, a Libertarian will adhere to the Constitution on all issues at all times, so you can be sure we won't compromise in any part of the Bill of Rights.

The radio interviews continue with Kevin Starrett on KPDQ in Portland, Oregon. He, too, is very supportive, and the callers are all either supportive or inquisitive, with none the least bit hostile.

The final interview is with my friend "Lionel" (Michael LeBron). He is one of the funniest people in radio. I first encountered him when he spoke at the New Jersey LP convention during the last campaign. He had the audience in stitches for half an hour, talking about politics. He is syndicated on a number of stations in big markets across the country. He is unusually complimentary today, and the show reaches a crescendo when he says, "I hereby formally endorse Harry Browne for President of the United States."

I was to appear on Hannity & Colmes tonight, but Fox TV couldn't arrange a satellite hookup for me in Nashville. And I was really in the mood to get into a shouting match.

The interview I did earlier with ConservativeHQ.com. shows up on its site. Among other things, Kelley O. Beaucar says:

"Browne says first and foremost, the income tax needs to be abolished, as well as Social Security and federal control of health care. He brings to these bold statements an articulate plan that allows taxpayers to save the money they are paying to the government each year and enjoy more effective services that aren't hindered by the bloated bureaucracy that exists in Washington today."

The entire article can be read at: http://www.conservativehq.com/chq/displayarticle?articleId=369 (although Internet publications sometimes change article addresses or delete them entirely after a period of time).

For a campaign that must operate with far less money than the Republicans and Democrats have, radio is a wonderful medium. It provides the opportunity to talk with tens of thousands of people in one day. This is especially important at the beginning of the campaign when we must talk to the people who basically agree with us — and recruit as many of them as possible to help us reach others.

Among other things, the LP presidential campaign must build name recognition for Libertarianism and the Libertarian Party. The LP hopes to have 2,000 candidates running this year for federal, state, and local offices. Their chances will be riding on several factors — including whether the presidential candidate and the national LP can build name recognition for all Libertarians. We must get the word to most Americans that Libertarians want you to be free — free to live your life as you want to live it, free to raise your children by your values, free to keep every dollar you earn — to spend it, save it, give it away as you see fit.

We have the most appealing political message possible. The all-important question is whether we'll have the resources to transmit that message to every potential American voter. If we do, it's only a matter of time until we win.

Thursday, March 2, 2000 — Nashville

After three hours' sleep, I'm up at 6:15am to do a 3-minute interview with Joe Galuski in the news department of WSYR in Syracuse. It goes well and quickly.

A half-hour later, I have a 45-minute interview with Mildred Gaddis at WCHB in Detroit. From the questions posed by the callers, I assume this is an inner-city station. Aside from two hostile callers, the atmosphere is very good. The callers either seem genuinely interested in finding out more about what we're offering or they already call themselves libertarians. The hostess asks me what I would do for urban America, and I say I would stop the Washington politicians from taking money from Detroit and spending it to clean up the air in Los Angeles, stop taking money from Detroit to build expensive housing projects in Detroit and other places — projects that could be built so much less expensively if the money didn't travel to Washington.

She asks me about abortion, I tell her I'm opposed to abortion and so I don't want the government trying to stop abortions -- since the government fails at everything it tries. When she says Libertarians ought to be pro-choice, I tell her I don't like that term. Too many politicians proudly say they're pro-choice, but don't believe in a woman's right to choose to drop out of Social Security, or to run her own business free from federal mandates and hiring rules. (In the same way, most politicians who claim to be "pro-life" have no reservations about killing innocent people in Serbia or Iraq.) We believe in individual liberty, and Libertarians differ on the abortion question because an argument grounded in liberty can be made on either side of that issue. This is one of the few issues on which Libertarians aren't somewhat unanimous.

The final question of the interview is on the Confederate flag in South Carolina — and what I would do about it as President. I say that if I lived in South Carolina, I'd probably be in favor of removing it, since I think too much is made of political symbols. But the President of the United States should butt out of the discussion. I'm sick of the President telling me how my retirement should be handled, what kind of health care system I must encounter when I visit the doctor, and imposing his values on virtually every area of my life. I'm running for President — not Dictator — and presidents should stop telling you how you must run your life.

The third interview is with Arlene Violet on WHJJ in Providence, Rhode Island. She is very kind in not interrupting me when I answer her questions. She asks some very relevant questions, giving me the opportunity to barrel forward with short answers on all the important issues. Two or three of the callers are contentious but not hostile.

Friday, March 3, 2000 — Nashville

Tomorrow I'll be speaking at the Delaware LP convention. Our press secretary Jim Babka, together with our publicity firm Newman Communications, has lined up four Wilmington phone interviews for today, to help publicize the convention. The combination of a talented press secretary and a powerhouse P.R. firm is giving us coverage that goes far beyond anything we were able to do at any time during 1996.

The first interview is 15 minutes with Patrick Jackson of the Wilmington News Journal. He's very friendly, but who knows what he'll write?

The second interview is with John Rago on WDEL. He, too, is very friendly; he mentions that he read Why Government Doesn't Work and gets the LP's press releases. The interview lasts about 30 minutes and goes very well.

The third interview is with John Watson of WILM. He is very contentious, challenging me on everything. Still, he quickly acknowledges any of my points that make sense to him — and he does a good job of interviewing. Also, a caller points out that John endorsed my being in the debates in 1996. John says I ought to be in the debates this year, and he also says the ballot access laws are a scandal. All in all, a good interview.

The final interview is with Chris Brugman of WMDM in Wilmington. He is very supportive and sounds as though he's on the verge of endorsing the Libertarian Party.

Saturday, March 4, 2000 — Wilmington, Delaware

This morning I speak at the Delaware LP convention. I'm particularly glad to be here. In the 1996 campaign, I visited 37 states, but Delaware was one of those I missed. My speech isn't one of my best. I got to the hotel at 1:30 this morning and got just a few hours' sleep, after short sleep the night before. Normally, I can handle two nights of limited sleep (but no more); however, this time it certainly slowed me down.

After the speech, I'm interviewed by Ken Grant of the Delaware State News, a Wilmington daily. It's obvious from his questions and his knowledge that he's very sympathetic to Libertarians. However, when the article appears, it is perfunctory — a one-sentence quote from each of the three presidential candidates at the convention, but nothing that would make readers sit up and take notice.

Steve Willis drives me from Wilmington to Washington for a brief, one-segment interview on Fox TV News. It goes very well. There are two interviewers (whose names I didn't catch) and they give me the opportunity to deliver the message my way. We probably will be putting this video clip on the website shortly.

Sunday, March 5, 2000 — Nashville

During announcement week, I had two phone conversations with Jay Hamburg of the Nashville Tennessean, who contacted me after seeing the AP article. Some of his questions indicated he might be planning to run a negative article. But today the article is published — and it is not only very friendly, it includes a lot of my message in the way I like to tell it.

For example, it says, "But he believes he has a winning message. That message includes repeal of the income tax, abolish the FBI, end all federal welfare spending, pardon all non-violent federal prisoners, stop federal government involvement in education and in personal issues such as abortion. ‘I think everything revolves around a very simple premise that I want you to be free,' said Browne.

"'I want you to be able to live your life as you think it should be lived. I think you should be able to keep every dollar you earn — spend it, save it, give it away as you think best. I think you ought to be able to raise your children by your values, not what Bill Clinton or Al Gore or George Bush or John McCain thinks is the way you ought to,' said Browne, . . ."

Meanwhile, we continue to hear of more major newspapers — such as the Fort Worth Star-Telegram and Richmond (Virginia) Times-Dispatch — that carried the AP announcement article.

Monday, March 6, 2000 — Nashville

I mentioned in a previous installment that Carlos A. Ball had translated into Spanish my article on the 2,000,000 American prisoners and the need to end the Drug War, and that the article had run in two Spanish-language newspapers. Today I hear from him that the translated article has also run in Miami's Spanish-language daily Diario Las Americas on February 24, and in Puerto Rico's daily El Mundo on February 26.

He also corrected my statement in the last installment that he is the "editor of a group of Spanish-language newspapers." Actually, he edits and translates libertarian articles and sells them to Spanish-language newspapers and magazines in the US and 12 Latin countries. He is helping to spread libertarian ideas far and wide. I first came across him at the Florida state convention last year, at which he gave an excellent speech explaining how the American Drug War was helping to destroy South America.

In the last installment I mentioned the problems I have dealing with show hosts who give long speeches leading up to a question, and then interrupt me almost as soon as I begin answering the question, sometimes piling more questions on. Tom Estrada-Palma sent me a useful suggestion: "I'd say, ‘Please forgive me. I've known many very intelligent people in my life, but I've never met anyone smart enough to effectively answer two questions at the same time while being interrupted with still more questions.' Then go silent for as long as it takes for your persecutor to apologize and shut up so you can speak."

This calls attention to a technique that should be obvious, but too often gets overlooked: simply point out what's going on, rather than pretend it isn't happening. I can say, "I'm sorry but it just isn't possible to answer your 2-minute question in the 10 words you allow me before you interrupt. So before we continue, please tell me: are these rhetorical questions you're asking or do you really want me to answer?"

Another problem occurs when a host says, "We have only one minute left, so tell me . . ." He then goes on to use up 45 seconds making a speech that ends with a question. I now realize I shouldn't even try to answer a question under those circumstances. Instead I should say, "Sorry, but I can't answer a 1-minute question in 10 seconds, so I suggest you go to my website HarryBrowne.org for a proper answer."

Doug (no last name, poor fellow) wrote in response to my mention of a confrontation on the Drug War in an interview. "To conservatives who favor the Drug War, simply point out that it is their policies that have led us to drug anarchy, and that we want drugs to be regulated and controlled by doctors and pharmacists — not gangsters and children. Yes I said ‘regulated.' That is what the free-market is — natural regulation. Your policy has given us an unregulated drug market, and Libertarians want the drug trade brought under control.

"Is it really your position to let criminals sell drugs to children? I want the drugs sold by doctors and pharmacists; you want them sold by drug dealers in schools."

This leads to another technique I like but don't use often enough: Ask the questioner what he wants. "Do you want to see the Drug War continue as it is?"

Whenever I've asked that question, I've gotten either silence for an answer or the ever-popular "We should start publicly executing all drug dealers; that'll stop ‘em." That's easy enough to counter. Big-time drug dealers already risk life in prison; the death penalty isn't likely to be much additional deterrent. And if the policy did actually succeed in reducing the drug trade, think of the terrible precedent it would set. Soon they'd be executing people who sell cigarettes to children, then drunk drivers, then "dead-beat dads," and who-knows-whom after that.

Asking what the questioner wants is an effective technique. On many talk shows, a caller has gone on about some terrible conspiracy that's trying to take over the world. Instead of trying to show that what he's saying is really unlikely, I just ask, "So what do you want to do?" Very often there's no answer — except sometimes that we must "wake up America" to what's happening. "And then what?"

If you ask the questioner what he wants, you usually provide a gentle demonstration that he doesn't really have a solution to the problem. Then when you offer your answer, the questioner doesn't usually argue with it.

Tuesday, March 7, 2000 — Nashville

Today I sent to publisher LiamWorks the final parts of the manuscript for my campaign book, The Great Libertarian Offer. I started the book last summer and was continually derailed by more urgent tasks concerning the campaign — such as producing the half-hour TV show. Now the book is done, and it should be in print by June — so that it will be available for the final five months of the campaign. I hope the book will help us recruit the people who can provide time and money for us to get our message to every potential voter in America.

We are getting wonderful reports from people who have shown the campaign videotape to friends. Today Jennifer Willis, our dynamo of a Volunteer Coordinator, forwarded a note from Mickey deRham saying, "Received the tape the other day and showed it to a friend who is dyed in the wool Republican yesterday. She didn't even see the whole thing and she was sold. This gives a big boost to my fire to work for HB. This AM this friend was on the phone at 7:30, wanting to know how to get more tapes as she has already been talking and has a bunch of people in Vermont who are dying to see it."

The video is proving to be a powerful recruiting tool. As a videocassette it's an ideal way to introduce a friend, neighbor, or business associate to the basic ideas of the campaign. Since it's only 30 minutes, it can be shown when friends have gathered for some other purpose without anyone feeling he's been sandbagged into a brainwashing session.

Today is primary election day in California. I'm informed that popular Los Angeles radio host Larry Elder mentioned on his show that he had voted for me today. He is a true friend of Libertarians and a very effective ally.

Wednesday, March 8, 2000 — Nashville

Out of bed at 6:30 for a 10-minute interview with Al Lerner and Richard Stevens on the Daybreak USA show on 350 radio stations. The interview goes well, as they let me answer every question fully.

Because I was working very late last night, I decide to go back to bed — only to be awakened at 9 because Neal Boortz wants to talk with me on the air. He is a very popular Atlanta show host, and this is the hour he broadcasts nationally. During our interview, he complains that the media keep talking about 3rd parties without recognizing the most important 3rd party of them all — the Libertarians. I say that we have to advertise, we have to flood newspapers with letters to the editor, flood the talk shows with calls, and make our presence known; no one is going to give us the coverage we want, we have to earn it by demonstrating that we can affect the outcome this year.

Next I'm on for one hour with a host I've never encountered before — James L. Hirsen on the America Advocate show, broadcast on a few stations in Colorado, Tennessee, and California. It's obvious that he and his audience are constitutional conservatives. He asks politely why we need a Libertarian Party when the Republicans say they're for smaller government. I point out that Republican politicians treat "small government" as a slogan, not something they believe in or even understand. Consequently, they use "small government" as a justification for initially opposing something (which they may cave in on later), but then promote more government somewhere else without embarrassment — such as with the Drug War or censoring the Internet or bombing innocent people. I then explain why force is both wrong and ineffective — and why Libertarians oppose it across the board.

The host takes to the idea immediately, sensing that something better than Republicanism has come his way. He is very supportive throughout the show, as are the callers — only one of whom indicates he's already familiar with Libertarians. We apparently have a new friend in James L. Hirsen.

Next, another host who is new to me — Brent Johnson on The American Sovereign show, which goes out to commercial radio stations, as well as on the Internet and short wave. Here, too, is a constitutional conservative host and audience. After 15 minutes of Q&A on the issues, he says he could be listening to himself. He is very supportive and urges me to come back as the hour goes by very quickly. The callers are supportive. Some of them are obviously worried about various conspiracies, but the universal answer to concerns about any kind of conspiracy is to make the government so small that it doesn't have the power to implement anyone's conspiratorial designs.

My last interview of the day is an hour with another stranger — George Noory on KTRS in St. Louis. He is very respectful, asks my opinion on many issues, and gives me a clear path to reply. The calls are very encouraging, with only one dissenting view — one that was expressed in such a way that it took nothing away from my case.

Tonight on the Politically Incorrect TV show, Republican talk radio host Jack Burkman said to comedian Bill Maher: "The other night on my radio show, I had a guy named Harry Browne, who might be a friend of yours. He's the Libertarian candidate for president. His philosophy — and it might be your philosophy — is he wants to do away with every facet of the government that's not an immediate Constitutional function. I said, ‘What about — do away with the Department of Commerce? What about trade law? What about environmental law?' I believe in scaling these things back, but I sure don't believe in getting rid of them 100%. Neither does Newt Gingrich."

This is exactly what we want — to be the opposition the defenders of big government cite when they want to make a point. Think how many people heard Burkman's statement that there's someone named Harry Browne, Libertarian candidate for President, who thinks we should "do away with every facet of the government that's not an immediate constitutional function." A lot of them are going to think that's a pretty good idea, and make a note of the name — or wish they'd paid attention to it and do so the next time. The more often they hear statements like this, the sooner many people will be motivated to return to the polls and vote for dramatically smaller government.

Thursday, March 9, 2000 — Nashville

Four interviews today. The first is a half-hour with Paul Irwin on WICR, an NPR station in Indianapolis. He is very friendly and even voices his own concerns about big government.

Then it's an alternative health show, "Mind Your Body," with Marcia Minor on WERE in Cleveland. I stress the federal government's intrusions into health care and she's happy to hear a candidate who wants the government out of the way.

I then have a one-hour interview on the I.E. America network with Michelle Laxalt, daughter of Paul Laxalt, the former Republican senator from Nevada. I was on her show during the last campaign, and she introduces me as "the integrity candidate." She and the callers all seem to be rabidly anti-Bush. I wonder how much they reflect rank and file Republicans around the country.

My last interview is an hour with David Gold on the Salem Radio Network. He calls himself a "Christian conservative-libertarian." Throughout the interview, he keeps telling his listeners that he and I are "kindred souls."

Four interviews and no confrontations. A pleasant, but strange, day.

Friday, March 10, 2000 — Nashville

Just one show today. It's with Jerry Hughes, a conservative Constitutionalist with whom I've had a good relationship for the past three or four years. He bears down hard when he disagrees, but he's a very fair interviewer. He is quite supportive, as were most of the callers today.

In Part Four of the Campaign Journal, I mentioned an email received from "Doug" providing some good ideas for arguing against the Drug War. Unfortunately, it came with no last name, and I didn't know how to track down the author. It turns out that it was Doug Scribner, Vice-Chair of the Orange County (California) Libertarian Party.

Sunday, March 12, 2000 — Nashville

After taking a day off and going to bed at 2am, I'm up at 6am to do a 45-minute radio show with Peter Solomon on WIP, Philadelphia. It appears to be a typical Sunday "public service" type broadcast, with free commercials interspersed throughout. But everytime he tries to take a call from a listener, he loses the phone connection to me and the station has to call me back. This happens about six times during the broadcast. But the interview goes well, he gives me plenty of opportunity to answer questions, and he seems to understand the point that when you give politicians the power to do what you think is right you're automatically giving politicians the power to do what you think is wrong. After the interview is over, I happily jump back in bed and sleep like a log.

Monday, March 13, 2000 — Nashville

The day starts with a repeat interview with Larry Marino on KIEV, a large talk station in Los Angeles. He is obviously a Republican and very contentious — disputing my opposition to the Drug War, closed borders, and some other issues dear to the hearts of Republican pundits and politicians.

He, like so many people, keeps talking about Libertarians wanting to "open the borders." The point I keep coming back to is that the borders are open already. There is no way you can keep out of America people who are determined to get here. And every attempt to do so takes us closer to a police state — making you and me carry national identity cards to be shown on demand, forcing employers to be responsible for verifying the citizenship of anyone they employ. And still the people will come — just as the drugs flow across the border despite draconian efforts to stop them.

The principal solution to the immigration problem is to end the welfare state. Then the people who come will be the ones who seek opportunity and will do the work we don't want to do — cleaning hotels, picking lettuce, and clerking in 7-Eleven stores in dangerous areas. Those who are looking only for a free lunch will have to look elsewhere.

The next interview has a smaller audience. It is with Kenneth John, a libertarian on WRMN in Elgin, Illinois. He does not seem to be a professional talk-show host, but he's an excellent interviewer — completely at home in the medium. I remember how difficult it was for me when I had my own show to interview other people, but he does it very well. He brings up the point that the Drug War wasn't discussed at all in the Democratic and Republican primary debates, and probably won't be in October debates.

I mention something that I've raised in a number of interviews so far: It isn't necessary for the listener to decide today to vote for me, since there's still almost eight months to Election Day. But it is important that the listener decide whether he wants to see the Republican and Democratic candidates have to defend the Drug War, the income tax, and locking you into Social Security. If you want these issues to become part of the public discussion, the best thing you can do is support my candidacy, because that's the only way it's likely that any of these issues will be raised.

The next interview is with Glen Galaich on KWAB in Boulder, Colorado, also going out on a syndicated network and the Internet, taking calls from listeners across the country. His guest in the studio is Dave Baker, an articulate Libertarian Congressional candidate. Galaich apparently is a liberal — all in favor of ending the Drug War, but finding it difficult to give up such concepts as "collective responsibility" and government (the nation's worst polluter) as the protector of the environment. He's a good host, however, and the discussion is lively.

The final interview of the day is at midnight with Joe Arnold at WHAS in Louisville. Although he doesn't agree with everything we stand for, he is very friendly and respectful. A Republican caller says he's a libertarian working for liberty as a Republican within the two-party system. I tell him that some Republicans have been trying without success to turn their party toward smaller government ever since the Eisenhower years. And I say that even if it takes a few years to get a Libertarian President, that's a better prospect than supporting Republican candidates and never getting smaller government.

I receive a message from a Libertarian who says, "I've been reading through the Campaign Journal that Mr. Browne sends out
weekly and he constantly talks about all of the great libertarian shows that he has been on and how the hosts are like minded, but those shows most likely have a libertarian-minded audience. It seems that Harry Browne is spending a little too much time talking to those that already agree and not enough time trying to convince others why the libertarian offer is so good. I'd sure
like to see Mr. Browne in office but I don't think that it's going to come unless he gets on shows where the host is Democratic or Republican."

I apparently have given the wrong impression in this Journal. Without going back to count the shows I've done so far, I'd say that about one quarter to one third of the shows have had Libertarian/libertarian hosts, perhaps one half have had Republican/conservative hosts, and maybe one sixth to one quarter have had Democratic/liberal hosts.

Today's shows so far, for example, include two conservatives, one libertarian, and one liberal as hosts. The fact that they treat me with respect doesn't mean they agree with me. But I hope through frequent appearances to move them all in our direction.

It's also important that I do appear on shows that have largely libertarian-leaning audiences. The people hearing these shows need to be persuaded that their votes will be more significant if they vote Libertarian — so that we can amass a total large enough to impress the press and the public, and thereby surmount the hurdle of irrelevancy that has stood in our way for so long.

Tuesday, March 14, 2000 — Nashville

Only one interview today. It's 45 minutes with Jeff Santos on the Talk America Radio Network. He's a liberal, but very pleasant, and he gives me plenty of opportunity to talk. He wants to focus on how the poor will be taken care of. I keep stressing that almost anyone will take better care of the poor than politicians have. And I'm able to turn the conversation to Social Security, the income tax, and a little on the Drug War (which he wants to end).

A correspondent writes, "All these little radio stations are good but here in Maryland I have heard nothing of Harry. When are you going to get on the real media? Why don't you go to college campuses? Make some noise!"

Of course, these are not little radio stations. Most are networks of from 25 to 250 stations. In addition, most of these shows transmit through the Internet, making it possible for anyone in America to hear these broadcasts. Some shows reach as many as a quarter-million people (actually listening, not just in the market area). That's a huge audience — a lot larger than will hear me at a college campus.

It is one thing for the candidate of a major party to speak at a college, or to prospect for votes in a restaurant or mall, or to stand outside a factory at 8 in the morning shaking hands. A candidate does that only because there are reporters and cameramen following him around, recording everything he does. The candidate hopes something he says will show up on the Evening News and in tomorrow's newspaper. But a minor candidate (and that's what I am — temporarily, I trust) doesn't have anyone following him around. No one will carry my message to the public for me. So radio and TV are the best venues — both for interviews and for advertising.

I hope we'll be at the point later in the campaign where the press is following me around — wondering whether I'm taking votes away from the Democrats or the Republicans. But until then I must reach the largest audiences possible.

Today, Jennifer Willis, our Chief Volunteer Coordinator, informed me that our volunteer organization has exceeded the 4,000 mark. These are people who are writing letters to editors, calling into talk shows, putting up signs, passing out bumper stickers, showing the videocassette at meetings, and doing many other important jobs that add so much to the campaign. I'm amazed at how quickly this organization has been put together. Jennifer started work on it only last Fall.

And now we have some wonderful state coordinators who are building effective state-wide organizations. In Michigan, for example, Al Titran already has 75 volunteers, with six county coordinators and nine coordinators for Congressional districts.

But, of course, we need thousands more volunteers, and I know they're out there. If anyone can find them, it's Jennifer. But you could speed up the process by going to www.HarryBrowne.org and signing up.

Wednesday, March 15, 2000 — Nashville

I'm informed that the Spanish translation of my article on the 2 million American prisoners and the Drug War ("La ‘compasiσn' de los polνticos") has been published again — this time at todito.com, an online Spanish-language news site (www.todito.com/paginas/contenido/fc03142000/nt881.html). The translator Carlos A. Ball calls todito.com "the Mexican equivalent of Yahoo, getting 600,000 hits per day, many thousand from Mexicans living in the U.S." The article refers to me as "Candidato a la presidencia de Estados Unidos del Partido Libertario." Well, okay.

My first show today is with Dave Ross, an amiable host on KIRO, Seattle's big talk station. We joke back and forth at the outset, but I begin to worry that people who don't know me might wonder whether my candidacy is meant to be a joke, so I start bearing down on the issues. Dave reveals no trace of his own political positions, but he does say he wants to see me in the debates. The interview goes very well.

My only other show today is with Chuck Morse on the American Freedom Network. He calls himself a small "l" libertarian, and begins by saying that a vote for me is a vote for Al Gore. I ask why electing Al Gore is any worse than electing George Bush. Either one will make government bigger and push back any reduction in government by another four years, so why not pave the way for a Libertarian candidate to win the Presidency in 2004 or 2008 by piling up a large Libertarian vote this year? In fact, Al Gore would be better for us as President because no one would be fooled into thinking he favors smaller government, as they might with George Bush. Bill Clinton has done us a service by showing people the true face of government and the way politicians abuse power. George Bush would also abuse power, but in a less obvious way.

Tom Curry of msnbc.com (affiliated with the MS-NBC TV network) publishes a nice article on the possibility that the campaign will fight the Federal Election Commission over the campaign finance laws. The article states the facts, quotes opposing opinions, and let's the reader decide for oneself. (The article is at http://www.msnbc.com/news/381798.asp.)

Thursday, March 16, 2000 — Nashville

I am on a live 15-minute Internet broadcast with Tom Curry, who wrote yesterday's msnbc.com article. We cover the potential FEC suit, Social Security, and last year's bombing of Serbia. Although discussion of the FEC situation is new to me, the interview as a whole goes well. He does not betray an opinion one way or another on any of the issues.

I receive a message from Jim Merritt of California, telling me that he heard a brief radio commentary on the CBS Radio network by Dave Ross, whose Seattle show I had been on yesterday. Ross was talking about me, lamenting "the lackluster competition we might expect from Bush and Gore," and playing soundbites from yesterday's show. He said I'm attempting to get into the national presidential debates, and concluded, "What a debate that would be."

This, of course, is what we want — to be talked about when I'm not present.

Friday, March 17, 2000 — Nashville

I have a 30-minute radio interview with John Quaintance on WXBQ in Johnson City, Tennessee. It is the first time we've talked since 1996. He begins by saying, "I don't know whether you know that you and the Libertarian Party have a great deal of support in this area." John was quite friendly in 1996; now he appears to be completely supportive, winding up the interview saying, "Good luck to you in your journey, hopefully all the way to the White House."

In the evening I have a 40-minute interview with Jim Dexter, the hard-working chair of the Utah LP, on KTKK in Salt Lake City. He does a terrific job hosting the show, conducting the interview, and talking with callers. Not surprisingly, all the callers are positive. One is a 23-year-old getting ready to vote for the first time. I ask him whether he wants to put 15% of his income into Social Security, and he says he has no hope of ever getting any of his money back from Social Security. I say that's one reason to vote Libertarian. I ask what he thinks of the War on Drugs. He says it's an utter failure. I say that's a second reason to vote Libertarian. I ask whether he would like government to be a good deal smaller so he could be free of the income tax. He's all for it. I say that makes three good reasons to vote Libertarian. He says he will.

I then say to the other listeners, you don't have to decide today whom you'll vote for seven months from now. But if you'd like to see these issues debated in the campaign, support me now with a few hours or a few dollars every month.

Saturday, March 18, 2000 — Chicago

This will be a long day. I'm up at 5:30 to catch a 7:50 plane to Chicago.

The Illinois LP is holding its state convention today, and I arrive about an hour before the luncheon panel that will present three LP presidential hopefuls. While waiting, I sit in on National Director Steve Dasbach's workshop on organizing a local LP chapter. It is excellent information, well presented. Steve later tells me that Bill Winter (the LP's Communications Director) developed the material, and that it's presented at the LP's traveling "Success" seminars. From what I saw, these are valuable events that help people learn to do the necessary nuts and bolts work to make a local party successful.

The luncheon panel features 20-minute speeches by Don Gorman, Barry Hess, and me. It isn't one of my best talks, but I'm able to get my points across. Immediately afterward, Steve Givot drives me to the airport, where I head for Atlanta.

I arrive in Atlanta in time to give the banquet speech at the Georgia LP convention. Nearly 200 people are present, and they sure look like winners. The Georgia party has come a long way, and now has a full-time director in Mark Moseley. My speech centers on "My First Day in Office" — the things a Libertarian President could do all on his own, without waiting for Congressional approval. I say that on Inauguration Day I will pardon all federal non-violent drug offenders, non-violent gun-control offenders, and tax evaders; rip pages of regulations and executive orders out of the Federal Register; bring the troops home from overseas; make sure no American military personnel are under the command of international agencies; submit a constitutional budget; and order a carload of pens from Office Depot to veto all unconstitutional bills passed by Congress. And then I will break for lunch.

Monday, March 20, 2000 — Atlanta

After a day off, mostly sleeping in an Atlanta hotel, I'm ready for bear again. I look forward to appearing on CNN's Talk Back Live show today.

My first interview is by phone with Lanigan & Malone on WMJI in Cleveland. They are generally sympathetic to my libertarian proposals, but they ask why they should trust me to be any different from the Republicans and Democrats who claim to be on their side. I tell them I've already qualified for federal matching funds and rejected them because I don't believe I should use their tax money to benefit my campaign. Each of them says, "Well, you've got my vote!"

Hunter Schaeffer and his father Jim drive me to the Atlanta Constitution for an interview with political reporter Tom Baxter. The interview goes well, although I expect the published result to be the typical obligatory interview of a presidential candidate — full of details about my life and little of what I want people to know about my proposals. When I mention pardoning all federal non-violent drug offenders on my first day in office, he writes that down. I say, "I'm glad you made a note of that, because if there's one thing I want you to be sure to say in the article, that's it." He smiles and nods. It is important that we let all the people who have been affected adversely by the Drug War know that there's a candidate they can vote for by which to unequivocally protest the insane War on Drugs.

We go from the Atlanta Constitution to WSB for an in-studio interview with Neal Boortz. Neal is a very popular talk-show host who joined the LP two years ago and has been a great friend to the party. I am surprised and flattered when he refers to me as "one of my personal heroes." We have an hour on the air, and it is the hour that his show goes out on a national network. The first 15 minutes or so, it seems that we do a lot of joking about various things, and I begin to get concerned that we're not covering the important issues. But both he and I bring it around to the serious stuff, and we get some excellent calls raising good questions.

We discuss the presidential debates. I say something to the effect of, "At some point in a debate Al Gore is almost certainly going to lecture George Bush by saying, ‘Repeat after me, George, I-believe-in-a-woman's-right-to-choose.' There should be a Libertarian on that stage to ask Al Gore, ‘Does that mean you believe any woman has a right to choose to drop out of Social Security, or a woman with glaucoma or cancer has a right to choose to smoke marijuana, or a woman has a right to choose not to let you run her life for her?' That's why we need a Libertarian in the presidential debates — to present a perspective voters will never hear otherwise."

While at the WSB studio, we get a call from the campaign office (off the air) saying that my appearance on the CNN show has been cancelled – I've been "bumped" in the vernacular. Not only that, but I was rescheduled for the next day — and then bumped again.

Curses, foiled again!

Tuesday, March 21, 2000 — Nashville

Only one interview today. It is 45 minutes with Michael Stein, guest-hosting the Senator Phil Arthurholtz show (I don't know what he's a senator of) on WJIM in Lansing, Michigan. The host is very surprised at my positions — and very supportive.

Wednesday, March 22, 2000 — Nashville

I have a phone interview with Zack Coile, the political reporter for the San Francisco Examiner. He is writing an article about the AntiWar.com conference near San Francisco this weekend, at which I'll be speaking. He says the main focus of the article will be Pat Buchanan's appearance, but he wants to get some idea of what I'll be saying.

I tell him that I don't write my speeches out in advance, read them, or memorize them; I prefer to speak as I feel in the words that come to me at the time of the speech — and that I haven't yet decided on a general outline for the speech. However, I probably will include three important points:

1. All the military adventures of the U.S. government over the past few decades have involved the wholesale killing of innocent people — people who may hate the Adolph-Hitler-of-the-day as much as our humanitarian-President-of-the-moment may hate him. No one discusses those innocent lives lost, the families destroyed, the homes leveled, the life's work bombed down the memory hole, or any other part of the "collateral damage" the warriors treat so lightly.

2. Whenever you give any President the power to act on his own, you are destroying the Constitution and giving any future President the power to engage in similar acts — good or bad. It does no good to say the circumstances are different , because no one will ask you to define the circumstances. If you think Ronald Reagan acted rightly by invading Grenada or bombing Libya, you are saying the President of the United States — at his own discretion — is free to wage war against anyone he chooses, for any reason he chooses. He need not get a declaration of war, and America need not be threatened with attack. So you have no basis on which to object if Bill Clinton decides to bomb Serbia or cause innocent people in Iraq to die for lack of medicines and food from a U.S. trade blockade.

3. Many people have pointed out that war helps big government grow. But too few people have noticed that big government makes war more possible. By letting the politicians do anything they want without constitutional authority, we allow them to use foreign policy as their personal plaything — to enhance their own power and prestige, to enrich the politically connected, and to deflect attention from domestic failures. If we really want to bring peace to the world, we must start by dramatically reducing the American government.

Thursday, March 23, 2000 — Nashville

The day starts with a 20-minute interview on Good Day USA, a 250-station radio show. The guest hosts are Roberta Fascenelli and Mark Scheinbaum, neither of whom I recall having encountered before. They're interested in campaign finance reform. I tell them we're considering challenging the entire campaign finance system, and they aren't shocked in the least by this. Then when I give my usual 60-second summary of proposals for a Libertarian America, each of them interrupts to agree with my opposition to Social Security.

The interview I did with Tom Baxter in Atlanta on Monday is published today — not just in the Atlanta Constitution, but throughout the Cox newspaper chain. As I feared, the article focuses on me as a person and what motivates me to run such an uphill race, rather than on the issues I want to stress. But the writer's sympathy for what I'm doing shows through in every paragraph, so I can hardly be upset about it. And, no, he didn't mention that I want to pardon every federal non-violent drug offender on my first day in office.

I receive an email from Hunter Schaeffer in Atlanta. Sometime back, he was listening to an Atlanta sports show, in which the host (for some strange reason) wondered aloud who the Libertarian presidential candidate is this year. Hunter contacted the show and he's arranged for me to do a 10-minute phone interview tomorrow.

Hunter also mentions that Neal Boortz received hundreds of emails and faxes from people thanking him for having me on his show Monday. Neal plans to replay the interview sometime in the next couple of weeks. Hunter says, "Neal even did a reenactment of your bit where you describe Gore chastising Bush about a woman's ‘right to choose,' saying how much he loved that part!"

Friday, March 24, 2000 — Nashville

A long day today. Two press interviews and five radio shows.

The first event at 8am is a one-hour radio interview with Jim Cates on WIBW in Topeka. In the studio with him is Dennis Hawver, Libertarian candidate for the 2nd Congressional district in Kansas. At one point the host asks Dennis about the Drug War. Dennis, who is a defense attorney, gives an eloquent statement on the harm that the Drug War has done to families and our civil liberties.

The host gives no indication of his own views. But near the end of the hour, he asks about foreign policy. I say I want to end the U.S. government's bullying of small countries, end having occupying troops in nearly a hundred countries as though we were the Roman Empire, end arming countries around the world, end the use of foreign aid as a way of bribing countries to temporarily cease their feuding, scale back the ability to annihilate any country in the world, and use private companies to develop the ability to defend ourselves against anyone's missile attacks. At the conclusion of my statement, the host says, "Amen to that."

Next I have a short interview on KATD in Concord, California. It is the "Jim and Susan" show, but today it's Stephen and Chuck. It seems to be a typical upbeat morning show, with plenty of humor. The hosts were given no background on me or the Libertarian Party, so they ask very basic questions. When I state my views on the Drug War, one of the hosts picks up the subject and adds comments of his own against the Drug War. At the end of the 15-minute interview, the same host says, "I will cast my vote for Harry Browne." As I can't tell their voices apart, I ask which one said that. It was Stephen.

The third interview is the kind we need much more of. It is a sports show with Chris Dimino and Nick Cellini on WQXI in Atlanta. Here we can reach non-voters who have shut their minds to politics — and since the interview is brief, they have no incentive to switch stations and avoid this short political interview. I identify with the non-voters by pointing out that I didn't vote for 30 years because I knew that whoever was elected, Republican or Democrat, was going to make government bigger, more expensive, and more intrusive. One of the hosts interjects, "With more laws."

There's an echo everytime I speak, which makes it very difficult to focus. But even though it's probably the result of an engineer's mistake, I don't say anything about it — as I need to practice working under the most unfavorable circumstances. Both hosts are very polite, and they mention that they're looking for alternatives to the usual politicians. I reply that Al Gore and George Bush are arguing over which one is better qualified to run your life, while I don't think either of them is qualified to run your life — and neither am I. I point out that the more votes we Libertarians get this year, the sooner we will get big government out of our lives.

I'm interviewed by phone by John Wildermuth of the San Francisco Chronicle. He's asking questions regarding the speech I'll be giving tomorrow at the AntiWar.com conference near San Francisco. We get along fine and he seems sympathetic to everything I say regarding foreign policy, but who knows what he'll publish?

A second press interview is with Carl Winter at the Courier Post in Cherry Hill, New Jersey. This is a different story. He wants to debate just about everything — from how we wouldn't have railroads or the Internet without the federal government's help to how our roads would be run down without the federal government dictating to the states. However, he's sympathetic about the problems third parties have getting heard and on the ballot.

The next interview is with Barbara Simpson in San Francisco on KSFO, one of the two big talk-radio stations there. I've been on with her several times before, and she's always sympathetic. The first part of the interview focuses on foreign policy, because of the AntiWar.com conference tomorrow. Then we get into other areas. One caller asks what I would do about immigration along the southern border. I point out that the borders are open now, and will continue to be open — no matter who is elected and no matter what is promised. If politicians get serious about closing the border, they will impose police-state controls on us (having policemen check us for citizenship cards) and they still won't stop the immigrants from coming. The only answer is to shut down the welfare state so that we no longer have to worry about people coming to get on the gravy train.

The final interview is with Peter Weissbach, on whose syndicated show I appeared several times in 1996. Now he is on Seattle's big talk station, KVI. As always, he is very sympathetic, although he disagrees on some points.

Today, I talked with two reporters and five radio shows. Although the newspaper interviews were helpful, they are far from the best medium through which to transmit our message, because we have to rely on whatever a reporter chooses to write. But the radio shows allow me to speak directly to the voters. And today's shows probably reached a half-million listeners — plus all those hearing the Atlanta, San Francisco, and Seattle shows on the Internet.

Many of these listeners aren't likely to hear us in any other medium. They won't attend our events, they don't seek out our positions. But by reaching them through radio while they perform other tasks (driving or working), we get the opportunity to tell them there's a candidate and a party who want them to be free to live their lives as they see fit — without Al Gore, George Bush, Bill Clinton, or anyone making major decisions for them.

Saturday, March 25, 2000 — San Francisco

I'm up at 4:30am, as I have to catch a plane to San Francisco at 7:20. I forced myself to go to bed at 11, so that I would get a decent night's sleep, but I awoke at 2 and couldn't get back to sleep. I hope to sleep on the plane, but the connection via Dallas includes two planes with no leg room and no ability to rest my head on the back of the seat. Still, I manage to doze off.

It seems my biggest vulnerability as a campaigner is my inability to get enough sleep sometimes. I almost always seem to overcome the problem when doing interviews. But I'm never sure how a speech will turn out when I've gone two nights in a row with short sleep. And that's the case today as I arrive in San Francisco just before my speech at the AntiWar.com conference. In addition, there are so many bad things to say about war that I'm not sure which ones I want to focus on. And I want to provide a perspective that doesn't duplicate what other speakers might have said, and I haven't heard any of their speeches.

I settle on the theme that we must view war as one more government program. Our government is no more able to bring peace to the world, to be successful as the world's policeman, than it is able to stop drug use or end poverty. I mention that we have the strongest national offense in the history of the world, the ability to annihilate any country, but a very weak national defense with no ability to defend the country against anyone who can get his hands on a nuclear missile. This is typical of government programs, never delivering what they promise — in this case, selling us defense but giving us everything but that.

And, happily, the lack of sleep doesn't affect me at all — and the audience of a hundred or so receives the speech very well.

After my talk, I return to my room to do a radio show with a San Francisco college station, but a technical problem at the college causes the interview to be postponed.

I do my best to stay awake until 10pm, to do a radio interview. It is one hour with Erskine Payton on Erskine Overnight on the Equity Network. I don't recall ever talking with him before, but within the first few minutes he refers to me as "Maybe the last hope for this country and the Constitution." As the interview proceeds, he seems to agree with my positions on everything. He later sends me a tape of the broadcast with a letter offering to help the campaign.

Monday, March 27, 2000 — San Francisco & Denver

After a lazy day resting up in a San Francisco hotel, I start the day at 6am with a half-hour interview with Larry Hughes on WEOK, Poughkeepsie, New York. The host is very receptive and takes everything I say seriously, giving me an excellent platform to offer my proposals.

Then there is a 10-minute interview taped with Deb Lawler, a newswoman at WBZ, the big talk station in Boston. She pretty much gives me free rein, allowing me to get all my main points in.

I then fly to Denver, where I will be speaking at an investment conference tomorrow. On the way into the city from the airport, I phone Carl Wiglesworth at KTSA in San Antonio for an interview. Unfortunately, the schedule didn't allow enough time for me to get to the hotel first.

Carl starts out by mentioning that he voted for me in 1996, and expects to do so again this year. One of the callers says he agrees with me on everything but will vote for Bush to keep Gore out of the White House. Carl and I each take a run at him, but neither of us succeeds in changing his mind. My approach is to tell him that by voting Republican he's giving up on ever changing anything — because there will always be someone he considers bad that he will feel obligated to vote against. Instead, we must take the important first step toward what we want by getting enough Libertarian votes to make the country sit up and take notice of us.

Tuesday, March 28, 2000 — Denver

I managed to get a good night's sleep — even though today's first show is at 8:15.

It is a 40-minute interview with Simon Rose, an Englishman, on KRFU, Columbia, Missouri. He is sympathetic to libertarian ideas but he has a hard time imagining how America would operate without the government's hooks into everything. I'm not able to reassure him, but he acknowledges that he agrees more with us than with the Democrats and Republicans. All the callers are Libertarians. Although this is unusual, it isn't a bad thing. They don't sound like clones of one another; each raises a different point that steers me into a new area. And the calls undoubtedly help reassure other listeners that we have widespread support and may well make a much bigger impact this year.

Next is a 15-minute interview with George Brown on WTAG in Worcester, Massachusetts. As with many hosts, he doesn't reveal any particular sympathy for what we're selling, but he does allow me to make all my points. And when I realize that the interview is suddenly at an end, he allows me to squeeze in the phone number and website address before cutting me off.

I have a 15-minute interview with Nancy Rodriquez, a reporter for the Lawrence (Massachusetts) Eagle-Tribune. In the course of the conversation, she asks how roads would be built if the federal government were cut back. I point out that the federal government doesn't build roads; it only takes our money and doles it back to the most politically influential states, leaving the states to build the roads. Routing the money through Washington causes the cost to rise considerably. And I mention that letting the federal government use gas taxes causes money to be wasted on subway systems in Miami and Los Angeles, a boondoggle airport in Denver, and a ridiculous trolley system in Detroit. She then calls my attention to "The Dig" — a giant federal boondoggle in Massachusetts that has cost overruns in the billions of dollars. Most reporters know the sins of the government; in some cases they only need to be shown that such disasters are inherent in the nature of government.

A 40-minute press interview follows with Scott Deacle of the Danville (Virginia) Register. He asks a lot of intelligent questions, and says he expects a story to appear in the paper over the weekend. One of his questions concerns whether it's worthwhile to do interviews with small newspapers. I say that it is, especially early in the campaign. If he makes it plain in the article that I and the Libertarian Party want the reader to be free to live his own life as he wants to live it, not as the politicians think best, it may help connect us with one or more people who could do a lot to bring about the eventual success of the party. As the campaign progresses and our time becomes more limited, we may have to ration the press interviews — and focus on the areas where we can get the most votes. But at this stage, the most important job is to recruit the people who can help us reach other people.

At noon, I'm the luncheon speaker at an investment conference. This is one of the very few non-campaign activities I'll have this year. At other investment conferences I'll be giving political speeches, but this one is strictly on investments.

My final interview of the day is a half-hour with Mark Bernier on WNDB, Daytona Beach, Florida. I've been on with him before, and he's quite sympathetic. In one of the commercials he reads, he stresses that a company has created a new product with no help from the government. He asks me whom I would vote for if the only choices were the Republicans and the Democrats. I tell him that I would do what I did for 30 years — abstain. Why would I want to send a message to either of those parties that I endorse what they're doing?

In the evening, I have dinner with two dozen Libertarians, arranged by Bette Rose Smith, the Colorado state chair. We have a question period afterward. I close by asking whether anyone there believes the great majority of Americans would be better off in a Libertarian America. Everyone does. So I point out that this means we aren't faced with a political problem or an ideological problem; we're faced with a marketing problem. We have to find the proper words to show people that our product is superior, and we have to have the resources to transmit that message to people. What we don't know how to say today, we'll know how to say tomorrow. So we should be very optimistic about the long-run prospects for liberty in America.

Late in the evening Mike Dunafon arrives at the dinner. He is running for Mayor of Glendale, a suburb of Denver, and he is coming from a campaign event. He is a good-looking, articulate candidate. His campaign appears to be a model of efficiency. They have produced a campaign video and newspaper — and they've already collected 170 absentee ballots in a race that probably will have only 400-500 voters overall. The election is next Tuesday and they have plans to pick up voters and escort them to the polls. I hear a lot about grass-roots organizing and campaigning, but sometimes it amounts to little more than just running a token campaign. These people in Denver are serious, and probably have an even chance to win.

Wednesday, March 29, 2000 — Denver

The first interview today is at 8am, with Jan Michelson at WHO in Des Moines. He's a very funny guy who must be a pleasure to listen to every morning. I've been on with him before, and he's very supportive — although he usually plays the Devil's Advocate in a humorous way. As do so many, he raises the idea that Americans don't want freedom, they just want government handouts. I suggest that after the show he go out on the street and ask the first five people he encounters to name their favorite government programs — and observe the blank stares. Ask the first five people what they think of the Drug War and see the contempt in which it's held. Ask the first five people whether they would like to escape from the Social Security system and see the positive responses.

My next interview is with Mark Silva of the Miami Herald. He is very friendly, but who knows what his real attitude is? He primarily wants to know how I hope to transmit the message. We discuss the avenues available to the campaign, the potential campaign budget, and the advertising possibilities. At the end, he asks whether there's anything else I'd like to get across. I say I'd like people to know there's a wealth of information about the issues at HarryBrowne.org, and also I want people to know that we want them to be free. He says, "That sounds like a good idea to me."

Another newspaper interview follows — this one with Peter Lyman of the Syracuse Post-Herald. As sometimes happens with reporters, it turns into a debate about whether government helps or hurts people by intruding into education, health care, and various other areas. This is not what I want in an interview, and when it happens I always feel that I've failed to do what's necessary to prevent it. Because we're arguing about things I've given more thought to than he has, it's clear that I "win" the debate — which means I've alienated someone. The object isn't to win debates, it is to win converts — and that comes not from debating skills but from the ability to show people how their self-interest is furthered by libertarian ideas. When you win a debate, you almost always lose a prospect.

I give another speech at the investment conference. At the luncheon, the owner of the company putting on the conference makes it known how much he supports my campaign. His company is very successful, with nearly a hundred employees, and with several hundred people attending the conference this week — paying several hundred dollars apiece for the privilege. He is a valuable addition to our cause, and typical of the kind of people who are now being attracted to the LP.

The schedule calls for my next show to be with Bob Smith on WXXI, a National Public Radio station in Rochester, New York. I remember my interviews with him during 1996. He is an unabashed liberal with an audience that mostly believes people starved in the streets until Franklin Roosevelt appeared and miraculously turned stones into bread. In 1996 he and his callers tied me up with discussions about all the terrible things that happened in America before government came to the rescue. The arguments were pointless and I finished each interview feeling that I had accomplished nothing.

But today it's different. Whatever question he raises, I'm able to answer quickly and then turn it from theory to practical matters affecting the individual's life. When he says big business is as much a danger as big government, I tell him that I want him to be free to choose whom he wants to deal with — without big business being able to use big government to force its way upon him. When we discuss a totally private school system, he says he went to private school, didn't like it, and wouldn't want his children going through what he did. I say, "That's precisely why we need a private system — so that you're not forced to send your child to a bad school. You should be free to pick the school that matches your values, not be limited to the one type of school the politicians think is best for your child."

I'm able to turn each issue, whatever his argument, to my desire to give the listener greater freedom and resources to pursue what he wants for himself. The same is true with the callers — all of whom are opposed to my positions, but who provide the springboards for me to appeal to the other listeners who might welcome more freedom to make their own decisions. It's one of the best interviews I've had. We'll try to get a tape of it for our website.

Thursday, March 30, 2000 — Nashville

My first interview today is with Bob Van Sternberg of the Minneapolis Star Tribune. He is very friendly and we talk for about 30 minutes. He has spent time studying our website and getting background on the campaign. He seems to understand Libertarian political positions, and asks more about our campaign strategy.

However, when his article runs on April 6, there are several errors. Among them, he has my age at 70, instead of 66, mixes up some of my quotes, and confuses the Libertarian Party with my campaign. But he pretty much gets across the point that I stand for much, much smaller government.

Next is an interview with Kelly Beaucar of the Internet news site, ConservativeHQ.com. She's already written two articles on my campaign in the past month, and now wants to discuss our potential challenge to the FEC. I emphasize that we won't do this if our research indicates that we have no chance to win the case eventually. I point out how the current $1,000 donation limit is a repressive hindrance for small parties, while major candidates can get packages of donations amounting to $100,000 or more from large firms that want to curry favor with a potential President. I also emphasize that voters can decide for themselves whether reporting of donations is important — by supporting candidates that report, if they want, or by ignoring the matter and allowing candidates to save considerable sums of money by skipping the reporting.

The interview is published on ConservativeHQ.com later in the day. The article generally is quite informative. Among other points made, she says, "He believes the ‘secret' contribution list, much like secret ballots, would encourage more voters to give. But he doesn't foist his views on everyone, he explained, but believes that the practice of disclosure on all counts should be voluntary. Then, if voters feel strongly about disclosure and want to hold their representative accountable, they can seek out the candidate who is most candid with his or her finances at election time, he charged."

My third interview of the day is with Todd Hartley on KTAR in Scottsdale, Arizona. His show and website are called The American Resolution (www.AarShow.com). He picks an issue, in this case the legalization of marijuana, and interviews candidates or other political figures — asking them to propose specific solutions to the issue. He broadcasts the interviews and posts the guests' solutions on his website — urging his listeners/readers, if they agree with the solution, to write Congressmen and others to push for passage of it.

Of course, my solution goes beyond just legalizing marijuana — to ending the entire War on Drugs. He understands this and sees no problem with it. We go over the entire subject — non-violent people filling the prisons and separated from their families, the corruption of law-enforcement, the recreational drug industry in the hands of violent criminals rather than reputable companies and pharmacists, the destruction of the civil liberties of innocent people, and so on.

However, the following week I check his website and can find nothing on the subject or my appearance on his broadcast, which was to have been broadcast Sunday morning, April 1.

Friday, March 31, 2000 — Philadelphia

The day begins at home in Nashville with a typical morning radio show that features two comedians helping people start their days. I've been on such shows before, and I think they're very valuable. They reach people who would never dream of tuning into C-SPAN or CNN, or reading about politics.

Sometimes I run into comedians who want to make a joke out of everything I say. But in most cases, the hosts take the subject seriously because they want to be freer, just as other people do.

Today I'm on WRFX in Charlotte, North Carolina. It's "The Big Show" with John Boy and Billy. John Boy begins by asking why I want to be President. I reply with my usual paragraph: "Because I want you to be free — free to live your own life — free to raise your children by your values, not those of the politicians — free to keep every dollar you earn and spend it, save it, or give it away as you think best, not as the politicians decide." At this point Billy says, "No more calls, please, we have a winner."

The 10-minute interview is a big success. The two hosts love what I have to say, I get the chance to deliver all the main points, and I mention the website and the 800 number twice. They invite me to return periodically throughout the campaign. I will.

Later, Mark Smith writes a message to our website: "All my life I have been exposed to politics, and it's never made sense to me. My dad use to make me listen to Rush Limbaugh all the time, and he honestly was down right irritating. I have always had a dislike for politics and political leaders, until I heard Harry Browne talk on the John Boy and Billy show the other morning. What he said made so much sense. I can't believe there is a candidate for president that actually feels the way I do. I was instantly motivated to spread the word to all my friends, family, and anybody else I thought would be moved as I was. You are getting my vote, and I will continue to enlighten new people to your movement."

Later, Brian Thomson, who heard the show in Georgia, writes: "John Boy and Billy's audience generally consists of classic rock fans and NASCAR fans. Their audience is also generally not very interested in politics. Julie, one of my friends at work who heard the interview, said that she would register to vote now, just so she could vote for Harry Browne. She said that ‘Harry made a lot of sense, and he said things in ways that I have always thought about them.' And to top it off, she asked me for a copy of ‘The Great Libertarian Offer' video, and the ‘Harry Browne Tabloid.' Before the interview, she had not been interested in looking at either of them! Thousands of non-political people, who never listen to talk radio, heard your message this morning. ‘The Big Show' is broadcast on over 90 FM stations, and is even available on Direct-TV audio throughout Japan."

Another e-mail (signed only "Halo") says: "I first heard of you and your party this morning on the radio and for the first time I actually liked what I heard. It's the same stuff I have been saying all along!!!! I'm 18 years old and never thought of voting, but now I feel as though I can help make a change for the better. You got my vote Harry!! GOOD LUCK!!!"

These letters call attention to the tens of millions of people who will never watch C-SPAN or CNN, who will not watch or listen to a show that's going to discuss politics. We need to reach these people in non-political venues, and we need to appeal to their self-interest — to tell them we want to free them from the politicians who want to run their lives, free them to raise their children by their own values (not those of Al Gore or George W. Bush), free them to keep the money they earn (not let the politicians divide it up).

After "The Big Show" I catch a plane to Philadelphia. Naturally, the flight goes west from Nashville to Memphis, before going east to Philadelphia. But I manage to get exit-row seats for the whole way, which allows me to stretch my legs and take a nap.

Laura Carno picks me up at the Philadelphia airport and takes me to King of Prussia for the Pennsylvania LP convention. There is an early-evening reception.

Later in the evening, Laura drives me to a TV station in Philadelphia for an appearance on Hannity & Colmes on the Fox TV News Network. This is about my sixth appearance on their show, and they are always good to me. Tonight Alan Colmes begins by asking, "If you're elected President, what will you do on your first day in office?" I'm surprised by the question; it's as though it was a planted question. I of course say I'll pardon every non-violent drug prisoner in federal prison.

Sean Hannity interrupts, as I knew he would, to say "Harry, you never take my advice. That's where you will always lose with the American people. I've debated you a hundred times on this and I don't want to go down that road. You stay lock stock on that, you lose 80% of the American people, Harry. They don't want to hear anything else you have to say?"

I reply, "Five years ago I would have agreed with you even though I would not have changed my stand on it, of course. But today, the American people are coming around on this so fast it's making your head swim. Just go outside the studio and ask the first five people you meet, what do you think of the War on Drugs? ‘Oh, it's a failure. Oh, God, it's a joke.'"

He says, "I agree it's a failure . . ." and then goes on to say we must work harder to make it succeed.

The interview is only one brief 5-minute segment, and it never gets off the Drug War. But that's okay. I want to spread my promise to pardon the non-violent drug prisoners far and wide — hoping to reach as many as possible of the of millions of people who have been personally hurt by the Drug War. These include families and friends of prisoners, people hurt by asset forfeiture, the millions of people who smoke marijuana regularly, the medical marijuana patients, and many more. None of these people sees Al Gore or George Bush as a "less bad" alternative. Their only hope (once they know about it) is to vote Libertarian — whether or not we can win — to make a strong, unequivocal statement against the War on Drugs.

As the segment ends and the show heads to a break, I hear Sean Hannity say regretfully, "I didn't really want to get into that subject again." I suspect that they'll have me back again soon to talk about other aspects of the campaign.

Saturday, April 1, 2000 — Philadelphia

Today the Pennsylvania convention has a 90-minute panel for the presidential candidates — Don Gorman, Barry Hess, and me. After I make my opening statement at the podium, I move from the microphone back across the platform to my place — and I fall off the back of the narrow platform. I'm not hurt at all, but it startles many people. When I get back on the platform I announce that I saw Bob Dole do that in the 1996 campaign and wanted to try it for myself.

The Pennsylvania party has always been one of the LP's largest state parties. Today there are a little over a hundred people in attendance at the panel, and they are enthusiastic about the ideas expressed by the candidates.

In the evening, Nadine Strossen of the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) gives an excellent speech at the banquet. Part of her talk focuses on the way the Drug War has been used as an excuse to trash the Bill of Rights.

After her speech, Julian Heicklen, a chemistry professor at Penn State University, gives a short speech — describing ads he has been running in local newspapers. He reads one of them to the audience:

"Greta Slovensky is 32 years old. She started to experience slurred speech, body tremors, and distorted eyesight in 1990. Her motor skills were impaired. She started drooling. Over the next two years, she stumbled and fell often, had severe headaches, felt dizzy, and had trouble speaking. Finally she was diagnosed with Wilson's Disease. By the time she was treated, she could no longer talk, was informed that her vocal chords were paralyzed, and put on a feeding tube. The drugs that she was given for treatment were ineffective and had serious side effects. She had not been able to talk for two years, when she started smoking cannabis. Her speech returned after seven days, and her symptoms are improving. The tremors are almost gone. Her walking is stabilized. The Republicrats want to take away her medicine and put her in prison. Stop torturing the sick. Vote Libertarian on November 2."

Needless to say, there wasn't a dry eye in the house.

Sunday, April 2, 2000 — Philadelphia

I'm up at 5:15 to go into Philadelphia for a 7am radio show. A couple of weeks ago I was on WIP with Peter Solomon by phone. Every time he took a call from a listener, I was disconnected. So he has invited me to join him in the studio while I'm in Philadelphia. The show goes well. The callers are about evenly divided between supporters and critics. No matter how much I hate to get up early in the morning, I don't have trouble with early shows.

After the show, Laura Carno and her husband, Bill Trees, take me to the airport, to fly south to Nashville — by first going north to Detroit to change planes. I get home around 2pm, and Pamela and I take the rest of the day and evening off to be together.

Except for one scheduled interview. At 5pm I'm on for an hour with Nathan Lowe on WUSC at the University of South Carolina. There are no commercials and no call-ins, just an hour of conversation. He is very sympathetic toward libertarian positions, and I try to keep coming back to how various policies will affect young people. I think the interview is a success, and Nathan asks me to stay on for the next hour. However, as I don't know when Pamela and I will have our next day off, I suggest that we instead do another interview soon — which he quickly agrees to.

Monday, April 3, 2000 — Nashville

My first event is a press interview with Miles Benson of the Newhouse News Service. He is not particularly sympathetic, but I can hear his keyboard clicking away with everything I say. I'm not pleased with the way the interview is going. But towards the end I have occasion to say that a Libertarian America will be much more harmonious than the contentious society we have today. He asks why I think that. I say that, without government imposing one way on everyone, gays will have less reason to fear Christians and vice versa, the poor will have less animosity toward the rich and vice versa, races will have less to fear from each other — and each of us will be free to decide the course of action he wants for himself, rather than having to fight to prevent someone else's values from prevailing. I ask whether I've made myself clear. He says, "Very!" I hope he prints that.

I'm on for about 35 minutes with Bill Press, sitting in for Ronn Owens on KGO, the big talk station in San Francisco. Press is a regular liberal spokesman on CNN's CrossFire. This is my first encounter with him, and he's generally a good interviewer. However, I just don't feel I'm getting my points across in a persuasive way. The interview doesn't seem to be a bad one, but I've certainly done a lot better. I always feel a bit disappointed after such an interview, because I know every interview reaches many people who have never heard me before — and this is their only basis on which to form an opinion.

But later I receive an e-mail from Rick Adams, saying: "I heard Mr. Browne on the Ronn Owens show today and was quite pleased with his fresh view on our country's problems. Real problems like ridiculous taxation laws and imprisoning any American who doesn't agree with the government's view of narcotic consumption. I can only hope more people are upset enough to REALLY use their vote to voice our outrage at the way things are getting. It might not happen right away but I will no longer throw my vote away on either head of the beast. Keep up the good work! People are listening!" So you never know.

Tuesday, April 4, 2000 — Nashville

My interview with Scott Deacle of the Danville (Virginia) Register and Bee (mentioned in Campaign Journal #7) is published. He provides a good overview of what we're for and how we hope to continue growing and be far more visible this year.

Today's first interview is with Dark Starr on WCCO in Minneapolis. He's a Republican, and he says he's concerned that Libertarians wouldn't do anything to promote free enterprise. I never do figure out what he means by that. He asks whether I would step aside for Alan Keyes, and I say no. Although there is much to admire about Keyes, he isn't a Libertarian, he has no proposals to reduce government, and we won't restore America as a free country until we have a Libertarian President.

I have a phone interview with Steve Lund, a reporter for the Kenosha News in Wisconsin. He is very friendly. He asks whether the thriving economy makes it difficult to get people interested in a radical overhaul of the system. I point out that heavy regulation caused the economy to slow down in the 1970s and since then it hasn't really accelerated to a level comparable to the 1950s and 1960s. The median family income (the income of a family right in the middle of all American families) has barely grown over the past 30 years. I fax him some material from my forthcoming book.

The day's last interview is with the esteemed Gene Burns — long-time Libertarian, eloquent speaker and talk-show host. This show is on WMEX in Boston, although Gene is broadcasting from San Francisco. Needless to say, we get along just fine. There are a few phone calls, all helpful.

Wednesday, April 5, 2000 — Nashville

A scheduled interview with Jim McCarthy of the Brunswick (Maine) Times-Record is postponed to a later date. This allows me to sleep until 1:30pm. (I seem to mention sleep a lot, don't I?)

My first actual interview is an hour with Mike Richards on KPRC in Houston. He's a "good ol' boy" type who obviously doesn't think highly of government. We have an excellent conversation. Only two calls come in but he asks many intelligent questions.

Near the end, in response to a question, I rhapsodize again on the greater harmony that will exist in a Libertarian America: "Gays no longer will fear Christians, and Christians will no longer fear Gays. Blacks won't be so afraid of whites and whites won't be so afraid of blacks. Rich and poor will no longer be so hostile to each other. This is because the government will be so small that no one can use it to impose his values on others. Today everyone's afraid some other group will get control of the government and impose alien values. In a Libertarian America that can't happen, and so people can relax and enjoy each other without fear." The host says, "I really like that."

Then there's a phone interview with Jim Ragsdale of the St. Paul Pioneer Press. It's scheduled for 20 minutes, but we talk for about 35. He's very friendly, interested in libertarian ideas, and takes seriously my hope that we'll be more visible this year.

The last interview is with Jerry Fogel on KPHN in Kansas City. It's supposed to be for 25 minutes, but he holds me over for an extra 20 minutes. He betrays none of his own philosophy, but he asks intelligent questions and is quite respectful — saying that he wants me back for a longer interview.

Thursday, April 6, 2000 — Nashville

Today's first interview is an hour with Roger Parent on WBET in Brockton, Massachusetts. In introducing me he says, "I'm more libertarian than anything." And later he says, "I agree with you 100%." Needless to say, I get the opportunity to say anything I want.

Next is an interview with John Day of the Bangor (Maine) Daily News. It's supposed to be 20 minutes, but I have to end the interview after 30 minutes because of my schedule. Mr. Day is very interested, he has studied the website, and wants to know how we hope to get attention. He says that occasionally lightning strikes and someone like Jesse Ventura catches the attention of the public. He finishes by wishing me good luck.

I then have a half-hour taped interview on the Florida Radio Network of 60 stations, to be played this weekend. The hosts are Reagan Smith and former Republican Congressman Lou Frye. Before the taping starts, they emphasize that the show is low key with no confrontations. They are very nice to me in the interview. However, after the taping is complete, I'm off the phone while they tape their closing comments — which may be more revealing of their feelings about libertarians.

Lastly, I'm on for five minutes with Joe Palan, a reporter on WMNN in Minneapolis. He is very friendly and gives me a surprising amount of time to voice my main concerns during the five minutes.

Friday, April 7, 2000 — Nashville

I become aware of an article on the Nebraska.StatePaper.Com website, the online version of some Nebraska newspaper. The article describes last Sunday's state LP convention. It is amazingly respectful of the convention's speakers — who are mostly Libertarian candidates.

One such candidate is John Graziano, running for Congress, who said "the government safety net could turn into a shroud." The article also mentioned that he "attacked school officials over reacting with stiff penalties for kids bringing safety scissors or pen knives to class. ‘This is not zero tolerance,' he said. ‘This is infinite absurdity.'"

I wish I'd been there. It sounds as though the Nebraska party is alive and well.

There are no interviews today — giving me a chance to begin correcting the proofs and creating the Index for my forthcoming book. I also can clean up my desk before heading out on the road for most of the next two weeks.

Saturday, April 8, 2000 — Portland, Maine

At 7:30am, I'm on the phone with Jeff Weinstein, broadcasting from Lewiston on three Maine stations. He is a Libertarian, and is very supportive on all counts. He says he was so impressed with our 30-minute campaign videocassette that he has broadcast the audio portion on his show. He jokes that the only bad part was when the host in the video said, "Call the telephone number on your screen."

Later in the morning I'm at the airport, checking in for the flight to Portland, Maine, via a connection in Detroit. My flight is going to be late and it's obvious that I'll miss my connection in Detroit. So the Northwest Airlines agent arranges for me to take a Delta flight to Portland through Atlanta. At the Delta ticket counter, I try to get an exit row so I'll have some legroom, but no exit seats are available. The Delta agent decides to put me in first class instead, and I have the opportunity to relax, sleep, and stretch my legs throughout the flight.

I arrive in Portland in time to speak at the evening banquet for the Maine LP state convention. It is an enthusiastic audience of Maine Libertarians and outsiders who have come to hear what Libertarians offer. There are so many good people in the Maine LP, beginning with state chair Mark Cenci, and their efforts are paying off.

Ben Barth introduces my speech. He says that seeing the Libertarian national convention in 1996 caused him to change his life and become more of a self-supporting, responsible citizen. He also tells about his daughter Hannah, who represented me in 1996 in her middle-school class debate of presidential candidates. She presented my message of personal freedom so well that she got 61% of the vote. I am considering withdrawing from the race this year and having her run instead.

My speech is well received. Afterward, Michael Cloud asks people to stand if they are at their first Libertarian event, and well over half do so. He asks some of them to tell the audience what they think of what they've heard, and the responses are all enthusiastic.

When the banquet is over, Michael, Carla Howell (U.S. Senate candidate in Massachusetts), and I drive to Boston, where I stay overnight.

Sunday, April 9, 2000 — Minneapolis

In the morning, I fly to Minneapolis to be the noon banquet speaker at the Minnesota LP state convention. The audience numbers around a hundred. This is the third state convention I've attended here, and each time the attendance seems to double each time. Charles Test and so many Minnesotans have done an excellent job building the party.

The audience is very enthusiastic, and I'm hoping for good things there this year.

Monday, April 10, 2000 — Minneapolis & St. Paul

What a day. A full schedule of interviews. Matthew Gress, our Minnesota Volunteer Coordinator, escorts me through the day.

It all begins at 8:30 with Ann Marie Ronning on WLTE-FM. We tape an interview for broadcast either this weekend or the weekend after. Before beginning, she explains that she almost never discusses politics on the show but decided to make an exception in this case. The interview is supposed to be a half-hour, but midway through she asks whether I can extend it to an hour. She is intrigued by the Libertarian message, even though she doesn't immediately accept it all. Once again, we are reaching an audience of non-political people who probably haven't even been voting.

The problem is that there's no way to test how worthwhile it is to devote resources to such an audience. Are these people responding favorably? And if so, will they be enthusiastic enough to actually go to the polls in November? Here again, we must be well-enough financed that we can reach them through advertising again and again over the next seven months. Otherwise, even if they remember me, they will come to feel that I don't have enough support to warrant their bothering to vote for me.

Next comes a phone interview with Joe Hallett at the Columbus (Ohio) Post Dispatch, the only non-Minnesota interview of the day. He is very friendly, and the half-hour discussion focuses on the difficulty we face in breaking through to national attention. I tell him there's no way to know when we'll have the resources to reach enough people to break into the polls and have an impact on the election, but that I hope it will happen this year.

Then another phone interview. This one is a short discussion with Steve Murphy, a news announcer at WCCO in Minneapolis, who tapes some comments to insert in the day's newscasts. Some of the soundbites concern the good growth of the Minnesota LP.

I have an interview scheduled with an editorial page editor at the St. Paul Pioneer Press. But when I arrive I find that it's with Steven Dornfield, Glenda Crank Holste, and D. J. Tice, all editorial writers for the paper. They quiz me more on campaign strategy than issues, but I manage to insert the issues into my answers on strategy. Of course, I have no idea what they'll write about me — if anything. One of them is impressed when I tell him I don't expect any newspaper to go beyond a single courtesy interview until we're large enough to affect the outcome of the election.

Now we go to KFAI-FM, an inner-city station for a taped interview with Ahndi Fridell. The conversation goes wonderfully. She asks several questions concerning poorer people — such as why they should care about the income tax or investing for their own retirement. My answers are to the point and (I think) compelling. I mention that the Social Security tax takes 15% from the first dollar a person earns — making it particularly difficult for someone to start getting his life together. When she asks about corporations, I say I want to take away the power of corporations to use government to impose their way on rich and poor alike. When she asks about minorities, I point out that the prize of government power makes groups afraid that others will get control and impose their way — fostering distrust and making harmony and tolerance difficult.

The interview goes so well — and we have covered so many questions that I don't usually get asked — that I get her to promise to send me a tape we can put on our website.

From there, we head to the Minneapolis Star Tribune, only to discover that a scheduled interview had been cancelled. But I get a message from the campaign office that Al Malmberg of WCCO wants to do a quick interview. So we head for WCCO and Al and I tape about ten minutes of conversation, to be broadcast when today's baseball game ends. I've been on by phone with Al several times and he's always been very good to me. It's a pleasure to meet him in person.

The biggest event of the day is an hour on KSTP with Jason Lewis, the city's biggest talk-show host. He's a libertarian Republican, and I've been on with him before a couple of times. Ironically, I think this turns out to be the weakest interview of the day, but it still is a good one. The weakness (if I'm even correct about that) isn't Jason's fault; he is very respectful and gives me plenty of opportunity to talk. Perhaps my reaction stems from the other broadcast interviews going so well that this one seems to be a slight letdown.

As we leave the studio, I get a call from the campaign office; Ahndi Fridell called to say that something is wrong with the tape from our interview and we have to redo it. Horrors! This was the one interview I wanted most to preserve. We drive back to KFAI and redo the interview. She uses the same list of questions as before, and my answers seem (to me) articulate and compelling. But somehow the follow-up questions don't take us into the same new areas where I felt so brilliant before. She says she still hopes someone will rescue the material on the earlier digital tape, and will send it to me if that happens.

As though to put the icing on a particularly productive day, I see an article by Melissa Levy in the Minneapolis Star Tribune, reporting on my speech yesterday at the state convention. The headline is, "The less government, the better, Libertarian says." Wonder of wonders, the entire article (15 paragraphs) relates the main points of my speech, starting with, "If Harry Browne were elected President, the Libertarian Party candidate said one of the first things he'd do is order a box of pens to veto bills from Congress." It goes on from there to talk about my principal issues, other parties wanting to run your life, pardoning non-violent drug offenders, pointing out how much better off you'd be without the income tax, and so on. Easily the best press coverage so far in the campaign.

Tuesday, April 11, 2000 — Nashville

Upon returning home from Minnesota, I have one interview — with Chris Casteel of the Daily Oklahoman in Oklahoma City. He is very friendly and respectful. As with most reporters, he's more interested in our campaign strategy than with the issues, and I have to try to keep slipping the issues into my answers to strategy questions.

When he asks how we expect to do better than we did in 1996, I point out that the party is 2-1/2 times as large as four years ago, we are in a position to spend many times as much on advertising, and we expect to be far more visible. The big question is: will we be visible enough that most eligible voters will become aware that there's an alternative to the two candidates who want to make government larger — that there's a Libertarian candidate who wants to repeal the income tax, free you from Social Security, and end the insane War on Drugs?

Wednesday, April 12, 2000 — Nashville

No interviews today, as I get my first day off in a couple of weeks. Pamela and I run some errands, eat out, and rent a couple of videos to watch. But before going to sleep, I slip into my office and check my email.

Thursday, April 13, 2000 — Nashville & Boston

I have one interview before catching a plane to Boston. It is 35 minutes with Doug Guetzloe on WWNZ in Orlando, Florida. He describes himself as a libertarian Republican, and it's obvious that he has "libertarian tendencies." He also has invited two local county LP chairmen to join the conversation near the end. (Unfortunately, I couldn't hear their names.)

One caller asks whether the Libertarian Party is comprised mostly of former Republicans. I respond that there is no statistical evidence on this, but that my own informal experience indicates that we seem to draw about equally from Republicans, Democrats, and people who haven't been voting at all. Many people I meet in the party tell me they didn't vote for many years until they encountered the Libertarians. I also am receiving a good deal of email from people who say they intend to vote for the first time this year because they've heard about our campaign.

Like so many interviewers, the host asks me what I think about the Elian Gonzales case. I tell him that the obvious policy should be to grant political asylum to the boy's father, if he wants it and is free to accept it. But I point out the hypocrisy of Democrats and Republicans saying the boy shouldn't be sent back to Cuba, when our government since 1995 has been intercepting Cuban refugees at sea and forcibly returning them to Cuba — with the full support of Democratic and Republican politicians. Just put a child on TV and every politician's posture changes overnight. Too bad we can't see all the people in Cuban prisons who were put there, in effect, by the U.S. Coast Guard.

Friday, April 14, 2000 — Boston

What a day planned for today. Between our P.R. firm Newman Communications, Press Secretary Jim Babka, and Elaine Berchin of the Massachusetts LP, I have ten interviews scheduled.

It all begins at the leisurely hour of 5:30am with "The Morning Show" on WRKO, with Andy Mose and former Republican Congressman Peter Blute. I do this show by phone from my hotel room. Andy is a comedian and asks me the key issue question: "Which Darren did you prefer on the old Bewitched TV show?" I say I have to waffle on that one because I couldn't tell them apart. But the 25-minute interview contains a lot of substance — discussions on taxes, abortion, immigration, and more. And Andy really comes to life when I mention ending Drug Prohibition — an issue on which he apparently agrees with me.

Muni Savyon picks me up at the hotel and escorts me for the morning. We're joined by John Moran of Newman Communications, our P.R. firm. We begin at WZLX-FM with Ann Cody, taping a 20-minute interview that will be broadcast Sunday on a public affairs show. She is very friendly and respectful, and gives me the opportunity the make all the points that are important to me.

Next we head for WBUR at Boston University for an interview with Bruce Gellerman. The place is teeming with police and Secret Service personnel. I say, "I didn't order this protection." But, of course, it isn't for me; it's for President Clinton's trade representative (whose name I can't spell or pronounce) who the President thinks is threatened by people protesting the World Trade Organization. My interview is taped and lasts about 10 minutes. The host is skeptical of my positions, but provides a very nice, respectful introduction.

At the Boston Globe, I am interviewed by Bob Turner, who is the Chief Editorial Writer, and Don MacGillis, also an editorial writer. They are very nice to me, ask a lot of questions, and seem genuinely interested in what I have to say. They know I have an uphill battle and they are quite sympathetic. The general impression I come away with is that they take me very seriously.

On the way out of the building, Bob Turner takes me by the office of Jeff Jacoby, the conservative-libertarian syndicated columnist. I've read and enjoyed many of his articles. He says he had intended to sit in on the interview, but was prevented by a looming deadline. He asks that I let him know before my next trip to Boston, so that he can follow me around for the day and do an article on my campaigning.

We head next to the Boston Herald, where Libertarian entrepreneur Bob Willis joins us. We have lunch in the Herald cafeteria. Muni heads back to his own work and Bob takes over as my escort.

At the Herald, I'm interviewed by editorial writer Wayne Woodlief and conservative syndicated columnist Don Feder. The latter has been critical of libertarians at times — apparently he considers them a threat to Republican chances and he also genuinely opposes the degree of liberty libertarians want. He tells me that he read How I Found Freedom in an Unfree World many years ago. I ask him what he thought of it. He says he liked it — then. I promise to send him a copy of the newer edition. Feder also invites me to come back in the future for a longer discussion on the differences between conservatives and libertarians.

(Woodlief's article appears the following Sunday, and it's mostly about Pat Buchanan. The part about me is pretty condescending.)

The Herald recently published a very helpful article about Carla Howell, the Libertarian candidate running against Teddy Kennedy. In fact, she has received a wealth of good publicity and is being taken very seriously by the press. It's even possible that the Republican candidate won't obtain sufficient signatures to get on the ballot by the deadline in May.

We call the Boston Phoenix, a local weekly newspaper, to postpone our interview there — as we're running too far behind. It isn't unusual for the interviews to last longer than scheduled, and we're now in the position that we couldn't make it to the Phoenix and still be on time for the next radio show.

That show is with Jay Severin, broadcasting on WTKK from The Rack — a combination restaurant and pool hall next to the legendary Faneuil Hall, where patriots spoke in the 18th century and I was fortunate to be able to speak in 1996. It turns out that Severin is an avowed libertarian who rarely has guests, but who has invited me on to clear up for his listeners what a libertarian is. Apparently, many of his callers have said they were libertarians and others have shown interest. There's an audience of about 20 of the restaurant's patrons gathered around the stage where Jay and I are "performing." It's obvious that this is definitely not a political show. On the whole it goes well, but I notice that the setting and the noise throw me a little off balance and my words don't come out as fluently as in most interviews.

From there we go to WTKK, where PBS is videotaping me for a documentary on third parties that will air in October. Strangely, the host, Darren Garrick, asks me questions about what I hope will happen between now and election day — even though when the show airs, such things will no longer be hopes; they'll already be confirmed as achievements or disappointments. But we get all that worked out.

He focuses largely on the troubles a third party must face trying to break through the stranglehold the Republicans and Democrats have on the electoral process. Despite his determination to concentrate on the strategy and mechanics of the campaign, I continually recite that we're the only party offering to free you to live your life as you see fit (and related points), so I'll be amazed if the final cut doesn't include some of our message.

He asks if we will succeed. I tell him I can't predict the future, but that it seems to me very possible that we'll elect a Libertarian President by 2008.

Bob Willis, Dave Rizzo, and I have dinner and talk about the challenge facing Dave in his race for state representative. We have a little more time than expected, because my appearance on New England Cable News has been preempted by coverage of the Elian Gonzales case.

The final show of the day is with David Brudnoy on WBZ. David is one of New England's most popular talk-show hosts. He's an old friend; my first interview with him may have been as much as 20 years ago. He has had AIDS for a number of years, and when he found that out he vowed to beat it. This evening I'm happy to see that he looks healthier than he did when I saw him four years ago. He is a strong, amazing individual.

David begins the interview by telling his audience that he voted for me in 1996 and will do so again this year. When one caller says I'm not yet the Libertarian nominee, David assures him that I will be and that he's going to vote for me. In response to another caller, he says he flirted with the idea that change would more likely come from within one of the two old parties but that he realized how impossible that would be — and he's sticking with the Libertarians. I also said a few important things — something about liberty, I think.

Saturday, April 15, 2000 — Boston

Today is the Massachusetts LP's state convention. The party is certainly in great shape. Elias Israel is doing a wonderful job as State Chair, assisted by people like Elaine Berchin, who has established excellent relations with the media, Muni Savyon, who has been recruiting candidates, Dave Rizzo, Bob Willis, and many, many other determined people.

There are several press people in attendance. And I have two interviews before speaking. The first is with Thomas Grillo of the Boston Globe. He is very friendly and wishes me luck at the end of the interview.

The second is with Curt Lovelace, publisher of the Massachusetts News, a conservative monthly. He asks a number of questions about campaigning. He also asks why conservatives should vote for me instead of George W. Bush. I say that economic conservatives have to prove to the Republican Party that they won't any longer vote for candidates who are going to make government bigger — that they can't change the Republican Party for the better if they continue to endorse whoever the party runs. I then say that social conservatives should be scared to death of Bush's proposals. He wants to use their money to subsidize private, "faith-based" charities — which will effectively render them useless, just as federal aid to private colleges has made them virtually indistinguishable from state universities. And Bush wants to subvert private elementary schools with federal vouchers — which will tie up the schools in government regulations until they become clones of the government schools, ending "choice" rather than enhancing it.

Lovelace says he has all he needs and asks whether there's anything else I'd like to say. I ask whether he'll be around for my speech and he says no; so I say, in effect, let's talk about your freedom. We talk for another 15 minutes and he takes another few pages of notes as I pour it on about the way we want to give you control over your life and set you free.

Carla Howell, the U.S. Senate candidate, speaks shortly before I do. She delivers a stirring stump speech. Afterward, she does an excellent job of answering questions — possibly the best job I've ever seen anyone do. It makes me wonder why I can't answer questions so concisely.

Jim Sullivan is the convention emcee, and he provides a very flattering introduction for me. It is as energizing for me as for the audience to give a speech in this setting. To see 150-200 good-looking, enthusiastic people here reminds me that we have the talent, the skills, and the determination to bring about liberty in our lifetimes.

After the speech, Carla and I go to the press room to do separate interviews with Bub Hokanson on WTAG. Again, she does an excellent job of answering questions. I follow her on the show, providing a 1-2 punch, so to speak. The host is very respectful, saying that — in effect — we're simply trying to restore the traditional American idea of personal freedom. And yet, he is careful not to appear to be a partisan of libertarians.

Sunday, April 16, 2000 — Denver

I'm up at 5:45 to catch an early plane to Denver, to attend the Colorado LP convention. Tim Sauer and Michelle Konieczny pick me up at the Denver airport — the giant boondoggle airport that very few people in Colorado wanted; it's so far away from Denver that it seems as though it's in Illinois. Tim and Michelle are doing terrific jobs as the Colorado Campaign Coordinator and the Adams County Campaign Coordinator, respectively.

Shortly after my arrival, I speak at the Colorado LP convention. There are a hundred people or so in attendance. I mention that I may be the most optimistic person in the Libertarian Party — that I was recently diagnosed as having Extreme Euphoria with Pollyanna Syndrome. But because of the power of our message — the desire to give people control over their own lives — I believe we have an excellent chance to reverse the long-term trend toward bigger government, and do it in this decade.

Monday, April 17, 2000 — Denver

Today I have six scheduled interviews plus a meeting.

I wake up at 6:30 for a 5-minute phone interview, only to be told that the interview is postponed until tomorrow, as interest in the stock market has preempted me.

At 8:15, BetteRose Smith, the Colorado LP Chair, picks me up to take me to today's media events. The first is with Gary Tessler at KWAB. It is meant to be 20 minutes, but it lasts for about 40 minutes. We get along very well. He is a liberal and disagrees with a lot of what I say (except for my stand on the Drug War), but he gives me plenty of opportunity to state my views.

I was scheduled to meet with Sue O'Brien of the Denver Post editorial board, and then have a phone interview with Jeff Miller on the Morning Call radio show. But both have been cancelled and will have to be rescheduled. Normally, about one interview in ten gets cancelled. But today it is three out of six, and last Friday two out of ten interviews were cancelled.

At noon, I meet with Ari Armstrong, Dudley Brown, Bob Glass, and Mark Call — all of whom are Colorado gun-rights activists. They are supportive of my campaign, and we discuss ways to reach the tens of thousands of gun supporters in Colorado, and to convince them that voting Republican in November will lead to more compromises of their gun rights.

After lunch, I have an interview with Linda Seebach at the Rocky Mountain News, one of Denver's two daily newspapers. She is very friendly and very familiar with libertarian ideas and the Libertarian Party. In fact, when the Drug War comes up, she mentions that it's one of the very few issues on which she doesn't agree with Libertarians. I don't know whether she's planning to write an article about me now, or just wants to know what's happening with the campaign. However, she says she will want to do a column on our FEC protest if we decide to go ahead with that. The interview lasts an hour and 15 minutes.

The final interview is with Jim Bryan at KNUS. He is a staunch Republican. On the way to the interview, we hear him doing a phone interview with Jim Nicholson, the Republican National Chairman. With the Columbine anniversary this week, Nicholson echoes the NRA line that there should be no new gun legislation; instead, the Clinton administration should do a better job of enforcing the 20,000 gun laws on the books.

During my hour on the show, I remind the host of what Nicholson said and ask him whether he thinks those 20,000 laws are all good laws. He says no, and has to agree that the Republican/NRA strategy doesn't make much sense. (I also thank him for having Nicholson as my warm-up act.)

Bryan is very complimentary of my handling of the issues, and he says I would make a good Republican. I tell him that I have almost nothing in common with Republican politicians. The Republicans want to keep Social Security going; I want to free you from it. The Republicans want to rearrange the tax burden; I want to reduce your tax burden dramatically. The Republicans want to manage health care better; I want to get the government completely out of it. The Republicans want to take over private schools (by managing them through vouchers) and "faith-based" organizations (by giving them welfare money); I want to get the federal government completely out of education and welfare. The Republicans like to make government bigger and bigger, and run your life better; I want to get government out of your life and let you run it yourself.

As with so many conservative Republican talk-show hosts, he says he agrees with 90% of what I say, but not on the Drug War. And, like so many hosts, he says we Libertarians would be more successful if we'd drop that issue. I point out that we couldn't be believed if we pointed out that the government that makes such a mess in so many areas is somehow going to succeed in stamping out drugs. And, while our stand on drugs was relatively unpopular five years ago, the tide has been turning rapidly in our direction.

At the conclusion of the show, Jim Bryan invites me back for a two-hour interview, so we can discuss the issues in more depth.

Despite the cancellations, the day's events have been very helpful.

Tuesday, April 18, 2000 — Denver

The day begins at 6:35 with the phone interview that was postponed from yesterday. It is with April Zesbaugh and Kim Kobel on a news broadcast on KOA in Denver. It is meant to be only five minutes, but it lasts about ten. They give me plenty of opportunity to talk, and at the end of the interview one of them says something to the effect of, "There it is folks; this year you'll have a third choice instead of just the same old Democrats and Republicans." Ah, but I neglected to mention the website and phone number.

Later in the morning I catch a flight to Nashville and Home Sweet Home. Pamela and our dog Schnoodle meet me at the airport. (He is named Schnoodle because, when we got him from the Humane Society, he appeared to be a cross between a Schnauzer and a Poodle; but we later discovered he's a Portuguese Water Dog, a rare breed.)

In the evening, I do a phone interview on KABC with my friend Larry Elder, the popular Los Angeles radio host. We talk about the press release we sent out this week on the Microsoft case — in which I accepted Assistant Attorney General Joel Klein's bravura challenge to debate any "libertarian" on the question of whether the anti-trust suit will help competition. We also go over many other issues — and, as always, there's one caller who is certain that government is the answer to every question — and who won't consider any other possibility.

Wednesday, April 19, 2000 — Nashville

My first interview is at 10am with John Duane and Chris Kelly at KIDO in Boise, Idaho. During the 45-minute discussion, John says that Libertarian items are very intriguing, and in fact he confesses that he voted for me in 1996 — to which Chris says that she too voted for me. Two of the callers bring up the wasted vote issue. One says he's voted Republican in the past, "But if you keep on talking as you are, I'll vote Libertarian." Another keeps saying it does no good if you don't win. I try to point out that he isn't winning either, since the people he votes for don't give him what he wants, but it doesn't win him over — at least not today.

Then I'm on for an hour with Glenn Mitchell at KERA-FM, the NPR station in Dallas. He provides a very nice introduction, giving an accurate summary of libertarian ideas. Throughout the conversation, he is non-committal, very calm and pleasant — and so are all the callers. Some of them support me, others are opposed, but all are polite and none are hostile. Glenn's demeanor must rub off on his listeners.

To one caller who says it's a pipe dream to think that churches and other agencies will help those in need, I say it's a pipe dream to think that government agencies are providing much help. But more important, "I want you to have control over your own life. I want you to be in a position to be able to help anyone you think is in need. And if you don't want to help anyone, that's okay, too. You don't need to feel guilty — your taxes aren't really providing much help either."

My next interview is an hour with Jim Dexter, the LP chair of Utah. He has his own talk show on KTKK in Salt Lake City. Most of the callers want me to change my views on something — oppose free trade or support a national sales tax. However, an elderly, disabled woman calls who says she is getting by on very little. She says she supports what I'm doing because she wants her children and grandchildren to live in a freer country than she has. I mention that this demonstrates that we shouldn't write off people who pay no taxes or who are getting government services — and especially not the elderly. Most of them would be delighted to see their children and grandchildren go through life without the awful tax burden they've had to face.

Then it's a few minutes on the phone with Kelly Beaucar of ConservativeHQ.com. she's already written about me at least twice, but now wants my opinion on the controversy over the Republican Congress' desire to appoint Bradley Smith to the Federal Election Commission. Smith supports doing away with campaign contribution and spending limits (although he wants to retain reporting). She says that some of the Democrats have been comparing him to Slobodan Milosevic or David Duke. I say that this is typical when someone in government has such enormous power: the stakes are so high that people will go to any lengths to make sure that power is controlled by a political ally. The answer, of course, is to take that power away from the politicians. She includes some of my quotes in the article that appears the following day.

Thursday, April 20, 2000 — Nashville

In the evening I appear on the David Gold show on KGNW in Dallas. It is a taping, to be aired tomorrow night — and Russ Verney, former Executive Director of the Reform Party, is also a guest. The relationship between Verney and me is cordial, and we each point out that the parties have cooperated frequently to strike down ballot-access hurdles and on other procedural problems.

It is, as sometimes happens, an interview in which several of the topics don't lend themselves to clear-cut libertarian positions — in this case, the Elian Gonzales matter and the South Carolina Confederate flag issue. In the latter case, I point out that this is an issue typical of politicians in which everyone gets riled up over something that is merely symbolic. It isn't going to change anyone's life significantly whether the flag stays up or is taken down, whether or not the Ten Commandments are posted in government schools, whether or not there's a flag-burning amendment. But politicians seize on these issues because it gives them a way of playing to their constituents without actually doing anything for them.

Friday, April 21, 2000 — Nashville

My only interview today is with Michael Dresser on KFAR, the ABC radio station in Fairbanks, Alaska. My impression is that Michael and his listeners are very conservative Republicans. Today I feel very articulate — and very intense. I really pour it on regarding what the politicians are doing to you and the country.

Michael asks whether I believe that Clinton's ability to flout the law and get away with it has set a bad precedent for the future. I say that the precedents were set long before Clinton — with Presidents violating the Constitution, specifically the Bill of Rights, and getting away with it. I cite the example of Clinton being able to bomb The Sudan and Afghanistan at his own whim, since Ronald Reagan was able to do so when he bombed Libya and invaded Grenada. We have reached the point that politicians can do anything they want, since there is no longer an enforceable Constitution to restrain them.

Over and over in the conversation, I come back to the point that only a strong-willed President — someone determined to restore liberty to America — will stand up to Congress and the Supreme Court. A President whose sole purpose is to reduce government to its constitutional functions can do so much to change the course of history. But we won't get that kind of President with Al Gore, George W. Bush, or Pat Buchanan.

Only when we have a Libertarian President will the debate change from how fast government should grow — to how fast and how far government should be reduced.

Every one of the half-dozen callers is positive and supportive.

Monday, April 24, 2000 — Nashville

Good news! Today the Portland Oregonian releases a state-wide poll, showing the following preferences among Oregon voters:

George W. Bush, Republican, 40%
Albert J. Gore, Democrat, 27%
Ralph Nader, Green, 7%
Harry Browne, Libertarian, 2%
Patrick Buchanan, Reform, 2%

(Complete information is available at the newspaper's website: http://www.oregonlive.com/news/index.ssf?/news/oregonian/00/04/lc_21prezp24.frame#poll)

This is good news on two counts. First, a polling company is including us in the question posed — something that didn't happen in 1996 unless we commissioned the poll. Second, we're already showing up in the results, and in a state where I've had almost no localized coverage at all — no press interviews and just one radio interview on a Portland station.

Votes for me had to come from some combination of (1) national coverage of the campaign (national TV appearances like Fox News TV or national radio shows), (2) the work of our volunteer organization, and (3) growing positive name recognition for the word Libertarian.

And then another piece of good news. The Zogby poll releases the results of an April 20 national presidential poll. I'm included for the first time:

Bush, Republican, 42.5%
Gore, Democrat, 36.0%
Buchanan, Reform, 4.4%
Nader, Green, 4.0%
Browne, Libertarian, 0.8%
Hagelin, Natural Law, 0.2%
No answer, 12.1%

The third parties combined receive 9.4% of the 87.9% who had a preference. This is larger than the margin of difference between Bush and Gore. That will encourage the polling companies to continue listing the main third-party candidates, as their votes may have an impact on the outcome of the election. (Details of the Zogby Poll are at: http://www.zogby.com/features/featuredtables.dbm?ID=8.)

My first interview today is for an hour starting at 9am with Michael Graham on WSC in Charleston, South Carolina. Not surprisingly, he wants my opinion on the Gonzales kidnapping. I say the kidnapping may have been a good thing, because it showed people the naked power of the government, but without anyone getting hurt physically. There is no question that the kidnapping was unconstitutional, unwarranted, and not even in keeping with the current court order.

Immediately afterward I'm on for an hour with Robby Noel on the American Freedom Network — a handful of stations around the country. Again, the Gonzales case. But we also cover the Drug War and several other issues. It sounds as though his audience is made up of right-wing, conspiracy-oriented populists. But it seems that everything I say sets well with the host, and all the callers are supportive. It's easy to handle the question of possible conspiracies just by pointing out that reducing government is the answer — taking the power away from those who want to use it to enslave you. At the conclusion of the interview, the producer asks me to arrange for another interview on the show.

Tuesday, April 25, 2000 — Nashville

I have one interview today. It is with Jeff Miller, the Washington correspondent for the Allentown (PA) Morning Call. He is very friendly, and admits he doesn't know much about Libertarians. We talk for 30-40 minutes. He says he thinks every candidate should be heard, but he appreciates the fact that I don't demand that the press cover us when we might not have an impact on the outcome of the election.

He asks whether there aren't some things a nation's people should do collectively — such as the programs by which Roosevelt pulled us out of the depression. I point out that the country was still in poor shape going into World War II, and the idea that the New Deal rescued America from the depression is a convenient myth of history.

More important, I mention that the idea of a nation's people acting collectively really means the politicians are deciding how all of us are supposed to act. Why is it necessary to force people to go along with a policy or program they don't approve of? I want to return control of your life to you, not to some mythical "collective" — which really means to whomever has the most political influence.

Wednesday, April 26, 2000 — Nashville

I receive some emails asking why I haven't spoken out on the Elian Gonzales kidnapping.

This is the not the kind of issue on which we're likely to get much publicity, because right now so many people are saying so many things. We would be lost in the babble of voices. The best kind of issue is one wherein we are standing alone while other political parties issue mild statements or ignore the issue entirely — while the average person is affected directly and he knows it. The intrusive census forms were a good example of that; the LP generated a good deal of positive publicity by standing up for privacy.

We aren't issuing regular press releases now. However, shortly we will begin a steady stream of press releases, op-ed articles, and talking points for letters to editors to be distributed to our volunteers.

Thursday, April 27, 2000 — Nashville

Only one interview today. It is an hour in the evening with Stan Solomon, broadcasting from WZL in Indianapolis, with coverage on several satellite stations, short wave, and the Internet. I was on once with him in the last campaign and once in 1998. He is very supportive of my positions, but he worries that a Libertarian vote will get Al Gore elected and perpetuate what he believes is the most immoral administration in history.

I point out that the Clinton administration has been good for freedom in one respect: the use of raw power has been very visible — with incidents like Waco and the Gonzales kidnapping. DEA agents were busting down the doors during the Reagan and Bush administrations, but that went largely unnoticed. Clinton has helped many people realize that government is brute force.

I'm feeling very articulate this evening. It makes me wish I'd had several interviews. But then I always want more. Just call me Oliver Twist.

Friday, April 28, 2000 — Charleston, South Carolina

I fly to Charleston for the South Carolina LP convention. However, my flight is delayed and I arrive in Charleston just a little while before time to speak. Waiting for me is Schuyler R. Kropf, a reporter with the Charleston Post and Courier. We have a 15-minute conversation — mostly about the difficulties of running as a third-party candidate.

Don Gorman and I each give 20-minute speeches, followed by a joint question period. Toward the end of that, a gentleman in the audience rises to note that, in almost an hour, neither of us has had anything negative to say about the other. Don points out that all the presidential candidates pledged during the California debate in February that we would emphasize the positive — what we want to achieve, not what one's opponents have done wrong.

Saturday, April 29, 2000 - Yonkers, New York

I arise at 5am (ugh!) to catch a plane to LaGuardia airport. I check into a hotel by the airport, and later catch a taxi to the New York LP convention in Yonkers. (The hotel in Yonkers was sold out at the time the reservation was made.)

I arrive in time to hear an excellent speech by Steve Landsburg, a columnist for Slate.com (Microsoft's online magazine). He explains that children learn to follow rules in playing with each other that are diametrically opposite to the subsidies, special privileges, and force that adults employ through government.

I'm surprised to find that Reginald Jones is there to speak. He is one of many new friends I acquired during the last campaign. He is a radio personality who also gives speeches at colleges and other venues around the country. Being a black man, his speech "Freedom is the Answer to Racism" carries special weight. He relates the history of the entrepreneurial endeavors of blacks in the South Bronx, and goes on to point out how government has kept blacks from using their own talents and skills to climb up the economic ladder — effectively making them dependent on government handouts. And he notes how reluctant the black "leaders" are to come to the aid of any black individual or group who is held back by government. Afterward, Steve Dasbach tells me that he's arranged for Reginald to speak at the national convention in June. Look for his speech; you'll enjoy it.

During the banquet I give my speech, and I'm followed by John Clifton, the Libertarian candidate running against Rudolf Giuliani and Hillary Clinton.

Sunday, April 30, 2000 — New York

Curses! My wake-up call doesn't come through, and I've set the clock radio incorrectly. I've missed my plane to Cincinnati, and thus my connection to Nashville. I hurry over to the airport, only to discover that the Cincinnati flight is just leaving — two hours late. But I will have missed my Nashville connection, so Delta reschedules me through Atlanta.

I finally arrive home, about three hours late, and Pamela and I take the rest of the day off.

Monday, May 1, 2000 - Nashville

Because of the financial crunch last week, our P.R. firm has no interviews scheduled for the first few days of this week. This gives me a chance to catch up on a number of writing chores — composing material for the website, writing op-ed articles, doing fund-raising, and answering candidate surveys from various groups.

Tuesday, May 2, 2000 — Nashville

F. Aaron Smith of Sonoma, California, lets us know that our 30-minute TV show, The Great Libertarian Offer will be shown on the Santa Rosa cable channel (72) four times — May 8, 10, 15, and 17. More details can be obtained from Mr. Smith at (707) 541-0615. You also can contact him to help arrange more showings.

Wednesday, May 3 — Nashville

I have one interview this evening — with Gary Nolan, syndicated on about 45 radio stations. Gary joined the LP a couple of years back and does an excellent job covering libertarian issues. The conversation goes well. There are no phone-ins.

Thursday, May 4 — Nashville

The interviews pick up again. The first today is at noon. It is with news reporter Bruce Ferrell at the North Carolina News Network in Raleigh. He tapes some soundbites from me, to be played during the day on Friday and Saturday on the network's 83 affiliate stations. His questions are fast-paced, jumping from one topic to another, but I'm able to keep up with him.

Then it's a similar interview with Dave James at WBUS in Columbus, Ohio. He tapes about 15 minutes worth of material, for use during news broadcasts. We cover a great many issues. For a change, a reporter isn't so interested in the "Why are you doing this when you know you can't win?" angle. I plug the Ohio LP convention, where I'll be speaking on Sunday.

The last interview is an hour with Jerry Agar on WPTF in Raleigh. I have the opportunity to plug the North Carolina LP convention, at which I'll be speaking Saturday morning. We cover a great many topics. Most of the callers are supportive.

Tomorrow morning I'll be off to North Carolina for the LP convention.

Friday, May 5, 2000 — Raleigh, North Carolina

I arrive in Raleigh for the state LP convention. Candi Copas, the convention organizer, walks me to the Capital Building, a few blocks away, where a number of Libertarians have gathered to meet the public. Unfortunately, there aren't too many non-libertarian passers-by, but we talk to those who do come up the walk to the Capital.

I have an interview with Barry Smith, a reporter for the Freedom Newspapers. I don't realize at first that this is the Freedom Newspapers chain that owns the Orange County (CA) Register and a number of other dailies around the country — some of the most libertarian daily newspapers in America. The reporter asks questions about the issues, which is a refreshing change.

Saturday, May 6, 2000 — Raleigh & Columbus

As with so many states, the attendance at the North Carolina convention is about twice what it was the last time I was here.

I meet Matthew Eisley of the Raleigh News & Observer. He tells me that another reporter will take his place at the convention shortly, and that she'll interview me after my speech. As it turns out, however, she says she got enough material from the speech for the article she's writing on the convention.

I catch a plane for Columbus for the Ohio LP convention. The evening banquet speaker is Gary Nolan, a talk-show host on the Radio America network, who joined the LP a couple of years ago. He is traveling at his own expense to LP conventions in the eastern U.S., bringing cheer to Libertarians. He gives an entertaining and informative speech on the difference between Libertarians and the old parties.

Sunday, May 7, 2000 — Columbus, Ohio

In the morning, I meet Steve Stephens, a columnist for the Columbus Dispatch and a Libertarian Party member. He stays for the 3-way presentations and question period for Barry Hess, Don Gorman, and me.

Monday, May 8, 2000 — Nashville

Returning home from Columbus, I have one show before taking the rest of the day off with Pamela. It is a 40-minute interview on "Seniors on the Move" with Bart Carafella and Fern Karhu on WLUX in Farmingdale, New York. The first 20 minutes or so are spent talking about my Social Security proposal to sell off government assets to finance the transfer of seniors from vulnerable Social Security accounts to secure private accounts that the politicians can't touch. When I first present it, Bart says, "I'm speechless; this makes so much sense." Fern agrees with him.

Later, we get into the Drug War and gun ownership — and the lovefest breaks down a bit. They are very polite and sincerely interested in knowing my positions. But they find it hard to imagine ending the Drug War, even though they acknowledge that it's a failure. And with guns, I point out that just one innocent person with access to a gun at Columbine High School would have saved the lives of several children, but it doesn't resonate. However, they are glad to have me on the show and say they want me to come back.

Tuesday, May 9, 2000 — Nashville

My one interview today is with Jim Garrity of Intellectual Capital, an Internet political publication (www.intellectualcapital.com). He tapes about 20 minutes of questions and answers — which will appear on the website as an audio file, with a written transcript as well.

He asks the usual questions about the challenges facing a 3rd-party candidate — ballot access, coverage, and so on. I point out that the party has slowly but surely grown to a point where we are approaching critical mass — the stage where the growth will explode. The LP is better off for the slow, steady growth we've enjoyed — as opposed to sudden fame from a celebrity or billionaire — because it means the party has an ideologically consistent program and a strong, committed base.

Although he wants to talk mostly about procedure, I'm able to work the campaign themes into the conversation several times.

(As it turns out, the article appears on May 11 and is about several 3rd party candidates — providing little that would excite people about my candidacy. It is at http://www.intellectualcapital.com/issues/issue373/item9295.asp)

Wednesday, May 10, 2000 — Nashville

No interviews today. So it's a chance to do some writing, handle other paperwork, and make some fund-raising calls. I go over the TV ads we'll be filming in ten days. And I write an article on the gun issue ("For Safety Sake, Repeal All the Gun Laws").

In the 1996 campaign, I spoke at several gun rights events. Naturally, my 2nd-amendment message was well received, but I doubt that it led to many votes. It was too easy for a gun rights activist to believe that Robert Dole would be at least a little less eager than President Clinton to sign new gun-control legislation — even if the eventual result would be more restrictive gun laws. The same is true in 2000. This has made it difficult for us to rally the gun rights people to our side.

But now the NRA has handed us a golden opportunity. They pushing the idea that, instead of enacting new gun laws, the government should do more to enforce the 20,000 federal gun laws and regulations now on the books. And many Republican politicians have echoed this approach.

But why should we want the government to enforce bad laws more energetically? Many of those laws were opposed by the NRA and the Republicans when first proposed. It is hypocritical to imply now that they are worthwhile. And so far it appears that gun rights activists around the country are not responding favorably to the idea.

So my article takes the approach that, for safety's sake, we must repeal the 20,000 federal gun laws and regulations now on the books — not enforce them. These laws put innocent citizens at a disadvantage to the violent criminals who will aren't affected by the laws. Criminals don't register their guns; only law-abiding citizens do. Criminals don't acquire their guns in ways that require background checks and waiting periods; only innocent citizens do — citizens who in some cases need a gun immediately for defense against a stalker or to undertake a job in a dangerous situation.

No gun law of any kind makes an innocent citizen safer. But almost every such law either puts him at a disadvantage to violent criminals or a gratuitous invasion of the citizen's privacy.

By calling for the repeal of the gun laws, we separate ourselves clearly from the Republican approach to gun control. We offer something meaningful to gun rights enthusiasts — something that Republican politicians will never have the courage to advocate. Voting Libertarian offers the only route by which they can make their sentiments known clearly and unequivocally.

(The article is on my website at HarryBrowne.org; click on "Discover Harry Browne's stand on the issues," and then "Gun control." The article was also published by CNSnews.com, and appears at http://www.cnsnews.com/ViewOpinion.asp?Page=\Opinion\archive\OPI20000515a.html.)

Thursday, May 11, 2000 — Nashville

Three interviews today — all in areas where I'll be speaking over the weekend.

The first is with Sandra Swain, a reporter for KAST in Portland, Oregon. She tapes about ten minutes of soundbites from me, of which a few minutes will run on the station's news broadcasts. A similar interview is with Eric Berman on WIBC in Indianapolis, who tapes about 15 minutes — also to extract some soundbites. In both cases, I'm able to get onto the issues, and I hope those come across in whatever material is used.

The last interview is with Scott Milford of the Wisconsin State Journal in Madison, Wisconsin. He is very friendly, and we discuss my ideas on what Libertarians will have to achieve in order to make a breakthrough to major-party status. He says he will try to file the story with the Wisconsin AP but isn't sure whether it will be used statewide.

A fourth scheduled interview was scheduled with The Capitol Times in Madison, but the reporter and I never connect by phone — as sometimes happens.

Friday, May 12, 2000 — Nashville

I have three interviews today — all aimed at publicizing this weekend's Wisconsin LP convention, where I'll be appearing.

The first is with Mike Clish on WFAW in Fort Adkinson, Wisconsin. It is only about 10 minutes. He appears quite skeptical at first, but at the end he says, "I wish we had more time; you're a very interesting fella'."

The next interview is an hour with Dave Anthony on WIBA in Madison. He is an excellent interviewer — asking good questions, making no long speeches (I wish I could say the same for myself), and encouraging the callers. The questions from listeners are all very relevant, giving me an opportunity to concentrate on the red meat of the campaign.

One caller says he's a farmer and is concerned about the government's role in agriculture. I assume he means he doesn't want an end to farm subsidies. So I try to show him how much freer he'll be without price subjects, crop allocations, and dictation from Washington. But it turns out he isn't trying to stay on the government dole, he's more concerned that we have a free trade policy that will permit him to sell his produce worldwide. It reminds me that I should never assume the worst intentions from a question.

The final interview is about 15 minutes, taped by Bob Ridden on WTMJ in Milwaukee for broadcast during the day. As with the soundbite requests of yesterday, I can only hope he'll use the best parts of the interview.

In the evening, Pamela takes me to the Nashville airport for my flight to Milwaukee. I find that the flight has been cancelled, however. After trying vainly to find another way to get to Milwaukee tonight, I book an early-morning flight. Thanks to the existence of cell phones in the car and in my pocket, I'm able to reach Pamela before she's too far from the airport, and she comes back to pick me up and take me home for the night.

Saturday, May 13, 2000 — Milwaukee & Indianapolis

Traveling is less eventful today. I make it to Milwaukee without problems, and arrive just in time for my speech. Don Gorman and I each talk for about 20 minutes, and then there's a 20-minute joint question session. And then he and I immediately head for the airport to fly to Indianapolis. In all, I'm in Milwaukee for only about 2-1/2 hours from arrival to takeoff. I regret that I don't have time to meet people and find out much about the state of the party in Wisconsin.

We arrive in Indianapolis with a more leisurely schedule at hand. At the dinner banquet, Don, Barry Hess, and I each give a 20-minute talk, and then there's a joint question period.

After the banquet, I have the opportunity to get caught up with local Libertarians. As long as I've been in the LP, Indiana has been one of the most successful state parties. Thanks to the efforts of people like Joe Hauptmann, Barbara Bourland, Steve Dasbach, Sarah Cotham, Ken Bisson, and many, many others, the party has been a torrent of activity. The state hopes to run 200 candidates this year. And Jeff Adkins tells me that a group of people have already raised half the money necessary to run our 30-minute TV show on a group of stations in Kentucky and Indiana.

Sunday, May 14, 2000 — Indianapolis & Portland

Up at 5am to catch a plane to Portland, Oregon. Many people have been nice enough to tell me how much they appreciate the effort involved in running for President. But, really, most of what I do is exciting, and I wouldn't miss it for the world. The only "sacrifice" I have to make is in getting up early in the morning.

My routine has always been to arise around 1pm or so, work through the evening, and go to bed around 5am. For some reason, the political world doesn't seem to want to accommodate itself to that schedule. So too often I have to haul myself out of bed at some unholy hour — to do a radio interview or catch a plane. But if that's the worst thing I have to face, I have a very fortunate life.

However, I should mention that campaigning contains one other problem — bad eating habits. At home, my usual routine is to have my first meal at 6pm, dinner with Pamela. When I quit working around 3am, I fix myself a sandwich and a glass of wine and relax until going to bed around 5am. Although we don't have a strict regimen, we use a lot of "Lite" foods like fat-free mayonnaise or low-fat margarine. As a result, my weight normally remains stable.

But when I travel, everything changes. I find myself eating more meals — including hot dogs in airports or richer food at banquets. During the 1996 campaign, I had to let out the waistlines of my suit trousers, and I gained a few pounds that I still have with me. And this time around, my waistline is threatening to expand still further.

But enough about sleeping and eating (as though there can ever be enough about two such attractive subjects).

Don Gorman and I fly together to Portland, with a plane change in Denver. We're met at the Portland airport by David Hintz and David Robinson, who drive us to McMinnville, about 90 minutes away, for the state LP convention.

What a change from when I was here in 1995. At that time, the party was embroiled in internal conflict; only a few people showed up for the convention; and by the time the floor fights were over, even fewer had the energy to stick around for my speech, which began a few hours late. Today, the Oregon party is alive and thriving. About 70 people are on hand to hear Toni Nathan (the 1972 LP Vice-presidential candidate), Don Gorman, and me speak. The party has won a number of local elections and is running professional races for many seats this year.

Afterward, Richard Burke, the 1998 gubernatorial candidate, drives me back to Portland. In the evening, I do a bit of fund-raising.

Monday, May 15, 2000 — Portland & Nashville

After my complaining about early rising in yesterday's journal, today I get to sleep in until about 10:30. I have lunch with Adam Meyer, the state chair, and his wife Chris at a lovely German restaurant near the airport. Although my flight leaves Portland about an hour late, I'm able to make my Nashville flight from Denver — just barely.

I arrive in Nashville at 11:30pm, Pamela picks me up and we head for home.

I check my e-mail and find that Don Feder of the Boston Herald has released his article resulting from our interview (see Campaign Journal #10 for April 14). After the interview we talked once on the telephone and went over several issues. He seemed to be sincerely trying to get my positions straight. He had even read the Libertarian Party platform.

His article, however, is a complete hatchet job — as indicated by its title, "Goofy May Be a Libertarian" (a play on the fact that we're holding the LP national convention near Disneyland). All the nuances and subtleties of my positions are ignored as he tries to make my positions look as ridiculous as possible, using words like "loony," "impractical," and "delusional" (the article is at http://www.bostonherald.com/news/columnists/don05152000.htm).

For example, he says the LP's "platform calls for ‘the elimination of all restrictions on immigration.' If 50 million Mexicans chose to move to California and Texas, resulting in chaos and the obliteration of national identity, why should that concern Libertarians? If these new Americans (then constituting a majority in the states where they settle) wanted to secede and reunite the territory with Mexico, presumably Libertarians would not stand in their way."

Of course, it doesn't occur to him that 50 million Mexicans fleeing Mexico for the land of opportunity aren't about to vote to become part of Mexico again. Talk about loony.

How do I feel about such things? (That's a rhetorical question; you don't have to answer.)

Of course, I much prefer to see positive articles. But I've had too much experience with journalists to take negative articles seriously or personally. During the 1970s my iconoclastic views toward the economy and investing brought out the worst in some reporters — as their dislike and determination to ridicule me blinded them to the real flaws in my presentation and caused them to resort to inventing mistakes and distorting what I said. By the end of the 1970s I had learned to live with the ridicule. (I must admit that gold rising to $800 and silver to $50 — vindicating my investment advice — helped make the criticism easier to handle.)

I see Feder's article as a desperate attempt to keep people from voting Libertarian this year — so that George W. Bush can win the White House and maintain the Republican tradition of bigger, more expensive, and more intrusive government. So I don't take it personally; I know my ideas aren't goofy, and I know how well my ideas are received when people hear them directly from me.

Thus the article also reminds us why radio and television appearances are far more valuable than press coverage. In interviews, I get to tell the story my way — not hope that our best ideas will somehow filter through the reporter's prejudices and get to the reader.

We will continue to grow and prosper so long as we keep telling people directly that we want them to be free — free to live their lives as they see fit, not as George Bush or Al Gore thinks is best for them — free to raise their children by their own values, not the values of the politicians and bureaucrats — free to keep every dollar they earn, to spend it, save it, give it away as they see fit.

Tuesday, May 16, 2000 — Nashville

Just one interview today. It is an hour with Don Roberts at WDAY in Fargo, North Dakota. It turns out that Don is a member of the LP and will be at the national convention in Anaheim. He begins the broadcast by saying that he voted for me in 1996 and expects to do so again this year. Needless to say, the entire interview is very friendly, and we get some good calls. Martin Riske, a local Congressional candidate, is in the studio with Don and will be on the air during the next hour.

Don says that he recently attended the Minnesota state convention at the Mystic Lake Casino Hotel near Minneapolis. While there, he saw our campaign video. After watching it, he went into the casino and asked a number of people at random what their favorite government programs are. As in the video, hardly anyone could think of a government program he liked. Finally, a couple of people mentioned food stamps. (I wonder if the slot machines accepted food stamps.)

Incidentally, we should have mentioned in the video that the responses to the street interviews were all representative of the overall responses we received to the questions asked. We used the ones that were the funniest, were concise, had the best rhythm, and fit the format. But we got virtually the same responses from about 80% of all the people we interviewed.

Wednesday, May 17, 2000 — Nashville

I have two interviews today — both to promote the Michigan LP convention this weekend.

The first today is at 7:20am, with Dave Barber on WFDF in Flint, Michigan. As the interview progresses, it becomes apparent that he's a liberal. He finds my ideas to be new and intriguing. And everytime we seem to be headed into trouble, we find some kind of agreement. He's strongly pro-union and asks what I think the federal government should do about labor relations. I tell him the government should stay entirely out of the area, and let people work out their own agreements voluntarily — without force being imposed from above. He seems to find this to be sensible, but asks what should be done when an employer hires goons to beat up union members. I say that now you're talking about violence — which should be treated as such by local law enforcement (not a federal agency).

He suggests that without unions being aided by the government, employers could pay starvation wages. I ask whether he belongs to a union. He says no. I ask, "Is your salary above the minimum wage?" He says he receives well above the minimum wage. I ask, "If employers could pay whatever they want, why doesn't your employer pay you just the minimum wage? It's because you're worth more than the minimum wage, and your employer knows you'll take a job elsewhere if you don't get what you're worth here. It's the same for any employee in any job. That's why so few people receive only the minimum wage."

We get along quite well. Only in the final segment does the situation get tense when we get into guns. I've made the point several times during the show that people should be free to associate with whomever they want and not be forced to associate with those they don't like (for whatever reason). When he says he's very nervous around people with guns, I say, "Then don't associate with people who have guns. I, too, have little use for guns, but I'm glad I live in a neighborhood that probably includes many gun-owners. That way potential intruders are discouraged from entering any home in this area."

The interview was scheduled for 20 minutes, but it lasts 1-1/2 hours, and we get along very well. A number of callers who don't seem to be libertarians show great interest and want to know more.

My second interview of the day is with Ron Dzwonkowski of the Detroit Free Press. He is well familiar with Tim O'Brien, Barb Goushaw, and other outstanding Michigan Libertarians — having interviewed them in the past. Although I doubt that he shares our ideas, he is very friendly and sympathetic.

I learn that the latest nationwide Zogby poll (as of May 15) has me at 0.7% nationally (down from 0.8% on April 20), with Pat Buchanan falling to 2.1% from 4.4% and Ralph Nader rising to 4.4% from 4.0%. (Bush leads Gore, 42.4% to 38.8%.) It appears that, for the time being, Zogby will run this broadened poll once a month. The 3rd-party candidates combined continue to have far more support than the difference between Gore and Bush, making it useful for the pollsters to determine how well each of the 3rd-party candidates is doing. (The details are at http://www.zogby.com/features/featuredtables.dbm?ID=8.) I'm hoping our 1-minute TV ads, scheduled to begin in June, will start boosting our poll numbers.

An email arrives from Larry Stafford, a Volunteer Coordinator in Illinois, telling us about Jeremiah Beck, a talk host in Rockford. Jeremiah has seen our campaign video and today he mentioned it on the air — and he read an episode of the Campaign Journal and the article "For Safety Sake, Repeal the Gun Laws." It helps considerably to leverage the campaign if I'm talked about favorably when I'm not present.

Thursday, May 18, 2000 — Nashville

Today WorldNetDaily, the online publication (www.worldnetdaily.com), is running my article, "For Safety Sake, Repeal the Gun Laws" today. I understand that WorldNetDaily gets a million or so hits every day.

I notice that Issues2000 (http://issues2000.org) has an extremely informative website covering issues and candidates. They have an extensive compilation of my views on various issues — culled from a number of sources, including quotes from Why Government Doesn't Work. They have similar coverage for the leading candidate of each of the other parties. There also are forums in which visitors can discuss each candidate.

My first interview is at 7am with Ben Merens on 14 stations of Wisconsin Public Radio. He is scrupulously neutral and quite friendly. The one-hour interview contains too much about the horse race, but I manage to cover a number of the issues — especially with the callers.

The next interview is with David Newman on WJR in Detroit, to promote this weekend's Michigan LP convention. I learn later that this is one of the biggest talk shows in the Detroit area.

The interview is scheduled for 20 minutes, but the producer tells me off the air that they're inundated with callers — and he asks me to stay for a full hour, which I do.

Newman says the Libertarian message as I present it seems very appealing, but Americans haven't accepted it — indicating that they prefer dependence on government to self-government. I say that most Americans have heard very little of our message, and that we have to keep growing to acquire the resources and talent to get the message to people who will never tune in to C-SPAN, talk shows, or anything that smacks of politics. And I also point out that Americans have never been given a clear-cut choice (that they're aware of) between self-control and dependence on government — only between different shades of government growth.

That's why the Great Libertarian Offer is important — because it provides a well-defined choice: Would you give up your favorite federal programs if it meant you'd never have to pay income tax again? And your children would never have to pay income tax. And your grandchildren could go through life without the terrible burden of taxation you've had to face.

Although Newman seems to be a conservative, he joins me enthusiastically when I criticize the Drug War.

In the evening I have a one-hour interview with Stan Solomon on WZLW in Indianapolis. He is a Christian conservative. With him in the studio is Michael Gratison, an officer in the local ACLU, whom Solomon sometimes has on as a foil for his views. I find that I'm able to steer the conversation sometimes to issues that all three of us agree on — such as the futility of foreign adventures, the destructiveness of the insane War on Drugs, and the need to treat the Constitution seriously.

My last interview of the day is with "Lionel" whose new show is now on 21 stations — many of them in major cities (his station list is at http://lionelonline.com/affiliates.htm). He is an LP member, a very funny fellow, and a great advocate for liberty. He begins by saying, "I have endorsed Harry Browne for President," and then proceeds to ask his questions. We get some calls, which help to answer potential objections. The interview lasts only about 25 minutes, but I believe it does a lot of good.

On May 9 I was interviewed by Jim Garrity of Intellectual Capital, an Internet political publication. He taped about 20 minutes of questions and answers. The written interview led to an article on the publication's site on May 11 (http://www.intellectualcapital.com/issues/issue373/item9295.asp), which was mostly about 3rd-party candidates in general, with little about Libertarians or me in particular.

Today the audio file appears on the web (at www.policy.com/rafiles/PC/Browne-000515.ram). Not one of my best interviews, but it will do. He asked a lot of questions about the challenges facing a 3rd-party candidate — ballot access, press coverage, and so on. But I was able to work the campaign themes into the conversation several times.

Friday, May 19, 2000 — Nashville

Today we begin transmitting a series of press releases. These releases will be faxed to radio, TV, and print media — as well as emailed to supporters via LibertyWire and posted on our website. Soon we will add a vast email transmission to organizations and writers. Today's release was entitled "The Non-Sense of the Senate" — chiding the U.S. Senate for passing non-binding "sense of the Senate" resolutions that commended the Million Mom March and advocated tightening the screws on gun owners.

Saturday, May 20, 2000 — Ann Arbor, Michigan

I fly to Detroit for the Michigan LP convention. I'm picked up at the airport and driven to Ann Arbor by Al Titran, our wonderful Volunteer Coordinator for Michigan.

There are about 180 people at the convention — a sign of another great state party continuing to grow. So many people have contributed to the growth and strength of the Michigan LP — people like Ben Bachrach, Diane Barnes, Mike Brinkman, Fred Collins, Jon Coon, Barbara Goushaw, David Littmann, Mike Miller, Tim O'Brien, Sheldon and Irving Rose, Emily Salvette, Bill Shotey, Stacy Van Oast, and many, many others.

Along with all these trail-blazers are a host of new people in the party. It is a pleasure to meet them, and it's gratifying to learn that many of them came into the party because of the last presidential campaign or by reading Why Government Doesn't Work.

At the evening banquet, Don Gorman, Barry Hess, and I answer questions in a forum for presidential candidates. One of the questions leads to a discussion of how important money is to the campaign. It's easy to believe that you can operate a national campaign solely with volunteers and with very little money. But that's true only if you have no ambition to obtain millions of votes.

Even 10,000 volunteers would have to obtain 100 votes apiece to get a million votes total. We will reach mass audiences who can put us over the million mark only through radio and TV advertising, and that costs money. It costs money to produce the ads (see May 22 below), and it costs money to air them.

In addition, it costs money to have the best public relations people get me on important radio and TV shows that can reach hundreds of thousands of people at one time. It costs money to book speeches in important venues and travel to them. It costs money to produce persuasive selling tools like our 30-minute videocassette (which will continue to sell Libertarian ideas after this campaign is over). It costs money to coordinate the activities of our 4,500 volunteers.

We have raised and spent $1,350,000 so far. We will continue to raise money as fast as we can — and we'll spend it as though there's no tomorrow, because in fact there is no tomorrow. The money spent so far has brought us hundreds of interviews, articles, and mentions in the press, positions in one national and one state-wide poll, strong finishes in many Internet polls, nine national TV appearances, radio interviews heard by millions of listeners, articles by me published in newspapers around the country and on the Internet, 16 showings of our 30-minute video on commercial TV stations and many showings on cable-access channels, four new 1-minute TV ads that will begin airing next month, and much more. In short, the money has bought us visibility among the non-Libertarian public.

But we're a long way from where we want to be. By the end of this campaign, I want three things: (1) So much visibility that any voter seeing, say, four candidates for state representative on his ballot, and not recognizing a single name, will know that the Libertarian candidate is the one for smaller government; (2) To have elevated name recognition for the Libertarian label to the point that everyone in America knows that the Libertarians are the ones who want each person to be free to run his own life; and (3) A vote total that takes us clearly and permanently out of the sub-million class, and makes us known nationally and locally as a force to be reckoned with. Achievement of these three goals will put us in a position where everyone will know we'll have an impact on future elections and will have to take the Libertarian Party seriously.

Achieving those goals will put us on the road to bring about a Libertarian America by the end of this decade.

Apparently, the Michigan LP is well aware of the need for money to achieve our goals. At the banquet, Greg Dirisian raises $10,000 for the Ballot Access Retention Committee, a program to assure that the presidential candidate gets a big enough vote total to retain the state party's ballot status. I want to do what I can to help all local parties, but it is inspiring to see a state party take the initiative — instead of waiting for someone else to rescue them.

Sunday, May 21, 2000 — Ann Arbor, Michigan

In the morning the two announced candidates for the LP vice-presidential nomination give short speeches. Ken Krawchuk of Pennsylvania and Art Olivier of California are both impressive candidates — either of whom would be a welcome addition to the national ticket.

Immediately after those speeches, Al and Rosemary Titran drive me to the airport for my flight to Los Angeles.

Monday, May 22, 2000 — Los Angeles

Today we are shooting four 1-minute television ads.

In the last campaign, we could afford to produce only a handful of TV ads in which I stood or sat in front of a blank background and delivered a message. Such ads might inspire the faithful or even tip a few marginal voters to our side. But to most people, they shout a single message: "Amateurs! Don't take them seriously!"

Today it's a far different story. These four ads have been carefully conceived to entice, provoke, shock, inform, persuade, and entertain. They are being created with the most professional production values. In the studio are 27 people at work — the director and his assistant, the producer, a sound engineer, teleprompter operator, set designer, makeup artist, wardrobe specialist, cameraman and assistant, lighting specialists, stagehands, and more. And every one of them is needed to produce the right result — the kind of result that lets the general public know we're here, we mean business, and we're going to be heard.

The crew begins at 6am and finishes up about 9pm. My job is relatively easy, and I'm actually needed for less than two hours. The rest of the time they are shooting intricate visual images that bring our ideas to life.

I think you're going to love these ads. We hope to put them on national cable networks during June, in which case they could do a lot to elevate my standing in the polls.

Tuesday, May 23, 2000 — Los Angeles

While Perry Willis, Kristin Overn, and Geoff Braun are reviewing stock film footage to be used in the new ads, I'm in my hotel room getting caught up on some overdue work on articles and campaign materials.

I find that my article "For Safety Sake, Repeal All the Gun Laws has been reprinted by The Libertarian Enterprise, an Internet publication published by L. Neil Smith and John Taylor.

I receive an encouraging e-mail from Nathan Spanier, who says,

I am a college student who learned about the
Libertarian party and Harry Browne from Bill Maher on
‘Politically Incorrect.' I, like many people, was
disenchanted with the two candidates I had to choose
from in this year's election. When I found your
website and read your positions on the issues, I was
thrilled to find that I agreed almost across the
board. The first thing I did was to e-mail a link to
your site to some of my friends, many of whom had no
interest in politics at all. The response of my
friends was the same as mine. Finally they had
someone they could vote for that shared their views
exactly. They also passed the link on to their
friends. The potential for a large number of votes
from young people like myself is enormous. One of the
best ways to reach them is through MTV. I'm sure your
campaign is well aware of this. My friends and I have
all contacted MTV to let them know we want Harry
Browne covered this summer/fall. Hope to see you there!

Thank you, Nathan, I do hope to see us there as well. It occurs to me that young voters are less likely to be touched by the "wasted-vote syndrome" that infects older people. Young people have had less time to build the deep-seated prejudices that cause older people to vote against Bill Clinton or Al Gore, or against the Religious Right, even if they don't care for the candidate they're supposedly voting for. If young people want what we offer, they're more likely to vote for us — even if they don't believe we can win — because they see a vote for us as a way to let the world know what they want.

I'm sure we'll be running ads on MTV before the campaign is over.

Wednesday, May 24 — Los Angeles & Nashville

To all newspapers who carried Don Feder's article "Goofy May Be a Libertarian" (see the Campaign Journal #13 for May 15), we transmit a rebuttal entitled, "Is It Loony to Want You to Be Free?" (The rebuttal is posted on our website at www.HarryBrowne.org.)

When responding to an attack, it is easy to be lured into defending yourself against every accusation and innuendo in the original article. But that's a mistake. That's playing on the opponent's home field — letting him set the agenda. The only reason for responding at all is to use the attack as justification for getting a platform to present the ideas you want to discuss.

For decades I've followed three principles when responding to someone's attack on me:

1. By the time a response is published, few people will remember much of what was said in the original. And unless a reader of the original was already well aware of you, the article probably didn't have any lasting impact. So there may be no need to defend yourself at all.

2. Thus the only reason to respond is to use the attack as an excuse for a fresh article — a way of gaining the opportunity to say something you want to say. The purpose of a response isn't to clear your name, but to get new people interested — in the case of the campaign, possibly even getting them to go the website or call us.

3. Since no one is likely to remember what the attacker said, it isn't necessary to refer to even the most damaging accusations made against you. Even if some reader was affected by them at time of publication, the particulars will have been forgotten by the time of the response. And if you make good points in your article, the reader may wonder why he had thought badly of you before.

So in the response to Feder's article that Jim Babka and I prepared, I mention only one of his specific accusations. He said, "The party's position on defense is equally loony. In a Browne presidency, no American soldier would set foot on foreign soil."

I dispense with this in two short paragraphs by pointing out that George Washington must have been "loony" to advise against entangling alliances.

The bulk of the article is then devoted to what Feder called our "crusade for a utopian agenda." I ask rhetorically what that agenda is and then say:

"It's very simple. I want you to be free — free to live your life as you think it should be lived, not as George W. Bush, Al Gore, or even I think you should.

"I want you to be free to raise your children by your values — not those of educational bureaucrats who see your children as little soldiers in their plans to remake the world. I want you to keep every dollar you earn — and spend it, save it, give it away as you think best — instead of being allowed to keep only what the politicians don't have plans for.

"I want to repeal the income tax by forcing the federal government to give up every activity not authorized in the Constitution — the same Constitution Mr. Feder pretends to revere. I want to unlock the door and let you out of Social Security — so you can plan a truly safe, secure, prosperous retirement for yourself.

"I want to repeal the thousands of gun laws that disarm you while leaving criminals free to terrorize you. I want to end the insane War on Drugs that has turned the drug business over to criminal gangs who compete with violence, prey on your children at school, and turn our streets into shooting galleries."

The article concludes with a reference to our website and phone number, so the reader can get our positions on all the issues.

I mention this article at length here because I think it provides a formula you can use when writing letters to the editor or calling into talk shows. Don't be lured into feeling you have to answer every charge made against Libertarians. Don't try to show that we're not as bad as someone has charged. Always go on the offensive — trying to show the reader/listener how much better his life will be in a Libertarian America.

And, if you don't feel competent to explain specific libertarian issues to someone, use the quoted paragraphs above as a way of explaining the general libertarian philosophy to people.

I have only one show today, which I do by phone at 5:30am from my hotel room in Hollywood. It is with Doug Stephan who is syndicated on the Radio America network. He has been very good to Libertarians, and today is no different. He says I present many valuable ideas that people should hear. He also says something I don't recall hearing from him before — that he voted for me in 1996 and intends to do so again this year. He says that earlier today the President of Hell's Angels was on the show and said he is a libertarian.

At the conclusion of the 15-minute interview, Doug says, "See folks, I told you you'd find him interesting."

With the interview done, I go back to sleep — and awaken at mid-morning to catch a plane home to Nashville.

Friday, May 26, 2000 — Nashville

We release a press release on Congressional attempts to legalize "black bag" searches — searches of your home or other property without your knowledge. The provision has been introduced in a bill designed to overrule the 1st amendment by making it a crime to tell someone where to find marijuana paraphernalia on the Internet.

Knowing that this bill may not pass, its authors have also attached the black-bag search provision to a bankruptcy reform bill, H.R. 833, that passed both houses earlier this year and is currently in a conference committee. This is common procedure. Insert a dangerous new federal power in a seemingly innocuous bill.

Jim Babka has done an outstanding job with the press release. He titled it "High on the Hill" — and used marijuana metaphors to show that the politicians have gotten so "high on power" that they now show no restraint whatsoever.

Saturday, May 27, 2000 — Nashville

I am on for 45 minutes on "Saturdays with Ed and Lou" on KMAX in Spokane, Washington. Ed Schofeld is the host, and Lou is his sidekick. They seem a bit skeptical at the outset, but they become friendlier and friendlier as the show progresses. I try to treat any contentious assertion as though it is a friendly question — by calling attention to something in the premise that I agree with, and starting off with, "As you pointed out, . . ." and then going on to show a better way — a Libertarian way — of achieving the objective cited.

Ed says he read an article years ago in which William F. Buckley, Jr. made fun of Murray Rothbard's advocacy of privatizing lighthouses. And Ed asks, "Just how far do Libertarians want to go in reducing government?"

I reply (as best I remember), "We might argue endlessly about which functions a small government should perform, but that would be pointless and self-defeating. You know and I know and probably almost everyone listening to this broadcast knows that government is way, way too big and we have to reduce it dramatically. So that's where our attention should be. When we have finally reduced government a long way, you might decide that's enough and oppose any further reductions — while others might want to reduce it further. But at least we'll be arguing then within the context of a government that all of us would find a lot less oppressive. So I prefer to focus first of all on getting government reduced to the limits of the Constitution, before worrying about how much further it should go. Does that make sense?"

Of course, he says that it does. And this calls attention to a useful tool when answering questions or discussing libertarian ideas. When answering a question about an issue, I often state my position and then ask, "Does that make sense?" I believe this causes the questioner to acknowledge to himself that the answer does make sense — that we really want the same basic things he does — even if he still has some reservations about our way of achieving them. Occasionally (but only occasionally), someone says my answer doesn't make sense. If so, I ask what about it doesn't make sense to him — and we then can focus on the particular problem he has with our position. And, of course, the question, "Does that make sense?" reminds anyone else listening to the dialogue that, yes, the Libertarian answer does make sense.

Sunday, May 28, 2000 — Nashville

I'm on the radio for an hour with C.B. Maxwell on KNRY in Monterey, California, on a show he calls "Intergalactic Radio." There are no commercials and no phone-ins. I'm not really sure whether it is a live broadcast or a tape for later.

He is a non-voter who sees no reason to bother trying to choose between evils. But near the end of the broadcast I tell him, "Look, I didn't vote from 1964 to 1994. But when I started voting Libertarian in 1994, it was a wonderful feeling to come out of the voting booth knowing I had voted for what I wanted. I know my one vote isn't going to swing the election, but it gives me a great emotional release — my symbolic way of getting back at those who want to run my life." He says, "You've just about got me convinced to register again."

During the broadcast we cover a number of issues. There's no question that he's supportive on all of them. And I'm on fire. It's my only interview today but I'm warmed up from the opening bell. Everything flows out of me succinctly and passionately.

Tuesday, May 30, 2000 — Nashville

After taking most of yesterday off, I have three shows today — the first at 8am. It is on "Dimitri Live and Dangerous" — with Dimitri Vassillaros on WWVA in Wheeling, West Virginia. He makes it clear he's a Libertarian. He's a good host — upbeat, well-informed, and a good questioner. At the end of the hour-long interview, he tells his listeners, "Listen to this man and please vote for him."

The next show follows immediately. It is an hour with Greg Freyermuth on KTSM in El Paso. He begins by saying he doesn't agree with Libertarians on everything, but he respects us because we are clear in our beliefs and unwilling to apologize for what we believe. Several times during the show he mentions that he finds my ideas sensible.

The lovefest dissolves, however, just before the end of the show — when we get into child pornography and drugs. I say that you really have only two choices: take responsibility for your children or expect the politicians to take care of them; there is no middle ground. If you rely on the law to protect your children, you're relying on politicians and bureaucrats to put the interests of your children ahead of their love of power. He can't see this at all.

He raises the common view that, even if the laws are ineffective, they are necessary in order to state "society's" views on the matter. I tell him that society doesn't make laws; only politicians do, and they will never be the laws you want. Unfortunately, just as we're getting into this, we are out of time. I would like to continue along this line, as it is an opportunity to raise some fundamental points about the way we should view government.

As I'm leaving on an extended trip tomorrow, I need to run some errands in the afternoon. So I do my last show from my cell phone in the car. I recently bought a Motorola StarTac cell phone — a tiny, light weight, flip-top model. The clarity is amazing. The interview is as technologically successful as though I were on my phone at home — or even in the radio studio.

The interview is 15 minutes with Manno and Condon on WKDR in Winewski, Vermont. The two are very friendly and sympathetic. Condon even says he voted for me in 1996. They ask me to come back when there's more time — which I'll do.

I'll be heading out tomorrow for ten days on the road — to New York City, Missouri, West Virginia, Dallas, Houston, and Corpus Christi.

Wednesday, May 31, 2000 — New York City

I fly to New York City to speak at an investment conference tomorrow. The only event today is a reception during the evening, at which I have the opportunity to talk with some of the campaign's major donors.

Thursday, June 1, 2000 — New York City

The big event of the day for me is a speech to several hundred people at the International Investors Northeast Mining Conference. Although every other speaker at the conference is talking about investments, my speech is my typical campaign stump speech — beginning with my standard opening: "I am running for President because no Democrat or Republican is going to stop the relentless growth of the federal government. Only a Libertarian is going to free you from the income tax, unlock the door and let you out of Social Security, and end the insane War on Drugs." Although the speech interrupts the normal flow of the conference, it is very well received.

After the speech I fly to St. Louis for the Missouri LP convention, which will begin tomorrow evening.

The Zogby Poll began carrying me in its April poll, in which I showed up at 0.8%. In May it dropped to 0.7%. But today Zogby released a new poll (http://www.zogby.com/features/featuredtables.dbm?ID=8):

George Bush, Republican, 41.7%
Al Gore, Democrat, 39.1%
Ralph Nader, Green, 4.0%
Pat Buchanan, Reform, 2.3%
Harry Browne, Libertarian, 1.1%

The 1.1% is, of course, below the standard margin of error. The significance is more in the fact that they're tracking us than in the precise figures at this point. It is also noteworthy that I'm not very far behind Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan, two candidates who began their campaigns with far greater name recognition and a lot of attention from the press.

As though the Zogby Poll weren't enough good news for one day, Gallup releases a new poll (http://www.gallup.com/poll/releases/pr000524b.asp):

George Bush, Republican, 45%
Al Gore, Democrat, 38%
Ralph Nader, Green, 3%
Pat Buchanan, Reform, 2%
Harry Browne, Libertarian, 1%
John McCain, Republican, 1%
John Hagelin, Natural Law, 1%
Howard Phillips, Constitution, 0%

These polls are reported widely in the wire services and newspapers, and on political websites — such as Reuters, Fox News, and others. The Zogby poll treats the race as being five-way — listing Bush, Gore, Nader, Buchanan, and Browne. And many of the major political websites have narrowed their coverage to these five candidates alone (with one or two continuing to carry Alan Keyes, who hasn't yet dropped out of the race). All this is still before we have done any national TV advertising — which we hope to begin later this month.

We are being noticed.

This is a major breakthrough for the LP. It will help enormously to overcome the "wasted vote" idea. Many Libertarians misunderstand this issue, believing that people are afraid to vote for someone who apparently can't win — and occasionally people even tell us that's the reason they won't Libertarian. But it isn't the fear that we can't win that keeps people from voting for us.

In 1992 Ross Perot had so discredited himself by election day that practically no one in America believed he had a chance to win the election. And yet 19 million Americans voted for him. And in 1996, millions of people voted for Robert Dole knowing he had long since blown any chance of winning the election.

At the same time, many people who felt much closer to Libertarian views didn't vote for Andre Marrou in 1992 or for me in 1996. Why not?

Because they didn't believe votes for a Libertarian would count for anything. Voting for Perot in 1992 told the world that one was fed up with the Republican and Democratic parties. And people voting for Perot knew their votes would be counted and reported on TV on election night and in the newspapers the next day. At the same time, if you voted Libertarian, it might take three weeks to find out how many votes the Libertarian candidate received.

Getting into the public opinion polls means we're being treated as relevant to the contest — that our support can affect the outcome. Even though the pollsters believe neither Pat Buchanan, Ralph Nader, nor I has a chance of winning, they think the votes we get might affect who does win the election. So it's important for them to know how much strength we have, and to try to gauge whether we're getting our support at the expense of Bush or Gore.

If I can stay listed in the polls through election day — and even better, if I can build a larger position in the polls — many people may conclude that voting Libertarian is no longer a wasted vote. They may decide that it's an effective way — in fact, the only way — to protest the Drug War, to demand that the 20,000 gun laws be repealed, to assert their desire to be freed immediately from the Social Security Ponzi scheme — statements that can't be made by voting Republican or Democratic.

In other words, this entry into the polls may be the start of a new era of Libertarian politics. It is an indication that we're starting to get the visibility we have craved for so long.

Friday, June 2, 2000 — St. Louis

I have five interviews today — three here in St. Louis and two phone interviews elsewhere.

The first is twenty minutes with Charles Brennan on KMOX in St. Louis. He has a sidekick whose name I don't learn. Both of them are friendly and give me a chance to say what I want, although neither shows any sign of agreeing with me. I'm able to get so much into the brief time that I ask for a tape afterward, so we can put the interview on our website as an introduction to my campaign.

Next is a ten-minute taping with Bill Phelan at KTRS. I presume the interview will be broadcast later in the day. He seems content to let me say all I want, and so I'm able to cover a lot in a short time.

I then talk with Alison Barker of the Associated Press in West Virginia. She has already visited my website and wants just a few details to finish her story as an introduction to my appearance at tomorrow's West Virginia LP convention.

Next comes about 45 minutes with Eric Stern, a young reporter for the St. Louis Post-Dispatch. He asks me whether the press missed something in last year's coverage of George W. Bush's possible drug use in his young days.

I say, "I know what you're getting at, and I agree with you. The real issue is George Bush signing laws that impose draconian sentences on drug-users for doing what he apparently did when he was younger. Would George Bush be a better person today if he had served ten years in prison for cocaine use? Should Al Gore have spent five years in prison for smoking marijuana in the 1960s? If not, why are these men so determined to impose such sentences on others?"

The day's final interview is about 40 minutes on KIQ in Salt Lake City. The host is Joe Jackson, with whom I've never talked before. He has a guest host, Ken Larson, with whom he apparently argues a lot. The interview goes very well. At the first break, both mention how much they like what I say, and Larson says, "He has my vote." Jackson says, "You just lost him 100 votes by saying that."

In the second part, Larson says, "I realize you want to get government out of the school business, so that parents could choose the kind of schools they want. If you were the principal of a private school, what kind of a school would it be?"

I say, "I'm not an educator, and I don't presume to know what kind of school would be best — anymore than I know how a computer should be built. What's important is that the government stay out of it, so we can have a wide choice, so you can choose what's best for you, and so you can make a change when you don't get what you want."

He says, "I love that answer. I'm tired of politicians who act as though they know everything and presume to know what's best for the rest of us."

Saturday, June 3, 2000 — St. Louis & Charleston, West Virginia

Today there's a forum at which Don Gorman, Barry Hess, and I discuss our campaigns and answer questions. Eric Stern of the Post-Dispatch, who interviewed me yesterday, is in attendance. There are about 70 people in the audience — close to twice as many as when I spoke at the Missouri convention two years ago.

After the forum Alan Underdown rushes me to the airport to catch my flight to West Virginia. Unfortunately, I won't get to hear what should be interesting talks by Mary Ruwart, Doug Bandow, and Sarah Cotham.

I get to the airport about a half-hour before departure time. Because it's a small-company flight on a prop plane, handled by Northwest, the sky cap can't check in my bag at the curb. I go inside and encounter a line at the ticket counter that seems to stretch halfway back to downtown St. Louis. I don't see how I'll ever make my flight — and missing it would mean missing my speech in West Virginia.

I finally manage to bribe a sky cap to handle the checking of my bag. The flight takes off on time, and takes me to
Detroit
— where I change planes and grab a sandwich (turkey, so I don't continue loading up on calories and fat).

At Charleston, West Virginia, John Brown — former state chair — picks me up at the airport. We arrive just as people are starting to eat dinner at the evening banquet. There are only 25 people in attendance, but they are good-looking folks. John Brown, Mr. & Mrs. Wallace Johnson, Richard Kerr, and others have done a lot to provide a first-class image for the party.

Just before I begin to give the after-dinner speech, the music starts up in the banquet room next door — flooding our room with "Y-M-C-A, Y-M-C-A." Combined with a baby who's up way past her bedtime, my voice has a lot of competition. But I stand close to the audience and the speech goes very well.

Afterward, an auction of interesting items raises about $2,400 for the party.

Sunday, June 4, 2000 — Charleston & Nashville

I arise early to catch a flight to Cleveland, changing planes there to get to Nashville. I'm met at the airport by Pamela and our nephew, whose visiting us for the week. Unfortunately, the only time I'll have with him is a few hours today, as I'm leaving tomorrow for Dallas, Houston, Corpus Christi, and Detroit.

Monday, June 5, 2000 — Dallas

The most memorable event for me today is Continental Airlines' moving me up to first-class because no exit-row seats are available for my flight to Dallas. Otherwise, it's an uneventful day. I spend most of it in my Dallas hotel room, catching up on some overdue campaign writing projects.

Tuesday, June 6, 2000 — Dallas

I'm in Dallas for two days of work with speech coach Bill Cakmis of Talent Dynamics. I have been speaking publicly since my high school days — over 50 years ago. And I've taken various kinds of lessons off and on during all those years — public speaking classes in high school and the Army, a private tutor for a couple of years in the 1960s, and isolated coaching sessions occasionally from various pros. But there's never enough. Like most people, I don't enjoy watching tapes of my TV performances or listening to tapes of my radio performances, because the defects in my work jump out at me.

I don't expect to be perfect, but I'm always determined to get better and better. I want to improve my delivery for public speeches, my facility to respond quickly and clearly in rapid-fire TV interviews, and the ability of my voice to hold the attention of radio listeners.

Bill Cakmis proves to be an excellent coach. Usually, I expect coaching to be more like drills — repetitive practice to overcome weaknesses I'm already aware of. But as we view video tapes of my speeches and TV interviews, he points out a great deal about effective communication that hadn't occurred to me. And unlike some advice, almost everything he says makes perfect sense to me. I find myself taking pages and pages of notes.

At the end of each of two 7-hour days, I'm thoroughly exhausted — mentally and physically drained. But I've learned a great deal that I can put to use immediately.

And more will come with practice. Next week and the following week, I'll be at home, preparing for the national convention and the campaign to follow. Each day I'll spend at least an hour practicing my new techniques before a video camera, so I can make sure I'm benefiting from the coaching.

Wednesday, June 7, 2000 — Dallas

As of today a third national public opinion poll has started tracking my candidacy. The Rasmussen Poll (http://www.rasmussenresearch.com/html/poll-804.html) releases the following results for a poll taken on June 5:

George Bush, 44.3%
Al Gore, 34.0%
Ralph Nader, 2.5%
Pat Buchanan, 2.1%
Harry Browne, 1.1%
Howard Phillips, 0.4%
Some other, 3.4%
Not sure, 12.2%

The only drawback of this poll is that no party labels are attached to the names — so publication of it in newspapers won't help build name recognition for the Libertarian label.

Unlike Zogby and Gallup, who also include me in their polls, Rasmussen polls every day and releases those results daily. Over the rest of this week, these polls will show my support at a steady 1.1% — suggesting that there's little margin of error. That doesn't mean these will be the results in November, only that they're fairly representative of the populace as a whole at this time.

Thursday, June 8, 2000 — Dallas & Houston

I'm back on the radio today. I have a 45-minute interview with Eric Hogue on KTKZ in Sacramento. Before the interview, he tells me off-the-air that he is a life-long Republican who is rethinking the Drug War and has had a number of discussions about it on his show. Almost the entire interview is devoted to the drug issue. It's obvious that he's pretty much made up his mind that the Drug War is a big mistake.

There are three callers. The first two are for ending the Drug War. The third is a former marijuana smoker who is in favor of the War on Drugs. Eric asks him whether he quit smoking marijuana because he was afraid of going to prison. When the man says "No," Eric asks what the point is of threatening people with prison for taking drugs, and the man has no answer. Eric asks me to comment, but I say only, "You've said it all."

Near the end of the interview I try to broaden the scope of the discussion by saying that Libertarians oppose the Drug War because we recognize that nothing is ever solved by turning problems over to people like Bill Clinton, Al Gore, George W. Bush, Newt Gingrich, or Teddy Kennedy. And when we vote for Republicans or Democrats, we just encourage them to make government bigger, more expensive, and more intrusive.

Eric says that he's with me on the Drug War, but we will have to have a discussion later on matters like abortion. And he says that if abortion is murder, Libertarians ought to be opposed to it. My parting comment is that I do oppose abortion, and that's why I don't want the government on my side in opposing it — since the government has made such a mess of the War on Drugs and the War on Poverty. He acknowledges the logic of that as we say goodbye.

At mid-day, I catch a plane to Houston, where I have a few interviews tomorrow.

I receive an e-mail from Scott Lieberman in California, telling me that ABC-TV News this morning had a commentary suggesting that third party candidates could affect the outcome of this year's election. While the commentator was talking, the bottom of the screen listed several third-party candidates, including Don Gorman and me.

Carl Wiglesworth has been a radio friend and supporter since long before I first decided in 1994 to run for President. Today I have a 15-minute interview with him on KTSA in San Antonio. As I'm working on my e-mail in my Houston hotel room, I can't understand why the station hasn't called for the interview. Then it dawns on me that I have the hotel phone line tied up with my computer. I get on my cell phone and call the station — and after three tries, I finally get through and the producer puts me right on the air.

Carl is his usual friendly, good-natured self. And I'm happy to hear that he'll be at this Saturday's Texas LP convention.

A caller asks how I feel about free trade with China. I say I believe you should be free to buy whatever you want from whoever is willing to sell to you. And if you want to make a statement against the Chinese communist regime, you're free to boycott Chinese products. Either you have the power to make these decisions for yourself or someone like Bill Clinton will make them for you. I prefer that you make your own choices.

Politics1 is a major Internet political site (it is at http://www.lobbyforme.com/p1/index.htm). On June 8, 2000, the site contained the following report about the presidential race and the polls:

"According to the Newsweek poll — conducted within the past few days — Bush leads Gore by a very tight 44% to 43% vote. The latest Reuters/Zogby poll shows a similarly close race: Bush-42%, Gore-39%, liberal activist Ralph Nader (Green)-4%, conservative commentator Pat Buchanan (Reform)-2%, financial author Harry Browne (Libertarian)-1%, nuclear scientist John Hagelin (Natural Law)-0% and Undecided-12%. As Nader, Buchanan, Browne, and Hagelin are likely to each be on the ballot in most if not all states, more pollsters should start including them in future surveys."

A further indication that this year we will be far more visible in the mainstream political world than we were in 1996.

Friday, June 9, 2000 — Houston

Seven interviews are scheduled today.

The first is at 8am with "The Captain & Anthony" on KCJJ in Iowa City, Iowa. The two hosts are comedians. I like these shows. I have no trouble trading gags with them, and such hosts always seem to be very receptive to our message of getting government out of their lives. In about 20 minutes, we cover the income tax, the Drug War, and foreign policy — but they are most enthusiastic about getting out of Social Security. They offer their own examples of how much better off people could be by keeping their own money and saving or investing it for themselves.

Incidentally, everytime Social Security "privatization" is discussed, the current system is compared with the stock market. This comparison is intentional and it's promoted by those who oppose changing the current system. Although millions of people have stock-market investments and would like to be free of Social Security so they can buy more stocks, other millions of people may be afraid of the stock market. So privatization opponents continually refer to stock-market investments because they seem risky.

The truth is that ending the Social Security tax means you can put your money wherever you want it — in a bank savings account, in government bonds, in stocks, in foreign currencies, or anywhere else you want. Even a bank savings account will provide a much better return than Social Security, and — unlike Social Security — it will build an estate you can leave to your children.

So I rarely mention stocks when discussing Social Security. I usually say, "You could assure a comfortable retirement simply by putting 5% to 10% of your paycheck into a bank savings account — or by having your employer do it for you. Even if you know nothing about investing, you could easily take care of yourself — if the politicians would simply leave you alone."

At the conclusion of the interview, one of the hosts asks me to sum up in one minute why they should vote for me. I say, "Because voting Republican or Democrat is telling the politicians to keep doing what they're doing — keep intruding further on your life, keep making government bigger, more expensive, and more oppressive. Only by voting Libertarian can you say, ‘I'm mad as Hell and I'm not going to take it anymore.'"

Next is a quick 5-minute interview with Lou Penrose at KNWZ, the news station in Palm Springs, California. He is very friendly, and encourages people to visit the website for more information. Most of the conversation is about Social Security. He mentions that Al Gore has said that George Bush's plan to allow citizens to put 2% of the 15% Social Security tax in their own accounts is "risky." I tell him, "Al Gore says it's risky; I say it's puny. You should be free to keep every dollar you earn — and spend it, save it, or give it away as you think best, not as Al Gore or George Bush thinks is best for you."

The third is a taped interview of 10 minutes with Rod Rice of the news department at KTRH in Houston. He will play excerpts of it during the day on news broadcasts. I'm not as good in this type of interview as I should be. He's looking for short, one-sentence or two-sentence soundbites, and I tend to talk in paragraphs. But the more of these I do, the better I'll get.

Then it's into the city for a couple of interviews. The first is at the Houston Chronicle — with Associate Editor Frank Michel, political columnist Jane Ely, and reporter Alan Bernstein. Such meetings with editorial groups are always fascinating, as literate people pose questions from many different angles. But even though I enjoy those meetings, I'm never very optimistic that they will do us a lot of good. I would trade a dozen such interviews for 10 minutes on a cable TV network — where I can tell my story my way, rather than having a journalist choose what to pass on about me.

But, lo and behold, this coming Sunday Jane Ely and Alan Bernstein will both publish articles about me — and while Ely's is typically patronizing, Bernstein's is excellent. Even the title is good: "Practicing what he preaches, Libertarian Party hopeful refuses matching campaign funds."

The final paragraphs of the article are:

"The goal, Browne explained, is to make sure voters know that Libertarian candidates for any election are the ones who would reduce government the most.

"He opposes federal government efforts to eradicate poverty and illegal drugs, saying they have not only failed, but made the problems worse.

"'Because I have seen what the war on drugs has done in escalating drug use and crime in his country, the last thing I would want is the government on my side to stamp out abortion,' the mild-mannered 66-year-old said. ‘I mean, if you enlisted the government to try to stop abortions, probably within 10 years men will be having abortions.'

"He said the two major political parties are hypocritical on abortion, because so-called pro-choice lawmakers would not let a woman choose to use marijuana to ease the pain from cancer or glaucoma, and so-called pro-life candidates didn't oppose the U.S. bombings that killed civilians in Kosovo.

"As part of the Libertarian philosophy, Browne calls for a federal retreat from education, welfare and other programs that he says are not authorized by the Constitution. He would abolish the Social Security payroll tax and withdraw U.S. troops from foreign peacemaking missions."

The article will be posted to our website if we can get permission from the Houston Chronicle.

Next is a visit to KTRK-TV, the local ABC-TV station. Sara Greer tapes me answering some questions, from which she will put together some soundbites for the evening news. I'm still not as good at coining soundbites as I should be (meaning I haven't improved much in the last two hours), but generally it goes well.

Back at the hotel I'm on the phone for 25 minutes with Tony Trupiano, sitting in for Gene Burns on the Talk America radio network. Tony tells me he began paying attention to the Libertarian Party during the last presidential campaign and has continued to understand the libertarian way more and more — to where he now says, "It's about our keeping more of the money that is ours to begin with." He is very supportive and keeps repeating the website address and phone number. After the interview is over, he calls back and offers to help with the campaign.

The last interview of the day doesn't come off. It was supposed to be 15 minutes on the phone with Mike Laurel of Metro Networks, a radio news service. But we miss each other on the phone and the interview never occurs.

Today the Gallup Poll releases a new poll (http://www.gallup.com/poll/releases/pr000609.asp). Although I wasn't included in today's preference poll, I was one of five candidates given favorable/unfavorable ratings. Gallup says, "Fewer than one in five Americans venture an opinion of Browne (with 5% feeling favorably and 14% unfavorably). Two-thirds of the public, 66%, say they have never heard of him while 15% have heard of him, but express no opinion."

The "unfavorable" rating doesn't bother me. As we do more advertising, more people will begin to understand what we're offering. Until then, they may be confusing me or Libertarians with someone else, or they may have heard only the most outlandish ideas about Libertarians.

Speaking of outlandish ideas, I've written before in this journal about Don Feder's May 15 Boston Herald article "Goofy May Be a Libertarian" (http://www.bostonherald.com/news/columnists/don05152000.htm), and my article in response to it (posted on our website). In his article, Feder mentioned that our national convention will be held in an Anaheim hotel, but suggested it would be more appropriate to hold it at nearby Disneyland. He said, "What could be more fitting for these laissez-faire visionaries than to convene in the theme park's Fantasyland? Goofy might even be available for their national ticket."

It turns out that the Herald's website was flooded with dozens of objections to the article. And now Art Olivier, candidate for the LP vice-presidential nomination, has reprinted over 80 of those responses on one web page (http://www.vp2000.org/__Goofy_for_Pres_/__goofy_for_pres_.html).

The responses are instructive because they reveal a great deal of Libertarian writing talent. Some of the letters are very well-written. For example, here are some excerpts from one by Matt Siegel:

"Bravo to Don Feder's proposal that the Libertarian Party nominate Goofy as our candidate for President of the United States. Goofy has name recognition, and a solid record of public service. . . .Goofy never put people in prison for using the same drugs he used when he was younger, while at the same time freeing violent criminals who actually do hurt people. Goofy never stood on a podium surrounded by armed guards and told people they aren't entitled to protect themselves from the aforementioned violent criminals. . . . 

"Goofy never made participation in the Social Security System mandatory, then stole all the money from that system, resulting in a negative return for the ‘investors.' Goofy never screwed up public education, welfare, Social Security, and then set his sights on screwing up healthcare next. . . . 

"Yes, Goofy does stand out from the rest of the lower life forms you have a choice of voting for. . . . He certainly is a Libertarian, and I'd be proud to vote for him. The problem is, Goofy doesn't want to run for public office. Like most Americans, he has better things to do."

The collection of letters is marred by a few that contain bad language and incivility. But they demonstrate what a wealth of talent is available in the libertarian movement.

Saturday, June 10, 2000 — Corpus Christi

I arrive in Corpus Christi in mid-morning, relieved that yesterday's forecasts of bad weather throughout Texas seemed to be inaccurate. On arrival, I run into radio host Carl Wiglesworth and his producer-wife Laurie. Despite our many phone interviews, I've never met them in person before — and it's a pleasure to finally do so.

Carl is the luncheon speaker. He delivers an interesting talk on the changing natures of traditional radio and Internet radio, but it is interrupted by the collapse of a man in the audience. Carl's speech is never completed. The man is rushed to the local hospital. Later one of the Libertarian doctors who attended to him at the luncheon reports that he's not expect to survive.

On a happier note, Geoffrey and Nancy Neale have done an excellent job organizing the convention. I didn't think to ask for an official count of the attendance, but I would guess there were at least 100 people present.

In the afternoon, author Mary Ruwart (running for the U.S. Senate seat against Kay Bailey Hutchinson) and I conduct a candidate workshop. Mary offers some excellent suggestions for dealing with tough issues.

I provide an overview of how I believe a campaign should be conducted. You must start by defining your goals. Saying you're running to win isn't enough. The odds are against your winning at this point in the party's development, so you must make sure your campaign produces other gains for the libertarian movement and the LP if you don't happen to win. A goal might be a significant and noticeable increase in the vote total, to inspire the press and public to take future Libertarian candidates more seriously. Another goal might be the recruitment of many new members to the party.

Whatever the goals, they must be realistic and they must be carefully defined. Once having set them, you have to decide which people in your electoral district are the best prospects for meeting your goals. You won't be able to reach everyone, so you need to spend your limited resources of time, money, and volunteers getting to those who will do the most good for you. You may want to focus on the leaders of organizations whose members should have the greatest reason to vote for you, or perhaps the geographical areas within the district that are most susceptible to your message.

You then need to craft a few key issues and proposals (three is usually a good number) that provide compelling reasons for your best prospects to vote for you. The best way to circumvent the "wasted vote" syndrome is with proposals that will improve people's lives significantly, but that Republican and Democratic candidates are opposed to. One example is to appeal to people who are already taking care of their own retirements by proposing the complete and immediate end to the Social Security tax. Another is to try to reach those who have been personally touched by the Drug War, proposing an end to it. Still another is to appeal to gun owners by proposing the repeal of all the existing gun laws that put innocent citizens at a disadvantage to armed criminals. In each of these examples, your Democratic and Republican opponents will offer nothing remotely comparable to what you're proposing.

In other words, there are two important qualifications in selecting issues. First, you should be proposing something that will improve people's lives dramatically, not arguing against someone else's proposals. Second, each proposal should be uniquely Libertarian — that is, it should be something that no Democrat or Republican would ever propose. Stay away from such things as a flat tax, sales tax, Medical Savings Accounts, vouchers, or anything that other politicians might propose. Whatever you may think of such ideas, they don't give anyone a compelling reason to support you. Why should someone vote for you, since you seem unlikely to win, when there's a Republican or Democrat proposing the same thing and has a chance to win?

Lastly, use the Libertarian label profusely. Put it on your literature and signs, and use it in your ads. Refer to a proposal as a "Libertarian proposal" or say "The Libertarian solution to this is to . . ." Make sure people know that the good things you're offering are Libertarian proposals.

If you avoid using the word "Libertarian" and you don't win the election, what have you gained? You will be just one more politician who didn't win. And after the election there will be no tangible benefit from your campaign.

If you want your campaign to achieve something, it must be part of a greater, continuing process. You can leave a legacy of greater awareness that Libertarians are the ones who are trying to set people free. This will help whoever carries the Libertarian banner in this race next time — whether that's you or someone else.

One of my campaign goals is to expose every American to the idea that Libertarians are the ones who want smaller government. We may not be able to attain this goal completely this year — but the closer we come to it, the better off we'll be. I also want to achieve sufficient name recognition for the Libertarian label that many voters trying to decide whom to vote for in local races — and not recognizing a single name in a race — will vote for the Libertarian because the voter has heard me on radio or TV, or has seen one of our ads.

Later in the afternoon, there is the usual presidential candidate forum with Don Gorman, Barry Hess, and me. This time we're joined by Dean Tucker of Texas. The forum is delayed by several hours because Don and Barry encountered severe storms flying in from New Mexico — and they had to be rerouted with a series of flights that seemed to take them all over Texas.

Ah, the joys of travel. You, too, can be a presidential candidate and see the USA.

At the evening banquet, Mary Ruwart gives an excellent speech describing ways various government functions could be handled in the free market. Afterward, Geoffrey Neale does a good job of fund-raising for the Texas LP. For an auction, my publisher Liam Works donates a proof set of my new book The Great Libertarian Offer, which brings $120.

Today a letter appears in the Seattle Times, written by Travis Pahl (http://seattletimes.nwsource.com/news/editorial/html98/lett10_20000610.html). Apparently a Times editorial had urged that Pat Buchanan and Ralph Nader be included in the presidential debates. Mr. Pahl's letter says that Libertarian Harry Browne should be included — pointing out that the LP is a much bigger party than the Green Party, and the LP will be on the ballot in all 50 states.

He closes by saying, "With a Libertarian in the debates, you would actually have a candidate who stands for a smaller, limited government. All the parties The Times wants in the debates are for large government. All they differ on is what part of our lives the government is going to control. Unfortunately, it appears that we will end up instead with a boring debate between two pro-government candidates."

This is a good example of how easy it is to take a news item or editorial in the newspaper and use it to gain publicity for the campaign.

Sunday, June 11, 2000 — Detroit

I'm in Detroit for a "Slash the Pork" barbecue picnic at Barbara Goushaw's home. There are 150 people present. The purpose is to raise money for BARC (Ballot Access Retention Committee), a project to produce enough advertising for the presidential campaign to get the 26,000 votes necessary to retain ballot status in Michigan.

Don Gorman, Barry Hess, and I each give short speeches and answer questions. Then Barbara does a little fund-raising. Bruce Smith is the winning bidder on a proof set of The Great Libertarian Offer, paying $400. Not only is $10,000 raised (from ticket sales and fund-raising) for BARC, but everyone I talk with seems to be having a very good time.

Monday, June 12, 2000 — Nashville

Home at last after spending almost all of the past two weeks on the road.

I have just one interview today — a half-hour with Charlie Sykes at WTMJ in Milwaukee. He invited me to appear after a campaign volunteer sent him our 30-minute video. Today he begins by describing himself as a recovering liberal and now a "small-l" libertarian. Although he apparently is in tune with our ideas, he is relatively non-committal — content to simply ask questions and let me make my points.

Today WorldNetDaily, the large online news publication, publishes my article, "We're from the Government and We're Here to Improve Your Software." It is available at the campaign website.

The Great Libertarian Offer video began running today on a Little Rock cable access channel, thanks to Glen Schwarz and the Arkansas Libertarian volunteers. It is scheduled to be aired seven times.

Wednesday, June 14, 2000 — Nashville

After taking Tuesday off, I'm back at it.

My first interview is an hour with Matt Alsdorf of www.PlanetOut.com, a gay website. He asks many questions that would provide excellent opportunities for someone like Al Gore to pander. My answers are different, of course, and Matt seems to understand them very well. He knows we don't want to use the force of government to solve social and political problems. And he comprehends without trouble my point that the power that's used for your benefit today can easily be used against you tomorrow.

I make the point that reducing government to its constitutional limits will eliminate the ability of one group to use government to force its views on other groups. Not only will that mean that gays no longer will have to fear moralists, it means that moralists will no longer have to fear gays — making for much more harmonious relationships.

He asks whether we have any openly gay people on the campaign staff. I say that I don't believe so. Then I remember that Stuart Reges and Rob DeVoil are both gay. Because we don't look at people in terms of gay/straight, it is easy to forget who's who.

The interview probably came about because of the prodding of Sacramento volunteer Amanda Swafford, who kept after PlanetOut to pay attention to me. Our volunteers are doing a great job in making the Libertarian presidential campaign much more visible.

Matt Alsdorf will be writing an article from the PlanetOut interview, and it should be on their website soon. Meanwhile, a poll on the site asks the question, "Which presidential candidate would make the most interesting lunch companion?" As of today, the results are:

Harry Browne (Libertarian), 48%
Al Gore (Democrat), 13%
George W. Bush (Republican), 6%
Ralph Nader (Green), 6%
Pat Buchanan (Reform), 4%
I'd prefer to eat alone, thanks, 23%

I hope I don't spill coffee on my suit.

Although they included me in the poll, they don't yet include me among the candidates profiled throughout the website.

The second interview is with Terry Langeland of The Colorado Daily — a newspaper circulated primarily to University of Colorado students. The interview is meant to be a half-hour, but it lasts close to an hour. We cover a multitude of issues. Near the end, I say, "If you have any sympathy for my campaign, I hope you'll stress my stance on the Drug War. Young people need to be particularly concerned about this. Many of them smoke marijuana, and they could easily get busted and receive a sentence of 10 or 15 years — just for buying or selling pot, or driving someone to a drug transaction."

As the Green Party is having its convention in Denver next week, he says he won't publish his article until just after the LP convention, so it won't get lost among the coverage of the Green Party.

In the evening, I have an online chat at Evote.com — one of the big political websites. I think it's the first such chat they've had, and it isn't completely smooth. The event is slow getting started, and the questions and answers seem to be posted very slowly. I'm a fast typist, but it doesn't help much.

However, the session goes very well. I'm able to give short, snappy, one-paragraph answers to questions. About 900 people are in attendance. I'm very glad I was invited. Our website has a link to a complete transcript of the session (in the "Hot Campaign News" section).

Today WorldNetDaily published a letter from me on the Drug War. It began:

"Ted Wegener's letter to the editor says, ‘Libertarians see the improper way the drug problem is being waged and they throw the baby out with the bath water when they say solve the problem by legalizing drugs. By advocating the legalization of drugs they are advocating the destruction of society.'

"Mr. Wegener apparently doesn't understand: We have to throw the baby out with the bath water because this is Rosemary's Baby we're talking about."

The letter goes on to list the problems the Drug War has created, pointing out that "These tragedies aren't the result of bad administration; they are inherent in any attempt to enforce victimless-crime laws." It finishes by saying that the Drug War is living on borrowed time, and I expect to see it ended within five years.

Recently, Justin Raimondo wrote an article on his website AntiWar.com in which he said that Pat Buchanan was the only possible choice for an anti-war activist. So yesterday I emailed a note to him pointing out that I am more reliably anti-intervention than Buchanan is. I attached the foreign policy chapter from The Great Libertarian Offer, which will be published next week.

Knowing that Justin is pretty libertarian, I said, "The principal difference between Buchanan and me is that he believes a wise leader (he) can decide properly when government should overrule your freedom — as in when foreign intervention is warranted, when you should be prevented from buying what you want from overseas, when your constitutional liberties should be abridged in the name of fighting drugs or immigration, and many, many other areas.

"I believe neither Al Gore, George W. Bush, Ralph Nader, nor Pat Buchanan is qualified to run your life — and neither am I. I believe in you."

Today his column reproduced my letter. He went on to say, "As one of the few remaining movement activists who remember the good old days before Jesse Ventura and Bill Maher were somehow inducted into the libertarian ranks, Browne is practically the only movement leader of any stature who still retains an interest in the Libertarian Party as a vehicle for social change. He is a charming and knowledgeable man, and a good candidate. (He is head and shoulders above his critics – pygmies to a man – who carp and complain that he isn't "purist" enough: this about a man who would immediately get rid of most government as we know it!) As for his foreign policy positions, they reflect the consistent opposition to US military intervention overseas that has been encoded in the Libertarian platform since around the mid-1970s – thanks to Murray N. Rothbard and Williamson Evers, who in the early days had to fight off the Randians and others who wanted to enlist the party in the Cold War."

His view of today's LP is very sour, however. And he objects to the fact that the LP had accepted as a member the head of the Jewish Defense League — which he considers to be a terrorist organization. He reiterates his support for Pat Buchanan.

Thursday, June 15, 2000 — Nashville

The day begins on a happy note with a 30-minute radio interview with "Lionel" (Michael Lebron), who is now broadcasting on the full-time Internet talk network, EYada.com. He introduces me as "My candidate." Among the many issues we cover is the gun laws. I point out that the last place guns should be outlawed is at schools. If one person at Columbine High School had had access to a gun, many of the slain children would still be alive today.

Later I have a half-hour radio interview with Rick Knobe at KSOO in Sioux Falls, South Dakota. This is my first encounter with him. He is a good host — skeptical but very friendly — and at the end of our time he says he would like to have me back several times before election day.

Friday, June 16, 2000 — Nashville

Peter McWilliams died on Wednesday. Today I wrote a eulogy for him and sent it to WorldNetDaily for publication. It will be published this coming Sunday, June 18 (http://www.worldnetdaily.com/bluesky_browne/20000617_xchbr_learning_f.shtml). We also transmit it via LibertyWire and it is posted on the website (in the "Hot Campaign News" section).

Peter was a very intelligent, thoughtful man. I mention in my eulogy that he bore little animosity toward his opponents; he considered bad ideas, not bad people, to be the enemy. I was fortunate to know him, and I will certainly miss him.

Sunday, June 18, 2000

We're still in the polls. However, the polls aren't as stable from day to day and company to company, which inspires less confidence in their accuracy.

Rasmussen — which polls daily — had me dropping from 1.1% on June 6 all the way down to 0.3% on June 11, and then rising back gradually to 1.4% on June 15. Now I've been at 1.2% the past three days. As of today, the poll shows:

George Bush, 41.0%
Albert Gore, 36.5%
Pat Buchanan, 2.8%
Ralph Nader, 2.5%
Harry Browne, 1.2%
Howard Phillips, 0.2%
Some other, 2.7%
Not sure, 13.2%

In the Zogby poll I've dropped from 1.1% to 0.4%. The latest poll, as of June 13 shows:

George Bush, Republican, 43.9%
Albert Gore, Democrat, 36.5%
Pat Buchanan, Reform, 2.7%
Ralph Nader, Green, 2.1%
Harry Browne, Libertarian, 0.4%
John Hagelin, Natural Law, 0.4%

The Gallup Poll's latest is still from May 21:

George W. Bush, 45%
Al Gore, 38%
Ralph Nader, 3%
Pat Buchanan, 2%
Harry Browne, 1%
John McCain, 1%
John Hagelin, 1%
Howard Phillips, 0%
Someone else, 1%
No opinion, 8%

Monday, June 19, 2000 — Nashville

I will be home through Saturday, preparing for the general election campaign that begins right after the Libertarian national convention, June 30 - July 3.

I have been criticized sometimes because our campaign has scheduled many events for after the convention, and because I have focused far more on outreach to non-Libertarians than on getting the nomination — as though I had already won the party's nomination.

This isn't because I am presumptuous (well, not about this, anyway). We are doing this because you simply can't run a worthwhile presidential campaign in only four months, from July through November. During that brief period, you can't possibly attract enough media and public attention to help the Libertarian cause.

That's why I've been doing radio & TV interviews for the past three years. And that's why we've done a tremendous amount of public outreach since I made my official announcement in February.

During that time, I have had the following media appearances:

9 national TV shows
37 national radio shows
74 big-city radio shows
33 smaller-city radio shows
3 local TV shows
8 national press interviews, published in hundreds of newspapers
39 local press interviews
11 Internet interviews or articles, plus tons of listings of my views on political       websites.

Our 30-minute video has been played dozens of times on commercial or cable-access TV stations.

One benefit of all this exposure is that we're going into the general election campaign with much greater name recognition (both for me and for Libertarians in general) than in 1996. I'm listed in the public-opinion polls. Most of the major political websites carry information on me.

All this didn't just drop in our lap. It took a lot of hard work by a lot of people on our campaign staff to make this happen. And we wouldn't have been in this position if we had waited until after the nomination was secured to start cultivating the media and the public.

I mention this because I have a number of projects to deal with this week — all looking ahead to after the convention. Many websites and organizations have asked for answers to questions they are providing to presidential candidates. In addition, many of them will publish position papers on various issues, and I need to prepare those.

The League of Women Voters' political website, DNet.org, already carries information from me on a number of issues. However, these have been picked up from wherever they could find them. I need to write better, more succinct issue statements on all the topics they cover.

In addition, the FreedomChannel.com has offered to allow me to do a series of 90-second video spots on various issues. We have scheduled the taping of these spots for Washington, D.C. on July 8. I need to write scripts for them.

I also need to write a campaign platform, as called for in the LP bylaws. And, as always, I need to spend a good deal of time on the phone raising money.

This week will be devoted to getting as many as possible of these projects done — in addition to doing a few radio interviews.

Tuesday, June 20, 2000 — Nashville

Just one interview today. It is an hour with Joe Jackson of KIQ in Salt Lake City. I was on his show a couple of weeks ago, and he received emails asking to have me back. He usually has a guest host, and today it is Bob Madrid, a staunch Republican.

Jackson stays pretty much out of the conversation, as Madrid argues politely with me about a number of things — most notably the Drug War and foreign policy. I feel that I'm getting the better of most of the arguments, but I'm not there to win arguments; I'm there to persuade. I don't expect to change Madrid's mind, but I do hope I'm persuading listeners to come around to the Libertarians.

Wednesday, June 21, 2000 — Nashville

Just one interview scheduled today, and it doesn't come off. The show is scheduled for 8:10am. The producer calls at 8:20 and says an in-studio guest from the previous hour was late and is on now. She wants to reschedule for 8:40. I say okay, but she doesn't call back until 8:50, and then says we will begin at 9:00 after a break. Unfortunately, I have other activities scheduled and I beg off. She says she will call the office to reschedule, as they are determined to have me on.

An email from Brian Mulholland is forwarded to me. He is one of our 4,500 campaign volunteers. He says that the Los Angeles Daily News devotes the letters section on Saturdays to a single topic. On June 3 the topic was Social Security, and the paper printed letters from both Brian and his brother Barry.

Brian's letter describes an encounter with a woman who said she was "pro-choice." Brian asked whether she thought one should be free to choose or not choose to be in Social Security. Barry's letter, printed right after Brian's, provides an example of the ideal letter in three small paragraphs:

"If a private individual came up with a scam like Social Security, he would be arrested, prosecuted, and his ‘program' would be exposed for what it is: a pyramid, or Ponzi, scheme.

"What to do about it now? Well, the federal government has trillions of dollars in assets it has acquired for activities unrelated to its actual constitutional functions. I agree with Libertarian presidential candidate Harry Browne's plan to sell off those assets, and use the proceeds to buy lifetime annuities for those truly dependent on Social Security. Those annuities would be offered by private companies who don't break their promises, for unlike the politicians, they are criminally liable if they do.

"And the rest of us would be freed from the 15% Social Insecurity tax forever."

This letter includes the three essential elements for such a letter or for a call to a talk show: (1) Present a specific proposal that will make the prospect's life much better, so that he has a reason to care about the subject. (2) Identify this as a "Libertarian" proposal, to help people come to realize that Libertarians are the ones who want to benefit them by getting government out of their lives. (3) Urge the prospect to do something specific to make things better — in this case, the implication that one should vote for Harry Browne for President.

Thursday, June 22, 2000 — Nashville

Today's one show is with "Uncle Nasty" on KBIP-FM, a hard-rock-music station in Denver. We tape a 15-minute interview, to be played on his show later in the day. The discussion revolves almost completely around the anti-methamphetamine bill that just passed the Senate and is being considered by the House. It would authorize searches and seizures of your property when you're not present, and without even telling you the spies have been there. And it would outlaw Internet discussions of illegal activities — such as how to grow medical marijuana.

Nasty says he asked an aide to Senator Hatch, a sponsor of the bill, for clarification. The aide said the bill doesn't create new government intrusions; it merely legalizes what the government is doing already. Well, that ought to make us all sleep better.

I point out to Nasty that by letting the government transgress the Constitution in any area, we open the door to this kind of tyranny. The only solution is a program that will force the federal government to stay within constitutional limits in all areas. And that's why the Great Libertarian Offer is so important; it will end all the illegal activities of the federal government.

He says he wants me back after the convention to discuss my whole platform.

Friday, June 23, 2000 — Nashville

My only interview today is with Chris Reed of the Orange County Register in Santa Ana, California. The Register is one of several publications in the Freedom Newspapers chain. The paper is the dominant newspaper in Orange County (near Los Angeles), competing with the Los Angeles Times' Orange county edition. The Register probably is the most libertarian daily newspaper in the country. In fact, Alan Bock, one of its columnists, will be moderating the presidential debate at the LP convention next week.

In keeping with the paper's philosophy, Chris is very sympathetic. His questions deal mainly with the problems a third-party candidate — and a Libertarian candidate in particular — faces in getting attention. I point out that we have not built our party on celebrities or billionaires, and so it will take us longer to become prominent. But because we're the only party offering to make it possible for the average person to control his own life, we have a very good chance of prevailing eventually. And very possibly by the end of this decade.

Saturday, June 24, 2000 — Nashville

Just one show today. It is 20 minutes or so with Tim Winchester and Mike Ferguson at KCWJ in Kansas City, Missouri. They ask a number of questions about the issues, and seem very interested.

The last question asked is why anyone should vote Libertarian. I say that if you vote for George Bush or Al Gore, you are telling the politicians you like big government, you like people controlling your life, you like the fact that government keeps getting bigger, more expensive, more intrusive, more oppressive.

You may think you're voting for a Democrat or Republican in order to keep his major opponent out of the White House. But voting against someone is always a wasted vote, because the recipient will treat it as an endorsement of his entire big-government political career.

The only way you can say you've had it with big government is to vote Libertarian. It is the only vote that can't be misinterpreted.

Tomorrow Pamela and I will fly to New York, where I have three days of good media events scheduled. Then it's on to Anaheim for the LP convention, and from there to Washington for more media.

Sunday, June 25, 2000 — New York City

Pamela and I arrive in New York City for three days of media — both national and New York events.

We arrive in the evening, in time to have dinner with my 83-year-old cousin. She has always been intensely interested in politics, and tonight we find the conversation split evenly between politics and cats. I realize that maybe we Libertarians have finally arrived as a full-fledged party when she tells me that she probably will vote for me because I'm the lesser of three evils.

Monday, June 26, 2000 — New York City

Pamela and I are joined for the first two days of media events by Gene Molter of Newman Communications, the campaign's public relations firm.

Today's events being at 7:15am with a 15-minute phone conversation with Larry Goldstein on WVOX in New Rochelle in nearby Westchester County. The interview is nothing special. Larry lets me say whatever I want without interruption or argument, but I end the interview feeling that not much has been achieved.

Later in the morning, we drive out to the far end of Long Island for a press interview. On the way, I talk with Kelly Beaucar of ConservativeHQ.com, a conservative news website. Kelly has written about me several times before, and now she is doing a story leading into this weekend's Libertarian national convention.

She asks why we're getting more attention this time than in 1996. I point out that the party is bigger and better financed, we have a large volunteer organization that is putting pressure on news sites to cover us, and we have all that was achieved in 1996 as a starting point to build on. In addition, the presence of Pat Buchanan and Ralph Nader in the race helps turn attention toward third parties in general, and we're benefiting from some of that. She wishes me luck as we hang up.

Another interview, with Jose Santiago at WBAI news, was scheduled to be held by phone on the way to Long Island. But I can't connect with Santiago, and the interview never happens.

We arrive in Melville for an interview at Newsday, a large daily newspaper. The paper started in the 1970s (as I recall) as strictly a Long Island daily. But when the New York City newspapers begin folding, leaving only three dailies where once there were six or seven, Newsday began to circulate in Manhattan and other nearby areas. It is generally a quite liberal paper.

My interview is with Larry Levy, an editorial writer, and Phineas Fisk, assistant editor of the editorial page. Coincidentally, Larry's cousin was one of the founders of the Massachusetts Libertarian Party — and Phineas' stepson is a staunch Libertarian. The two are quite friendly, they understand what I'm saying, and they even get my jokes. But who knows what they will write — if anything?

The traffic is unbearable, and we're late getting back to the city. I am supposed to be on Sean Hannity's radio show from 4 to 5, but we don't make it to Manhattan until after 4. So, instead, I'm on from 4:30 to 5:30. Sean is half of Hannity & Colmes, on whose TV show I will appear this evening. He is the conservative and he always tells me how he agrees with me on so many issues, but I go too far — especially in wanting to end the Drug War.

Today, prior to my appearance, he is railing against Sunday's Gay Pride Parade in Manhattan. On the air, I mention that he's always talking about government being too big. But when it comes to making specific proposals, it never seems to be to shut down the Department of Education or get the government out of health care, for example, but rather to rail against gay demonstrations, push for a flag-burning amendment, fight to get the 10 Commandments displayed in government schools, or advance some other issue that won't make anyone freer or government any smaller.

The conversation is friendly but very intense on both sides. When he talks about using government for good purposes, I tell him that's a fantasy. No one will ever ask him to design or run a government program; that will be done by politicians for their own political interests, and the ideal program that he imagines will in fact turn out to be just another bad government boondoggle.

More important, lately I've realized that I sometimes let interviewers keep the conversation too much on abstract issues and policy questions — and not focus on the importance of voting Libertarian. So today, I keep coming back to the point that a Republican vote (since Sean is a Republican with a largely Republican audience) is telling the Republicans you don't mind that they keep making government bigger, and that only a Libertarian vote will tell them you aren't going to take it anymore. The show goes quite well, and I'm quite pleased with how easily I was able to return over and over to the importance of voting Libertarian.

In the evening I'm on the Hannity & Comes show on Fox News TV. Both Sean and Alan (Colmes) have been very good to me — giving me plenty of airtime. I will be on the last two segments of the hour-long show.

The middle portion of the show is with Jim Nicholson, Republican National Committee chairman, and a Democratic Congressman. When Nicholson comes into the Green Room with a large entourage, one of his companions is Cliff May — a former Libertarian whom I haven't seen in several years. He's determined to introduce me to Jim Nicholson, which he does. I point out that Cliff is a unique individual — the only person in the world ever to defect from the Libertarians to Republicans, sort of like defecting from the U.S. to Cuba. Nicholson is good-natured about this. Only later does Pamela point out to me that Nicholson and I met four months ago at a studio in Washington. Apparently, neither of us remembered that historic meeting

Nicholson's on-air interview is about Al Gore's fund-raising at the Buddhist temple and the lack of an independent counsel to investigate it (perhaps only the 3,547th time the show has covered this subject). Once again, the film footage of Al Gore at the temple is shown over and over — and the participants argue endlessly, with two or three talking at once.

When it's time for me to head from the Green Room into the studio, I turn to the four Nicholson people sitting there (another three are inside the studio), and I ask, "You folks are all Republicans, right?" They nod. I ask, "And you're all for smaller government, right?" And they say yes. So I say, "Why is it that Republicans run for office promising smaller, limited government, but when your party chairman gets a chance to tell the world on TV what Republicans want, he doesn't propose ways to make government smaller; instead, he goes on endlessly about Al Gore's fund-raising crimes or a flag-burning amendment or anything in the world except something to make government smaller?"

One woman answers me, saying "Because we have only a tiny majority in Congress." I remember during the Reagan years they used the excuse that they didn't have any majority in Congress. I didn't really expect a logical answer to my question, but I couldn't resist asking. As it turns out, the woman who answered was Mrs. Nicholson, but I didn't know it at the time.

My segment on the show goes very well. Again, I keep bringing the conversation back to the idea that if you want smaller government, voting Republican or Democratic is a wasted vote — because it tells the party you vote for you will never punish it for making government bigger. At the end of the show, all four men working in the studio come up to me, one at a time, to tell me they agree with me and intend to vote for me. The fact that two of them are black is particularly encouraging, because we hear so often that Libertarians have nothing to offer blacks. In fact, blacks, whites, men, women, gays, straights, rich, poor — all of them want to be free, free from politicians trying to run their lives.

After the TV show, we ride in Alan Colmes' car to his radio show at WEVD. As usual, we get along very well on his show — and he is very supportive, although he is a liberal and disagrees with parts of the Libertarian approach. All the callers but one are opposed to me, but I try to side with their concerns and then point out how much better those concerns could be handled by getting government out of the picture. I don't believe any of the callers were converted, but I hope some of the other listeners were.

Tuesday, June 27, 2000 — New York City

We have another full day of media in New York.

The first is back at Fox News TV. I have a 5-minute live interview with David Asman, a former Wall Street Journal editorial writer and now a news reporter at Fox. In the course of the interview, he asks whether I believe there are very many Americans "who hate the federal government as much as" I do. I point out to him that I don't hate anyone, but I do feel sorry for people who expect the government to deliver what it promises. In the quick interview, we cover a lot of issues and I get the chance to emphasize the importance of voting Libertarian. After the interview, he tells me off the air that he's about 85% libertarian.

The next interview is with Gordon Deal at Metro Networks. Metro, among other things, provides news services to independent radio stations around the country. Gordon tapes a conversation with me from which he will extract soundbites to feed customer stations. He asks a lot of questions about various issues. I keep bringing the matter back to the question: who will control your life, you or the politicians? I keep pointing out that we need to take power out of the hands of the politicians and put it not in the hands of "the people" — but in the hands of each individual citizen, to live his life as he thinks best.

During the interview I notice there is a woman standing behind me and off to one side, just barely in my field of vision. I assume she's waiting to use the equipment when Gordon is done with our interview. But I run into her on the way out, and she tells me, "I really like what you had to say. I wanted to hear it all. I wish you the best of luck."

On the way to our next in-person interview, I have a 15-minute interview by phone in the car with Jennifer Stayton of WAER-FM in Syracuse. She is very friendly, but not necessarily supportive. She asks what makes Libertarians different, and I provide the standard answer — that we're the only ones who aren't trying to control you life. We're the ones who want you to be free to live your life as you think best, rather than as George Bush or Al Gore thinks is best for you.

We then meet with John Fund, an editorial writer at the Wall Street Journal. John is a libertarian who finds himself defending Republican positions in print and in guest appearances on TV talk shows. He is very sympathetic to what we're doing, and he offers a number of suggestions for promoting a debate with Pat Buchanan and Ralph Nader, and getting it telecast by one of the cable news networks.

I mention to him that it was a Libertarian landmark in 1996 that a Wall Street Journal editorial took the trouble to say that Harry Browne should not be in the presidential debates. No one had bothered to mention our candidates before. I also chide John that Investors Business Daily and several daily newspapers did endorse my being in the 1996 debates. He implies that there's a good chance the Journal's policy will be different this year.

Our next stop is at CNN's radio network where I have a 20-minute taped interview with Gary Baumgarten. He is extremely friendly. And after the tape stops, we talk for several minutes more. He says he supports most of my positions — especially my opposition to the Drug War. He mentions that he once was a police reporter in Detroit, and saw first-hand the destruction caused by Drug War. I've found that almost all liberals — and many conservatives — oppose the Drug War. This, of course, is contrary to the position of liberal and conservative politicians.

Wednesday, June 28, 2000 — New York City

With no late night show last night and no early show this morning, I get a good night's sleep. My first interview is at 9:40 — a 5-minute phone interview with Kevin Keenan, News Director at WBEN in Buffalo. There appear to be more interviews with news departments than in the last campaign, which I think might be a good sign. It apparently means that Libertarian politics is becoming newsworthy, instead of just entertaining.

The interview with Kevin Keenan is brief and crisp. As often happens, it starts with the question "Who is Harry Browne?" In situations like this, knowing that the interview will be very short, I want to get off the subject of me and onto the subject of voting Libertarian as quickly as possible.

So I say, "I was in the investment world for 30 years — writing books, consulting, and producing a newsletter. Like so many people, I also didn't vote for 30 years, because I knew that whether the Democrats or Republicans won, government would just get bigger, more expensive, and more intrusive. It was only in the early 1990s that I saw that public opinion had shifted to the point that perhaps we could restore an America in which you would be free to live your life as you want to live it — not as Bill Clinton or George W. Bush or Al Gore thinks you should live it." From there on, we're talking about politics, not about me.

The second interview, also on the phone, is with Robert Hennelly at WBAI-FM in New York City. This is part of the Pacifica network — a group of several very liberal radio stations around the country. Hennelly is amazingly sympathetic. He asks why I think it is that we have lost so many traditional American freedoms in the last half-century.

The interview isn't on the air, or even taped. He merely wants to get background material — apparently for a commentary he will deliver later, possibly using this weekend's convention as a news hook.

I'm proud of the interview. Usually, I'm not a top-notch sound-bite producer — speaking in paragraphs, instead of quotable sentences. But several times he asks me to repeat myself so he can take down my thoughts word for word. One time is when I mention Michael Cloud's phrase that the problem isn't the abuse of power, it's the power to abuse — that whenever you give good politicians the power to do good, you automatically give future politicians the power to do bad. I follow that with the point that when you give people the power to run other people's lives, you attract the worst elements of society — who use that power for their own purposes.

He also likes my oldie-but-goodie, "Given that the government's War on Poverty has escalated poverty, and the government's War on Drugs has expanded drug use and produced a terrible crime wave, any War on Abortion will probably lead within ten years to men having abortions."

I then take a taxi from uptown New York to the southern tip of Manhattan for a 30-minute interview with Malachy McCourt at WNYC, an NPR station. McCourt is a jolly Irishman in his 70s, but a socialist through and through. In 30 minutes we cover a lot of ground and the debate is intense but friendly.

I mention that most people aren't old enough to remember when charity hospitals were a staple in all American cities and doctors took care of those who couldn't afford to pay. Now government has run the charity hospitals out of business and buried doctors in red tape so they can no longer make house calls. He says he thinks charity is demeaning, and much prefers an impersonal welfare system.

I say, "What is more demeaning than taking money from people by brute force to distribute to whatever groups are politically connected? There's nothing benevolent about stealing money from families who will have to deprive their own children in order to feed the coffers of bureaucracies and politicians.

"You think the money's going to lift the poor out of poverty. But low-cost housing projects benefit only the building contractors — often at the expense of the poor, who are kicked out of their homes in order to build more expensive homes they can't afford."

By the end of the conversation, he acknowledges that government schools are run more for the benefit of the teachers' unions than the students (and he points out that this is why home-schooling is proliferating), that the Drug War is a resounding failure and tragedy, that the U.S. government is the world's bully. That doesn't mean he's no longer a socialist. But the conversation goes so well that I ask for a tape — so we can put the audio on our website.

Through awful traffic, I take a taxi back to the hotel — taking better than an hour for the taxi to travel the ten miles or so.

Pamela and I take another taxi to LaGuardia Airport. We're catching a plane to Atlanta, to connect to Anaheim, California, for the LP national convention. The plane leaves the gate on time, but we go no further than the runway. The tower holds the plane on the runway and gives no explanation. We sit there for 4 1/2 hours.

While we're waiting, I make a note to prepare a position paper on airline problems. The government operates the air traffic control system, and governments own the airports. Passenger volume and numbers of flights continue to expand rapidly, but airports are always years behind. There is no increase in gates or ticket counters to handle the increased volume. So flight delays abound and the lines at ticket counters get longer.

But who gets blamed for all this? The airlines, of course. And who has to pay passengers for missed connections and other delays? The airlines, of course.

Finally, the plane takes off and arrives in Atlanta a couple of hours later, about four hours after our connection left for Orange County. We make a plane reservation for the next morning and the airline pays for a hotel room for the night — even though the airline probably isn't at fault.

Thursday, June 29, 2000 — Anaheim, California

Pamela and I arise early and catch the plane to California. Unfortunately, we don't have our luggage, so we can't change clothes and I can't shave.

On the plane, two Libertarians from Georgia tell a stewardess who I am. She asks for an autograph, and I wind up having my picture taken with all the flight attendants. Later, as I'm getting off the plane, I scratch my face and remember that I haven't shaved today.

We arrive at the hotel, check in, shower, change, and I get to shave. With Stephanie Yanik and Steve Willis, we drive to Los Angeles for two interviews. More heavy traffic. It takes about two hours to drive to KABC in West Los Angeles. We arrive there for the Larry Elder radio show.

First, however, I have an interview with Hillary Johnson of Worth Magazine, who meets me at the radio station. We talk about the ways Libertarian proposals will give people more money to save and invest, and to make their own choices. She seems to be very aware of libertarian ideas. But who knows?

Then I'm on for two hours with my friend Larry Elder. As always, he treats me as though I'm the only person in the world qualified to be President.

Our only policy disagreement has been over foreign policy. He believes the U.S. government should intervene in world affairs. I have said to him (and I elaborate on it in my book, The Great Libertarian Offer) that there probably never would have been a World War II if the U.S. government hadn't intervened in World War I.

Larry says that he recently had a chance to talk with Henry Kissinger. Larry told him of my attitude toward the World Wars, and asked him what he thought about it. Kissinger considered it for a minute and then said, "There's a great deal of merit to that idea. I tend to agree."

Back at the hotel in Anaheim, there's a pre-convention reception with a few hundred people. It's wonderful to see so many Libertarians whom I may not have seen in many months or many years.

Tomorrow, the 2000 Libertarian national convention begins.

Friday, June 30, 2000 — Anaheim

At 9:30 a.m., the 2000 Libertarian National Convention begins. What an exciting venue. Over a thousand Libertarians are here to select the party's nominee, elect new officers, and celebrate our ideas.

Unfortunately, I can't listen to the speeches. There are many talk-show hosts broadcasting from the convention and a lot of reporters — and I have a full slate of interviews.

The first is with Libertarian Jim Dexter, the Utah chair who has his own radio show. During the interview we come back over and over to the importance of voting Libertarian, rather than trying to vote for a winner.

Then there's a TV interview with Pamela Gentry of C-SPAN. We go out to the C-SPAN bus, sitting in the alley behind the hotel. We talk for about 15 minutes. She says she's interviewing each of the Libertarian presidential candidates, and wants the interviews to be personal profiles more than discussions of issues. But I don't let it go that way; I try to bring my answer to each question around to some way that a Libertarian proposal will make your life better.

Back in the convention hall, I have a half-hour interview with Blanquita Cullum on the Radio America network. I make the theme of the interview the difference between controlling your own life and letting the politicians do that.

We talk about gun laws and she mentions that Pat Buchanan stands up for the 2nd amendment. I point out that Buchanan believes he should control your life; it's just that on a few issues the choices he makes are similar to what you'd choose for yourself. But he still wants to be the one that makes the decisions. He wants to decide what you can buy from foreign countries, what kind of industries should be protected, and so on.

Blanquita asks, "But what would you do about such things as human rights in China?" I say, "If you think it's wrong to trade with China, you can just simply not buy Chinese products. But if you give the government the power to make that decision, you're letting Bill Clinton decide what's right and what's wrong for you."

I then have a 12-minute phone interview with Tom Bustamante of the website WallStreetNewscast.com. They want to interview every presidential candidate and provide each interview as an audio link on the website. I'm the first of the bunch. By this time today, I'm all fired up and flying through every question. Surprisingly, Bustamante makes it a pure political interview, with no particular slant toward the financial markets. The audio interview is posted on the Internet at http://www.WallStreetNewsCast.net/usnews/harrybrowne.html.

Next it's another radio interview in the convention hall — this one with Ken and Rick Minyard, a father and son team on KFIV in Modesto, California. Rick is an LP member, while his father is a Republican. We talk about the possibility of being in the presidential debates. Ken wonders what I would ask George Bush or Al Gore if I got the chance. I say, "Would you be a better person today if you had spent ten years in prison for your youthful indiscretions — like the sentences you favor for young marijuana smokers?"

Then it's ten minutes with Brian Higgins, a Libertarian talk-show host on Liberty Works radio network in Massachusetts. Because of technical problems, the interview is cut short and we don't get a chance to cover very much.

The last interview is with Libertarians Gary Nolan and Lowell Ponte on the Radio America network. Among other things, we talk about the people who won't vote Libertarian because they're afraid it will swing the election to the worst of the Republican or Democratic candidates. Gary tells how he decided after the 1996 campaign that he could no longer vote Republican.

The C-SPAN people tell me the interview with Pamela Gentry didn't take because of some technical problem. So we have to do it again. She asks the same questions — and because I can anticipate them, I do a better job this time.

Saturday, July 1, 2000 — Anaheim

Another round of interviews today. The first is ten minutes with Leslie Aherne and Paul Antakolski on "Living Longer and Better" on WMEX, Boston. We talk about health care, education, and taking care of the poor. Paul seems convinced that nothing would be possible if the government didn't do it. Even though he may be as old as I am, he has no recollection of the multitude of charity hospitals and free clinics that existed throughout America before government regulations ran them out of business.

ZoomCulture.com asks me to tape a series of statements to be played as video on its website. Its audience is dominated by young people. One of the statements is about two minutes on why people should vote Libertarian up and down the ticket. Then they ask me to do a video for each of the four books of mine that are still in print — to be played in its book section.

A Los Angeles Times photographer follows me around for an hour or so, taking pictures of me in various places around the convention.

Barbara Ortutay of the UCLA Daily Bruin interviews me for a few minutes. Surprisingly, she doesn't ask questions particularly related to education or young people — just for my stands on the usual issues.

I have a short interview with Greg Hardesty, a staff writer for the Orange County Register, the large local daily newspaper. He is writing a feature story on the convention for the Sunday edition, and says another reporter will be around to cover the voting tomorrow.

I tape a 5-minute video interview with Ned Martel, Chief Political Correspondent for Voter.com, a large political website. He asks which other presidential candidate I hope to take votes from. I say that they are all on the other side of the fence from the Libertarians. Al Gore, George Bush, Pat Buchanan, and Ralph Nader all want to control your life, make decisions for you, and run the world. I'm the only presidential candidate that believes you're competent to make your own decisions, so we should draw voters away from all four of them.

A young woman from Peninsula High School in the Los Angeles area interviews me briefly for the school paper.

In the late afternoon there's a presidential candidates debate with Don Gorman, Barry Hess, Dave Hollist, and myself. It seems to be a good show for the C-SPAN viewers, as a lot of Libertarian points are made. When asked about gun rights, I say that I would disarm all federal employees, outside of the military, including those guarding Congress at the Capitol — and they will remain disarmed until Congress restores the full and unconditional right of every American to defend himself. Most likely, it would take about five minutes for Congress to come to its senses.

Afterward I meet with caucuses from a number of states.

The Southern Party (a new party formed to restore respect for the Southern heritage) held its first convention today in Charleston, South Carolina. I later learn that Ron Holland gave a speech to the convention in which he endorsed me for President (the Southern Party isn't running candidates this year). The speech has been posted at http://www.ronholland.com/Ch%20Speech.htm.

Sunday, July 2, 2000 — Anaheim

The day begins with the nomination speeches for the presidential candidates. Carla Howell nominates me, seconded by Fred Collins and Reginald Jones. The presentation concludes with the screening of four 1-minute ads produced by our campaign. The ads go over very well.

The roll call of delegations begins with Montana (chosen by lot) and proceeds alphabetically from there to Wyoming and then to the start of the alphabet at Alabama. Massachusetts puts me over 50%, and I finish the first ballot with 56% of the vote.

Don Gorman then goes to the podium and gives a fiery speech urging the party to unify now that the nomination has been decided. I give a short speech, thanking him and Barry Hess for running clean, constructive campaigns.

Before I can leave the auditorium, Andrew Bowers of National Public Radio catches me for an interview for tomorrow's Morning Edition program on NPR. He surrounds the interview with quotes from other Libertarians and with a nice objective description of the LP and what it's trying to achieve. (You can hear the interview at http://www.npr.org/news/national/election2000/bios/libertarian.html.)

Then it's over to the press room for a whirlwind of interviews. Reporters are lined up there waiting to talk with me. There are brief interviews with Kate Folmass of the Los Angeles Times, Victor Infante of the Orange County Weekly, Diana Chiyo McCabe of the Orange County Register, and Erica Werner of the Associated Press. TV interviews include Jon DuPre of Fox News TV, Sam Hall Kaplan of LA's Channel 11, the Fox affiliate, and Mary Moore of the Orange County News channel. There also are Internet interviews with Ned Martel of Voter.com and Kris Lotlikar of ZoomCulture.com.

The article from the Associated Press appears in dozens of daily newsletters around the country over the next few days. Unfortunately, it includes the misstatement, "the 67-year-old Nashville man said he hoped his campaign would reinvigorate his ailing party." As the Libertarian Party is anything but "ailing," I have no reason to want to "reinvigorate" it. This is an example of how people read their own preconceptions into what others say. Probably because the reporter thinks we've been overshadowed by the Reform Party, we're ailing — and because one of my goals is to establish name recognition for the Libertarian label with every American, the reporter thinks of this as my wanting to reinvigorate an ailing party. As I've said before, I would trade 10 national press interviews for one national TV appearance -- wherein I can speak directly to the viewers, rather than having to rely on someone to relay my thoughts.

The stream of interviews is interrupted by Johnny Rotten, the former lead singer of the Sex Pistols. (They apparently have been a very popular band, but since they don't play much Rachmaninoff I'm not in a position to know.) He is very gracious for a man with dyed hair and plenty of earrings. Apparently, he became a friend of Libertarians through reading Bill Winter's LP press releases, and he decided to visit the convention.

After the rush of interviews in the press room, I go back to my room to change clothes. While there, I have phone interviews with Mike Ambrosini of KNX radio in Los Angeles and Norman Hall of Associated Press radio.

Then it's back down to the convention floor to give my acceptance speech, which is telecast to the nation by C-SPAN. The theme of the speech is "We believe in you" — explaining that all other parties are trying to control your life, but that Libertarians believe you have the ability to make your own decisions. I place special emphasis on the Drug War. (Video and text versions of the speech are on the campaign website at www.HarryBrowne.org.)

The traditional Presidential Banquet, a black-tie fund-raising dinner, is held in the evening. Gary Nolan does an entertaining job as emcee. I am privileged to be able to present the Thomas Paine award — for the best communicator of Libertarian ideas — to Michael Cloud, who has done a wonderful job of developing Libertarian soundbites, of giving persuasive speeches, of writing speeches, of showing people how to persuade rather than argue, and of raising millions of dollars for Libertarian causes.

The banquet raises about $125,000.

Monday, July 3, 2000 — Anaheim & Washington, D.C.

After going to bed around midnight, Pamela and I get up at 4:45 to drive with Jim Babka and Steve Willis to a studio where I will be on C-SPAN's Washington Journal at 6:15. The interviewer (in Washington) is one I haven't seen before, and I never do catch his name. The show goes well — with good phone questions that allow me to state our case in terms that show how a Libertarian America will dramatically improve the listener's life.

When we return to the convention hotel, I have the opportunity to meet for the first time Richard Cowan of NORML (the National Organization for the Reform of Marijuana Laws). He has been fighting for years against the Drug War. He is very kind in telling me how much he enjoyed my acceptance speech and how supportive he is of the campaign.

Susan Marie Weber is running for state representative in California. She has a telephone interview scheduled with Lou Penrose at KNWZ in Palm Springs this morning. We go to her room to await the call. When it comes, she tells Lou that I'm with her, and I speak with him for 10 minutes on the air. I've talked with him before, and he's very helpful to Libertarians.

Later I have an in-person interview in the press room with Stephen Cox and Bill Bradford of Liberty magazine. They want to know why I think we should do better this year than in 1996. I tell them the party is more than twice as large as in 1996, we have raised more money, we have much better relations with the press and broadcasters, we are getting much more media exposure, we will do many times as much advertising, and much more. No one can predict the outcome, but we have many opportunities we've never had before.

After a brief phone interview with Jay Lawrence at KFI radio in Los Angeles, Pamela and I head for the Orange County airport to catch a plane to Washington.

We have to change planes in Salt Lake City, at which time I have a phone interview with Michelle Laxalt and Barry Lynn on a radio network. Because I'm late reaching them by phone, Jim Babka handles the first 15 minutes of the interview and does a fine job. Michelle is a Republican who was very good to me during the 1996 campaign and Barry is a Democrat. Both are very respectful. We all defend Barry against a Libertarian caller who complains that Barry isn't nice to Libertarians. Actually, he is.

Tonight on CBS' Late Late Show, Craig Kilborn says, "In other news, the libertarian party nominated Harry Browne to be their presidential candidate. Not much is known about him except he will never, ever be president."

I'm glad to be noticed — negatively or positively. But we need to make sure a great deal is known far and wide about the Libertarian candidate and the Libertarian Party.

Today in the Rasmussen daily poll I jumped from 1.0% to 1.4%, undoubtedly as a result of many people seeing the LP convention on C-SPAN. This demonstrates how important national exposure is.

Our ads will start running on national cable networks later this month, and it's vital that we raise as much money as possible to show them far and wide. We are the only party offering people the opportunity to be free to live their lives as they want, but they can't vote for us if they don't know about us. And it isn't enough for them to see one ad; they need to see us often to be reassured that other people are seeing us, and therefore to know that their votes will be added to those of others and make an important statement.

Tuesday, July 4, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

It may be the 4th of July, but a lot is going on.

The day starts with a phone interview with Lee Rodgers and Melanie Morgan at KSFO in San Francisco. It is scheduled for 30 minutes, but lasts 45. It begins with my usual "We want you to be free to live your life as you want to live it, not as Al Gore or George W. Bush thinks is best for you . . ." When I'm finished, Rodgers says, "I wish the two major-party candidates were as articulate and well-spoken as you are." The interview continues, we take a number of calls from people with concerned questions, and I consider the show to be a success.

Next there's a brief phone conversation with someone at CNN, a "pre-interview" call to get information on which to base questions for the live interview that will take place later today.

I have a 10-minute phone interview with Dave Arrowwood of WSM and WTN in Nashville. He is very friendly.

Then it's off to CNN in downtown Washington. I have a short interview with Lou Waters (he's in Atlanta). It goes extremely well. Not only do I feel that I'm in good voice, but he seems to ask all the right questions — such as "Why do you think you'll do any better in 2000 than you did in 1996?" (Answer: "Because the LP is much bigger, stronger, and better financed than in 1996. We expect to be much more visible this year — allowing us to let most voters know there's an alternative that's determined to get government out of your life.")

In the evening I have an in-studio one-hour interview with Jim Bohannon on the Westwood One national radio network. He is a liberal, and I had an extremely argumentative interview with him in 1996. Tonight, however, we get along well — although there are still plenty of disagreements. I get a chance to say everything I want to, and he recites our website address and phone number twice during the show. Afterward, he and I tape a 5-minute interview to go out to all the stations on the network tomorrow morning.

Wednesday, July 5, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

A big day today. Two national TV shows, three national radio shows, and five other interviews.

While eating breakfast in a coffee shop with Pamela, Jim Babka, and Steve Willis, I have an interview on my cell phone with Kathryn Jean Lopez of National Review's website. Near the end, she asks about my relations with the media. I point out that radio and TV talk shows are very good to me. But print interviews require me to spend lengthy periods talking with someone who will use the eventual article to push a personal point of view that may have little to do with my main points. I say, "For example, you probably won't mention that the essence of my campaign is to make it possible for you to live your life as you want to live it, not as Al Gore or George Bush thinks you should."

(As it turns out, she publishes the interview on the National Review website in Q-&-A format, including all of my statements. However, someone transcribed some of my statements incorrectly. One statement comes out that "government gets bigger, more expensive, and more instructive" instead of more intrusive. Elsewhere the transcript has me saying that the LP is now "well over half the size of what it was four years ago," instead of more than twice the size. I email Kathryn about it and she makes the corrections on the website the same day. (The interview is at http://www.nationalreview.com/interrogatory/interrogatory070500.html.)

The first in-person interview of the day is with Teresa Joerger of the Washington Times, the daily competition to the Washington Post. She asks many questions and takes more extensive notes than anyone I've seen in this campaign. She is writing a series of articles on third-party candidates. She asks Pamela why she first suggested that I run for President in the early 1990s. Pamela refers her to the appendix Pamela wrote for my latest book, The Great Libertarian Offer.

From there, we go to a taping with Greg Corombos at Radio America. We talk for about seven minutes, so that he can put together material for their on-the-hour news updates. The interview goes well; both the questions and answers are brisk and to the point.

In the car, I do a quick phone interview with Kelly Beaucar of ConservativeHQ.com. She has been very good to us, and the article she puts together today on my nomination is no exception. It explains our campaign approach very accurately and persuasively. (It can be seen at http://www.conservativehq.com/chq/displayarticle?articleId=1820.)

Next is a taping at ABC radio news. Rusty Lutz asks a series of questions, from which he will extract soundbites for a report in the hourly newscasts.

We have been under the impression that I was to tape an episode of ABC's Nightline show with Ted Koppel today. But it turns out the producers wanted me to come to ABC to get acquainted and see whether they want me to be on a future show. The interview goes very well. There are about a dozen ABC people asking questions in a large boardroom.

I point out that my campaign not only might make a good subject for a Nightline episode, but that I could be someone to call on to discuss the crisis of the day. I stress that most panel discussions always assume that some government program is necessary to handle whatever is today's crisis — and the controversy is over how the government should react. Having me on will provide a different viewpoint — one that calls attention to how the government itself has caused the problem and how it can be solved by getting the government out of the way.

One of the Nightline staff members talks with someone at Newman Communications (our P.R. firm) later in the day. He says the general consensus of the people in the meeting is that I scored a B+ in my interview. So you may be seeing me on Nightline yet.

We rush from ABC over to CNN-TV for the Inside Politics show. Bernard Shaw does a nice job of interviewing me, giving easy questions that are more intended to elicit information than to be confrontational. I may be wrong, but most interviews seem much more calm than they used to be.

Then we head back to Radio America for the Oliver North radio show. Unfortunately, no one told us that North doesn't broadcast from there — even though he's on that network. Instead, he does his show from the MS-NBC studios, since his TV show is broadcast from there shortly after his radio show airs.

We make it to the MS-NBC studio about 15 minutes late, but still in time for a 35-minute interview. He has improved considerably as a host since I was on his show in 1996. He keeps the show moving along crisply. After talking with me himself for a while, we go through about a dozen calls in as many minutes. He and I disagree on several issues, but he has always been a gracious host.

In the car I use my cellular phone for an interview with Joan Buffington at KVMR in Sacramento. It is short and to the point, but I have the opportunity to cover most of the essential points.

Next on the agenda is an in-studio, 11-minute interview with Ray Suarez on the PBS News Hour with Jim Lehrer. When I was on this show in 1996, I was surprised that the interviewer was very polite and simply seeking information from me. The same is true tonight, as Suarez asks very informative questions and the interview goes swimmingly. (You can see the interview through a link on the campaign website.)

Thursday, July 6, 2000 — Washington

Another good day. It starts with an interview at CBS Radio, where I have a 15-minute taped interview with Peter Maer. It goes very well, and it will be aired this weekend on the network. After the interview, Dottie Lynch comes by to see us. She is overseeing the CBS-AOL website that will be up and running soon. Apparently, we will be covered there.

From CBS we drive to Arlington, Virginia, to USA Today for an interview with Tom Squitieri. He wrote an article on the nomination that appeared this past Monday. It was as much about the Reform Party as about us, but it was still helpful. Today he is very friendly, takes a great deal of time getting information from me, and then introduces Jim Babka, Steve Willis, and me to several reporters and editors at USA Today.

Then we go to Insight Magazine, a weekly newsmagazine published by The Washington Times, for an interview with Steve Goode. He mentions that he's a "small l" libertarian, and his questions indicate a knowledge of libertarian ideas. While there, the staff photographer shoots about 30 pictures of me. Heaven only knows what will show up in the magazine.

Back at the hotel I have a phone interview with Philip Smith of the Drug Reform Coordination Network. He is writing an article on us for his email release list. As he didn't see my acceptance speech at the convention, I go over some of elements of the Drug War section. He sounds very supportive. (The interview is at http://www.drcnet.org/wol/144.html#harrybrowne.)

Another phone interview follows. This one with Gary Barrett on Policast.com, an all-politics Internet radio station. He asks several questions and takes three calls from listeners during the 15-minute interview.

The final event of the day is an appearance on MS-NBC's Equal Time TV show. It is similar to CNN's Crossfire, but with Oliver North representing the Republicans and Paul Begala the Democrats.

In the first half of tonight's show they have two opposing guests, one a Democrat and one a Republican, the usual format. The Republican is Armstrong Williams, a prominent radio talk-show host who often appears on TV as an apologist for the Republicans. We chat before the show and he tells Jim Babka to be sure to call him to arrange for me to be on his radio show.

Since I'm neither Republican nor Democrat, I'm the only guest in my 12-minute segment. The interview goes very well. I'm able to dominate the conversation and get across many of the points I want to emphasize, no matter what questions are asked.

Both hosts are in favor of the Drug War. Begala asks why I'm not a Republican, since my only difference with North is over the Drug War — and otherwise we both want smaller government. I point out that the Republicans don't deliver on smaller government, just as the Democrats don't deliver on respect for personal liberty or world peace.

Then Begala tries to engage me in a debate about the limits of the Constitution. As I can see that this could go on endlessly, I complain that we're missing the point. I shamelessly turn to the camera and say, "The real issue is whether you think government is too big, about right, or too small. If you think government is too big, you have only one choice — vote Libertarian." I expect North or Begala to interrupt me; neither does. I also expect the director to switch to a different camera, but he doesn't. I get a clear shot at the audience. I wind up inviting viewers to visit my website, and Begala apparently is so taken by surprise that he repeats my web address.

Friday, July 7, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

My first interview is a 15-minute phone conversation with Marc Roberts at WERC in Birmingham, Alabama. At one point, he says, "Wait a minute. Are you saying we should legalize drugs???" He is astounded at the idea — and apparently is hearing it for the first time (maybe he just came back from a 20-year space mission). He says, "That's wacko!" I ask, "Was it wacko when alcohol Prohibition was repealed in the 1930s — ending the gang warfare, drive-by shootings, and police corruption?" Because he's never discussed the subject before (and he's a talk-show host!), he's at a severe disadvantage in the ensuing discussion.

Next I have a phone interview with Matt Santaspirt of FoxNewsOnline.com. He is writing profiles of five third-party candidates, which will appear on the their website on Wednesday, July 12. (However, as of that date the website was still under construction.) The conversation goes on for about a half-hour. He is 24 and seems to agree that government is way too big and intrusive.

I tell him that George Bush, Al Gore, and the others are just arguing over who's best qualified to run your life and run the world — and I apply this to several issues we discuss. He says John Hagelin of the Natural Law Party wants health care to focus more on prevention of disease and asks what I think of that. As I start to answer, he says, "I forgot, you don't think he should be making any decisions for the rest of us."

Jim Babka, Steve Willis, and I drive to WTOP for a live 3-minute radio interview with Debra Anderson in the middle of a newscast. She introduces me as the candidate of the "Liberation Party," but gets it right the next time the name comes up. She asks short questions; I give short answers, emphasizing my desire to stop politicians from running your life, stop interfering with your ability to get a job, stop presuming they know what's best for you.

We then head for Radio America for a 40-minute network interview with Blanquita Cullum. She interviewed me at the convention last week, and she was very good to us during the 1996 campaign. She is very cordial today, although she is ailing slightly from eating some bad food last night.

One of the callers is a radio-station owner in the Boston area who is a strong Republican. He says every vote for me is a vote for Al Gore, because it will be taken away from George Bush. I say, "You've just said that people should vote for Republicans even though they haven't earned your vote. Why? Why vote for a person or party that has done nothing to make government smaller, nothing to make your life better? They punish you and you reward them. Only by voting Libertarian will you let them know they can't take you for granted anymore."

In the car I talk by phone with Elizabeth Hurt who is writing an article for www.Business2.com. Her primary focus is on the Internet and the possibilities of taxing, censoring, or regulating the Internet. I tell her that only Libertarians can be relied upon to protect the Internet, because only Libertarians are against taxing, censoring, and regulating on principle — not just to pander to Internet users. As it turns out, she will include that quote in the article that will appear on July 13 (http://www.business2.com/content/channels/ebusiness/2000/07/13/14269).

She also asks whether Silicon Valley moguls are helping us. I tell her no, we haven't earned their support yet. They don't want to bet on a party that hasn't demonstrated yet that it can make a difference, but I hope we'll soon be in a position to command their respect, their support, and their money. Unfortunately, she makes this the theme of her article — emphasizing that I'm not seeking Silicon Valley votes.

An interview with John McColloch of WXYT in Detroit is cancelled because of a local story that has taken over the news.

The final event of the day is an interview on the America's Voice TV Network (formerly National Empowerment Television). I know that it is to be with Ellen Ratner, a liberal whose radio show I've been on several times. But when I walk into the studio, there with her is Armstrong Williams, the Republican I met last night at Equal Time. It is another Crossfire/Equal-Time type show, with a Republican and a Democrat as hosts plus guests, cookies, and chaos.

Fortunately, I'm the only guest. Neither one agrees with me, but that's okay. They try continually to interrupt me, but that's okay, too, because I've learned to take command of a show and keep people from interrupting me (as long as I'm in the same studio and not at a remote location).

Ratner dislikes all my smaller-government plans, and can't for the life of her see how children would be educated without federal education programs. Williams thinks it's ridiculous that I don't support Republicans — since Republicans are (supposedly) for smaller government.

At one point he asks whether I really believe there's no difference between Republicans and Democrats. I say there's a difference in rhetoric but they both make government bigger, more expensive, more intrusive, more oppressive. Williams claims that's crazy and says, "Look at the differences on Affirmative Action, abortion, the death penalty, same-sex marriage, capital gains."

I say "Yes, there's a difference in rhetoric, but look at each of those issues. The Republicans haven't implemented a significant change with any of them. So why should we care which of those two parties is elected?"

Ratner wants to go on to something else, but Williams stops her. After having scoffed at some of what I'd said earlier, he now says, "Wait a minute, Ellen. Listen to what the man says. He may be on to something."

Strangely, all the callers are supportive — even though only one of them appears to be a Libertarian (a woman who is running for Congress in Texas). A man says he's a Texan who likes some of the things Bush has done in Texas but really likes what I'm advocating. A Canadian woman says she saw the convention and is all for what the Libertarians are proposing — adding that they have the same big-government problems in Canada. She says she longs for the day when both America and Canada get rid of the "dumb-bells" in charge.

Another caller asks my stand on the 2nd amendment. I say that as President I would issue an executive order disarming every non-military federal employee, especially the guards at the Capitol Building, and would keep them disarmed until Congress restores to every American the complete and unconditional right to defend himself.

Finally, someone asks what I could do in the face of a Republican or Democratic Congress. I launch into my "first day in office" routine. When I mention pardoning all the non-violent drug offenders in federal prison, Ellen Ratner throws up her hands. I assume this is positively the last straw for her — but she says, "At last you're saying something I can agree with." But, of course, Williams thinks this is insane.

In short, a good time is had by all.

Saturday, July 8, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

I have a 20-minute interview with Todd Hartley at KTAR in Phoenix. Before we go on the air, he says, "I'm a really big supporter of what you're doing." And he demonstrates it by boosting me and other Libertarians on the air.

Late in the interview, a woman caller says she likes everything I've said but wants to know how I feel about open borders. I tell her the borders are open, that governments will never be able to close them. All politicians can do to try to close the borders is to invade your privacy, by making you carry an identity card and by threatening employers with fines and imprisonment for hiring illegal aliens. Even so, the immigrants still will come across the borders. I say we must close the down the welfare state so that we won't worry about who comes into America. A free and prosperous nation doesn't fear anyone coming or going, but a welfare state will always be scared of poor people coming in and rich people getting out. The caller says she doesn't agree but still likes the other things I've said.

FreedomChannel.com is a lavish political website funded by a number of large foundations. Among other things, they provide 90-second video clips of candidates speaking on various issues. Today a two-person crew arrives at my hotel room to tape video clips on ten different subjects. (The clips can be seen by going to our campaign website.)

Then it's off to the airport to fly home for a few days, thankful for a very productive week — with 6 national TV shows, 8 national radio shows, 8 local radio shows, 4 press interviews, and 7 Internet interviews.

Sunday, July 9, 2000 — Nashville

At last, a day off — sort of. Home after two weeks on the road, I spend several hours going through the mail that has piled up while I was gone.

In the evening I have a one-hour radio interview with Gary Nolan on the Westwood One network. Gary is guest-hosting for Wayne LaPierre of the NRA who is the regular host. I'm a bit long-winded, going into a lot of examples regarding, health care, Social Security, campaign finance reform, and other subjects. But we do cover the basics, and the two of us wind up pointing out that the way to waste your vote is to vote Democratic or Republican — because that will encourage the politicians to keep doing what they're doing now.

Wednesday, July 12, 2000 — Nashville

After two days of catching up on miscellaneous writing projects and other desk-clearing activities, I'm back doing interviews.

The first today is at 7:30 in the morning — about 15 minutes with Mary McKenna and Dale Carter on KFKF-FM in Kansas City, Missouri. Normally, when the phone rings for an interview, it's the producer of the show — who then puts me on hold until the host is ready for me. Today I answer the phone, saying "Harry Browne." A man's voice says, "Mr. President." I say, "Thank you." A woman chimes in, I realize they have placed the call to me while on the air, and I thank myself for not making some kind of smart remark to what I'd thought was the show's producer.

He says he's a conservative Republican, but he immediately takes to my proposals. When I say that either Gore or Bush will inevitably make the federal government bigger, he points out that Bush yesterday proposed a new foster-care program that will cost a couple billion dollars more per year — and probably won't work any better than other federal programs. She perks up when I mention pardoning the drug prisoners.

The next show is in Kansas City, Kansas — right across the Mississippi river from the last one — an hour with Tom Becka at KMBZ. He says he voted for me last time, but doesn't intend to do so this time, because he's afraid of Al Gore being elected. He brings up the idea that the next President will make critical Supreme Court appointments. I point out that Anthony Kennedy, Sandra Day O'Connor, and David Souter aren't that much different from Stephen Breyer and Ruth Ginsburg. The Supreme Court argument is just one more way the Republicans try to make you think one big-government candidate is preferable to another.

I then have a 20-minute phone interview with Michael Richards of a magazine called The Senior Focus. I assume he's concerned about Social Security, but he asks questions on other issues while I keep trying to get onto the topic of Social Security. He seems quite supportive of libertarian positions.

Tom Sailor of Your Money magazine calls to discuss my book, Fail-Safe Investing, for an article he's doing on alternatives to standard stock-market investing. I try to get him onto politics but to no avail.

The final interview of the day is a doozy. Don & Mike are shock jocks on CBS radio. They interview me for about 25 minutes. They want to talk about sex; I want to talk about politics. I seem to do a good job of converting their questions into opportunities to talk about politics. I decline to answer personal questions. Quite an experience, but they seem genuinely in favor of my positions (which I managed to get across). Later in the day we get some emails from people who heard the show, went to the website, and were favorably impressed with what we offer.

The interview is conducted over a digital phone line I have in my home — making it sound to the listeners as though I'm in the studio with the hosts. There is no handset for the phone — just a box, a microphone, and earphones. The phone doesn't ring, and it has to be hung up by pressing a button on the box. Usually, when the digital line is used, the station breaks the connection as soon as the interview is over.

At the end of this interview, I get a call from Press Secretary Jim Babka who's been listening to the show on the air. He asks what I think, I say, "Well, they are a bit raunchy." He tells me my voice is still coming through on the air; the station didn't disconnect the line, and the hosts are listening to see whether I say anything after the interview. Oh well.

(Tomorrow on the Don & Mike show, the announcer will introduce them by saying, "Here are the men the next President of the United States, Harry Browne, thinks are a bit raunchy.")

As I've said before, I think shows like this are quite valuable. They reach people who don't listen to the talk shows that are focused on politics. I seem to do well on almost all of them, and I may be the only presidential candidate showing up on them.

Thursday, July 13, 2000 — Nashville

I start the day fully embarrassed. By setting my clock incorrectly, I have missed two early shows (one will be rescheduled for tomorrow and the other next week).

I then have an interview with Libertarian Brian Higgins on Liberty Works Radio in the Boston area. He invites three non-libertarian talk-show hosts from the network to ask me questions. One asks whether I would have a litmus test for Supreme Court appointments. I say that any prospective judge must accept the Constitution exactly as written — not as someone interprets it or as someone believes the "original intent" was. The Constitution is written in plain English, not Esperanto or Chinese, so it doesn't need interpretation.

Knight-Ridder news service has called Robert Brunner of our office. The reporter said a company named America Chews is producing a cookie with my picture on it — and Knight-Ridder wants a quote from me for a news story. I think about it for a minute and say, "I'm hoping this will give people a taste of freedom." (The company has produced cookies for each presidential candidate, and is showing them at www.AmericaChews.com.)

I drive to the other side of Nashville for a radio interview. Near the station is the Gore for President national headquarters, set up by the Gore campaign during one of its many reinventions of Al Gore — presumably to show that Gore is a good ol' boy from Tennessee, not a Washington insider. The campaign actually is still run from Washington, but there's a huge complex of offices here — probably doing very little but running up bills. When your campaign is financed by the taxpayers, there's no need to stint on the expenses.

I arrive at the local National Public Radio (NPR) station for a one-hour interview with Juan Williams, the TV pundit, who is broadcasting from Washington to 162 stations. It goes very well. He does an amazing job of being non-partial. He never once reveals any support or opposition for anything I say, and yet he asks very pertinent questions. He provides a 2-minute introduction that is 99.44% accurate — an unusual occurrence — and says a lot of what we'd like to have said about us. The callers are all skeptical, but none of them is hostile. There is a small technical problem that creates a one-second transmission delay from Juan to me and vice-versa, so there are a few awkward spots as we attempt to talk over each other.

Juan asks a number of questions about eventual Libertarian goals for society. I realize that we're going far beyond what a President could achieve at the federal level. So I twice make the point that the question isn't whether you agree right now with all these goals. Rather, it's very important that you decide in what direction you want to move, in order to know how best to vote. If you want government to continue getting larger and more intrusive, you should vote for Republicans or Democrats. If that isn't what you want, you must make sure you don't reward Republicans and Democrats by voting for them. Only by voting Libertarian can you make it clear that you want to start the process of making government smaller. (There's a link to the interview at our campaign website.)

After arriving home I have a one-hour phone interview with John David Wells on KNUU in Las Vegas. He is very friendly and supportive. He asks me to tell the first five things I'd do as President, and that becomes the theme of the show. It turns out to be ten things — including such acts as pardoning the drug prisoners, disarming the people guarding the politicians until all Americans have the same rights to protection as politicians, ordering a carload of pens from Office Depot to sign vetoes, bringing the troops home from overseas, and so on.

Friday, July 14, 2000 — Nashville

Today's first interview is at 7a.m. with Brian Weigand and Eric Power, two young men on the Morning Line on WLNI-FM in Lynchburg, Virginia. They are both completely favorable to all my proposals. During the 30-minute interview, they simply assume that everyone should want to be free. They put a link to my website and to the LP website at their website at www.wlni.com/morningline/index.shtml.

On July 7 I was on a confrontational television show with Armstrong Williams. He began by being strongly opposed to a third-party candidate who he thinks would siphon votes away from George Bush. By the end of the interview, he was asking his co-host to stop interrupting so that he could hear more of my Libertarian ideas. He wasn't converted, of course, but he demonstrated an open mind in public that's very rare for a conservative or liberal talk-show host.

Today I'm on his radio show on the Talk America radio network. Once again, we have disputes over how to get to smaller government, but he's very open-minded. As we go into the first commercial break he says, "I like this guy, I really do. He makes a lot of sense."

One area in which we can't come to agreement is over school vouchers. He agrees that private colleges have become clones of government colleges, but he doesn't accept what seems obvious to me — that this happened because private colleges accepted government vouchers in the form of student loans, G.I. bill tuition, and other federal subsidies. With those subsidies come federal control. The same would follow if federal vouchers are used at private elementary and high schools. The result would be the end of the private-school alternative — in other words, the end of any "school choice." He says, "But you don't understand . . ." and he goes on to tell me how bad the government schools are — as those the severity of the disease justifies the wrong cure.

The interview lasts an hour. At the end, I point out that we seem to agree about 80-90% on what we want to happen, but we differ considerably about what we should do to achieve that. He's willing to give up hope for a free America and accept the small differences between the Republicans and the Democrats — voting for whomever he thinks will do the least harm. I'm not willing to give up; I want to do what's necessary to lay the groundwork to bring about a Libertarian America before the end of the decade.

It appears that this is the start of another good media relationship.

Next is a one-hour radio interview with Carol Pearson on the Voice of America. The show is aired in many places around the world, but it also reaches people in the U.S. through the Internet. It's interesting to receive questions from places like South Africa and India. There's also a caller from Colombia, who praises my stand on the Drug War. He says the U.S. government's program to "fumigate" the Colombian cocaine crops from the air probably will kill people with poisons, as well as destroy many other crops — putting legal farmers out of business. There also are calls from U.S. voters, listening on the Internet.

The last show of the day is with Charles Goyette at KTAR in Phoenix. This is my first appearance on this show since 1996, and I've forgotten how supportive he is. On the air he certainly seems to be a libertarian through and through. During one commercial break, we chat off the air and we agree to have several interviews this year — perhaps short ones to keep up to date on the campaign.

The callers are almost universally supportive and complimentary. However, one says, "I like a lot of what you say, but it sounds like the old hippie slogan that you should do whatever you want if it doesn't hurt others." I say that I'm not really familiar with what hippies said, but we Libertarians do believe you should be free to do what you want so long as you don't intrude on someone else's person or property. After all, you're the one who gets up and goes to work everyday; why shouldn't you be the one to control the money you earn? You're the one who's responsible for your family, so why should the politicians make the decisions? I ask him if that makes sense, and he says, "Perfect sense. I guess I'm a Libertarian."

Saturday, July 15, 2000 — Nashville

The Rasmussen Poll (the only one that tracks the presidential campaign every day) showed that we have climbed from 0.4% on June 29 (the day before the LP convention) to 1.6% on July 13 (the latest poll as of this date). The climb was steady during the convention period, and then again during last week — when I appeared on six national television shows and several national radio shows. The latest figures are:

Bush 41.5%
Gore 36.4%
Nader 4.0%
Buchanan 2.4%
Browne 1.6%
Phillips 0.3%
Some Other 2.7%
Not Sure 11.1%

You can see the daily tracking on the Internet at www.rasmussenresearch.com/html/poll_demo.cfm?PollID=804&DemoID=199.

The figure of 1.6% represents 1.6 million votes — which is 3-1/2 times what we achieved in 1996, and nearly twice the all-time LP record set in 1980. It's still early days, but 1.6% doesn't have to be the upper limit. As our ads begin to run this month we will reach many more people. And as I continue to appear on national TV shows, we will reach even more people.

If we break out into the millions of votes, we will garner new attention and respect from the press, the public, and especially from the millions of people who have been on the sidelines — not voting because they saw no hope of getting government out of their lives.

If Pat Buchanan fails to get 5% of the vote in the election, the Reform Party will have no federal subsidy for the next election, and the party undoubtedly will wither and die — since there is no ideological glue holding it together. After the election, Ralph Nader most likely will turn his attention to other matters, and the Green Party will go back to being a quaint obscurity.

Only the Libertarian Party will remain as the challenger to the two-party system that more and more people are becoming fed up with. This will lay the groundwork for competitive Congressional races in 2002 and a much more competitive presidential race in 2004.

We have the most powerful political message possible. We're offering to set people free to live their lives as they want to live — not as Al Gore or George Bush thinks is best for them. But that message has no power if it isn't heard. It is our task to reach as many millions of people as possible this year, as often as possible this year, to let them know there's a party, a candidate, a political program that will set them free.

That will take a lot of hard work and a lot of time. And it will take a lot of money — because advertising is the one sure way to reach millions of people. But if we want to change the political climate in America this decade, we need to do it. And we need to do it now.

Monday, July 17, 2000 — Nashville

Yesterday and today there are no interviews, as I do some telephone fund-raising and catch up on some campaign writing projects.

Meanwhile, there is both good news & bad news on the poll front.

The bad news is that there's been a slight slippage in the Rasmussen Poll from its 1.6% level last week:

Bush 41.7%
Gore 33.1%
Nader 5.5%
Buchanan 2.5%
Browne 1.4%
Phillips 0.1%
Others 3.8%
Not sure 11.9%

Further bad news is that the latest Gallup Poll, released today, includes the four other main candidates, but not me.

The good news is that Zogby today released its monthly poll. This month we're at 1.7%, up from 1.3% on June 21:

Bush 42.5%
Gore 37.4%
Nader 6.0%
Buchanan 2.6%
Browne 1.7%
No other choices listed, but 9.8% unaccounted for.

Tuesday, July 18, 2000 — Nashville

Five interviews today. None of the hosts are Libertarians, but all of them are very friendly and supportive.

The first is at 7:35 a.m. on A.M. America, broadcast on 15 stations of the Liberty Works Radio network. The hosts are two men and a woman, whose names I never catch. It is a typical traffic-time morning show with jokes and kidding. But all three are supportive, and I get positive responses to my plea to end the Drug War.

Then it's about 15 minutes with Mancow Muller on WKQZ-FM in Chicago. Actually, I have about 3 minutes; the rest of the time it's Mancow talking. He delivers monologues on several subjects in the middle of the interview. One of them is on the evils of the Green Party. He says, "Read their platform, folks; it's pure communism." (Later I go to the Green Party site at www.GreenParty.org, read the platform, and discover he's right.)

His only disagreement with me is over the Drug War. And even there, when I ask him what he thinks should be done about drugs, he mostly wants to end the punitive sentences and tone down the Drug War.

He says he's all for the Libertarians, but he's voting Republican because he can't stand the idea of Al Gore in the White House. However, when I point out at length that voting for Bush is giving up and guaranteeing that he'll never get what he wants, he says "Okay, I'm voting for you — for now."

Next it's most of an hour with the Jeff Johns show on WLKK in Erie, Pennsylvania. He, too, is very supportive. He says he planned to scan my book, The Great Libertarian Offer, over the weekend in preparation for the show, but he became so engrossed he read it in its entirety. There are many calls, almost all of them very friendly.

However, one person calls to oppose my stand on the Drug War. The caller after that refers to his predecessor as a nitwit. I say we must recognize that many people are bound to think the Drug War is doing good because they're exposed to only one point of view. The tide of public opinion on the Drug War is turning our way; let's encourage that movement by treating with respect those who haven't yet caught on.

The next show is another friendly one. Stephen Cobb on KSNX in Phoenix says he really liked my convention acceptance speech, which he saw on C-SPAN — and decided immediately to book me on his show. The interview lasts most of an hour and is friendly throughout.

The final show is another lovefest. Richard Dixon at WAPI in Birmingham interviews me for about 15 minutes. He says, "I love the Libertarian message," and later, "Big government is nothing but oppressive." He also says he saw a poll that showed me at 6% with Kentucky voters, but I don't get a chance to find out where he saw that.

Wednesday, July 19, 2000 — Nashville

I have an early interview on the Kevin Matthews show on WXCD-FM, a rock music station in Chicago. I like to do these shows because they reach young people — and especially people who don't pay as much attention to politics as the typical talk-show listener. In the studio with him is Jennifer Stephens of the station's news department. They are both friendly and favorably disposed toward what I say. Kevin says he will put a link to our campaign on the station's website. He ends the interview with the statement, "It's certainly nice to hear someone actually defend the Constitution."

The next interview is with Barbara Schoetzau of the VOA Background Report on the Voice of America, transmitting overseas to absentee voters and others. She tapes about 20 minutes of questions and answers. A lot of the interview deals with the obstacles third parties face in getting on the ballot and getting attention.

The day's final interview is with Spence (no other name given) on the Planet Spence show on KVTA in Ventura, California. He is very supportive on and off the air. He says he's leaning toward voting Libertarian this year.

Thursday, July 20, 2000 — Nashville

Two shows today. The first is with Steve Gill at WLAC in Nashville. Due to a technical glitch, a scheduled 15-minute interview turns out to be only two minutes. We cover the income tax only, but I do get in the website address and phone number.

The second interview is with Mark Scott at WXYT in Detroit. Mark has become a good friend of the LP over the years. He is very supportive of Libertarians and of my candidacy. He mentions the Great Libertarian Offer book several times.

Mark brings to mind how fortunate we are to have so many libertarian or Libertarian radio hosts around the country: David Brudnoy in Boston, Lionel on the Internet, Zoe Hieronimous in Baltimore, Neal Boortz in Atlanta, Carl Wiglesworth in San Antonio, Larry Elder in Los Angeles, Gene Burns in San Francisco, Jim Dexter in Salt Lake City, Lowell Ponte and Gary Nolan syndicated — plus several dozen libertarian hosts in smaller markets.

Friday, July 21, 2000 — Nashville

My first show today is 30 minutes on WSB with Neal Boortz, Atlanta's top talk-show host and a staunch Libertarian. We talk about the attention the media are giving to Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan, while rarely referring to me. I say that this could change with the kickoff of our ad campaign next week. We'll be sending videotapes of the ads and the ad schedule to many journalists. And we're almost ready to kick off a campaign to stop the media blackout. Neal and I also talk about my public appearance in Atlanta next Thursday.

Next is an hour with Jeff Styles on WGOW in Chattanooga. He seems to agree with basic libertarian concepts, but is concerned about clear-cutting in Tennessee forests. I point out that private companies don't usually do damage to their own property, because that hurts their future profits. I also mention organizations like the Nature Conservancy that raise money from people who want to keep special lands out of private hands; they band together to buy the property and keep it off the market.

He agrees that such organizations do good work, but says they don't cover all the property that needs to be protected, and so we need government to help out as well by forcing property off the market. I point out that giving the government such power is also giving it the power to tell him what he can do with his own property. He calls my statement demagoguery.

Lastly, he asks where I stand on gun control. I say I want to repeal all the gun laws — as they don't keep criminals from acquiring and using guns but they do keep innocent citizens from defending themselves. He says I'm preaching to the choir in southern Tennessee, as that's strong gun rights territory.

My last interview is with Adrian Gregory of the Galveston County News in Texas. She's preparing an article on third-party candidates. She sounds very young, but very conscientious about making sure the details are correct.

Saturday, July 22, 2000 — Nashville

One interview this evening — another of the comedy shows that are working well for us. This is the Gordon Brothers' Weekend Revue on WDBO in Orlando. There are three Gordon brothers — Doug, Scott, and Jason — and they all get into the act, making it difficult for me to tell which one is talking.

They each took the SelectSmart test (www.speakout.com/SelectSmart) to see which presidential candidate was closest to his views. Two of them came up with Harry Browne. In addition, several listeners have told them they sound like Libertarians. So they've invited me on the show. The producer calls about 15 minutes in advance, and I hear their pre-interview discussion — which turns out to be a big build-up for libertarian ideas.

The interview itself goes very well. Lots of humor all around, and complete agreement on all libertarian ideas. Whenever I take a stand on an issue, there is canned applause and cheering. At the end of the interview, one of them (Jason, I believe) says, "I'm the one Gordon brother who didn't match up with you on the SelectSmart test, but as a result of your statements I'm voting for you in November."

We're slipping in the Rasmussen poll (www.rasmussenresearch.com/html/poll_demo.cfm?PollID=804&DemoID=199). I've fallen from a high of 1.6% on July 13 to 0.6% Thursday (the last day reported). But our ad campaign finally kicks off this coming week. We're running a heavy schedule of ads on eight national cable TV networks. This is bound to make a difference.

Sunday, July 23, 2000 — Nashville

News comes in daily of the effective activities of campaign volunteers.

I learn that Sue Smart had a letter to the editor published in the Omaha World-Herald on July 15. Her letter began by saying, "Harry Browne, the Libertarian Party candidate for president, makes so much sense. . . . Imagine a candidate who thinks I should be able to run my life myself." She then goes on to contrast that with the Bush and Gore campaigns, ending with "How about we elect Harry and take our government back?"

Another volunteer, Kyle Varner, sells merchandise through eBay auctions, and is including a Harry Browne banner on each of his auction pages.

Jerry Hudson is one of many volunteers who has created his own website and is using it to promote the campaign and the Libertarian Party. He built the website with a free service.

Jared Rhoads in Boston is one of several volunteers who are arranging for our 1-minute TV ads or the 30-minute campaign video to be aired on local stations — either by raising money to put the ads on commercial stations or by working to get them shown on cable-access stations.

Ernest Lewis in Washington state has a TV program called Libertarian Forum. He is going to run the ads on his show as news, and then discuss their implications with his viewers.

Ken Stricker has pointed out that, while no one likes to receive Spam (unsolicited emails), each person can add a small ad for the Browne campaign after his signature on each normal email he sends.

Here is one possibility:

[Your name, signing the email]
Ask me about Harry Browne for President
and the Libertarian Party
For more information e-mail me at [your email address]
Or check out:
www.HarryBrowne.org.

I wish it were possible for me to personally thank the thousands of people who take it upon themselves to write letters to editors, encourage TV shows to book me, call into talk shows, or find new ways to publicize the campaign. I believe these activities are doing a great deal to further our goal of having the campaign seen everywhere everyday.

Monday, July 24, 2000 — Nashville

Three radio shows today. The first is a half-hour at 8am with Larry Hughes on WEOK in Poughkeepsie, New York. He begins by asking whether the issues have changed much since 1996, giving us reason to hope for a stronger showing. I point out that the main issue is exactly what it was in 1996: who is best qualified to run your life? All the candidates except me want to decide the most minute details of your life, and that hasn't changed since 1996.

He mentions that he was in favor of school vouchers until he read my commentary on education at our website. And he says he agrees with us on practically everything but the Drug War.

He calls attention to a survey showing that young people believe the federal government should censor the press and entertainment programs, and asks how I believe that kind of attitude came about. I say it's natural for young people to think this way. After all, they've been told for years that government can stamp out poverty or drugs, that government should decide how you should save for retirement, that government should control corporations and regulate the things that go into your home. Why shouldn't young people believe government should regulate the press and entertainment as well?

The next show is 22 minutes with Robert Wood, who is taping an interview for the 24 stations of the Texas State Network in Austin. The interview probably will run on the stations on Sunday, August 6. He asks a number of good questions that allow me to dwell on the issues and to emphasize the importance of voting Libertarian. He asks whether people are politically complacent because of the good economy. I say the right question isn't "Are you better off than you were four years ago?" It is "Are you as well off as you should be?" And I launch into all the things you might do with the added take-home pay if we repeal the income tax.

The last interview is close to an hour with Ed Flynn on WATR in Waterbury, Connecticut. He begins by asking my definition of sovereignty. I tell him it means control, and it should start with the sovereignty of individuals — to control their own lives, free from the meddling of the likes of Al Gore or George W. Bush. He asks about national sovereignty, and I say I want the U.S. out of all international organizations and mutual defense treaties, so that no one is making decisions for America but Americans.

He is very strong on the Constitution, and so I work that into the conversation frequently. We have a few calls, all of whom are friendly. I make reference to my new book The Great Libertarian Offer at one point, and he says, "I have it and it's a masterpiece." Sounds like we have a new friend.

Tuesday, July 25, 2000 — Nashville

My first show of the day is an hour with Tony Macrini on WNIS in Norfolk, Virginia. I've been on with him before and he's always supportive. Early on he says, "Philosophically, I agree with you." Statements like that usually are followed with "However, . . ." but not in this case. When a caller says we need the Republicans for foreign policy, Tony says, "Would your children be more likely to wind up in a body bag in Kosovo with a Libertarian or Republican President?" The caller says, "With the Republican, of course." That seemed to end the plea for a Republican foreign policy.

Next I'm on for an hour with Michael Medved, broadcasting from KVI in Seattle and syndicated to 130 stations across America. The producer says the show has an audience of about 2 million people. That's probably an overstatement, but there's no question this is a very big show. Medved is well known as a movie reviewer on TV, and as a conservative critic of the media and the entertainment industry.

This is probably the toughest interview of the year so far. He is a bulldog — with his teeth firmly locked on the idea that third parties are exercises in futility, that even if we get several million votes this year it won't mean a thing. He cites flashes in the pan from the past — George Wallace, John Anderson, and others — who had brief notoriety and then sunk back into obscurity. I say the Libertarian Party is different — that we have a full-time, year-round party with Libertarians in office around the country, an enormous slate of candidates this year, and a permanent, professional staff.

At some point I realize he isn't going to let go of this matter, so I start introducing my points into the answers to his questions. This doesn't set well with him; he wants short "yes or no" answers to questions — but I'm not speaking for his benefit, it is to reach his listeners. Fortunately, I've had years of practice dealing with confrontational talk-show hosts, and it certainly pays off in a show like this. When it's all over, I know I could have done better, but I also know it could have been a lot worse. And I know that no one is going to run over me.

However, I know too that I couldn't do six or eight shows like this in one day; my blood pressure would go through the roof.

The final interview of the day is an hour with George Noory at KTRS in St. Louis. He is very supportive. We start with my "first day in office" agenda. At some point, he says, "Well, that's three out of three I agree with." The callers are all people with genuine questions — rather than calling to support or challenge me. This interview was scheduled at the last minute to enable me to plug our event in St. Louis tomorrow night.

Wednesday, July 26, 2000 — St. Louis

Back on the road again. I'm in St. Louis for a fund-raiser tonight. Michael Cloud and our road manager Steve Willis are here, too.

Today is also the day that our national TV ad campaign kicks off. Our Social Security ad is being run several times on CNN. It will also run on several other national cable networks over the next few weeks, along with our other ads.

I arrive in St. Louis in the late morning, and Steve and I head for KSDK-TV. A news reporter tapes a 7-minute interview with me in the courtyard outside the station. She asks about the difficulties we encounter getting attention. I point out that Pat Buchanan has received a thousand times more attention than I, and yet is only about 1% above me in the polls. With our TV ads running now, we could move up and surpass him — and then Ralph Nader as well. I conclude by saying, "After that we'll set our sights on Al Gore and George Bush."

Back at the hotel I have a 30-minute taped interview in person with Shula Neuman of KWMU-FM, the local National Public Radio station. We discuss a number of issues. When we get to education I point out that a fully privatized educational system would be like the computer industry — with rapid innovation of new teaching techniques, constantly falling prices, and the continual development of new technologies to make learning easier, more exciting, and more effective. Instead we have more and more expensive education with worse and worse results.

Steve and I head back to downtown St. Louis for an interview at KTVI-TV, channel 2, with reporter Betsey Bruce. The interview lasts about ten minutes, from which she will take soundbites and put together a report for a newscast.

Unfortunately, none of today's interviews are assured of being broadcast today, so none of it will contribute to the attendance at tonight's fund-raiser.

In the evening, we have a fund-raiser downtown. Michael Cloud does his usual first-class job of eliciting money from the audience of 66. We show our new TV ads, the reaction is good, and the energy level in the room is high.

Thursday, July 27, 2000 — Atlanta

Michael Cloud, Steve Willis, and I fly to Atlanta. My wife Pamela joins us there.

Steve, Pamela, and I drive to the local National Public Radio station. There James Hargrove tapes a 20-minute interview with me, for use on the Peach State Radio Network of about 20 NPR stations in Georgia. Soundbites from the interview will be used on newscasts today and tomorrow, and the entire interview will be played over the weekend.

James is very friendly, and seems to understand libertarian concepts without trouble. He gives me the opportunity to say whatever I think is important.

From there we drive to the CNN center for my appearance on CNN's Talk Back Live!. The first 20 minutes of the show are devoted to a discussion of O.J. Simpson's new website and his offer to answer questions for a price. The remaining 40 minutes are an interview with me.

The show is broadcast from the courtyard of an atrium in the middle of the CNN building. A food court is right next to it. About 200 people are in the audience, in a circle around host Bobbie Batista and me. Other people are milling around the outskirts of the set. It is an awkward situation; sometimes it's hard to hear the questions, and it's difficult to speak conversationally in such a setting.

But still the interview seems to go very well. Bobbie asks me some questions, others come from the audience, and still more come in by phone or email. Applause from about half the audience greets several of my answers — on such things as opposition to the Drug War, wanting to repeal the gun laws, and other matters.

One young black woman says my ideas seem to be just what she wants, but she wonders whether it's possible for me to get elected — and, if so, whether I could achieve anything. I say she must first ask herself, "Is this what you want?" If it is, the first step is to resolve never again to vote for those moving in the opposite direction. That means never voting for Republicans or Democrats, because such votes encourage them to bring government deeper into your life. And no matter what you think our chances are, by voting Libertarian you are helping others to stand up and be counted — and you're finally doing something to move us closer to the day when we can achieve what we want.

At the end of the show, Bobbie shows me some of the other emails she's received. One woman writes, "You just converted my Republican husband to vote for you." Another says, "I am 28 years old and will now vote for the first time — for the Libertarians." All the emails she shows me are encouraging; if she has any negative ones, I don't see them.

In the evening we have a speech and fund-raiser. The program is to start at 7:30. Pamela and I arrive at 6, and there already are 20-30 people there. The ballroom has seats for 440 people. By starting time every seat is taken, and there are 50-75 people standing along the walls, with another 30 or so standing in the doorway and the adjoining foyer. Unfortunately, this is the largest room in the hotel; so even though the RSVPs indicated an overflow crowd, there's no way to accommodate everyone who wants to get in.

Jennifer Willis organized the event in cooperation with Tracee Avery in Georgia, and they have done a spectacular job. One reason for the large turnout is that many Libertarians have made it a point to bring several non-Libertarian friends with them to the event.

PBS has someone here taping the occasion for a documentary on third parties. The local ABC-TV station has a reporter and cameraman on hand. Before the event begins, Alan Gomez of the Atlanta Journal-Constitution interviews me. (His report will appear in tomorrow's paper and be quite friendly.) Thad Damkoehler is here to videotape my speech for airing on cable access stations around the country.

The atmosphere is electrifying. Michael Cloud begins the program by asking those who are attending their first Libertarian event to stand. Over half the audience does. When Michael introduces me, I am overwhelmed by the reception of the audience. These people know what we stand for, they want it, and they know that only Libertarians can provide it.

My speech goes over very well. And although so many of the people are first-timers, the fund-raising also goes well — as Michael does his usual entertaining and persuasive job. Michael introduces all the local candidates, plus the volunteers who did so much to make this meeting a success. Before and afterward, I pose for photos with the candidates and volunteers.

The Georgia Libertarian Party is one of the strongest in America. It seems that everytime I come here, the audience is twice the size of the last appearance.

Events like this raise important sums of money for advertising, and they impress the media and non-Libertarians. We get numerous requests from Libertarians for me to appear at events, but too often the locals make only half-hearted attempts to assure the events' success. It isn't enough to send out some invitations and issue a press release to local media. To make the event a success requires an all-out effort to personally invite non-Libertarians and assure a large audience before even contacting the press. Then you can get some press coverage simply because of the large turnout that's guaranteed, not hoped for.

Friday, July 28, 2000 — Atlanta & Nashville

Pamela and I drive back to Nashville in a rented car. In the evening, I check my email and the Internet.

Today the daily Rasmussen Poll shows declining support for all third-party candidates. Nader, Buchanan, and Browne are all down a bit:

Bush, 44.9%
Gore, 33.2%
Nader, 3.6%
Buchanan, 1.5%
Browne, 1.1%
Phillips, .1%
Some Other, 2.8%
Not Sure, 12.8%

The significance of today's poll is that I'm now only 0.4% behind Pat Buchanan. He has received a thousand times the press coverage I have, he's mentioned almost daily in newspapers, and yet he has virtually no lead over me. Imagine where we would be if I received even 10% of the coverage he gets. With the power of our message, we would be flying past Ralph Nader.

Jack Williams does a terrific job of answering all the inquiries coming to the campaign website. He sends copies of his replies to me, and I try to read as many of the inquiries as possible. He does an amazing job — sometimes answering over 50 emails in one day — steering prospects to the information they're looking for about the campaign, as well as handling objections or problems.

Today he has forwarded a number of encouraging emails we've received as a result of my Talk Back Live! appearance yesterday. For example, Matthew Link says, "His brief appearance on CNN today (which I saw while waiting in the lobby during a job interview) clinched it for me. Harry Browne is the only person I could trust enough to vote for President. And I am also convinced to vote for no other than Libertarian (or libertarian) candidates for office anymore."

Someone who gave only his email address (AwesomeCarCare) says, "Just wanted to let Mr. Browne know that within 30 min. of question and answer on CNN Talk Back Live he has made a new libertarian, me. Please keep up the good work and stay focused, no matter what the outcome of this election. Please let me know If I can help in any way."

Paula Monday writes, "Finally a reason to take part in our election process. Thank you for making me believe in America again. I am sending your web site to everyone I know."

Willy Chaplin writes, "As libertarian Web columnists (How Can You Laugh at a Time Like This?) we . . . had planned a "Don't Waste Your Vote" column for late August, which would urge people to vote for a third party candidate — any candidate — rather then the two SOBs (Son Of a Bush and Somewhat Of a Bore). We now intend, however, to make it an outright recommendation that the only non-wasted vote is one for HB. . . . After seeing and hearing him yesterday on CNN's Talk Back Live!, we were immensely impressed. Harry so seriously outshines the other candidates as to make comparison useless. A REAL CLASS ACT, Harry, and we congratulate you on it!"

Our message is so very powerful — if we use it to show how each individual's life will be dramatically improved in a Libertarian America. The big question is: how many people will we be able to expose to it by November? That will depend on how much money we can raise to get the ads on TV, and how strongly we can pressure the TV networks to cover our campaign.

And that brings me to the final good news of the day. This evening, the Brit Hume show on Fox TV News closed by showing our Social Security TV ad in its entirety (including the phone number and web address) as news, introducing me as another alternative to Bush, Gore, Buchanan, and Nader.

Some Libertarians have complained that our TV ads are a bit too controversial or insensitive. Perry Willis designed these ads intentionally to be edgy and controversial — to attract attention and get people talking about them. In most cases, someone has to see an ad many times before remembering even who the sponsor is. People who react favorably to one of our hard-hitting ads will remember me and the Libertarian Party after seeing the ad only once or twice, while those who don't like the ads will tend to forget them. So with our limited budget, we have to run ads that are unusual enough to attract the people who ought to be supporting us. Later we can court those who are more interested in running the world than gaining more freedom for themselves.

We have sent tapes of the ads to a number of political pundits, hoping for a reaction — favorable, critical, or just amused. Today's coverage on Fox TV News is a good start.

After 24 hours at home, tomorrow I head for California for another series of personal appearances.

Sunday, July 30, 2000 — San Francisco

Michael Cloud, Steve Willis, and I arrived in San Francisco yesterday for a week of California events.

The first is a fund-raiser this afternoon at the home of Terry Easton in Hillsborough, an upscale suburb of San Francisco. About 20 people are in attendance and we raise over $20,000.

Monday, July 31, 2000 — San Francisco

Today begins with an hour in-studio with Ronn Owens on KGO, San Francisco's biggest talk station. I haven't talked with Ronn for several years, and I don't remember where he stands politically. He seems to be skeptical of everything — including Libertarian positions. He tries to shoot down everything we stand for, and all the callers are negative as well.

To take myself off the defensive I start asking questions of Ronn and of the callers. When Ronn says he can't imagine legalizing drugs, I ask him what he thinks should be done. He says marijuana ought to be legal, but not cocaine. So I point out that we disagree only on the matter of degree, not on the principle. When a caller says my desire for people to be free is simplistic, I ask, "Am I correct in thinking then that you don't think people ought to be free to live their lives as they believe best?" In addition to getting you off the defensive, asking questions is an effective way to make your critic realize that he doesn't have anything better to offer.

Harry Osibin of KITS-FM hears the Ronn Owens show and calls Jim Babka to arrange for me to appear on his show immediately afterward. Steve and I drive over to KITS, where Harry and I tape an hour show for airing this Sunday. The atmosphere is quite different from the Owens show. Although Osibin says he is registered with the Green Party, he is very sympathetic, the show is relaxed, and he asks questions to elicit information, not to shoot me down.

In the evening I'm on the air again with Lionel — this time on his syndicated radio show covering 40 stations (last time I was on his Internet show). As usual, Lionel is lively and humorous — and he provides a new comeback for those who say, "You want to get rid of so many government programs, but you don't say what you would replace them with." His retort is simple: "If an overweight person loses a hundred pounds, would you ask him what will replace the lost weight? If something is wrong, you get rid of it."

Tuesday, August 1, 2000 — Santa Clara, California

The day begins early at 6:05am with a 15-minute interview with Doug Stephan on the Radio America network. He calls himself a libertarian and spends several minutes explaining why he thinks a Libertarian vote makes the most sense. We talk about the fact that the listeners as taxpayers have paid for this week's Republican convention.

Later in the morning Steve Willis and I go to the San Francisco Examiner. We have an interview with James A. Finefrock, editor of the editorial page. We're joined in a conference room by columnist Scott Winokur, reporter Jim Healey, and Lynn Myers Berger, a member of the editorial board. The Examiner is supposed to be the less liberal of the two San Francisco dailies, but this group is unable to imagine a world without government watching over every corner of our lives. The discussion is almost entirely ideological, and I can imagine what kind of article (if any) will result from it. As always, I leave thinking that one national TV show is worth a hundred newspaper interviews.

Steve, Michael, and I drive to San Jose. On the way I have a phone interview with Maya Suryaraman of the San Jose Mercury News. She's writing an article on the campaign for tomorrow's paper, and wants to know about our fund-raiser event tonight in Santa Clara.

When we get to San Jose, we head for the Mercury News, where I have an interview with editorial writers Philip Yost and Joanne Jacobs. The atmosphere is much friendlier than at the Examiner. None of my ideas shock these people, and they're also interested in such things as how we hope to get attention.

When we check into the hotel, I have a brief phone interview with John Kelly at KLIV in San Francisco, who is taping the conversation for airing later. He is quite friendly.

Next I spend about 45 minutes with Hillary Johnson, who is preparing an article on the campaign for Worth Magazine. She interviewed me at convention time in Los Angeles and Anaheim. She is following up with more questions, and has brought a photographer with her from Los Angeles. She says the magazine is interested in knowing more about my investment philosophy and how it ties in with my politics. As usual, when I'm asked personal questions, I try to answer in political terms.

In the evening, we have a fund-raiser at the hotel. Around 80 people show up and the proceeds are a little over $12,000 — an unusually good result for the size of the audience. Hillary Johnson is there, and her photographer takes about a hundred photos while I'm speaking. Afterward, John Webster tapes a 10-minute interview with me for his Free & Clear program on KKUP in Santa Clara.

Today the Rasmussen Poll shows that in Georgia I'm running ahead of Pat Buchanan and close behind Ralph Nader. This is an indication of how valuable our Atlanta event was last week. It isn't just that 550 people attended — but the press was there, it was well reported, and it inspired people to support what they really believe in. The Georgia figures:

George W. Bush, 42.0%
Al Gore, 35.0%
Ralph Nader, 3.2 %
Harry Browne, 2.4 %
Howard Phillips, 0.8 %
Pat Buchanan, 0.6 %
Some other candidate, 1.5 %
Not sure, 15.0%

Wednesday, August 2, 2000 — San Diego

We catch an early-morning flight to San Diego, eat lunch, and check into a hotel.

A camera crew arrives from KGTV, channel 10, the local ABC affiliate. Maya Nieshikawa interviews me for a 1-minute clip on this evening's news. She promises to give the details of this evening's event on the air. She asks three times why I bother to run if I have so little chance to win. I keep pointing out that you have to lay the groundwork first, and if we don't start doing that until we're sure to win, we'll never get government out of our lives. She's unfamiliar with Libertarians, but when I mention Richard Rider — the Libertarian who is the best-known anti-tax advocate in the area — the cameraman says, "He's saved me a lot of money."

The interview is played on the evening news, and then repeated all night long on channel 15, a sister station of the "headline news" variety.

I have a 5-minute taped phone interview with Ian Rose on the local Westwood One radio network. He will put some soundbites on news broadcasts on radio stations in this area and plug this evening's event.

That's followed immediately by a half-hour phone interview with John Wood of WRCW in Akron. Before we go on the air he mentions that he watched our convention on C-SPAN and was very impressed. He also saw me on the Washington Journal show on C-SPAN the next day. He says that a woman called and asked what I would do to protect children from pornography on the Internet. I said, "Either you take responsibility for your children or you turn the job over to politicians like Bill Clinton. I think you'll do a better job." John says he was hooked at that point. The interview itself is a lovefest, as he is very supportive and urges his listeners to take the ideas seriously.

Our evening fund-raiser draws about 90 people, but the fund-raising total is less than normal. However, the speech goes well and channel 10 and channel 61 are there to cover it. After the event is finished, Raoul Lowery Contreras of channel 61 tapes a 10-minute TV interview with Richard Rider and me.

Thursday, August 3, 2000 — Irvine, California

I have a 20-minute phone interview with Amy Glenn of KTBB in Tyler, Texas. She is very friendly and very small-government minded. I mention that I saw a soundbite on the news of Colin Powell addressing the Republican convention, in which he said, "Our children are the future of America" — to which Amy responds, "Duhhh — what an original thought!"

The subject of education comes up, and I ask the listeners, "Do you really believe that if George Bush or Al Gore is elected President that your child's school will be significantly better in any important way next year or the year after?" Amy thinks that's a good point.

A caller says she will vote for me if I promise that Al Gore won't get elected. Amy says, "If you vote for George Bush, Al Gore still might be elected." I ask the woman calling whether she wants smaller government or government to continue growing. She says she wants much smaller government. I say that you must then realize that no Republican or Democrat is going to do anything to make government smaller, and the first step toward smaller government is to stop supporting the people who are making government larger. If you vote for George Bush, you are endorsing all his plans to expand the federal government's role in education, step up the Drug War, and burrow the federal government more deeply into health care. Only if you vote Libertarian will it be unmistakable that you want smaller government. Amy jumps on this point and says, "That's right! He won't care what your reason is, he'll figure you're endorsing his call for more government. Only a Libertarian vote would send the message you want."

It looks like we've found a new friend.

Michael, Steve, and I drive north to Irvine in Orange County, and check into the hotel. Steve and I then proceed to the Orange County Register — probably the most libertarian daily newspaper in America. There we meet with three of the editorial writers — Cathy Taylor, Alan Bock, and John Seiler. The conversation is very friendly and supportive — almost the exact opposite of my hour with the editors of the San Francisco Examiner on Tuesday. They ask how much I hope to be able to achieve this year, what kind of reception I'm getting, and other strategic questions — as well as questions on specific issues. I'm pleased to see all three of them taking extensive notes.

Immediately afterward I go into a studio in the same building for a 30-minute TV interview with Leslie Leyton of the Orange County News Channel. It's a taping for a show to be broadcast on the weekend a few weeks away. She is very friendly and tells me that her husband is a Libertarian fan.

Back at the hotel I have a 10-minute phone interview with Larry Elder of KABC, Los Angeles, who's broadcasting from the Republican convention in Philadelphia. It gives me a chance to plug tonight's event in Irvine. He, I, and a caller all agree that the Republicans are nothing more than Democrats in drag, promoting bigger federal programs in their convention speeches.

I have a 30-minute phone interview with Melissa McDonald on the Tennessee Radio Network, covering 85 stations. She is very friendly, making it a premise of the interview that what we're trying to achieve is obviously desirable. She allows me to plug the candidate event we'll be having in Nashville this Saturday.

Hal Eisner of KCOP, channel 13 in Los Angeles, brings a cameraman to our fund-raiser in Irvine. He begins taping in my room as I'm typing these words. Then we turn on the TV to George Bush's acceptance speech. He and I sit on the edge of the bed and discuss the speech as the camera records our words. I point out the arrogance of George Bush's remarks. When he calls for "prosperity with a purpose," he's saying you aren't allowed to be prosperous unless you use your prosperity for the purpose he thinks best — that everything must be managed by George Bush to serve his ideas of what is good for the nation — for the Fatherland, in other words.

I also point out that the convention audience isn't cheering George Bush because they believe he's going to improve America. They're cheering because they think he's going to win the Big Game for them, after their having lost the last two games. For Republican and Democratic activists, it's no longer a case of what's good for America, but whatever they think it will take to win the election.

Then the cameraman tapes me heading downstairs to the evening fund-raiser. He tapes the first few minutes of my speech for a program to be broadcast later this evening or tomorrow. I have no idea what will finally show up on the screen.

The fund-raiser itself is well-attended — with about a hundred people who are very enthusiastic. The fund-raising goes well. Art Olivier gives a nice speech and then introduces me. Later we introduce the dozen or so Libertarian candidates in attendance.

Friday, August 4, 2000 — in Transit

This morning I have a one-hour interview with Tony Trupiano, guest-hosting for Armstrong Williams on the Talk America Radio Network. He is very complimentary, comparing my convention acceptance speech favorably with George Bush's. Tony has become a good friend of Libertarians — as have so many talk-show hosts. We need to help them by calling into talk shows, calling attention to Libertarian solutions to topics of the day, labeling those solutions as Libertarian, and urging people to vote for me and for Libertarians all up and down the ticket.

In the afternoon, I catch a plane to Nashville, arriving late in the evening.

Today Bobbie Battista on CNN's "Talk Back Live!" show says, "I had to read this e-mail from Carl, who said that, ‘If the Libertarian Party candidate Harry Browne had one tenth the coverage of Bush-Gore, he would be 100 times as popular as they are now, especially among unregistered voters.'"

Bobbie goes on to say, "Carl, if you're a regular watcher of Talkback, you know that we had Harry Browne on last week for almost the whole hour. And you know what? — it was one of the highest rated shows we had that week."

Saturday, August 5, 2000 — Nashville

Today the Tennessee LP has a "Meet the candidates" event at a convention center in nearby Smyrna. State chairman Richard Pearl has organized it and done an excellent job. About a dozen Libertarian candidates for federal, state, and local offices are there, and around 200 people wander in and out during the 3-hour event. I give a 20-minute speech and the other candidates give shorter speeches. There are a number of new people in attendance, brought in by their Libertarian friends.

Sunday, August 6, 2000 — Nashville

Today Rasmussen Research reports that yesterday's poll has me dead even nationally with Pat Buchanan:

George Bush, 48.0%
Al Gore, 30.9%
Ralph Nader, 4.0%
Harry Browne, 1.6%
Pat Buchanan, 1.6%
Howard Phillips, 0.6%
Some Other, 2.0%
Not Sure, 11.3%

Jim Rongstad emails the website to say that Tony Snow on Fox News Sunday interviewed Pat Buchanan today and pointed out that Buchanan isn't outpolling Libertarian Harry Browne, even though Buchanan has much higher name recognition.

The polling numbers will fluctuate, and I may go above or below Buchanan. But it's significant that I'm doing as well as two very well-known celebrities who get extensive news coverage.

Now is the time to capitalize on our growing popularity. We need to raise more money to step up our advertising coverage, generate more events that are truly news, get more national TV appearances, increase the number of requests people send to talk shows and pollsters to include me, write more letters to the editors, and have more people calling into talk shows to point out that Libertarians want to free listeners from the intrusions of government.

We're moving up, but the movement will stop the moment we do.

Monday, August 7, 2000 — Little Rock

Before catching a plane, I have a half-hour phone interview at 7am with Pete Ferrand at WNTK-FM in New London, Connecticut. He seems to know little about the Libertarian Party or me, but he also seems genuinely sympathetic to the ideas once they're presented to him. When I mention that in six years of doing interviews, I haven't come across anyone who can point to a single government program that has actually delivered what was promised for it, he replies that there's the National Weather Service — and then adds, "even though it doesn't do as good a job as private industry would." (Strangely, whenever I ask for an example of a government program that actually works, about the only answer I ever get is the National Weather Service.)

On the way to Little Rock, I change planes in Memphis. Walking through the terminal, a stranger smiles at me and says "Hello." This is becoming a lot more common now. A few days ago, a man in another airport called to me, "Good luck, Harry!" On the airport subway in Atlanta, a man asked to have his picture taken with me. Nothing like this happened prior to the LP convention, but now it's happening more and more frequently.

As I get off the plane in Little Rock, my cell phone rings with a call from Joshua Weinstein, a reporter at the Portland (Maine) Press-Herald. He's writing a story to appear in advance of my appearance there Sunday afternoon. He sounds young and quite friendly to what we're doing (but you never know with a reporter). He's very careful to make sure I get a chance to say whatever I think is important, and he says he'll provide all the details of our Sunday event in his article. (The article will appear later in the week, and it does plug the fund-raiser and provide an accurate picture of our message.)

After arriving at the hotel, I have a 30-minute interview with George Putnam at KIEV in Los Angeles. I can remember living in L.A. and seeing George delivering the TV evening news in the late 1950s and thereafter. He's been a fixture in L.A. for decades — always ending his broadcasts pointing to the flag and saying, "Here's to a better and stronger America." He's interviewed me before, but not in several years.

Today his voice sounds older, but the Putnam personality is still there. And a wave of nostalgia engulfs me as he asks questions, making it a little harder to focus on my answers.

He and a caller both say they agree with everything I'm saying, except about the Drug War. The caller says he will support Libertarians at the polls only when we have a chance to win; in the meantime, a vote for me is a vote for Al Gore. I say "No, a vote for me is a vote for freedom, while a vote for George W. Bush is a vote for big government. You know and I know that two years after George Bush is elected (if he is), your child's school will be no safer or more educational, health care will be no cheaper, no more effective, no more accessible, no more user-friendly. In fact nothing will have changed at all — except the government will be bigger. So why would you want to endorse that with your vote?"

Soon after the Putnam interview, I'm on the phone for a scheduled half-hour with Ray Lincoln at KARN in Little Rock to plug this evening's personal appearance. A mix-up about who was to call whom causes the interview to start ten minutes late. But I do get to plug the evening's event and we cover a number of issues in a hurry.

Ray asks what I think about Al Gore's selection of Sen. Joe Lieberman to be his running mate. I say that I hate to sound like a broken record, but all Republican and Democratic politicians are cut from the same cloth; they all believe they know how you should live your life for the benefit of the Fatherland.

In the evening we have a fund-raiser at the hotel. More than a hundred people show up, and they are very enthusiastic. I tell them I'm particularly happy to be here because Arkansas was one of only 12 states I didn't campaign in during the last election, and one of only 16 states I haven't visited this time. The fund-raising goes quite well, and it's obvious that Arkansas is on its way to becoming one of our stronger states.

There are two reporters there. One is Michael Rowett of the Democrat-Gazette, the state's largest newspaper. He interviews me before the event and then stays through the speech. (His article in the next day's paper is quite informative, reporting accurately the main points of my speech. It begins by saying I "contended that [I'm] the only candidate who doesn't want to tell Americans how to run their lives.")

The other reporter is from one of the city's TV stations. He takes scrupulous notes, but I never find out what he says on the air.

The event is certainly a success, and Matthew Richard, Gerhard Langguth, and Karl Kimble have done a terrific job getting a good crowd out. But they're not finished. They also help line up some good media appearances for tomorrow.

Tuesday, August 8, 2000 — Little Rock

The day begins at 7:10 with a 10-minute phone interview with Gary Christopher at WLIS in Saybrook, Connecticut, and WMRD in nearby Middletown. The interview is to provide soundbites for news broadcasts, and it allows me to plug our event there this Thursday. In the brief time we have, Gary asks the three most important questions: What do I hope to achieve by running? Why will I be in Connecticut? And why should someone vote Libertarian?

I then have a 20-minute phone conversation with Tommy Smith and Big Dave on KMJX-FM. It's a typical morning show with two comedians. Like some of the other comedian shows, they ask all-important questions like: How do I like my hamburgers? And which do I prefer — football or baseball? But I also have plenty of opportunities to get my points across. As I understand it, this is the top talk show in Little Rock.

The day continues with a 45-minute interview with Don Roberts at WDAY in Fargo, North Dakota. I've been on with him before and he's very supportive. He seems to have his callers very well trained because they all ask short, to-the-point questions, and we go through 12-15 of them in the final half-hour.

Steve Willis and I drive to station KARN for a one-hour interview with Pat Lynch. He's a character — very funny. He says he may vote for me because he knows that no President will ever do everything he promises. I ask him what it is that he doesn't want me to do. He says he doesn't want me to try to solve the pollution problems by taking land out of the hands of the government. He never really explains why he thinks the government is a better protector; in fact, he's very skeptical of government. He also thinks both Gore and Bush are bozos.

The show is being broadcast over the Internet, and one caller from California says the press never asks any really pertinent questions of the other candidates. The caller says he was watching "Hardball" yesterday evening, and he thinks it should be renamed "Lovefest."

The caller wishes reporters should ask such questions as "Where in the Constitution do you have the authority to do the things you're proposing?" I chime in with, "And who should pay for the prescription drugs or other goodies you're proposing to give away? Someone has to pay for them. Who will have to go without something he's earned in order for you to play public benefactor?"

I also say to Pat, "If you get a chance to interview Bush or Gore, I certainly hope you'll ask either of them, ‘Do you think you'd be a better person today if you had spent 10 years in prison for your youthful indiscretions?'" He loves that one.

Just before the end of the interview, a camera crew arrives from Channel 7. I think they're there for something to do with the station, but it turns out they're there to follow me around. They tape a little of the radio show, and then a reporter interviews me in the lobby of the station. We talk mainly about gun rights and why we need to get rid of all the gun laws. He says they're planning to be at tonight's 2nd Amendment rally in Hot Springs.

It seems that we're steadily getting more and more news coverage — at least on a local level — wherever we go. Newspaper and TV reporters are showing up at our fund-raisers and other appearances.

We then drive to Main Street in Little Rock, but we can't find KMJX-FM. We call the station and discover we're supposed to be in North Little Rock. We arrive 20 minutes late for an interview with Michael Langley, but fortunately it's being taped for broadcast this weekend — so there's no harm done.

Michael is an excellent interviewer. We cover a great deal of ground in a half-hour interview. I keep coming back to the point that if you want smaller government, you have to resolve to stop supporting those who are giving you big government.

In the evening, Steve and I drive to Hot Springs, about 60 miles from Little Rock. During the day, several people had warned us that the traffic would be terrible, and so we set our departure time earlier and earlier. As it turns out, there's virtually no traffic and we arrive more than an hour early.

We're here at the Hot Springs Convention Center for a Second-Amendment rally staged by the Dixie Southern Shooting Association. My appearance was arranged by the local Libertarians. Before the rally begins, Bobby Sisk of KTHV-TV, channel 11, the local CBS affiliate, interviews me for a minute or so.

About a thousand people are in attendance, and they are very enthusiastic — also very Republican. Governor Mike Huckabee introduces Wayne LaPierre, the executive director of the National Rifle Association. Although all the speakers were warned in advance not to be political, he stresses the need to send a message to Al Gore on election day that we reject his attempt to take away our guns.

I don't have a speech allotted. Instead the rest of the evening is a panel with Huckabee, LaPierre, a Republican state official, a Republican Congressman, a Republican woman running for another Congressional seat, a Democratic state Senator who is challenging the Republican Congressman, and me.

The first question posed to all panelists is two-part: (1) Does the Second Amendment apply to individuals (rather than just militias), and (2) does it allow for exceptions for particular types of firearms. LaPierre has set the tone by saying that the Clinton administration should be enforcing the existing gun laws, rather than proposing new ones. The other panelists pretty much accept that approach as a given.

I'm the last to answer the questions. I say that the Second Amendment obviously applies to individuals. And if it didn't, the Ninth Amendment would clearly protect an individual's right to defend himself — because nothing in the Constitution has taken that right away.

As to the second part of the question, the Amendment doesn't allow for exceptions — or else it would have read that the right "to keep and bear arms shall not be infringed, unless Congress chooses otherwise. And because there are no exceptions, I disagree with my fellow panelists who say the existing gun laws should be enforced. Those laws are unconstitutional. Those laws are wrong — because they put you at a disadvantage to armed criminals, to whom the laws are no inconvenience. And saying those laws should be enforced is a statement that the Second Amendment isn't absolute, and that there's nothing wrong with ‘reasonable' gun controls. This allows your favorite politicians to compromise on new laws and then claim victory for preventing something worse. I want to repeal all the existing gun laws." This brings heavy applause from the audience.

When questions are posed from the floor, about a third of them are directed to me. When one of the questioners says he's fed up with Republicans and Democrats, and will vote for third parties, he's applauded by a fair share of the audience.

When we get back to the hotel, I have a final interview of the day with Steve Lavelli at WBZ, the big talk station in Boston. He is a congenial interviewer and we get along well. Once again, gun rights come up.

He says that whenever he mentions Libertarians to someone, it seems the person says something like, "Those are the people who don't believe in rules and think you should be able to own your own tank if you want." I say, "That's not true. We do believe in rules. We insist that when you drive your tank, you always stay on the right side of the road."

One caller tries to pin down the host on what he thinks of my ideas. Lavelli tiptoes around the question by saying he thinks my ideas are important enough to warrant being on the show. But the caller keeps asking him for a more explicit opinion (which he doesn't succeed in getting), saying he believes in Lavelli. I say that I believe in the caller; I think he can run his own life without help from the likes of Bill Clinton, Al Gore, or George W. Bush.

Wednesday, August 9, 2000 — Nashville

After flying home from Little Rock, I have a 15-minute interview with Keith Shortall in the news department of Maine Public Radio. He will put together a short feature that will go to six NPR stations in Maine. The chief purpose of the interview is to plug Sunday afternoon's personal appearance in Portland. Keith wants to know why I'm coming to Maine. The reason, of course, is because that's where Libertarians can get a good-sized audience for me.

Immediately afterward, I have a 30-minute interview with Ed Flynn at WATR in Waterbury, Connecticut, to plug the fund-raiser there tomorrow night. Ed has become a good friend of the campaign. He is very strong on restoring constitutional limits on the federal government. The interview goes very well.

Kelly Beaucar from ConservativeHQ.com calls to keep up-to-date on the campaign. I fill her in on the poll results, the good turnouts at the personal appearances, and the running of our TV ads — but she knows most of this already from reading LibertyWire. She tells me that my candidacy is the one most talked about on ConservativeHQ's forums.

Thursday, August 10, 2000 — Hartford, Connecticut

The day starts in Nashville with another typical morning show — Crocker & Mike (Jim Crocker & Mike McCardell) on WGAN in Portland, Maine.

One of them begins by noting that my bio says I like "good food and wine, sports, television, and fiction." He says, "You have my vote on that score alone." He also mentions that his wife is a Libertarian, while he is a Republican. However, he seems to be a somewhat libertarian Republican, finding most of what I say to be quite compatible with his own thinking. The interview lasts about 10 minutes or so, but — yikes! — I forget to plug Sunday's personal appearance in Portland.

I catch a plane to Boston, with a plane change in Cincinnati. While waiting for the second flight I have an interview on my cell phone with Tom Scott at WELI in Hamden, Connecticut, near Hartford. Perhaps to make up for my lapse in the last interview, I plug tonight's event in Hartford twice in the 10-minute interview. Tom says he's a Republican, but he's very friendly to my positions.

I arrive in Boston and Steve Willis meets me at the airport. We drive to Newton and pick up Michael Cloud, driving on to Cromwell, a suburb of Hartford and the scene of tonight's fund-raiser.

Before the event I do a 30-minute phone interview with Angela Keyton, a Libertarian at KOOP-FM in Austin. We run through the issues, but also focus on why people should vote Libertarian.

The fund-raiser goes very well. James Madison and Andrew Hall have done a terrific job helping to get a good audience — and the local radio interviews have helped as well. About 120 people are in attendance, and very enthusiastic. I'm particularly glad to be here, as I haven't campaigned in Connecticut since 1995. This is the 36th state I've visited this time around, compared with 38 states in 1994-96.

Tonight, again, we have a PBS camera crew in attendance, along with reporter Julie Rubenstein and cameraman Mark Siesinki from WTNH, Channel 8, of Hartford. There's also a reporter from a nearby newspaper (whose name and paper I didn't get). We no longer have to plead for coverage; we've earned it. We're now in the same league in the polls as Pat Buchanan — just not generating the same kind of controversial news. But we are already attracting the press to fund-raisers. And shortly I'll be doing major non-Libertarian events that will generate as much news as Buchanan or Nader can provide. We are moving up.

Friday, August 11, 2000 — Boston

The day begins with two contrasting shows. The first is an hour with Joe Fondren at WRJM-FM in Ozark, Alabama. Joe is a "good ol' boy" — a slow-talking former politician. He begins by saying that if the election were held today, he'd vote for me. The conversation is very relaxed, but very enlightening. He makes the point that when you pass a law you should assume that the worst people in the world will administer it — that whatever can go wrong will go wrong. He makes several other perceptive observations about government.

The second show is the exact opposite. It is an hour with Alan Nathan on 65 shows of the Radio America network. Alan is an intense, fast-talking, hard-driving talk-show host. I can't relax for a second. He says he agrees with a great many Libertarian ideas but that we take them to too much of an extreme. As an example of what he means in practice, he says he believes fully in gun rights and the Second Amendment, but he sees nothing wrong with the Brady Bill and a 3-day waiting period. I'm never able to get him to explain why he bothers to say he supports the Second Amendment when he believe it's okay for the government to impose gun-control laws like the Brady Bill. The best explanation he can give is that innocent people should be allowed to own guns, but that waiting periods are necessary to keep the crazies from owning guns (as though the gun laws accomplish that).

Over and over in the show, I make the point that he thinks he's going to get laws that take things just as far as he wants them to go, but no farther — but that these wonderful laws are going to be fashioned by people like Teddy Kennedy or Jesse Helms, and administered by the likes of Bill Clinton, Al Gore, or George Bush, and that politicians will never confer with him to determine how far they should go and no farther. When you give politicians the power to do good, you're automatically giving them the power to do bad — and even if you think you have a "good" President today, the power you give him will be there to be used when a bad President replaces him.

A high-powered show like this is a big challenge — not just in having to think quickly to deal with a fast-talking host, but in having to go beyond answering his questions and objections to work in the points I want to make — why one should vote Libertarian, and why it's a mistake to think you'll ever get what you want from government.

I think I handled the show pretty well, but at the end my nerves are jangled from the intensity.

Steve, Michael, and I drive to Boston. On the way, we stop for breakfast at Denny's — the official restaurant of the Harry Browne for President campaign.

On the way to Boston, I have an interview on my cell phone with Gene Burns on WMEX in Boston. Gene is a long-time Libertarian and a great asset to our cause. He understands libertarianism completely and explains it eloquently. In addition, he is one of the most able talk-show hosts in the world. He has a beautiful voice, beautiful articulation, and a beautiful command of the English language. I enjoy listening to him even when he's delivering commercials. It's like listening to a lovely piece of music.

During the course of the show, we get a caller from Texas who's listening to the show on the Internet. I say to Gene, "Isn't this amazing? I'm on a cell phone traveling between Connecticut and Massachusetts, talking to you in San Francisco on a radio station in Boston, and we're conferring with a caller in Texas. Isn't technology wonderful?" Gene agrees, but a few moments later my cell signal is lost and the connection is broken. So much for technology.

We arrive in Boston and head for the Boston Herald, where I have an interview with reporter Karen Crummy. On the way to her office, I run into Don Feder, who wrote a silly, anti-Libertarian article before our convention — in which he said it was appropriate that we meet near Disneyland, since Goofy would make a good Libertarian presidential candidate. I have no interest in talking with him, but he wants to socialize. I finally tell him it's unfortunate that he's so insecure in his beliefs that he can't deal with opposing beliefs seriously, but must resort to sophomoric ridicule. If he were serious, he would have reported our ideas, presented our reasons, and then explained why he disagreed.

The interview with Karen Crummy seems to go very well. She appears to be in her twenties and apparently quite receptive to libertarian ideas. But who knows what will appear in the paper? (Unfortunately, nothing shows up in Saturday's paper, so the interview is no help to our Boston fund-raiser. However, it may still produce an article later.)

Back in the car, I'm on my cell phone with Dave Stone of KEWS in Portland, Oregon. The 20-minute conversation goes quite well, as we quickly run through my favorite issues — the Drug War, gun rights, Social Security, and the income tax.

Still in the car, making our way to our hotel in Lexington (a suburb of Boston), I'm on the phone with Jeff Jacoby, filling in for Jay Severin on WTKK. Jeff is a conservative-libertarian columnist with the liberal Boston Globe, and was recently suspended for three months for making a trivial mistake in one of his columns. He starts the interview by saying he voted for me in 1996 and expects to do so again this year.

One caller asks what I have to offer gay voters. I say I want the power to impose values taken away from the government — so that gays will no longer be afraid of Christians and Christians will no longer be afraid of gays.

Early in the evening I'm in Newton at the New England Cable Network — a TV network covering mainly the Boston area, but also transmitting to other parts of New England. I have a 10-minute live interview with Amanda Rossiter. She apparently doesn't know too much about Libertarians, and so she asks questions fed to her by the producer in the control room. She's quite content to let me dominate the interview and cover the issues I want to discuss.

From there Steve and I head to Boston. On the way, I have a 45-minute interview on the Gary Nolan show on the Radio America network. Tonight's guest host is — guess who — Michael Cloud, our chief Libertarian fund-raiser. He asks me such confrontational questions as "What does a Libertarian stand for?" Michael does a good job as host.

Now we're in Boston — at the home of David Brudnoy, one of Boston's top talk-show hosts. He is an LP member and an outspoken Libertarian. The interview, on WBZ, is of course very cordial — with some joking and a lot of important points covered.

I get back to the hotel in time for an hour interview with Brian Wilson at KSFO — one of the two big talk stations in San Francisco. I'm especially happy to do this show because a mix-up caused me to miss Brian's show earlier in the year. Apparently, there are no hard feelings because Brian introduces me as "My guy for President."

Among other matters covered in the show, I have the opportunity to make the point that the Reform Party brouhaha wouldn't have occurred if it hadn't been for the $12 million stolen from the taxpayers and promised to the party by the federal government.

This has been some day — beginning at 9am and ending at midnight. Ten interviews, ranging from Portland, Maine, to Portland, Oregon. Of the eight radio interviews, six of the hosts said they intended to vote for me. And these shows were all on networks or major stations in their cities. In addition, I was able to plug tomorrow's personal appearance on the four shows broadcast in this area.

Before I go to bed, I get some more good news. In North Carolina, the state party has been running our "Battered Voter" ad, and they report that they're getting increased donations on their website.

Roger Ailes, President of the Fox TV News network, was interviewed on C-SPAN today. In response to a caller, he said he would assure that the network provides more coverage of the Browne campaign. (He will make good on his promise, as we're contacted almost immediately by Fox News to do an interview next Tuesday.)

And the ABC Evening News showed an email from a viewer requesting more coverage of our campaign.

Lastly, Aaron Biterman in Wisconsin wrote to say that he nagged the Arizona Republic's website to include coverage of me with the other four presidential candidates. He received a response from Kim Kaan, the Online Editor, saying, "I have since added Harry Browne and other third party candidates to our Election 2000 page. Thanks for the suggestion!"

A great deal is happening as a result of people like you taking the initiative to write to websites, networks, and publications — and calling into talk shows to spread the word about the campaign. Thank you!

Saturday, August 12, 2000 — Boston

I'm awakened at 10am with a call from the Gun Owners Action League program on WORC in Worcester, Massachusetts. Apparently, I'm scheduled for an hour on the show but I wasn't aware of it. I'm constantly amazed that, with so much going on, things like this don't happen far more frequently. Our press staff, Jim Babka and Robert Brunner, are tremendously efficient.

I quickly come to life and the show goes well. Tom La Roache does a nice job of interviewing, and we cover all the important topics — not just gun rights.

That's followed by a short interview with John McDonald at WGAN in Portland, Maine. Although we don't have much time, I do get a chance to plug tomorrow's event in Portland.

Then it's 20 minutes on the phone with Alice Jackson, editor of the daily Franklin Review Appeal, the newspaper of the town in which I live in Tennessee. She is writing articles for next Sunday's paper on both Pamela and me.

Pamela was interviewed in our home on Thursday, and she says the editor was very friendly and very sympathetic with what the wife of a national candidate must go through. My interview today goes very well. Alice makes the point during the interview that she strongly opposes the Drug War. That, of course, is becoming more and more the common viewpoint.

In the afternoon, we have our fund-raiser at the hotel in Lexington. About 200 people show up — about 35% to 40% of whom say they've never been to a Libertarian event before. We get an excellent reception and the fund-raising goes very well. We're indebted to Laura El-Azem, as well as the energetic Massachusetts Libertarian cadre for a good event.

Sunday, August 13, 2000 — Portland, Maine

As the Rasmussen Poll continues to fluctuate day by day, I'm down to 0.8% today while Buchanan jumps up to 1.7% from 1.1% yesterday.

Steve, Michael, and I get up early to drive to Portland. Upon arrival, we go to WGME-TV (Channel 13). Julene Britt interviews me for three minutes in the parking lot. It is a taping, and will be on the air sometime later in the day.

From there we head to WCSH-TV (Channel 6), where I have a live interview with Shannon Moss that lasts 2-1/2 minutes. Although it is brief, I'm able to get in everything I want — including a plug for our fund-raiser later in the day.

After checking into the hotel, Steve and I go back out to WPXT-TV (Channel 51) for another interview — this one with Mollie Halpern. It, too, is brief — no more than five minutes — but I have the opportunity to say everything I want.

Then it's back to the hotel for today's event, starting at 4:30 in the afternoon. Cameras are there from Channels 6 and 51, as well as from a group broadcasting on cable access stations. Also there is Mal Leary from National Public Radio and Joshua Weinstein of the Portland Press-Herald (who gave us a very good article earlier in the week).

Around 120 people are in attendance. Mark Cenci and Duke Harrington have done an excellent job putting this event together. When Michael asks how many people have never attended a Libertarian event before, about half the audience stands up. Fred Staples, the local Libertarian Congressional candidate, gives a fine introductory speech. Then I speak, after which Michael does his usual superlative job of raising money.

The appearances of this week have all been successful. Laura Carno has done an excellent job working with local Libertarians in each area, setting up truly professional events.

After tonight's event, several of us go out to dinner. Afterward, I have a late-night radio taping. It is with Dennis Hutchins, a young man who has made the two-hour drive from Bangor to interview me. The tape will air on WQCB-FM and some other stations in the north end of the state. We talk for about 20 minutes, as he asks a series of prepared questions. At one point, he stops the tape to tell me, "Right on!"

When we're finished, he explains his own political position, which comes from the left. He says he faces the dilemma of wanting to vote for me but that this might wind up helping George W. Bush get elected. I don't say a word. After he describes his feelings about this and that concerning the situation, he concludes by saying, "I guess I really have no choice; I have to vote for you."

Tuesday, August 15, 2000 — Nashville

I arrived home early yesterday morning, and was able to spend a good part of the day with Pamela, for the first time in a while.

Today, I have a pretty full schedule of interviews. It starts with 20 minutes with Craig Anderson and Laura Borne on stations KMND in Midland and KRIL in Odessa, Texas. Craig begins by asking what I thought of President Clinton's speech last night at the Democratic convention.

I say that Clinton apparently thought he needed 45 minutes to explain to Americans that they're better off. He reeled off statistics, programs, and anecdotes to make his case. But the only people he was impressing were those in the audience at the convention — people who think this presentation is going to help them win the Big Game a third time in a row.

In fact, if most people were noticeably better off than they were eight years ago, he wouldn't have to cite anything; people would already know that their lives had been improved dramatically. If I should somehow be elected President I expect that at the end of four years most families will have a net increase in their take-home pay of over $10,000 a year — because of the income and Social Security taxes would no longer exist. Voters would know without my telling them that they now could afford to have their children in private schools, or that they're able to support their churches and charities in a much more significant way, or that they had finally been able to start their own businesses. I wouldn't have to cite the nation's economic statistics.

Their cities would be safer with an end to the Drug War and the end of federal interference with law enforcement. I wouldn't have to recite crime statistics; they'd know their neighborhoods were safer.

The length of President Clinton's recitation was a tip-off to its meaninglessness. (It also was misleading. Although I didn't mention it on the air, the average economic growth rate during the Clinton years has been 3.0% per year; from 1900 to 1970, it was 3.5% per year, even averaging in the Great Depression. So, contrary to what he said, the Clinton years have been far from the most prosperous in history.)

After the radio interview, Pamela and I drive to the other side of Nashville, so I can do a remote TV interview with Fox News. David Asman interviews me for about five minutes. I get in all the important items, and before concluding he's thoughtful enough to ask for my website address.

When I get home I have an hour interview with "Uncle Todd" (Walter Turner) on WWBG in Greensboro, North Carolina. He has a 3-hour show, and he says he's put all the commercials in the other hours, so that we can talk uninterrupted. He is very friendly and we find a lot to joke about — while discussing all the important issues and why people should vote Libertarian. The show goes very well.

Then it's an Internet interview with Holly Kernan of the Real Politics website. She records a conversation with me for posting on their site, www.RedBand.com, in about two weeks. She challenges me on many issues and it's a very interesting discussion, lasting about 40 minutes or so.

When she asks who our target voter is, I say, "You." She says, "Me?" I say, "Yes. Don't you want to be free to live your own life without George Bush or Al Gore telling you what to do — free from regulations, free from officious bureaucrats who think they know more about what's good for you than you do, free to keep every dollar you earn, instead of seeing your money squandered by politicians on pork-barrel projects?" I never do get an answer from her, but it's obvious that she gets the point.

Later I have a 15 minute interview with Jason Mullins at WKPT in Kingsport and the Tri-City area of eastern Tennessee. It is a taped interview, and before we start he says, "I've been a lifelong Republican. I knew about the Libertarian Party before, but I didn't really look into it until a few months ago. And now I support you completely." Needless to say, the interview is very friendly.

The last interview of the day is with Pascale Burton, a reporter on KLBJ, a news station in Austin. She records one interview for airing Thursday morning, to plug our Thursday evening event in Austin, and a longer interview for airing a couple of weekends from now.

A USA Today article on August 3 indicated that the Bush website had 114,000 different people visiting it during July, while the Gore website had fewer than 80,000. However, today Jack Dean reports that our website had 108,861 different people visiting it during July — only 5% fewer than the Bush site.

And we had 42,290 different people visit our site just last week alone. We are currently getting 38,307 visits each day (from new and repeat visitors). The website has proven to be a resounding success. We want to keep expanding it with new items as often as possible. Everyone on the staff is already stretched to the limit, but Geoff Braun seems to be able to keep adding new elements that give people reasons to return to the site.

Today we received a message from Tom Rowland, in which he mentioned: "This morning, . . . I made 5 copies of your ‘Why Harry Browne makes an interesting guest' from the Press Pages of the web site and mailed them to the 5 biggest news organizations with a little post-it note saying, ‘FYI. In case you haven't heard...Tom Rowland, voter.'

"Everyday, without fail, I am posting to a chat room, sending an email to a major talk show or a major news organization or writing a letter or as many of these as I can get in. If we can get 40,000 minutemen to do the same, I am convinced it will make a difference."

I'm convinced it will make an enormous difference if only 1,000 people will do what Tom is doing.

Sometimes people ask what motivates me to keep going when we seem to have such a long way to go. The main answer is: Progress. We keep getting bigger, more visible, stronger, and more popular. And we keep getting more people like Tom Rowland to help us.

For example, look at this email I received today from Bill Staab of Dallas:

I've been a Democrat for 15 tears (years). . . .Your speech at the Libertarian Convention moved me in a way to make me think about our government and what its doing to us. Two weeks after the convention, and after many hours of looking into the Libertarian Party, I sent in $25 and joined.

I joined because like you, Harry, I think freedom is worth fighting for. You have many supporters and volunteers standing beside you catching and deflecting those stones being thrown at you, and it would be an honor and a pleasure for me to stand beside you and help you catch those stones.

Emails like this are pouring in from people who want to help us.

Wednesday, August 16, 2000 — Houston

Up at the crack of dawn (although dawn doesn't seem to crack for me) to catch an early flight to Houston. Steve Willis and Michael Cloud arrive in Houston at about the same time, and we head for the hotel.

Once there I have a phone interview with Charley Jones at KRLD in Dallas. I was on with him during the last campaign but this is the first time this year. He talks very fast and is very business-like, betraying no support or hardened opposition. But at the end of the interview he says, "I took the test on your website, and it looks like I'm a libertarian."

Steve and I take a rented car into Houston in the boiling heat — apparently somewhere in the high 90s. It may have been a pretty hot summer, but somehow today seems to be the hottest I can remember. Combined with the too-little sleep I got last night, the heat makes me drowsy.

We arrive at KHOU-TV for an interview, only to learn that the necessary camera crew is out covering a fire. we have a full schedule for the rest of the day, so we can't wait for the crew to return.

We go on to KTRK-TV, the ABC affiliate, where I'm interviewed by Cynthia Hunt. She is a young, intelligent reporter who appears not to have been exposed to libertarian ideas much. She has genuine questions of concern about how various functions can be handled once they are removed from the government. When she asks, "What happens to the poor without a safety net?" I say, "Just what happens now — they get looked after by people who really want to improve their lives, not by bureaucrats who want to make them permanent wards of the state."

After some difficulty navigating the Houston streets and Houston traffic, Steve and I arrive at Rob McKinnon's studio for a 30-minute interview that will be broadcast later on his ITEN.net Internet network. (If we find out when it will be broadcast, we'll let you know.) Rob is very agreeable, and takes pains to explain why people should vote Libertarian. He says, "I hope to call you ‘Mr. President' someday."

Sometimes I coin soundbites and then forget about them. He reads one to me that I must have said a couple of years ago. Regarding Republican plans to privatize Social Security, Sen. Phil Gramm estimated that it would take 60 years before you would be completely free of the system — to which I said, "So if you believe in reincarnation, the Republican plan is for you."

At Rob's studio, I call Ken Hamblin ("The Black Avenger") for a 15-minute radio interview on 130 stations of the American View network. He apparently hopes I'll join him in giving a Republican spin to Democratic claims regarding health care, education, and such — but I manage to turn the conversation to the real improvements we Libertarians want to make. He is very respectful and says he wants to talk with me regularly during the campaign.

When the interview is over, the producer Angela Wilkes comes on the line to let me know she agrees with me and is going to vote Libertarian. This is a fairly common occurrence. In addition to our deep penetration of the Internet community, we seem to have a very receptive audience in radio engineers and producers, as well as TV cameramen.

We leave Rob's studio and head for the hotel. The traffic is a mess. I have a one-hour interview coming up with Jim Engster on 15 Louisiana radio stations, so I do it on my cell phone. Jim doesn't claim to be a libertarian, but several times he refers to the LP as America's third largest party. We go through about two dozen calls during the hour. None of them is hostile. All the callers are either supportive or genuinely seeking answers to questions regarding how Libertarians would handle various concerns.

When we finally make it back to the hotel, I get to cool off with a shower. Then it's downstairs for our evening event. About 80 people show up, and they're very enthusiastic — including the 50% of them who say it's their first-ever Libertarian event. Michael raises enough money for four showings of our ads.

Today we begin sending out daily press briefings, called Browne Briefs. These are simple one-page faxes and emails going to more than 2,000 reporters, journalists, radio-TV hosts, and producers. Each release contains a simple one-paragraph soundbite from me on some current topic. We hope that soon we'll be able to transmit my daily schedule, and to expand our coverage to include the U.S. Newswire — which reaches the wire services, Internet search engines, and hundreds of websites.

This coverage can do a great deal to expand the thinking of those media people who still think this is a 4-way race. It also should lead to far more discussions of my candidacy when I'm not present. However, our ability to generate and keep up this kind of coverage will depend on the level of financial support we receive from donors.

Although Pat Buchanan certainly deserved to be in the news last week because of the bar-room brawl in the Reform Party, the truth is that I'm most likely generating more real news than either he or Ralph Nader is. They normally get into the news only when they appear on the Sunday political talk shows (which don't invite me yet). But I'm talking to tens or hundreds of thousands of people almost every day. And we will expand on that as we proceed.

Today's soundbite in the Browne Briefs was a takeoff on Jesse Jackson's chanting at last night's Democratic convention that "Gore is more." I pointed out that Al Gore is more — more government, more regulations, more failed government programs, more taxes, more of everything you've come to know and love about the federal government.

Thursday, August 17, 2000 — Austin

Today's plane isn't until 11am, so I have the luxury of sleeping in until 8.

We have a very tight schedule in Austin today, and when the plane is a few minutes late it puts us behind for virtually the entire day. We get in a rented car and head for the first appointment at KVUE-TV. There I have a 15-minute, leisurely, friendly interview with Jerry White.

We hurry from there to KXAN-TV for an interview with Rich Parsons. This one is virtually a carbon-copy of so many interviews I've had — covering a few issues, why one should vote Libertarian, and why we're in a much stronger position this year than in 1996. Both this and the KVUE interview are tapings, from which the reporter will put together a short feature for the evening news.

While at the station I have a very brief interview with Bob Crowley of the Texas State Radio Network.

Yesterday I complained about temperatures in the high 90s in Houston. Today in Austin it's 103. I don't see how it could possibly be any hotter. I pray that Al Gore is elected soon, so we can get rid of Global Warming. I'm sure with his scientific knowledge and ability to force people to toe the line he can do the job in a year or two at most.

In the car I have a short phone interview with Gary Susswein of the Austin American Statesman. He is friendly but non-committal.

We hurry to KLBJ for a one-hour live radio interview with Jeff Ward. He makes it clear from the start that he intends to vote Libertarian this year. I feel my answers in this interview are a bit long-winded, but generally the interview goes well. And later tonight I will be told over and over by newcomers attending our event that they heard me on this show.

When the interview ends, Pascale Burton comes into the studio. She interviewed me earlier in the week by phone for the station's newscast. She tells me she took the SelectSmart test (SelectSmart.com) and found she was far closer to me than any of the other presidential candidates.

At the hotel I have a 20-minute in-person conversation with Julie Nolen of The Daily Texan, the University of Texas newspaper. She has a photographer with her who takes dozens of pictures. Julie doesn't ask anything about education, so I point out to her that a college education is so expensive for her because the federal government has run up the price with all its subsidies.

Steve and I grab a quick bite in the hotel restaurant before the event. While we eat, Clark Paterson interviews me for the Austin Review. He is a Libertarian who at one time was an LP candidate.

The evening's event is a great success. Over 200 people show up, and they are very enthusiastic. The fund-raising goes extremely well. David Eagle, a local Libertarian, has done a wonderful job of rounding up a large audience. When Michael asks those attending their first Libertarian event to stand up, about 40% do so.

Friday, August 18, 2000 — Dallas

We arrive in Dallas to discover that it's even hotter here than in Houston or Austin. It's apparently about 106 degrees.

We check into the hotel and immediately head for the city for a TV interview.

On the way, I'm on the phone with Lindsay Parker on Bloomberg Boston PM on WBNW. Bloomberg is a financial service that has a TV channel and also provides a continual stream of investment news and quotes to computers. This is a pure talk show, however, and I've never been on with Lindsay before. She describes herself as a liberal, leaning toward libertarianism. The interview lasts about 30 minutes, we discuss mostly social programs, and her liberal background doesn't prevent her from seeing that government economic programs can hurt the poor, and that they also provide the avenue for politicians to interfere with our personal lives.

We arrive at KDFW-TV, the Fox channel, for an interview with Tim Ryan. We talk on camera for about 15 minutes, and he seems to understand libertarian concepts easily. His questions show a sympathy with what we're up against as a third party. But I'm not looking for sympathy — so, as usual, I try to keep bringing the conversation back to what we're offering people and how important it is for them to vote Libertarian.

After getting back to the hotel, I have a 20-minute interview with Kevin McCarthy on KLIF, a big talk station in Dallas. He says he's with us on the Drug War, but thinks we have a tough road ahead to bring people around on that issue. I point out that public opinion is already moving rapidly against the insane War on Drugs. He points out that George Bush will carry Texas easily, and so the wasted vote issue is meaningless for Texans. He advises his listeners to vote for me, as he intends to do. (This evening I will find out that at least a dozen people attend our event only because they happened to hear about it on this show.)

Steve and I head for the Dallas Morning News for an interview. After being kept waiting well past the appointed time, I'm about to tell Steve we should move on — especially since print interviews are so unproductive. But almost immediately the person we're supposed to see comes out, apologizes, and ushers us into a conference room. It turns out I'm there to meet with the whole editorial board — Rena Pederson, the Editorial Page Editor, plus editorial writers Jim Mitchell, Debra Decker, Henry Tatum, and Ruben Navarrette.

Tatum says nothing during the 50-minute meeting, but all the others ask questions and seem surprisingly friendly and sympathetic. I have no idea what they'll write, if anything, but the meeting is very interesting. They understand what I'm saying, they get the few political jokes I make, and they seem to agree that I'd be an interesting addition to the debates.

After the meeting, Ruben Navarrette remains in the room and tells me that his experience as a talk-radio host leads him to believe that young people are a very fertile field for our ideas. In most cases, they haven't become emotionally attached to any party, and they find both Social Security and the Drug War to be bad news. None of this is new to me, but I'm encouraged by Ruben's desire to help. We intend eventually to test ads on MTV.

Steve and I get back to the hotel just in time to get something to eat before the next interview. It's 5pm and we haven't eaten anything all day. However, the hotel restaurant isn't open and we have to drive nearby to Denny's — the official Fine Dining Experience of the Browne for President campaign.

I get back to the hotel and talk for 20 minutes with Larry Marino on KIEV in Los Angeles. He's a conservative who agrees with me on virtually everything but the Drug War. And I can't help but think that, given 15 minutes to discuss the Drug War alone, he'd come around on that as well. The interview goes well.

The evening's event attracts about 130 people, at least half of whom are attending their first Libertarian event. Brian and Clint Zoch, our volunteer coordinators in the area, have done a good job of bringing out an audience. Given that so many of the people are brand new, the fund-raising goes particularly well. Camera crews are there from three stations — Channel 4 (Fox), Channel 5 (NBC), and Channel 33. We hold a mini-press-conference before the event, with me answering four or five questions. And then the camera crews film me talking to the arriving guests, as well as the first few minutes of my speech.

Saturday, August 19, 2000 — New Orleans

Michael and I fly to New Orleans to attend the Louisiana LP convention. Michael Perkins has done a terrific job of reviving what was a moribund state party. When I attended last year's state convention, only about 35 people were present. At this evening's banquet, there are close to a hundred.

At the banquet I speak on why I believe we have a good chance to achieve liberty during the next decade, and Michael fund-raises for the state party.

Sunday, August 20, 2000 — New Orleans & Nashville

I awaken early to do a radio show. It is 25 minutes with Doug Clifford at WSKY-FM in Gainesville, Florida. He is very friendly, and the interview is uneventful.

Afterward I fly home to Nashville. My laptop decided to stop working a couple of days ago, and I spend a couple of hours on the phone with Dell Computer trying to discover what's wrong. We never do find out, and the quest is postponed while the company sends me some upgrades.

The rest of the evening I spend writing and catching up on the email that I missed the past few days.

I find that my appearance on Bill Maher's Politically Incorrect is confirmed for Thursday night. I have mixed emotions about doing this show. The good side is that it's a national TV show that's watched by a lot of people. I was on it in 1996. Later, a young liberal woman told me that she and her friends all voted for me because they saw me on Politically Incorrect and thought I was the most honest politician they had seen.

The bad side is that it is a typical chaos show in which I'm unlikely to be able to deliver three sentences in a row without being interrupted. And unlike in a typical interview, I probably won't be able to steer the conversation to the areas I want to cover. I'm at the mercy of the host. The best I can do is relax and just make the most of whatever opportunities I get.

I receive advice from friends that I should dress for the show a bit more casually than I usually do. However, I don't think that's the best idea. Most of the public who see me — in any circumstances — will see me only once. If they're going to remember me, I don't want them to remember me as a casual candidate — but as someone they can envision as President. It's okay for George Bush or Al Gore to wear an open collar and cowboy boots occasionally, because most people have already seen them in presidential attire. But this may be the only exposure I have to much of the audience.

I think this is important for all LP candidates to bear in mind. We are presenting what to many is a very radical message. It's important that this radical message come from people who seem to be very reasonable. We must present a dignified, non-threatening appearance.

I receive some encouraging emails. Art Matsko, who distributes our literature, says he's currently shipping 10,000 copies a day of our introductory brochure. John Doebler, who was at our Dallas event this past Friday evening, has passed out over a thousand brochures himself.

Pat Wedel writes to say, "My husband & I took his parents to see Harry Browne in Austin last night. They have been die-hard ‘don't waste your vote' preachers ever since Larry & I started voting Libertarian. When we took them home last night they both said they are seriously thinking of voting for Harry. Hallelujah!"

Insight magazine (a conservative weekly published by the Washington Times) conducted a poll of its online readers, asking "If the presidential election were held today, would you vote for any of the major ‘third-party' candidates?" The results were:

Pat Buchanan, Reform Party: 29%
Harry Browne, Libertarian Party: 12%
Howard Phillip, Constitution Party: 7%
Ralph Nader, Green Party: 6%
John Hagelin, Natural Law Party: 2%
None of the above: 44

All told, 56% said they would vote for one of the candidates running for president outside the Republican and Democratic parties.

Since Insight is a conservative magazine, it isn't surprising that Pat Buchanan received the most mentions. But it is surprising that his lead isn't greater.

On August 17, The Rasmussen Poll asked voters the following question:

"In addition to Al Gore and George W. Bush, several candidates are likely to be on the ballot in nearly all 50 states. These include Pat Buchanan, Ralph Nader, Harry Browne, and Howard Philips. Should all of these candidates be included in the Presidential Debates?"

Almost half, 46%, said yes, 37% said no, and 16% weren't sure.

When voters were asked whether individual candidates should be included, these were the respondents saying yes for each candidate:

Ralph Nader, 42%
Pat Buchanan, 40%
Harry Browne, 21%
Howard Phillips, 17%

I receive a nice email from Richard Gilbert in Buena Park, California. He says,

Last night I was with a group of friends and I was reading to them the section about what Mr. Browne would do on his first day in office from The Great Libertarian Offer. When I finished they all exclaimed, ‘That's it. I'm voting for Harry Browne." And two of them immediately went online and ordered the book for themselves. They'll read it and tell others like I did.

We are making a great deal of progress, and more may be on the way. A lot will depend on how much money we can raise. I want to get our advertising message to every American, to reach every journalist, to promote our personal appearances and double the audience sizes again, to arrange more appearances on national TV shows.

Tuesday, August 22, 2000 — Nashville

This very long day begins at 6:20am with a 10-minute radio interview with "Jack and Sharon" on a morning drive-time show on WFLA in Tampa Bay. Jack says, "What do you do to try to dispel the idea that Libertarian means libertine?" I say that Libertarians are actually the opposite of libertines. We believe people must be free so that they can be responsible for what they do. Politicians like to shield people from the consequences of their acts, turning them into irresponsible libertines.

Sharon asks whom I would vote for if I weren't running. I say I wouldn't vote for anyone if there weren't a Libertarian candidate, because a vote for George Bush or Al Gore endorses their plans to make government bigger, more expensive, more intrusive, and more oppressive. If we want smaller government, the first important step is to stop supporting those who are making government bigger.

The second interview is 20 minutes with Phil Paleologos on the Talk America Radio Network. As always, he is very supportive. He asks me to answer only "good" or "bad" to a list of government programs. As he itemizes the programs, I of course say "bad" to each of them — progressing to "very bad" and "very, very bad."

Then I'm on a tiny pirate station in Adrian, Michigan. It is called Radio Free Lennawee, with no call letters. It's a Christian station and Martha Farnam is the host of this show. A Congressional candidate from the U.S. Taxpayers Party calls in. He tries to sell the idea that the founders meant the 1st Amendment as a vehicle to promote the Christian religion in government schools — even though there were no government schools at the time. He says the Bible should be taught in government schools. I say that if he succeeds in getting government to promote religion, it will be religion as practiced by the likes of Bill Clinton, Al Gore, Teddy Kennedy, George Bush, and Newt Gingrich. Is that what he wants?

Next is another conversation with Lionel, this time on his Internet show. He always asks me to recite the Great Libertarian Offer for him. In our half-hour interview, a good deal of the time is spent talking about why you should vote Libertarian.

I then have a 30-minute interview with Davis Rankin at KURV in Edinburgh, Texas. A caller says he's sympathetic to libertarian ideas, but I overstate the case when I say there's virtually no difference between Al Gore and George Bush. I ask him to cite some differences. He says George Bush wouldn't say "there's no controlling authority" (referring to Al Gore's defense when accused of making campaign calls from the White House). I ask how George Bush's attitude on that will improve the caller's life and get government out of it. The best he can say is that he'll be more serene knowing there's an honest man in the White House.

Now it's 25 minutes with Austin Hill on KTKP in Phoenix. He seems to think Americans want such programs as Social Security. I suggest that he go out on the street and ask the first ten people he meets whether they'd like to be free from Social Security so they could handle their own retirement money. I bet that at least seven out of ten would say yes.

It's now 10am, and I've already had six interviews. This is going to be a long day.

I have a very interesting hour-long interview with Kelly Stevens on WROW in Albany — my first interview with her. She likes it when I say I want to reduce Congressional pay to $400 per year with no retirement benefits, so that Congressmen would spend only one month in Washington every other year to pass a budget, and then go home to real jobs.

A caller says the Ayn Rand Institute has condemned the Libertarian Party because public opinion isn't ready for freedom and must first be made to understand reality. (I don't know whether the caller's description of the Institute's position is accurate.)

I tell him there are many good libertarian educational organizations, but they reach only people who've already decided to seek out libertarian ideas. The LP and Advocates for Self-Government, on the other hand, are the only national organizations I know of that take the initiative to go to the public and seek out new prospects; the others deal mainly with existing libertarians. It is after the Libertarian Party has exposed people to libertarian ideas that those people seek out other organizations. The LP is working to change public opinion, while most organizations are working to back up those whose opinions are already pretty much in line with ours.

Also, some people look down on the LP because they assume a political party will compromise, while other organizations can remain true to libertarian ideals. Actually, just the opposite is true. Many libertarian think tanks advocate partial privatization of Social Security (without letting people choose to drop out completely), tax cuts instead of repealing the income tax, freedom for medical marijuana but not a complete end to the Drug War. Meanwhile, Libertarians are out front — boldly showing people how much better off they'd be by getting the government completely out of these areas.

Next it is 30 minutes with Jeff McAndrew on KFIZ in Fond du Lac, Wisconsin. During the conversation, I mention that you know more about what's good for your life than Al Gore or George Bush does; you know better what you need than Bill Clinton or Newt Gingrich does; you care more about your life than any politician does. When gun control is brought up, I say that "Lives get saved when people can defend themselves; lives get lost when people are defenseless."

Then it's an hour with Glenn Klein on WTAN in Tampa Bay. He doesn't call himself a libertarian, but he certainly sounds like one. He introduces his show as "promoting maximum freedom." He says he likes the consistency of the Libertarian Party. His wife is on the show, and she tells me she agrees with us on economic freedom, but wonders whether we need government to enforce social justice. I ask her why she agrees with us on economic freedom, and she says it's because the government messes up everything. I point out that you're asking that same government to enforce social justice. Glenn ends the show saying, "I want to take this opportunity to endorse your candidacy for President."

After lunch, Pamela and I drive to the other side of Nashville to tape an 8-minute segment for the O'Reilly Factor on the Fox News TV network. Michael Reagan is the guest host. I don't consider it one of my best performances, but it goes well. Michael has always been very good to me, and today is no exception.

While I'm at the studio for the videotaping, a reporter from the Nashville Tennessean is snapping photos of me for an article.

Upon returning home, it's back to the phone again. First I have 10 minutes with Dave Jaconette on WKZO in Kalamazoo, Michigan. Although he doesn't overtly support me, he obviously knows a lot about the Libertarian Party, and seems to approve of what he knows.

Then I have a 20-minute interview with Joe Bonni of the Boston Weekly Dig, an "alternative" newspaper. Joe is a libertarian, and one of the producers of a big anti-Drug-War rally at which I'll be speaking next month.

My final interview of the day is with Stan Solomon at WXLW in Indianapolis. He has Brad Klofenstein, the full-time director of the Indiana LP, and Mark Rutherford, the state chair, in the studio with him. They've been on for the preceding hour, and now I'm on for 30 minutes. Stan has always been good to us, and today is no exception. But he asks how I'd feel if I got enough votes to throw the election to Al Gore. I tell him I'd be tickled pink; maybe it would make the Republicans stop taking your vote for granted.

Thirteen interviews today. Some were in smaller markets, but we probably reached hundreds of thousands of people on radio alone, and that much again on The O'Reilly Factor.

I received an email today from Toby Olvera, saying "Recently, the University of Florida chapter of the Florida League of Student Libertarians (FLSL) painted what we contend is the World's Largest ‘Harry Browne for President' sign on a roadside wall reserved for people to paint murals on. At 40-60 feet long and 9-10 feet high, if not the biggest sign, we are still confident it ranks right near the top! The sign reads ‘Harry Browne: Libertarian for President' and includes the website address and phone number." The organization's website is at http://flsl.tripod.com and a picture of the sign is at http://flsl.tripod.com/sign.html.

Today David A. Ricks of Miami has a letter published in USA Today. It is in response to a letter in which a reader said he won't vote because he finds neither of the two main candidates appealing.

David says, "I say to him: Stop and take another look. In this election, there are not two, but five candidates who will be on the ballot running for president. I myself will be voting for Libertarian candidate Harry Browne." The letter goes on to urge ending the stranglehold the Democrats and Republicans have on politics in America.

Wednesday, August 23, 2000 — Los Angeles

I'm up at 5:45am to catch an early flight to the Burbank airport, near Los Angeles. I see a "Browne for President" yard sign at the entrance to a Nashville freeway. It's the first yard sign I've seen for any presidential candidate this year.

When I get to the airport, I find my connection through Dallas is going to be two hours late. But I luck out. The direct flight to Los Angeles leaves in 20 minutes — and I not only get a seat, but I get an exit-row seat, giving me extra leg-room. I arrive in Los Angeles a couple of hours earlier than planned, but eat up one of them taking a taxi from the L.A. airport to Glendale, where we'll be having a fund-raiser this week. I'm here to be on Politically Incorrect tomorrow night, and we've arranged other events around that.

When I arrive at the hotel, there's a fax from the show providing some instructions and the topics planned for the night I'll be on. They are (1) people losing interest in the Internet, (2) legalizing sexual surrogates for the disabled, (3) a defamation suit against a radio program for offering to give away "black hoes" (garden tools) to listeners, and (4) an organization that grants wishes to dying children saying it will no longer grant wishes that involve hunting. I read the transcript of Ralph Nader's appearance two nights ago; almost the entire show was devoted to lionizing him and discussing his favorite topics — while I get sexual surrogates. Well, we'll see.

I have a 30-minute phone interview with Mike Bung of KXEL in Waterloo, Iowa. He seems intent in asking me question after question about Al Gore's campaign, but by now it's easy for me to turn any question into a discussion of my topics.

Then I'm on the phone with Bonna de la Cruz of the Nashville Tennessean. We talk for about a half-hour. She is very friendly, but apparently skeptical about the power of the Libertarian message.

Next up is a 30-minute interview with Tony Trupiano on the Talk America Radio Network. Tony is very supportive. We run through several issues and take one phone call — which is from a recent convert to the Libertarian Party who is concerned about the party's stand on immigration. Among other things, I point out that a free country has no fear of anyone coming in or going out. But a welfare state necessarily is scared to death of rich people getting out and poor people coming in.

My last show of the day is an hour with Tim Stellman on WSHA-FM at Shaw University in Raleigh, North Carolina. There are actually two or three students in the studio asking questions. Their questions indicate that they've been taught well that government must take care of us, but they seem to respond with open minds to my answers. As the program progresses, it becomes obvious that the students are more libertarian than I thought. They mention that they've been reading on the air material from my website and the LP's press releases.

I'm receiving a lot of emails about yesterday's appearance on The O'Reilly Factor — all favorable. One is from Corey Schimmel who says, "I just saw Harry Browne on the O Reilly Factor, and all I can say is Bush just lost a vote! Go Harry!"

Thursday, August 24, 2000 — Los Angeles

I'm up at 6:30am to write some radio commercials, to be recorded this morning.

My first interview is scheduled for 10 minutes at 7:35am with Eliza Sonneland at KTSA in San Antonio. She refers to me as "my personal hero" and tells what she goes through when she asks people to vote for a Libertarian President. She runs through the objections she gets on the environment, taxes, and other issues.

Unfortunately, as sometimes happens, the program was a little late getting to me and now she wants me to stay on for longer than was scheduled. But this morning I have another interview scheduled right on top of this one, and I have to cut this one short.

The next interview is with Mark Roberts at the news department of WEKC in Birmingham. We tape a 7-minute interview, running through all the issues quickly. He reveals his own Republican leanings, maintaining that the Republicans are for smaller government — even though, as I point out, they didn't criticize a single government program during their recent convention.

Steve Willis and I drive into Hollywood to a sound studio where I record six 1-minute radio ads. Four ads are on the wasted-vote issue, one is on the Drug War, and one is on the gun laws. We probably will run the wasted-vote ads on shows with Libertarian hosts during the last few weeks of the campaign. This will be our opportunity to try to keep people on our side from caving in at the last moment and voting for someone else. (The ads will be on our website sometime soon.)

Afterward, Steve and I stop for breakfast at Denny's — the official Eat-and-Run facility of the Browne for President campaign.

From the sound studio, we go to a TV studio where Mark Selzer, a local Congressional candidate, tapes a cable-access TV show. We have a 30-minute interview, and Mark does an excellent job of hosting the show. We also record another 15-minute interview to be inserted in a future show.

Back at the hotel, I write some soundbites for our daily press briefings. And then it's back on the phone with Rick Knobe at KSOO in Sioux Falls, South Dakota. Rick is obviously supportive, pointing out how much money is wasted on the Drug War. He asks whether this is an issue I get "sucked into" and I say that conservative talk-show hosts sometimes think they can discredit me with the drug issue — but in fact most Americans already think the Drug War is a failure. The Drug War is typical of most government programs — violating the Constitution, failing to achieve anything it promises, causing more harm than good, and increasing its budget with each failure.

In mid-afternoon, a car arrives at the hotel to take me to the Politically Incorrect show. Steve Willis, Jack Dean, and Geoff Braun of the campaign staff go with me.

Upon our arrival at the studio, the producer briefs me on the show. And, yes, they are planning to focus on the non-political issues listed in yesterday's memo — plus the social meaning of the large audience for the final episode last night of the "Survivor" TV show. It doesn't look like a promising venue in which to provide reasons to vote Libertarian.

One of the show's staff introduces me to a couple of her friends — one of whom has apparently been soliciting votes for me wherever he goes.

The other guests are Kellyanne Fitzpatrick, a Republican pollster who often appears on talk shows; Sharon Lawrence, a TV actress; and Tim Stack, a comedian whose now-defunct show "Nightstand" (a spoof of Oprah-type shows) I used to see occasionally and enjoy. Before the show, I talk with Kellyanne, who tells me that two of her employees were thrilled that she was going to be on the show with the Libertarian candidate. Tim Stack says he looked at my website and says "I really like your politics."

The show begins with a discussion of what the "Survivor" show tells us about what we want in leaders. Bill Maher says we want manipulative, slick people who can get things done as leaders. I say I don't want a leader; I want 250 million leaders, each running his own life. When I ask, "Don't you think you can run your life better than George Bush or Al Gore can?" I'm greeted with applause.

In the second segment, we discuss the lawsuit over the "black hoes." Sharon Lawrence and I debate this, and I maintain that if you give government the authority to make decisions regarding what people can say, why can't they stop Sharon Lawrence from saying something someone else considers offensive? I'm able to make libertarian points, and the audience responds positively, but we're a million miles away from discussing why anyone should vote Libertarian.

In the commercial break before the final full segment, Bill Maher says we'll cover one of the other topics on the proposed agenda. I remind him that he devoted the whole Monday show to topics that Ralph Nader relished, while on this show we're discussing nothing but trivia. Maher says to the producer, "We'll talk about libertarianism for the final segment."

And we do. It's terrific. I get to talk about the income tax, Social Security, the Drug War, and foreign policy. Tim Stack reads a line from my website saying that before the first World War a 10-year-old girl could go into a drugstore and buy heroin. Everyone listens without interrupting as I say that this freedom meant that little girls didn't buy heroin because it wasn't forbidden fruit. It was only when the Drug War started that criminal gangs began to ply little girls with heroin, cocaine, and other drugs.

During this segment Bill Maher is more forceful in endorsing libertarianism than I've ever seen him. He says to me, "You're my guy." And in answer to a question he says, "Would I vote for Harry? Absolutely I would." To this a large part of the audience cheers.

As it is a taped show, I get to see it on the air later in the evening. Although it wasn't perfect, it was far better than I had hoped for. My only regret is that I failed to mention the website address.

Today AntiWar.com published my article "What Is War?" (http://www.antiwar.com/orig/browne1.html). The article was mostly a reprint from my book Why Government Doesn't Work.

Friday, August 25, 2000 — Los Angeles

The day begins at 8am with a 30-minute phone interview with Jaz McKay at KKAL in San Luis Obispo, California. He says he has progressed from being a Socialist to a Democrat to a Republican and now a Libertarian, voting for me in 1996. At one point we talk about negative advertising, and I point out that Democrats and Republicans can no longer promise to dramatically improve the lives of people in any group, so they have to campaign on the theme, "I may be bad, but I'm not as bad as the other guy."

During a commercial break, Jaz tells me that in publications of the radio industry he's seen ads in which stations advertise for libertarian-leaning talk-show hosts.

Next is an interview with Fred Andrle on WOSU in Columbus, Ohio. We go over a number of policy issues and as yet I haven't urged anyone to vote Libertarian. So I take the next policy question and use it as an example of why you will never get smaller government unless you vote Libertarian. At the conclusion of the interview, the station doesn't hang up the phone and so I listen to Andrle's ensuing remarks. He gives a strong explanation of the failures of the Drug War, and when a caller challenges my views on the environment, Andrle defends the Libertarian position.

I then have an interview with Alex Jones of Genesis Communications, broadcasting on the Internet and through short-wave stations. He's conspiracy-oriented. I point out that although we may have different explanations for how big government came about, the only way you'll get smaller government is to vote Libertarian. He agrees and says, "I think Harry Browne is a great choice."

My last interview of the day is with Suzanne Lee on WNTA in Rockford, Illinois. She is quite friendly toward libertarian ideas, and the interview is otherwise uneventful.

Michael Cloud arrives from Atlanta, where he did fund-raising at a rally for local candidates with radio host Neal Boortz as the featured speaker. Michael, Steve, and I are joined by our webmaster Geoff Braun — and we drive about 20 miles to Woodland Hills for the evening's event.

About 115 people are in attendance. One of them is Penn Jillette, of the magic team of Penn & Teller. For five years Penn also wrote a very readable column for PC Computing Magazine — a column that was semi-humorous and semi-libertarian. He tells me he voted for me in 1996 and plans to do so again if I don't mess up my speech tonight. (Actually, his words were slightly more rustic than that.) Art Olivier, our esteemed Vice-President candidate, is there — and he provides a gracious introduction to my speech.

The evening goes well. About 40% of the audience are at their first Libertarian event. Aaron Starr did a good job of getting a crowd out on short notice. Although we prefer not to stage events unless we have a large audience guaranteed in advance, we do schedule some events in a hurry when I will be in the area for an important event — such as, in this case, my finding out only a week ago that I would be on Politically Incorrect.

Today Justin Raimondo of AntiWar.com (http://www.antiwar.com/justin/raimondo-sp1.html) publishes a hit piece on me entitled "Browne on Maher – ‘Libertarian Sells Out'" The article focuses on my policy of targeting foreign leaders who attack us, rather than their innocent subjects.

On Politically Incorrect, I said (taken from the ABC transcript): "But the interesting thing is that it is against the law to kill Saddam Hussein, but it is not against the law to kill millions of Iraqi citizens who may hate Saddam Hussein as much as we do. I would reverse that.

"If we got in trouble with a foreign country, the first thing I would do is go after the leader. I would put up a reward of $1 billion for the person who can kill that leader. And it would be available to Americans, to foreigners, to the dictators' wives or palace guards, anybody."

Raimondo's article tried to make it appear that I would use assassination threats as a way of imposing my will on foreign countries — when in fact the policy is designed as a means of dissuading a foreign leader from attacking us. It is part of my overall foreign policy that prohibits intervening in the affairs of foreign countries. Raimondo knows this, as my policy is spelled out in detail in both Why Government Doesn't Work and The Great Libertarian Offer.

In The Great Libertarian Offer, I make my use of the assassination policy very clear:

"Please understand the limits of this proposal. It isn't a way to force dictators to change their spots or accommodate the U.S. It is only a means to prevent a direct attack on America. If the dictator withdraws his threat, the U.S. would withdraw the reward.

"If our government followed a libertarian foreign policy, it's unlikely that any foreign ruler would want to threaten us. So it's unlikely that any such reward would ever be posted. But if a foreign ruler were tempted to threaten us, the fear of assassination would be more likely to deter him than the fear of losing some of his civilian subjects to U.S. bombs.

"If you don't believe that's true, if you think assassination isn't nice, what is the alternative? Is it to kill thousands of innocent foreigners and to assure the deaths of innocent Americans?

"That to me is the cruelest, most reckless approach."

But in his article, Raimondo says, "This is precisely why the rest of the world hates us, and justly so: because even the nice Americans, like Harry Browne — really a well-meaning kind of guy, quite likable if a trifle slow — have the supreme arrogance to see themselves as naturally wielding the power of life and death over the rest of humanity." In the process he puts words in my mouth, surrounding them with quotation marks as though they are authentic — a ruse that's been used on me frequently over the years.

Why would Raimondo misrepresent my views? Because he's afraid I might take votes away from peace-loving Pat Buchanan.

Yesterday the Jacksonville (NC) Daily News ran an editorial on my candidacy. It began with, "Looking for a refreshing and challenging change of pace from the Republicans and Democrats? Check out Harry Browne, the Libertarian Party's nominee for president." The rest of the editorial sounds as though it was based on one of my recent personal-appearance speeches, although I haven't been in North Carolina recently. Although Jacksonville, North Carolina, isn't one of America's major markets, the editorial is an example of what we're looking for — increased discussion of my candidacy when I'm not present.

Saturday, August 26, 2000 — Los Angeles

No interviews today, so I get to catch up on sleep. Then I think I have a chance to get up-to-date on my email and other writing chores. But I'm having problems with my laptop and my email service, and I wind up with less productive time than I had expected. After a third conversation with the Internet Service Provider, I'm able to download my email for the first time in three days, but I still have problems with the laptop itself.

In the late afternoon, we have an event at the Glendale hotel. A little over a hundred people are present, but the fund-raising is sub-par. Otherwise, the event comes off well. Again, nearly half the audience indicate that this is their first Libertarian event. The actor and game-show host David Ruprecht, who appeared with me in our campaign videotape and who joined the LP at the national convention in July, is on hand and says a few words prior to my speech. Art Olivier again introduces me.

Claudia Peschiutta of the Glendale News-Press, the local daily, is at the event and she interviews me immediately afterward. During the week she published an accurate and helpful article about my candidacy, which alerted readers to today's appearance in Glendale.

On the weekends, Fox TV News reruns some episodes of its opinion shows from the week. Today they showed several times the O'Reilly Factor episode with Michael Reagan interviewing me.

Sunday, August 27, 2000 — Detroit

I'm up at 5am to catch an early-morning plane to Detroit. It's a through flight with one stop in Dallas, taking 7-1/2 hours. Fortunately, I have more than enough Frequent Flyer miles to upgrade to first class.

Upon arrival in Detroit, I'm surprised to find about 40 Libertarians waiting to greet me at the gate. Barbara Goushaw and Fred Collins have arranged my schedule, and they take me to the home of Ben and Annina Bachrach for a fund-raiser for Greg Stempfle, who's running for State Representative. I say a few words, and then we go to a banquet staged by Brass Roots, Michigan's big pro-gun organization. There are a little over 300 people at the banquet, hosted by Jon Coon — a long-time leader in the Michigan LP. I'm the featured speaker. Apparently, my remarks help to persuade a few people to vote Libertarian this year.

Monday, August 28, 2000 — Nashville

Another early flight today, but this one is taking me home for the day. Tomorrow I'll be off again for New York, but at least I'll have a few hours at home.

Today's Nashville Tennessean has a lengthy article about me — starting on the front page above the fold. In fact it's the second most prominent article in today's paper. It is the article for which Bonna de la Cruz interviewed me by phone last Wednesday. It is a very friendly, respectful article. There are a few misquotes in it, but nothing serious. I don't know why the Tennessean decided to do this now. There is no news "hook" to the article, and they already ran a profile of me when I made my candidacy official last February. (The new article is at http://www.tennessean.com/sii/00/08/28/browne28.shtml)

Our proficient webmaster Geoff Braun tells me that our Internet site is receiving a steady stream of requests for information from people who heard about us from Neal Boortz' radio show on WSB in Atlanta (an hour of which is broadcast nationally). Neal joined the LP at our 1998 national convention, and since then he's been a Libertarian ball of fire — using his show to promote the party and my candidacy.

Jack Dean has let us know that our website traffic is way up. We have had 173,253 different visitors so far in August, as opposed to 108,861 in all of July.

Rasmussen's daily tracking poll indicates that the 3rd-party candidates are losing some support as the race between Bush and Gore narrows. We remain virtually even with Pat Buchanan. Here are the results of Sunday's poll:

Bush, 43.1%
Gore, 40.7%
Nader, 2.8%
Buchanan, 0.9%
Browne, 0.8%
Phillips, 0.1%
Some other, 1.9%
Not sure, 9.7%

Jack Dean first proposed in late 1995 that I write this campaign journal. I began writing it in January 1996 with the title "On the Campaign Trail" and stopped writing it on November 12, 1996. I resumed it in February of this year when I made the official announcement of my candidacy. As this has helped me keep in touch with you and pass on news you might not otherwise hear, I'm very grateful to Jack for the idea.

Tuesday, August 29, 2000 — New York

Pamela and I are up at 5:30 to catch a plane to New York. This is the first trip in several weeks on which Pamela has accompanied me, and it is a lot more pleasant for me.

To save several hundred dollars on the air fare, we fly into Islip Airport, way out on Long Island. There we meet Steve Willis, who has flown in from Baltimore. A car and driver also are there to take us to Manhattan. The trip takes about 90 minutes.

On the way I have a 30-minute phone interview with Mike Scinto at WDAO in Dayton, Ohio. My cell-phone connection is broken twice as the car goes through tunnels. He asks a lot of good questions, but takes no particular stand on any of the issues.

When we get to Manhattan, we realize that a clerical error has caused us to be booked at the wrong hotel in the wrong part of the city. We are supposed to stay at the Excelsior, a recently remodeled hotel on West 81st Street that is surprisingly inexpensive for such a nice hotel. Instead, we're at Broadway and 27th, in a hotel that costs as much but is far from as nice. In fact, the air conditioning in our room doesn't even work, and it's a very muggy day. So we quickly make arrangements to move to the other hotel.

But first I have four more interviews to do. One is 30 minutes with Paul Harral, Jack Z. Smith, and J.R. Jill Labbe of the Fort Worth Star-Telegram. They are very friendly, and one of them is quite happy with my intention as President to disarm the Capitol guards until the Congressmen restore to all Americans the unconditional right to defend themselves. As usual, however, there's no way to know what will come as a result of the interview.

(As it turns out, J.R. Labbe writes a wonderful article, published on August 31, presenting our ideas accurately and saying, ". . . his voice is one that needs to be heard. It would be a loss to the American people not to see and hear him during the presidential debates. Line 'em all up — Bush, Gore, Nader, Buchanan and Browne — and let the voters hear what they have to say." The article is reprinted the next day in San Diego's North County Times as an editorial, and apparently also in the Panama City [Florida] News Herald.)

Next is a 20-minute phone conversation with Timothy Pajak of HRWire, a magazine and Internet site (www.HRWire.com). The publication is for Human Resources officers in corporations and others interested in health care and retirement plans. He says he likes that I said on Politically Incorrect last week that we shouldn't look for someone to "lead" us, but instead America should have 250 million leaders — each responsible for his own life. He seems very friendly toward libertarian ideas.

I then have a 30-minute interview with Ralph Bristol at WSPA in Spartanburg, South Carolina. Before I go on the air, his producer says he happened to be surfing his TV set in July when he came across my acceptance speech at the LP convention. He became engrossed and decided he was pretty much a libertarian. A lot of my interview with Bristol concerns foreign policy and a missile defense. He seems to be quite in sync with a non-interventionist foreign policy. In the last minute of the show, he brings up the Drug War. I say we should schedule another interview and give that subject the time it deserves. He agrees.

The final interview is supposed to be 30 minutes with D.L. Stewart at WHIO in Dayton, Ohio. However, they have a problem with their phones, and we're about 15 minutes late getting started. He begins by saying, "The Democrats want to take our money and give it away; the Republicans want to take our money and keep it. What do Libertarians want?" I tell him that Libertarians want to stop the politicians from taking our money in the first place. He says, "What an extraordinary thought!"

Because of the late start, I stay for an extra 10 minutes or so. We get a number of calls — almost all from supportive people. One man says he was a Democrat for many years, but he wasn't really for the Democrats, he was simply against the Republicans — afraid of the Religious Right. But now he has decided to be for freedom and the Libertarians.

After the final interview, we check out of the hotel and move uptown.

Wednesday, August 30, 2000 — New York

A lot going on today. We have to get up at 5:30 (do some people really do this willingly?), as we have to drive all the way back out to Long Island for a short TV interview. (Don't ask why we didn't do the interview yesterday when we were on Long Island; that's just the way things work out sometimes.)

On the way to Long Island, I have three brief radio interviews on my cell phone. The first is with Jim Thompson a newscaster at WGCH in Greenwich, Connecticut. The interview is only about 5 minutes long, but it goes very well — covering all the basics.

Then it's Jim Turner at WDBO in Orlando. Before I go on, Kirk Healy, the producer, says, "We're all in your corner. You're our man." And he suggests that I invite Jim Turner to join the LP during the interview. I do so, but Jim doesn't respond. However, he does plug next week's appearance in Orlando.

Then it's "Carmen & Chris in the Morning" on WSSR-FM in Tampa. Carmen says she's a registered Libertarian and she's on my side all the way. We talk mostly about Social Security and she responds to most of my statements like a member of the Amen Corner.

We arrive at the News 12 station in Woodbury. This is a large cable channel covering Long Island. My interview is live at 8:15, and it's only 5 minutes long. But it will be replayed throughout the day. The woman who interviews me asks a question that leads me to talk about repealing the income tax. Without hearing a word I said, she then says, "I understand you also want to repeal the income tax." So much for an involved conversation. Walking down the hall after the interview, I pass a man who says, "I'm voting for you."

On the way back to Manhattan, I have a phone interview with Brian Weiss of George Magazine's website (www.georgemag.com). He's a young man who sounds almost like a Libertarian, as he anticipates my answers to many of his questions. He's either libertarian-leaning or a very perceptive reporter. Either way he ought to have a promising future.

Another cell phone interview is 5-7 minutes with the Kevin & Bean Show on KROQ-FM in Burbank, California. They have a morning rock & roll show for young people, which is the kind of show I always enjoy being on. Both hosts are very sympathetic to the ideas I express, and I have the opportunity to say everything I want.

Then we're at the Fox News Channel for a 5-minute interview with Linda Vester. She asks a couple of questions, and then I barrel forward and take over the conversation — covering everything I want to get into the interview. She seems quite willing to let me do so. On the way out, one of the engineers tells me she'll be voting for me.

Later in the day we go to WABC for a radio hour with Sean Hannity of Hannity & Colmes. He is a staunch Republican, but everytime I talk with him he seems to be more critical of the Republicans than before. He still will vote for George W. Bush, however. Today I keep repeating that voting Republican means you're giving up — that you don't ever expect to be free — because it's obvious that Republicans will never allow you to be free to live your life as you want.

In the second half of the hour, as I'm making this point, we suddenly lurch off into a discussion of the military and of foreign interventions — a discussion that lasts about 20 minutes. This in fact seems to be the only area where Sean actually expects George Bush to do something Sean wants — use the military to keep the whole world in line. I try to point out that none of the previous foreign adventures have delivered on their promised benefits, but I don't get anywhere with him. I hope I scored more points with the listeners.

In the evening I'm on for 45 minutes with Brent Johnson of The American Sovereign show, an Internet broadcast. He is very good to me — beginning by saying, "No other candidate is so well spoken." He seems especially happy with my statement to disarm all the guards protecting the Congressmen. The callers are all positive.

The final event of the day is one segment on the Hannity & Colmes TV show on the Fox News Channel. Both Sean and Alan have been very good to me — with a standing offer to be on the show whenever I'm in New York. Usually Sean uses his time to challenge me on any of my views that might be considered anti-conservative, and then Alan challenges me on my anti-liberal views. Tonight it's different. Sean asks me to elaborate on the views he agrees with, and then Alan asks me to elaborate on the views he agrees with.

At the end of the segment, all three cameramen applaud. Last time I was there, each of them came up to me afterward to say he was voting for me. The Floor Manager of the show (who also works on the O'Reilly Factor) is Jenna Sowards, a staunch libertarian and supporter.

Thursday, August 31, 2000 — New York

My first interview isn't until 10am, so I get a good night's sleep. I talk with Jeff Kats, an avowed Libertarian on KXNT in Las Vegas. He pushes the Libertarian message throughout our 15-minute conversation, which covers two segments.

Since he's a Libertarian and counting on me to carry the flag, I feel a little embarrassed in the first segment because my words don't seem to flow easily. But everything begins to fall in place in the second segment, and I become very passionate — saying that you'll never get smaller government in your lifetime if you don't start voting Libertarian.

Then I go down to the hotel lobby for a one-hour interview with Joseph Guinto of Investors Business Daily, the Wall Street Journal's chief competitor. He has taken a train from his Washington office to New York to interview me. He is writing a series of articles, one on each of the principal third parties. We cover the issues, as well as why someone should vote Libertarian, our campaign strategy, and just about everything else under the sun. Of course I have no idea what will show up in his article.

Some time back, Steve and Jennifer Willis heard Catherine Crier make a remark against the Drug War on her Court TV program. They wrote to her, enclosing a press kit and both the video and book of The Great Libertarian Offer. This eventually brought about a scheduled interview. However, the first date was canceled when it became impossible to set up a remote interview.

Today we have a rescheduled interview. So Pamela, Steve, and I head to Court TV. I used to watch her show when she was on the Fox News Channel, and I have always admired her interviewing skill. She never betrayed her own views on any significant matter, so I don't know what to expect when I enter the studio. To my surprise, she makes it clear before the interview begins that she thinks highly of libertarian ideas. She says she hopes I get into the debates because otherwise this year's race is very boring.

The 10-minute interview itself goes beautifully. In the first minute, I say, "I want to set you free to live your life as you want to live it — not as Al Gore or George Bush thinks is best for you, or best for the Fatherland. After all, you're the one who earns the money, you're the one who gets up every day and goes to work. Why should they be taking your money and deciding how much of it they're going to let you keep for yourself? Why don't you decide how much of it you're going to give to them?"

To this, she says enthusiastically, "Yes! Yes!"

We cover repealing the income tax, getting the government out of Social Security, and ending the Drug War. She adds her own comments to explain why each of these steps would be beneficial. At the end she insists that I come back for a longer interview. Happily, we've found a new friend.

On the way back to the hotel, I have an interview on my cell phone with Charles Pappas, who is writing articles on me for Salon and GreenMagazine, both Internet publications. He is a financial reporter for each of them — and he's interested in how my proposals would affect saving, investing, and retirement. He asks what I would do about Alan Greenspan. I say I'd try to help find him a new job, because there's no place in the Constitution for the Federal Reserve System — and no reason to think politicians know what the proper interest rate should be.

A technician comes to the hotel to fix my ailing laptop computer. Afterward it seems to work as it should.

The last interview is a 10-minute taping with Randy Ford of the Tennessee Radio Network. He provides news features for 80 stations in Tennessee. He will arrange my comments into soundbites for news items that will be played throughout the day tomorrow. We cover the basics, and he asks whether there's anything we've missed. I say we covered everything, but Pamela calls "The website" from across the room — and I add that.

We are scheduled to fly home tomorrow for one day, keeping this evening available for any last-minute interviews that might arise. But since nothing has come up, Steve obtains flights for us tonight and we make a hurried dash to the Long Island airport and catch a plane home — giving us an extra night in Nashville.

Friday, September 1, 2000 — Nashville

Just one interview today. It is with reporter Paul Rasmussen at WOKV in Jacksonville, Florida. We tape some soundbites he can use during newscasts next week, calling attention to my appearance there next week.

Once again my laptop computer won't start. The computer is only about nine months old, but it has given me a world of trouble. I won't mention the brand because the company has tried to treat me well, and people I know have found computers from this company to be quite reliable. I talk again with the computer company, and we agree that it will make one final attempt to get the computer working properly and reliably.

Today we receive an email from Peter Meister of Elk Grove Village, Illinois. He wrote a letter to C-SPAN saying: "You are the most open-minded network on TV, and as a Libertarian, I greatly appreciate your coverage of Libertarian events and candidates. Last week I saw you broadcast campaign speeches by Ralph Nader and John Hagelin. I would like to make you aware of Harry Browne's campaign schedule and to ask you to cover some of his upcoming events. Additional scheduling can be found at his website. Thanks again. You are a great service to democracy, and we really need you."

He says, "This e-mail led to me getting a call from C-SPAN. Anita Siegfried called to ask me if I knew who to contact to get updated information on Harry's schedule, as she is assigned to follow his campaign. I called her and gave her [Press Secretary] Jim Babka's phone number from the web page. I also left Jim a voice mail message with Anita's phone number."

It is amazing what Libertarian volunteers acting on their own initiative can achieve.

Today Jack Dean provided the website statistics for August. We had 198,339 different visitors during the month, compared with 108,861 in July — with 328,921 total visits, against 191,237 in July. These are very impressive figures, and undoubtedly in the same league with the Democratic and Republican candidates. Geoff Braun has done a wonderful job with our website.

Saturday, September 2, 2000 — Nashville

Just one interview today. It is with Larry Klayman of Judicial Watch, the organization that initiates court cases to try to keep the federal government in line. Larry has his own weekly radio show. Judicial Watch is sponsoring a presidential debate on October 20. Six candidates have been invited. Al Gore, Pat Buchanan, Howard Phillips, and I have already accepted. George Bush and Ralph Nader have not responded. C-SPAN plans to cover the debate, and other networks probably also will cover it if George Bush agrees to attend.

Larry starts the interview by referring to the debate. The ostensible topic will be rooting out corruption in government. I say that corruption is a natural byproduct of size and power. The problem isn't the abuse of power; it is the power to abuse. Our task isn't to bring about "clean government" or "good government," but to reduce government to the absolute minimum possible. So long as the politicians have the power to reward their friends and punish their enemies, corruption is inevitable. (P.J. O'Rourke once said that when the legislature makes the rules for buying and selling, the first things to be bought and sold will be the legislators.)

Tomorrow Pamela and I will head for Florida for a week of events there.

Sunday, September 3, 2000 — Miami

Pamela and I fly to Miami for a personal appearance, arriving at the Fort Lauderdale airport to save money flying Southwest Airlines. Steve and Michael Cloud are at the airport when we arrive. A campaign supporter has provided a limousine to take us to the Miami hotel.

At the evening rally there are only about 75 people — an unusually poor turnout, probably because of the Labor Day weekend. However, about 60% of those people identify themselves as attending their first Libertarian event. Because most of them are brand new, the fund-raising is skimpy. The audience is very enthusiastic, however.

After the event I learn that George Bush has proposed three debates — all with Al Gore alone. Because of this news, a late-evening interview is scheduled with Steve Norman of the Voice of America radio network. (The VOA broadcasts to overseas Americans, but also is heard in the U.S. via the Internet.) The principal topic is the debates. I point out that voter turnout seems to increase whenever the public is aware of more alternatives than just the Republican and Democratic candidates.

And, of course, I use the opportunity to list the various proposals the public won't hear if the debate is limited to just Bush and Gore. The audience won't know there's a candidate who wants to free them from the income and Social Security taxes, end the insane War on Drugs, get government out of their lives, and set them free to live their lives as they see fit.

Today Milton Friedman, the famous economist, was interviewed on C-SPAN-2. He said, "I am not a conservative, I am a libertarian. I am not a member of the Libertarian Party. But I am a libertarian. I am a libertarian with a small l and a Republican with a capital R. I am a member of the Republican Party but I am not a conservative."

In answer to a question, he said, "I think very highly of Harry Browne. I think his program is not one that is feasible politically at the present moment — but that would be desirable and could be adopted. I have never myself been active in the Libertarian Party — not for any particular objective reason but only because I thought I could be more effective and influential by working within the Republican Party."

About three years ago I had the chance to spend a few minutes with Mr. and Mrs. Friedman. He was very gracious to me, complimenting me on articles of mine that he'd read. I asked him whether he would actively support the Libertarian Party if it became big enough to be a competitor, and he said it was a possibility.

Monday, September 4, 2000 — West Palm Beach

Today WorldNetDaily, a large online publication, runs my article "The Supreme Court Scam" (http://www.worldnetdaily.com/bluesky_browne/20000904_xchbr_the_suprem.shtml).

Hannity & Colmes have taken today off from their Fox News Channel TV show. The network reruns the broadcast from last week that included my interview.

My day begins with an interview with Ian Bernard at WSPB in Sarasota, Florida. Ian is 20 years old, a Libertarian, and a marvelous interviewer. He tapes the interview for later broadcast and for listening on his own website. He tells me the station manager at WSPB is a Libertarian as well. In our 30-minute interview, Ian and I cover the whole gamut of issues — along with the importance of voting Libertarian. I point out that anyone voting Republican or Democratic is giving up — deciding that he'll never be free and thus trying to make the best of a bad situation.

After the interview the limousine drives us to West Palm Beach for tonight's event. Since my computer isn't working, I borrow a computer from Steve, who borrowed it from Perry Willis, and try to catch up on the Campaign Journal during the drive.

On the way, we stop in Boca Raton at the home of Frank Longo — the vice-chair of the Florida Libertarian Party. He has arranged an afternoon coffee with 17 people in attendance. One of them is Bob Burg, author of "Winning without Intimidation" — an excellent book that shows how you can achieve more with people by treating them with respect (a book I would love for all Libertarians to read). Although Bob and I have corresponded by email for the past three years, I'm glad to finally meet him in person. The coffee goes well and we raise as much money as we did at last night's much-larger event.

We continue driving to West Palm Beach for tonight's event. Jamie Holmes of WPTV, the NBC-TV affiliate, is there to interview me before the event. (The interview appears on the 10 o'clock news; I don't see it but Michael says Jamie provides a flattering portrait of me and the LP, and my best lines from the interview are included.)

There are 75 people at the event, about 60% of whom are at their first Libertarian meeting. Fund-raising is sub-par, but the audience is very enthusiastic. Afterward Adam Weisholtz interviews me for an article in the student newspaper at the law school of Nova Southeastern University.

Good news today. The Rasmussen Poll has me slightly ahead of Pat Buchanan in its daily poll — 1.0% to 0.9%. Considering the fact that he's already spent $11 million (including $4 million in taxpayer money) on his campaign, the fact that he's been on virtually every political TV show in America, and the fact that he's mentioned roughly 60 times as often in the press as I am, we have a lot to be proud of.

Mostly we should be proud that we're the only party that respects people enough to believe they should be free to live their lives as they see fit — not as Pat Buchanan, Ralph Nader, Al Gore, or George Bush thinks they should. I believe our powerful message makes it possible to recruit each voter with far less exposure.

Of course, the poll figures will continue to fluctuate, but this lead — even if only temporary — demonstrates that the major media should be covering us more than they are. We'll have to see how they react to this. We immediately send out a press release to call it to their attention.

It's interesting to note that John Hagelin of the Natural Law Party is at 0.1%. After months of being in the news as Pat Buchanan's opponent for the Reform Party nomination, this is all the support he's found. His name has been mentioned over and over in news stories, but never do the stories describe anything he stands for. A year ago some people urged me to compete for the Reform Party nomination, because of the publicity that could be generated. But Hagelin's experience demonstrates how little that would have achieved — while eating up a great deal of my time and our resources.

Tuesday, September 5, 2000 — Orlando

The morning starts with a 15-minute radio interview with David Stein on the Talk America Radio Network. He's a comedian and we do some joking. But when I talk about repealing the income tax and freeing people from Social Security, he gets serious and says he's starting to like what he hears.

Pamela, Michael, Steve, and I drive to Orlando. On the way, we stop for breakfast at Denny's — the official "Do you want fries with that?" bistro of the Browne for President campaign. (If I win the Presidency and a reporter asks me what I'm going to do next, I'll tell him, "I'm going to Denny's.")

During the drive, I'm happy once again to be on the air with Armstrong Williams. He's a black conservative Republican who probably agrees with us on about 80% of the issues. He's adopted the Republican Party as his only hope, but he keeps inviting me back to his show. He finds little with which to disagree with me, and is always very complimentary.

Today he mentions that Joseph Lieberman said there's a role for religion in public life, and that this provoked outrage from the Anti-Defamation League. He asks me what I think. I say that I wish Lieberman had said there is a role for the Constitution in public life. I would rather have in office an atheist who adheres strictly to the Constitution than a conspicuous Christian like Jimmy Carter or Bill Clinton who pays no attention to the Constitution. I ask, "Don't you agree?" And he says, "Well, I'll have to get back to you on that one."

When we arrive at the Orlando hotel, I have a 5-minute interview with Larry Spilman for the 60 stations of the Florida Radio Network. He tapes soundbites for news items. We talk briefly about the debates (on everyone's mind right now), and I get a chance to run through the issues and plug our remaining Florida events. However, I forget to steer listeners to the website.

Then it's 45 minutes with Randy Rhodes on WJNO in West Palm Beach, Florida. She's a liberal but very respectful of my views. She says I obviously believe what I say and that's rare for a politician. We really go at it — over the environment, health care, and a number of other subjects. All the callers are liberal as well. It's one of those occasions when, no matter what point she makes, a contrary example or metaphor comes immediately to my mind — and so it's quite a high-powered conversation. When she says it's time to get off a subject we've been on for five minutes, I say "Okay, let's talk about the Drug War instead." She says, "We agree on that, but go ahead and state the case." I do. It's important to let her listeners know I'm the only candidate committed to ending the insane War on Drugs. She and I part on good terms.

Later I'm on for 15 minutes with Mike Bung at KXEL in Waterloo, Iowa — the second time on his show. We talk about the debate situation, and I can't seem to get him off it. There's only so much to say, but he wants to discuss the jockeying by Gore and Bush. We finally go on to other topics, and eventually to the new poll results that show me ahead of Pat Buchanan.

The final interview is 20 minutes with Bob Rose on WDBO in Orlando. He apparently doesn't know much about libertarian ideas, but he received our press release on the poll results and called to arrange an impromptu interview. He quickly warms up to my proposals to limit the federal government to the Constitution, to repeal the income tax, to let people handle their own retirement, and to end the Drug War. He says, "How could anyone argue with this?"

The evening's event is attended by about 130 people, of which 60-70% are brand new. From the outset, they are very enthusiastic — perhaps the most enthusiastic audience we've had. Probably because of the high proportion of new people, the fund-raising is below our usual result.

Wednesday, September 6, 2000 — Tampa

My first interview is a half-hour at 8:30 with Gregg Napp at WSKY in Gainesville, Florida. He says he's a "true" conservative who wants smaller government, but he believes the reality is that only George Bush has a chance to move us in the right direction. I say that if the Republican Congress had reduced government by even 1%, he might have a case — albeit a weak one. But instead the Republicans have made government grow just as fast as the Democratic Congress did. So why should anyone vote for a party that's moving in the wrong direction?

During a commercial break, there's a "Rush Limbaugh moment" in which the pompous one delivers some of his unbiased, pro-Republican wisdom. This time he's touting the Bush tax-cut plan as being much fairer than Al Gore's because, among other things, several million lower-income taxpayers will no longer pay any tax at all.

When we come back to the show, I ask Gregg if he heard Limbaugh's commentary. I point out that George Bush is framing his proposals to gain the approval of the liberal intelligentsia — instead of making life better for Americans. The millions of Americans who will no longer pay any tax will then have an increased incentive to push for bigger government, knowing they won't have to pay for it. I also point out that all "tax cut" plans are fraudulent, because they don't reduce government itself — and thus they just rearrange the terrible burden of big government — usually to the disadvantage of people like him and me. He agrees with that.

During the show I keep hammering at the point that you won't get what you want by voting for the people who are making government bigger.

Jennifer Willis has joined us for a couple of days. And she, Pamela, Steve, Michael, and I drive to Tampa. Once there we head directly to WFLA-TV, channel 8, where I'm interviewed by Diane Pertmer. We do the interview standing up in the middle of the newsroom. People are talking loudly in the background and walking all around us, creating numerous distractions. This doesn't stop me from focusing on the task at hand, but I don't do as good a job as I should.

Then the station allows me to tape a 3-minute campaign statement that will be broadcast several times between now and election day. I do it extemporaneously and it goes quite well. I get in all the important reasons that people ought to vote Libertarian — not just for me, but for Libertarians up and down the ticket.

We check into the hotel and I have two half-hour phone interviews. The first is with Glenn Klein on WTAN in Tampa. He has already endorsed me and plans to be at the event tonight. we cover a variety of topics, and we plug the event.

The second interview is with Rob Lorie at WMNF-FM in Tampa. He's friendly but much less supportive. He challenges most of my statements. For example, he contends that government has made cars safer — even though almost every safety feature we rely on was developed by automakers in response to consumer demand for safer cars, not by government edict. By this time I'm flying, and I deal easily with him and the few callers — all of whom want to raise objections.

From there we drive to WFTS, channel 28, for an interview with Brendan McLaughlin. This is similar to the earlier one at Channel 8. It is a 5-minute segment that probably will be played several times during the campaign. The first three minutes is taken by three standard questions, after which I have two minutes to say whatever I want. The first question is on school vouchers. I stumble on my words and I'm just about to ask whether we can restart the tape; but I realize he may say no, and my asking will be part of the interview. So I barrel ahead, and by the second question my delivery is smoothed out. The questions aren't very fundamental, but I manage to work in our proposals. And I devote the final two minutes to why it's important that you vote Libertarian.

Back at the hotel I call Michael Reagan's voice mail and leave a message congratulating him on the 9th anniversary of his syndicated radio show.

A computer technician arrives at the hotel and works on my laptop. He replaces the motherboard, power board, and processor. If I have any further trouble with the computer, I will give up on it.

There's one more interview before the evening's event. George Coryell arrives from the Tampa Tribune and we talk for an hour at the hotel. He's the paper's military affairs reporter, filling in for the political reporter who's on vacation. We talk at length about the task we Libertarians face in getting our message to the American people. I point out that we're the only party with compelling proposals, but we have to be able to transmit them to all Americans. We're not big enough, strong enough, and rich enough yet to be able to get the message to everyone. But continuing to grow at our current rate over the next two or three years might be enough to get us there.

There's a big crowd for tonight's appearance. About 175 people show up, and well over half are at their first Libertarian event. Also there is Glenn Klein, on whose show I appeared this afternoon. Two commercial TV stations plus a cable-access program have cameramen there. They tape portions of my speech and we have a brief, informal press conference outside the room immediately afterward. One of the cameramen lets me know how enthusiastic he is about the LP's progress.

The event goes very well. The fund-raising is satisfactory and the audience is very warm. Afterward the hotel employee working the cash bar in the back of the room tells me how much he enjoyed the speech. (The hotel employees frequently make their support known to me. And at our Woodland Hills event a couple of weeks ago, the woman working the bar at the event wound up wearing a "Browne for President" button.)

Today Justin Raimondo issued a gracious apology for his attack on me regarding my appearance on Politically Incorrect (mentioned in Campaign Journal #29). The apology is at http://www.antiwar.com/justin/pf/p-j090600.html.

Thursday, September 7, 2000 — Tallahassee

Pamela, Steve, Michael, and I catch a plane to Tallahassee (Jennifer is headed back to the campaign headquarters in Virginia). Our trip is a little over an hour on a prop plane; fortunately, the weather is calm and the flight is serene.

As of today, I'm 0.2% ahead of Pat Buchanan in the Rasmussen Poll. Of course, this will fluctuate in both directions. And when Buchanan gets his federal handout and starts advertising, he'll be more competition than he is now.

Shortly after arriving at the Tallahassee hotel, I have an interview with Jackie Bauer of the Florida News Channel — which is covering me on behalf of the local NBC-TV station. In fact, we have three TV interviews in a row — all with the Florida News Channel. In this one, Jackie asks whether it's difficult campaigning as other than a Democrat or Republican. I tell her no — that the hardest thing imaginable would be trying to campaign on the Democratic or Republican platform.

A little later I have an interview with Penny Herman for the entire 30-minute episode of The Women's Interactive Network. The conversation goes very well, covering everything I'd like to see discussed. The show will be aired next Wednesday.

Then we drive to the Florida News Channel building for an interview with Mike Vasilinda, to be aired on the 6 o'clock news and again later in the evening. The Florida News Channel is a Florida version of CNN's Headline News — broadcasting news 24 hours a day to cable subscribers throughout Florida. The interview is about 10 minutes, during which he shows our entire Social Security ad. At the end of the interview I tell people to come to my website for more information, and to find out about "my appearances this evening in Tallahassee and tonight in Jacksonville — I mean tonight in Tallahassee and Saturday in Jacksonville — I mean tonight in Tallahassee and Friday in Jacksonville." Well, they'll never forget me.

(Later that night I see the interview on the air. It goes very well. The mix-up of days at the end provokes laughter from Mike and me, and it doesn't seem to be a fatal error. Immediately following the interview with me, Mike talks with Bill Cotterell, the political reporter for the Tallahassee Democrat. They discuss my campaign very favorably. They agree I should be getting better press coverage since I'm polling as well as Pat Buchanan, and they commend my integrity in not taking federal campaign funds.)

Back at the hotel, I have a one-hour phone interview with Wayne Green at WTAL radio in Tallahassee. He is quite friendly. Although apparently a conservative, he believes the Drug War is a failure. We get along fine, and there are repeated plugs for my speech tonight. However, the final caller says a vote for me is a vote for Al Gore, and we get into a shouting match over whether George Bush really wants smaller government. I ask why the Republican Congress never passed a single bill to make government smaller — and he says they were demonized by Slick Willie. I ask why George Bush didn't make government smaller in Texas — and he says the governor has limited power in Texas. I ask what excuse he will make if George Bush wins and he and the Republican Congress continue making government bigger.

Whenever I get into a knock-down-dragged-out fight like this, I'm embarrassed. This is the first time it's happened in a long time, and I hope I haven't scared some people out of coming to the event tonight.

The evening rally goes very well. Wayne Green shows up, and so does Page Baldwin — another WTAL talk-show host. In all, there are 140 in attendance, and about 60% of them are at their first Libertarian event. The audience is very enthusiastic. Several people tell me they came because they heard me on the radio and have now decided to vote Libertarian. A father and son are there together and they say they were "tax and spend Democrats" until they saw the LP convention on TV.

Three TV stations send camera crews, and we have an impromptu press conference in the foyer. One station is WTXL, the ABC affiliate, which later shows some footage of the event as the lead story on the 11 o'clock news. Another is WCTV, channel 6. And the third is WFSU, channel 47, the campus station at Florida State University.

Friday, September 8, 2000 — Jacksonville, Florida

Today there's a letter to the editor on WorldNetDaily, the large Internet publication, in which "David M." says in part, "I wasted my vote on Bob Dole last time around — no more. My vote for Dole merely told the Republican policy makers that I liked what they were doing, as ineffective as it was. Had I voted my heart, with Harry Browne, the Republican Party would have known that there was one more person out there who wasn't buying their weak, vanilla candidate. I will no longer squander or waste my vote on the lesser of two evils."

The following letter from Terje Norderhaug of Coronado appears in today's Los Angeles Times:

Re ‘As Politicians Demonize Pop Culture, Young Voters Tune Out,' Opinion, Sept. 3: Danny Goldberg wrote that condescension toward the pop culture that millions of Americans like knows no ideological boundaries, listing Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan as being as outspoken as Joseph Lieberman in condemning youth-oriented entertainment. However, Libertarians like presidential candidate Harry Browne promise to keep the government away from dictating what media content young voters and others can enjoy.

At 8:30am, I have a 10-minute interview with Lee Martin on WJGR in Jacksonville. It comes in the midst of a discussion he's having with studio guests about problems with the Florida Supreme Court. He asks for my opinion, I make some general observations about the arrogance of all Democratic and Republican politicians and judges in ignoring federal and state Constitutions, and point out that Libertarians want to restore the concept of government limited to its constitutional functions. I get the opportunity to plug tonight's event twice.

Then it's an interview with Jan Michelson at WHO in Des Moines, Iowa. I've been on with him before. He makes it clear that he's closer to the Libertarians than to Republicans or Democrats. However, he doesn't believe Americans really want to be free. A lot of our conversation revolves around that question — which is okay with me, as this is a subject dear to my heart. I want to reassure listeners that most Americans are likely to buy our product if they only get a chance to hear about it.

My next interview is with Andy Johnson on WJGR in Jacksonville. He, too, says he's much closer to the Libertarians than to Republicans and Democrats. However, he says he can't agree with us on the Drug War or immigration. We have a very interesting conversation. And at the end Ty Price, a local Libertarian, takes over for me.

Steve, Pamela, and I try to drive to a TV studio for an interview. But an intense rainstorm has tied traffic up for miles. There's no way we can get there within the hour. So we head back for the hotel. Not only has the storm killed a TV interview, but it probably cause a very poor turnout at tonight's event.

My last interview of the day is at the hotel with Tricia Booker of Folio Weekly — an apparently liberal magazine covering northeast Florida. She asks a number of questions about issues and strategy, and concludes by saying, "I have to say this is the most interesting interview I've had in a long time." A photographer is with her, and Pamela notices that he doesn't seem to want to take any pictures of me when I'm smiling.

The interview concludes at about 6:15, so Pamela and I go on into the meeting room for tonight's 7:30 event. A dozen or so people have already arrived. The rain keeps pounding down, but the people keep coming. By 7:00 there must be 50-75 people in attendance. And when we begin the meeting at 7:30, there are 180 people. About 60% of those identify themselves as attending their first Libertarian event. Among them is Lee Martin, with whom I had an interview this morning.

Matthew L. Pinzur of the Florida Times-Union newspaper is there. (His article will appear tomorrow. It is unbiased and describes the big turnout. It concludes by quoting me: "'If you want smaller government, all the rest are details,' he said. ‘The first step to take is to stop supporting people who make government larger.'")

The fund-raising is much more productive than any previous night on the Florida trip, and it pulls the daily average for the week up to a respectable figure.

Saturday, September 9, 2000

Today WorldNetDaily reran my article "The Supreme Court Scam."

We head home today. Our flight is at 7:50am, so Pamela and I get up at 5:30. We ride to the airport with Michael. Steve arose at 4:00 because his flight was scheduled to depart at 6:30. But when we get to the airport we learn his flight has been delayed, he's still there, and he'll probably miss his connection and arrive home several hours later than expected. As he has only 2½ days at home as it is, the loss of even a few hours is unfortunate.

We're very lucky to have Steve with us. As the Road Manager, he makes life much, much easier for me. He handles all the details, drives the car, juggles the supplies, communicates with our appointments, and a great deal more. Plus he is excellent company. Since we're spending much of this year together, that's a great relief.

Our flight leaves on schedule, so Pamela and I get home by noon. I will work the rest of the day, take tomorrow off, and then go back to the campaign on Monday.

Monday, September 11, 2000 — Nashville

A lot of interviews today. The first is 30 minutes with Louie Free at WASN in Youngstown, Ohio, covering Cleveland, Pittsburgh, and other nearby cities. He is very supportive, saying, "I've been an advocate of libertarian ideas for 45 years." The interview goes very well, and he says he wants me back for a longer conversation.

Then it's a one-hour online chat session at WashingtonPost.com. As I'm a fast typist, I'm able to get through 41 questions in the hour. Many of the questioners are supportive and ask how we can win eventually.

The next interview is with Chris Lato at Wisconsin Radio Network, an agency that provides news to 48 stations in Wisconsin and Michigan. Chris seems very sympathetic to the uphill battle we face against uninterested media and against politicians who are determined to keep us out of the public discussion. I have the opportunity to plug this week's two events in Wisconsin.

Then I have two interviews with reporters for Internet publications. The first is with Lisa Bowman of www.zdnet.com (the site for Ziff-Davis computer magazines), who asks a great many questions about technology and government. I make it plain that I'm opposed to Internet taxation, Internet regulation, and Internet censorship. (Her article will appear tomorrow; while it does recite several of my anti-government stands, it doesn't include any compelling reasons to vote Libertarian.)

The second is with Andy Petrizzio of www.Wired.com, an Internet publication. He is very sympathetic to libertarian ideas. We talk for nearly an hour about the technology industry. He says that some people think Bill Clinton's personal problems kept him from meddling more in the computer industry. I say that you better hope George Bush doesn't win and "bring dignity back to the White House," avoiding personal problems, and having the freedom to meddle deeply in the computer industry. (Andy's article will appear on Thursday, it is very extensive — providing a lot of good information and reasons to vote Libertarian. It can be read at www.wired.com/news/print/0,1294,38748,00.html.)

I then have a 3-minute conversation with Kay at Radio Iowa, which supplies news to 52 Iowa radio stations. It's so brief that I say little more than that we want you to be free from the income tax, Social Security, and the violent Drug War. She says she'll give people my website address and details of this week's appearance in Iowa City.

My next interview is with Rocky D. at WTAN in Clearwater, Florida. He says, "I went to see Harry Browne here in Tampa last week and I liked what he had to say." Although he doesn't endorse me, he tells a story about going into a restaurant after our event last week, wearing a "Browne for President" button on his T-shirt. When I describe how much better schooling would be if it weren't a political enterprise, he says, "Hallelujah!"

We receive an email from Rhys Read, the Vice-Chair of the Illinois Libertarian Party, telling us that a poll conducted by the Chicago Sun-Times and Fox News has me tied with Ralph Nader in Illinois at 3%. Buchanan and Hagelin are each at 1%.

Today the Rocky Mountain News, one of Denver's two daily papers, published a Colorado poll showing me at 3% in the state, with Ralph Nader at 5% and Pat Buchanan at 1%.

Also today, the Savannah (GA) Morning News published a letter from Jason Nobles, comparing politicians with brats who continually misbehave but whose parents (the voters) let them get away with it. He closes the letter by saying, "My duty and conscience require me to vote Libertarian for Harry Browne to save our country, the ‘child of liberty,' from the bad parenting of the Democrats and the Republicans. It's time to give these misbehaving brats a firm spanking."

We receive an email from Harry Gerard, informing us that the Knoxville (TN) News-Sentinel featured a pro-Browne letter with a headline across the top of the letters page. Harry took the trouble to write the paper, expressing gratitude for the coverage.

I receive a phone call from Hilary Johnson, who has been working on a Worth Magazine profile of me for over two months. She has a few last-minute questions before the article goes to press tonight.

Tuesday, September 12, 2000 — Iowa City, Iowa

I fly to Cedar Rapids, Iowa, where I meet Steve Willis and Michael Cloud. Steve drives us to Iowa City, where this evening's event will take place.

In the afternoon I have a short interview with a reporter at KKRQ-FM in Iowa City. I thought I was to be a guest on the Scott, Mark, & Cecily show, but instead someone named Steve interviews me off the air. He says the interview will play this afternoon, so I plug tonight's event.

Then it's a 15-minute taped interview with Bruce Baskin at KELA in Centralia. Washington. He is a Libertarian, and so the interview focuses largely on what we have to do to get libertarian ideas before everyone and to prevail in the political marketplace.

James Lynch of the Cedar Rapids Gazette comes to the hotel to interview me. We talk for about a half-hour, with much of the conversation dealing with the problems we have overcoming the obstacles in the way of getting our message to the public.

I then have a 10-minute interview with Jesse Elliot of the Daily Iowan, the campus newspaper at Iowa University here in Iowa City. He has done a lot of preparation, having interviewed students who are Libertarians and students who are critical of our ideas.

Both reporters stay for our evening rally. Also here are photographers Danny Wilcox Frazier of the Iowa City Press Citizen and Buzz Orr of the Iowa City Gazette. They snap numerous pictures of me greeting guests before the show begins. Julie Englander of the local National Public Radio station is here as well. She tapes my speech and will report on the event for a national NPR report. (I hear later that NPR ran excerpts of my speech on its national network.)

A little over 150 people arrive. At least half of them are college students. When Michael asks how many of them are at their first Libertarian event, about 70% of the audience stands. Christy Welty, our Iowa Volunteer Coordinator, set up carpools for people traveling from as much as three hours away to see the event.

The audience is enthusiastic, but the fund-raising is below average — probably because of the high proportion of students. My speech isn't one of my best, but three of the hotel employees tell me they enjoyed it very much.

Wednesday, September 13, 2000 — La Crosse, Wisconsin

The day begins in Iowa City at 8:15 with a 5-minute interview with Mike Hayes at WIZM in La Crosse, to plug tonight's event. He is very friendly and says there must be a lot of people who agree with the libertarian desire to be free but don't know they're libertarians. I, of course, agree.

Immediately afterward, I have a 15-minute interview with Steve Roisun at WLSU in La Crosse. He seems totally unfamiliar with libertarian ideas — even unaware that there are people in America who think the government should be reduced dramatically. So the interview seems to be a summary of Libertarianism 101, and I do get the chance to plug tonight's event.

Steve, Michael, and I drive the 225 miles to La Crosse. I'm able to work at my laptop (which is working well) as we drive alongside the Iowa cornfields and pass through a multitude of small towns. We stop in Marion, Iowa, for lunch. Alas, there's no Denny's, so we eat at the local Maid-Rite cafe.

On the road to La Crosse I hear by cell phone that the Arizona Supreme Court has rejected our plea to have me listed on the Arizona ballot as an independent candidate. The "official" Arizona Libertarian Party is not the organization affiliated with the national Libertarian Party, and it decided to put L. Neil Smith's name on the ballot as the Libertarian candidate for President. We filed petitions containing more than enough names to qualify as an independent candidate, but the signatures had to be filed before I was the LP's nominee. We applied for an extension, a procedure that almost all court precedents have upheld — but the judge hearing the case misread the precedents and the state Supreme Court refused to hear our appeal.

It's unfortunate that some Libertarians are more concerned with proving they're superior to other Libertarians than they are with bringing about a Libertarian America. But this sort of posturing and back-biting happens in almost any large organization, and we should not expect to be exempt from the norms of human nature.

We arrive in La Crosse in the middle of the afternoon and check into the Radisson Hotel. Wherever we go, we stay at typical middle-class hotels, which is where the evening events are held. Some of them are nice, some not quite so nice, but normally none of them is memorable — and I have trouble remembering any of them a few days after moving on.

Today, however, our rooms are on the 8th floor overlooking the Mississippi River, and the view is spectacular. I find myself spending several minutes standing at the picture window, just relishing the scenery. La Crosse itself is a pretty town and seems like a pleasant place to live.

Almost immediately after arriving I have a TV interview with Jim Masterson of WXOW-TV, who has come to the hotel. He asks a series of prepared questions, and I use the opportunity to reiterate the major campaign themes. The report that appears on the 5 o'clock news is quite good, and it even includes statements from a local political analyst telling people they should vote for a 3rd-party candidate if he's the closest to one's views. A further report appears on the 6 o'clock news.

Just before the evening's event, I have a live interview standing outside the hotel with Mike Thompson of Channel 19, the ABC affiliate. He is a young man, apparently without too much experience. He has a list of prepared questions, and goes through them without hearing my answers. Consequently, at one point he asks a question I had just answered.

The campaign rally draws an audience of 117 — 80-90% of whom identify themselves as being at their first Libertarian event. College students comprise at least half the audience. We learn that many of them are there on assignment from political science classes. As a result, the audience is not nearly as enthusiastic as at most of our events. Michael's jokes go unappreciated — except by one woman in the front row who laughs almost hysterically at everything he says. The audience listens to my speech respectfully, but without enthusiastic response. We raise very, very little money.

Ed Hoskin of the La Crosse Tribune is there, as is a TV camera from Channel 8. John Davis of Wisconsin Public Radio interviews me after my speech.

Eric Bailey of the Los Angeles Times is doing an article on third parties, and has flown to La Crosse from Sacramento to sit in on the campaign event. He will be at tomorrow night's rally in Milwaukee as well. He says he'll be building his article around our campaign.

Today Alan Bock, an editorial writer for the Orange County (CA) Register published an article today on AntiWar.com praising my foreign policy stands (http://www.antiwar.com/bock/pf/p-b091300.html).

Jack Dean informs us that our website is setting new records each day for visitors. Yesterday, we had 13,380 different visitors.

Many of the visitors send emails with questions or comments. We are very fortunate that Jack Williams, my friend of 36 years, answers every message that calls for a reply. Some days there are as many as a hundred such messages, and Jack takes care of them all — treating each one with patience and thoughtful concern.

Thursday, September 14, 2000 — Milwaukee

We get up early to make the 4-hour drive to Milwaukee, stopping along the way for breakfast at a non-Denny's coffee shop.

We arrive in Milwaukee and head for a German restaurant — where we have lunch with John Griner, his son Curt, and Mark Rutherford, the Indiana state chair. They have driven up from Bloomington, Indiana, to talk with us and to attend tonight's event.

After arriving at the hotel, I have three interviews. The first is 10 minutes with Kevin Patrick and Tracy Romine at KNEW in San Jose. It is a technology show, concerned with Silicon Valley issues. I, of course, focus on how dangerous it is for computer companies to turn to the government to try to achieve anything — get back at Microsoft, receive research & development subsidies, or anything.

The second interview is a half-hour with Brian Wilson of San Francisco, who's guest-hosting this week on WBAL in Baltimore. Brian is an avid Libertarian who's been using this show all week to urge people to vote Libertarian. We talk about how important it is not to waste your vote by giving your blessing to candidates who are making government bigger.

The third interview is an hour is with Kathleen Dunn on Wisconsin Public Radio. I'm told by Wisconsin residents later that she's a liberal, but she doesn't betray any position in the interview. She is very cordial and a good interviewer. The first two callers are Libertarians, but then I get calls from people who are more typical of NPR listeners.

Eric Bailey of the Los Angeles Times has journeyed to Milwaukee from La Crosse and we spend an hour or so together talking further for his pending article on third parties. And he rides to the evening's event with Michael, Steve, and me.

The rally is at the American Serb Hall, instead of at the hotel. There's a large electronic sign on the front of the hall sending a message continually throughout the evening: "Harry Browne — Libertarians Want You to Be Free." It is a large building with several big meeting rooms. It turns out to be an excellent venue with one of the best sound systems we've encountered.

A little over 200 people are there. This time only about 35% are newcomers. It's a very enthusiastic audience. Both Michael and I are "on" and the evening goes very well. The fund-raising is very productive. The entire event is a wonderful counterpoint to last night's event. Bob Collison and other volunteers did a terrific job of bringing out a good crowd.

Tami Kou of WTMJ-TV, Channel 4, is there to interview me and cover the event, as is Carlene Orig of WISN-TV, Channel 12, the ABC affiliate. And, of course, the ever-present Eric Bailey of the Los Angeles Times.

On the way back to the hotel, Eric joins us for a late meal at Denny's, the official Soup Kitchen of the Browne for President campaign.

The Bush and Gore campaigns announced today that they had reached agreement to do the three debates originally proposed by the Debate Commission. This virtually kills any chance that either of them will appear in a debate with any third-party candidates. Now we must persuade Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan to join me in a series of debates among the three of us. Since a couple of TV networks have already proposed such debates, there's a good chance we will see them.

Friday, September 15, 2000 — Providence (RI) & Boston

Up at 6am for a 2-hour drive to Chicago to catch a plane to Providence. (The weird variations in airfare prices sometimes require us to cut expenses by making strange travel plans — such as flying out of Chicago, rather than Milwaukee.)

On the way to Chicago, I have a 5-minute interview with Bill Becker at WWUS-FM at Big Pine Key in Florida. Although the interview is brief, I'm able to get in all the important themes.

When we arrive in Providence, we have a productive meeting in an airport room with a dozen Rhode Island Libertarians, arranged by state chair Daniel Harrop.

From the Providence airport, we drive to the Boston area. Steve and I drop Michael off at his home and head for our hotel. Having been short on sleep the past few nights, I'm exhausted and I lie down for a 45-minute nap. However, I set the clock radio incorrectly and don't wake up for two hours. I don't even know what awakens me, but it's just in time to get dressed for an evening TV interview.

Steve and I drive into the city to the local PBS station. Unfortunately, the directions we've been given aren't very precise. We miss the proper turnoff, and I have to call the station for directions. The engineer there feeds me instructions as we drive. The city is so torn up from the (federally funded) "Big Dig" tunnel boondoggle that time is beginning to get very short. I'm scheduled for a live interview precisely at 8:15 and we arrive at the station at 8:13.

The interview is actually with Wisconsin Public television, a network of PBS stations in Wisconsin, from which we've just come. I never catch the name of the woman interviewing me, but she's very pleasant and she gives me every opportunity to say what I want.

Saturday, September 16, 2000 — Boston

Two events today. The first is a picnic and rally at the Woburn Sportsman Association. This is a gun club whose event today is for members and their families to have a day of food, flea-market booths, pony rides, and shooting. Carla Howell (the Libertarian U.S. Senate candidate) and I have been given the opportunity to give short speeches.

We were told that 300-400 people were expected, but the turnout is disappointing. Probably no more than a hundred people are in attendance at the time Carla and I speak, and a lot fewer than that are actually focused on the speeches. But we are well received.

While at the picnic I get to shoot a Browning BuckMark .22 pistol, the first pistol-shooting I've ever done. I shoot about 20 rounds at balloons 25 yards away. I enjoy the experience and I hit the targets on about half the shots.

From there, Carla, Steve, Michael, and I drive to the Boston Common in downtown Boston for the Mass-Can rally. This is the annual "legalize marijuana" rally, and it's a big one. I can't tell how many people are in attendance, but it has to be in the tens of thousands. There are booths, food, and a lot of music. Interspersed among the musical acts, there are short speeches, and Carla and I have been invited to speak. She gives an excellent speech, comparing her anti-Drug-War stance with that of Drug Warrior Teddy Kennedy.

I follow her with a 10-minute speech — opening with my pledge to pardon the non-violent drug offenders. I go on to point out that the other presidential candidates are arguing over who's best qualified to run your life, to decide what kind of medical relief you can get, how many years you should rot in prison for smoking marijuana, and so on. I keep coming back to "I want to set you free," and the audience loves it. I also point out that only Libertarians can be counted on to be firmly and reliably against the Drug War because only Libertarians are opposed to virtually all government intrusions into your life.

While at the rally I'm interviewed by Monica Morales of WFXT, the Fox TV station on channel 25; Terry Adler of WHDH, the NBC station on channel 7; T.J. Winick of New England Cable News; both James Lubin and Adrian Bashchuk of Tufts University's TV station in separate interviews; Jamal E. Watson of the Boston Globe; Ernie King of The Gardner News (a suburban newspaper); Kevin Stone of The Daily Collegian at the University of Massachusetts at Amherst; and Jason Walsh of The Campus Report at Middlesex Community College.

(In tomorrow's paper, the liberal Boston Globe will estimate the crowd at 40,000. It also quotes me: "'The war on drugs is a tragic, flawed failure,' said Harry Browne, who is running as the Libertarian candidate for president of the United States. ‘It is not the government's business to tell people what they should or should not put in their bodies. If elected president, I would pardon every non-violent federal drug prisoner to make room for the murderers, rapists, and child molesters who get out of prison early on plea bargains and early release,' he said."

(The conservative Boston Herald, however, merely mentioned that Carla and I were there, with no statement regarding our stand on the Drug War.

(During the next few days we will receive numerous emails from people who were at the rally, telling us of people who decided to vote Libertarian after hearing the speeches.)

After the rally, Steve and I drive to the Boston airport, where we have a meeting with Bob Newman of Newman Communications, our public relations firm. We discuss ways to try to get more national TV coverage in the final seven weeks of the campaign.

Then Steve and I fly to Washington, D.C. — he to be home and work in the campaign office for a few days, I to stay in nearby Rosslyn, Virginia, to do radio and TV appearances in the Washington area.

Sunday, September 17, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

This is a lazy day. I catch up on sleep in the morning, and remain drowsy throughout the afternoon. I'm staying at a small hotel in Rosslyn, Virginia, just outside Washington, D.C.

In the evening I have dinner with campaign manager Perry Willis and press secretary Jim Babka — to discuss how we can ramp up the publicity for the campaign between now and Election Day. Afterward, I go to Jim's office to do an online chat session with FreeRepublic.com. A new audio software system is used, so that it's more like a radio show. I hear the callers' questions and respond audibly, rather than by typing my answers. The session goes well, but the audience is much smaller than it would be for a radio show.

Today Reuters ran an article entitled "Libertarian Browne Possible White House Spoiler." In it, Michael Carney points out that I'm polling at a few percent in some states, and might have more than the margin of victory between Gore and Bush.

Monday, September 18, 2000 — Washington

The day begins with a 20-minute radio interview with Barnes, Leslie, and Jimmy on the Morning X show at WNNX in Atlanta. It is a Gen-X show and the questions are very good, very much to the point. I get the opportunity to make all the important points.

Barnes seems to take the lead, questioning my stands on the Constitution, the gun laws, the Drug War, and other issues. He isn't hostile, but he says that he thinks some of my views, while good, are too extreme — that there's a middle ground that should be reached. I point out that he won't get to write the perfect laws he imagines. If he gives the politicians the power to make these decisions, he'll no longer be on the middle ground because the politicians will turn things into just what we have today. At the end, he says he doesn't agree with all I say, but that I'm the only presidential candidate he's heard whom he can understand; the rest are reciting double-talk.

Later, someone writes to me to tell me that Barnes is the son of Roy Barnes, governor of Georgia.

Steve and I drive into Washington to tape an interview with Bob Edwards for the Morning Edition on National Public Radio. The interview lasts about twenty minutes, and I get the chance to say everything I want. Interviewers on NPR and PBS generally do not intrude much of their own opinions into an interview, so they provide good opportunities for me to present mine.

Later in the afternoon I have a phone interview with Paul Ladd of the Nashville News, a suburban weekly. He knows very little about libertarianism, but he's very cordial and asks perceptive questions.

Then I have an hour-long interview with Otis Twelve at KKAR in Omaha. He's a genial fellow who describes himself as a Goldwater liberal and a life-long Democrat. Although he says he disagrees with me on a few issues, he is strongly opposed to the Drug War and he says he doesn't know of anything he strongly agrees with Al Gore or George Bush about. He begins the interview by saying he is "leaning toward voting Libertarian this year."

Today we had 18,440 different visitors at the campaign website. Not only is this a new one-day record for us, but more than 1,000 people logged on every hour for the 5 hours during 3-8pm, with a peak of 1,300 during 4-5pm.

Tuesday, September 19, 2000 — Washington

Today's USA Today includes two letters to the editor — by Tommy J. Anderson and Dr. Ted Norris, both of Texas — deploring the lack of coverage for our presidential campaign.

I have a phone interview with Wyatt Haupt at the North County Times, a newspaper published north of San Diego. He is writing an article on third-party candidates running in California, in particular Libertarian candidates. He's in his early 30s, and when I describe our plans to get him out of Social Security, he says, "That's cool; I don't expect to ever get anything back from Social Security."

Later in the evening it's an hour with Joe Elliot at WHAS in Louisville. He is a genial sort
— very friendly and not contentious. We take a number of phone calls.

WorldNetDaily (a large Internet publication) conducted a one-day presidential poll today. Over 23,000 voted, and George Bush won with 61%. I came in second with 26%, Pat Buchanan was third with 7%, and no one else had more than 3%.

Wednesday, September 20, 2000 — Washington

In the morning, Jim Babka, Steve Willis, and I drive to Springfield, Virginia, to visit with Larry Pratt of Gun Owners of America. Although he appears to be quite libertarian and finds no satisfaction with most Republicans, he says his organization isn't in a position to endorse me.

In the afternoon I have a 30-minute interview with Ralph Bristol at WSPA in Spartanburg, South Carolina. Before the show, his producer tells me he (the producer) has joined the party and has begun giving speeches on behalf of Libertarian candidates. I was on with Ralph a month ago and the Drug War came up just as the interview was ending. I suggested we devote another show to it to do it justice, and he agreed. So today we spend the entire interview on this subject. He doesn't reveal his own opinion on the subject, but he seems very skeptical of the idea that the Drug War will ever succeed. One woman calls to support the Drug War but the other callers agree with me.

Steve, Jim, and I drive into Washington and I spend an hour with Oliver North on his show, syndicated to 114 stations. The show moves along smartly, with many callers stating brief questions and my giving brief answers. The interview goes very well. The most important information I can impart is specifically why it's important that people vote Libertarian, not just agree with our positions — and I get several opportunities to make that point.

North is strongly in favor of having third-party candidates in debates. MSNBC, his TV network, has told him it will gladly carry a third-party debate if he can arrange it. He says that Buchanan and Phillips have agreed to debate me, but that he can't even get Nader on the phone.

Later I get a call from Josh Burek of the Christian Science Monitor, who is doing an article on me that will appear either in the printed edition or online or both. He asks a lot of pertinent questions and the interview lasts about 40 minutes. He seems quite sympathetic. I grew up in a Christian Science household, so I kid him that we should devote our conversation to the current health-care situation in America. (Christian Scientists don't patronize doctors or hospitals.)

In the evening Steve and I drive back into Washington so I can appear on America's Voice TV, being interviewed by Bill Hormann for about 20 minutes. As I'm the last guest on the show, I watch the earlier segments, and I can see that Bill does an excellent job interviewing his guests. My interview goes very well, and it ends with a strong statement urging people to vote Libertarian.

Today Rick Holmes, the News Opinion Page Editor of the Boston-area newspaper MetroWest Daily News, published an article called
"Pacifists in the War on Drugs." The article talked about the speeches Carla Howell and I made at the Mass-Can anti-Drug-War rally last Saturday. Holmes quotes my statement about pardoning the non-violent drug prisoners.

(Photos accompanying these Journal notes now appear on our website, www.HarryBrowne.org. Just click on the link to the Campaign Journal.)

Thursday, September 21, 2000 — Washington

I know I've mentioned getting up early before. But it seems to be getting earlier and earlier. This morning it's at 4:30 — in order to get into the city for a TV interview at 6:15. The interview is with Don Hudson at WJLA, Channel 7, the ABC affiliate, and it's only 3 minutes long. But I manage to hit the highlights and mention the website. However, I don't get time to plug tonight's event in nearby Arlington. (As it turns out, we have an overflow crowed at the event, so plugging it wouldn't make a difference.)

Back at the hotel, I have an hour on the phone with Tony Mancrini at WNIS in Norfolk, Virginia. We have an event there tomorrow, and Tony and I plug it several times. He has been very good to us, and he's very supportive. He'll be at tomorrow's personal appearance. The show goes well with plenty of callers, and an opportunity to hit all the important points.

Just after that, I'm supposed to have an interview with a Houston radio station. But I don't hear from them, and when I call I'm told the show is running late and won't be able to accommodate me today. So I tell them to call Jim Babka to reschedule the interview.

Kelly Beaucar of ConservativeHQ.com comes to the hotel for an interview. Although we've spoken several times on the phone and she's written several articles about me, this is the first time I've met her in person. Today she wants to concentrate more on my personal background, but we inevitably wind up back on the issues, the campaign, and the debate possibilities.

Then I have a phone interview with John Lowry at WKYX in Paducah, Kentucky. It is a taping for later broadcast. We go through the issues and he wishes me luck at the end.

Next is an interview with Erica Stevens and Jim Carney at WKTX in Cleveland. Erica seems to like my suggestion to eliminate Congressional retirement benefits and pay Congressmen $400 a year — so that they show up in Washington for just a month every other year and spend the rest of the time in honest work in the private sector. Unfortunately, we lose the phone connection in the middle of the interview and I can't reach them by phone afterward. We'll reschedule the interview.

Josh Burek of the Christian Science Monitor calls again, requesting some audio soundbites from me for the newspaper's website. We go over some of the major issues and I try to be as brief as possible. He seems satisfied with what he gets from me.

The evening event is in Crystal City, just outside Washington. The audience is a little over 200, overflowing the room and creating standing-room-only conditions. Marianne Volpe and the Virginia Libertarians did a terrific job of drawing a crowd.

ZoomCulture.com, an Internet site, is doing a documentary on third parties and has a reporter and cameraman present. Michael Lynch of Reason magazine is there.

About a third of the audience are new to Libertarian events, and the entire audience is very enthusiastic. The fund-raising goes quite well. Michael Cloud is a brilliant emcee and fund-raiser. I don't know where the LP and our campaign would be without him.

Rasmussen Research's latest poll has Bush at 43.1% while Gore has 40.9%, Ralph Nader 3.5%, Harry Browne 1.2%, Pat Buchanan, 1.2%, John Hagelin 0.2%, and Howard Phillips 0.1%. The daily poll results are at the Rasmussen site at www.portraitofamerica.com.

A Reuters/Zogby poll has Gore leading Bush, 45% to 41%. Green Ralph Nader is at 5%, and Pat Buchanan and I are tied at 1%. Zogby says, "If you look at all third parties, they total from 6% to 7% of voters nationwide. A total of 7% could decide the election."

Bill Shadle has a letter published today in the Harrisburg (PA) Patriot-News. He chides Pat Buchanan for saying government is too big and then accepting $12.5 million of taxpayer money
—contrasting Buchanan's feeding at the federal trough with my refusal to accept matching funds.

Friday, September 22, 2000 — Norfolk & Manchester

Up early again — this time at 5:15 to catch a plane to Norfolk. Robert Dean and Tom Cantrell meet me at the Norfolk airport. They take me to WVEC-TV for a 12-minute interview with Joel Rubin and Jim Spencer, taped for viewing Sunday morning after ABC's This Week political show. Sharon Wood, the local Congressional candidate is also on the show, and she does a good job of handling the question's put to her.

Apparently, the original plan was that Sharon and I would be on for the entire half-hour show. But a school bus accident has preempted the station's facilities, and we have to be satisfied with a one-segment interview squeezed in between on-the-spot remotes from the accident scene.

(Jim Spencer writes for the Hampton Roads, Virginia, Daily Press. His article on me will appear on Sunday, and it makes a big point that our views are out of the mainstream of American opinion — citing our low poll numbers. He doesn't acknowledge that our poll numbers tell very little about the popularity of our views if very few Americans have heard our views.)

Afterward we head to Tom Cantrell's office where Robert Dean has worked hard to set up a small rally and press conference. Three local TV stations had committed to attending, but the bus accident has kept all of them away. However, Janie Bryant of the Norfolk Pilot is present and asking questions.

Also present is Tony Mancrini of WNIS radio, who introduces me. Tony is a terrific talk-show host — very bright and very entertaining. I'm thinking of going back to doing a radio show after the campaign, but when I hear someone like Tony I can't help thinking I'm out of my depth in a business with such talented people as him and Larry Elder.

Tony has already endorsed me. And on the way to the TV station we have heard him on the air making an excellent presentation on why the only wasted vote is one for someone you don't agree with. Tony gives a summary of that argument in his introduction now.

I give a 20-minute speech, talking mainly about why we have good reason to be optimistic. We're laying the groundwork for a possible victory before the end of this decade. About 50 people are in attendance — which is quite a turnout for 11 o'clock on a Friday morning.

Robert Dean takes me back to the airport, where I catch a flight to New Hampshire via Philadelphia.

Art Olivier arrives at the Manchester airport about the same time I do. Don Gorman drives Art and me from the airport to a banquet staged by Gun Owners of New Hampshire.

Don takes Art and me around the room to meet several of the many Republican office-holders in attendance. I'm surprised that some of them have seen me on TV and have nice words to say about me.

Gordon Humphrey, the former U.S. senator, is running for Governor and is the featured speaker. John Babiarz, the LP gubernatorial candidate, and I go up to say hello to him. I tell Humphrey that I regret to inform him that I've decided to endorse Babiarz. He doesn't see much humor in that (but then, now that I think about it, neither do I).

There are many Republican office-holders among the crowd of a couple hundred or so. But somehow Don pulls off a miracle and arranges for me to be the only politician there with a speaking slot, aside from Humphrey.

They give me two minutes, and the emcee makes a very nice introduction. I point out that incidents of gun violence cause Democrats to call for new gun laws, and Republicans respond by saying we should enforce the gun laws on the books. I say that those gun laws are the principal cause of gun violence — because they put innocent citizens at a disadvantage to criminals who circumvent the laws. That's why Libertarians want to repeal all the gun laws. This gets a nice round of applause.

I go on to relate my plan to disarm the guards protecting the Congressmen until the latter restore to all American citizens the unconditional right to defend themselves. This, too, goes over well.

I also mention that Libertarians are the only ones that can be trusted to promote gun rights in all cases because we also want to get the government out of all the other areas where it has violated the Constitution — education, health care, law enforcement, welfare, and so on. This also is well received.

Finally, I say we will lose all our remaining rights if we continue to remain on the defensive — fighting only against new invasions of the Constitution. We must take the offensive and demand the repeal of all the gun laws and demand the removal of the federal government from all areas that have no constitutional authority.

Somehow I say all this in two minutes. (Well, maybe I take four or five.) And I'm surprised at how well a Republican audience responds.

We eat dinner, and then Don, Art, and I sneak out before Humphrey's speech. I don't think I can stand to sit through another speaker telling me we must "protect" our second-amendment rights when we've already lost them.

Saturday, September 23, 2000 — Manchester

I'm able to sleep late this morning, and not a day too soon. I arise in the mid-morning and get some work done at my computer.

In the afternoon I give a short talk to the New Hampshire state LP convention. Other New Hampshire candidates speak as well. While there, I'm interviewed by Monica Morales of WFXT, channel 25, the Fox TV affiliate; by Terry Adler of WHDH, channel 7; and by T.J. Winnick of New England Cable News.

At the evening banquet, Marshall Fritz gives an excellent speech on the importance of separating school and state. I follow him with a 5-minute talk comparing the free-market computer industry with the government-dominated education business. This is an easy way to see how much better off we'd be if education were handled in the free market, as computers are (and how much worse off we'd be if computers were handled by government, as education is).

Afterward Jack Kenny of the Manchester Union-Leader interviews me for a few minutes outside the banquet room. He wants to get the exact wording on the analogies I used in my brief talk. I appreciate his desire to be accurate.

Tomorrow I will fly to Detroit for several events, including a Monday speech at the Detroit Economic Club, which C-SPAN will televise.

Sunday, September 24, 2000 — Detroit

I fly from Manchester, New Hampshire, to Detroit. Steve Willis meets me at the airport.

Shortly afterward we hook up with Barbara Goushaw, the Energizer Bunny of the Michigan LP. Together we go to Excalibur, a gourmet restaurant in Southfield, where Sheldon Rose is hosting a dinner for Libertarian candidates and activists, as well as some of Sheldon's influential friends who lean toward libertarianism. One guest is Mary Kramer of Crane's Detroit Business, a local magazine. Sheldon is a successful contractor and property manager, and has been a great friend and help to the Michigan LP and to my campaign.

After the guests have had dinner, I speak for about 20 minutes and then answer questions. My talk concentrates on the good prospects for the LP to bring about significant change in America in this decade, and how important it is that we get the largest vote total possible this year — to help the LP continue to grow in size, strength, and influence. Although fund-raising isn't part of the evening, afterward one family gives me an envelope containing $2,200 in donations.

Monday, September 25, 2000 — Detroit

Today I speak at the Economic Club of Detroit. Not only is it an influential venue, but C-SPAN will be on tap to televise it nationally. I have prepared a special speech for the occasion, focusing on the income tax and Social Security — with a new approach to showing people how important it is to support Libertarians now. It is all laid out in my mind and I hope it will be very powerful.

Unfortunately, my inconsistent sleep schedule has caught up with me. I have a great deal of trouble getting to sleep and staying asleep. When morning arrives, I've been asleep for no more than two hours all night. I've spoken under worse conditions before, but I don't expect to be at my best — to be able to remember all I want to say, to come up with the right phrases and examples easily, and to maintain a passionate energy — with so little sleep.

Before leaving for the speech, I have two radio interviews to do from the hotel room. The first is with Marci & Joe at WKMI in Kalamazoo, Michigan. She asks most of the questions, and she finds my stands on the issues a little hard to believe. But at the end of the half-hour she asks if we can stay over for the rest of the hour. I say that I can't, because I have another interview now, but we can schedule another interview for the near future. She says she'll do that because she thinks I'm a "great guest."

The second interview is 30 minutes with Al Gross at KJSL in St. Louis. Early in the conversation he asks what I think of the sodomy laws. I say what people choose to do with their own bodies is none of the government's business, and it's very dangerous to think you can regulate other people's conduct through government — because government winds up regulating you over things you believe are proper.

In the studio with him is a woman from the Constitution Party. She asks me what I think about Vermont's same-sex marriage law. I say that marriage is a private relationship, like a friendship or a business contract, and it's not government's business to determine what is or isn't a proper relationship — so long as it doesn't intrude upon the person or property of someone who hasn't consented to the relationship.

Later she and I get into a battle over abortion. I still haven't gotten wise to what's going on here. But then the host says he will ask me a question that Larry King or Barbara Walters would never ask me: When I die, what can I tell God is my justification for getting into Heaven. I say I don't know, because I don't believe I can know God's will. (It doesn't occur to me to point out that God wouldn't have to ask; he'd know already whether or not I had qualified for admission.) Al says he does know what God's will is, and advises me to read John, chapter 3. I finally figure out that this is a Christian program.

Then Steve, Barbara Goushaw, Jennifer Willis, and I head to downtown Detroit for the Economic Club. I seem to be wide awake and not dragging; perhaps it's adrenaline.

At the Cobo Center, we meet up with Bill Halling, President of the club. He shows us around the center, and then there's a small press conference. Actually, it's a very small press conference. Present are Hugh McDiarmid, political columnist, and Alexa Capeloto, a Metro reporter — both of the Detroit Free Press. They ask about 20 minutes of questions.

(Alexa's article will appear on the front page of the Metro section tomorrow, and it will be a very helpful article. She includes my statement that "Government is really good at only one thing, and that is to break your leg, then hand you a crutch and say, ‘Look, if it weren't for the government you wouldn't be able to walk,'" There also will be a large photo of me at the podium.)

Next is a pre-lunch reception with about 40 invited guests. We then head into the banquet room. There are about 200 people present. After everyone has had lunch, a prominent lawyer, Beverly Hall Burns, introduces me.

I was worried about my lack of sleep — especially since C-SPAN is televising the speech. But as it turns out, I'm full of energy and passion. The speech seems to go very, very well — one of my best. I'm not interrupted by applause, but there is an enthusiastic ovation at the end. The question period also goes smoothly.

Afterward, Nolan Finley, an editorial writer for the Detroit News, asks if I can meet with the newspaper's editorial board tomorrow. I say I'd be glad to, but he'll need to set it up with Press Secretary Jim Babka.

Andre Holland of WKBD, channel 50, interviews me. And Jim Suhr, a staff writer for the AP, asks me some questions. (His article will appear tomorrow. A boxed adjunct to the article will describe my positions on our major issues, and will be very helpful.)

From downtown Detroit we head to the University of Michigan at Dearborn. A last-minute event has been arranged for political science students there. About 30 are in attendance. I speak for about 15 minutes and then answer questions for about a half-hour. Some respond very positively and sign up to volunteer for the campaign and the LP. Others are skeptical.

I find out that the interview I had with Bob Edwards for National Public Radio last week was broadcast this morning. Actually, it apparently was only part of the actual interview — about 5 minutes out of the 20 minutes that was taped. But I'm told some of the best items were aired.

James Ridgeway of the Village Voice (a liberal weekly newspaper in New York) asks for my answers to five questions, to be posted on the publication's website. Here are the questions and answers. . . . 

"What's the difference between you and Bush?"

George Bush wants to run your life. I want you to be free — free of the income tax, free of Social Security, free of the Drug War, free of people like George Bush and Al Gore.

"Since the GOP doesn't have much going for it except libertarian-style economic ideas, why not just vote Republican?"

That would be an endorsement of the big-government programs George Bush is proposing or supporting.

"Aren't you — like Nader and Buchanan — just a spoiler?"

I am running to help build a Libertarian Party big enough to win the Presidency and Congress. By your definition, we could never have anything but the Republicans and Democrats, because anyone else would be a "spoiler."

"Give me three simple things you'd do first if elected?"

1. Pardon every federal prisoner convicted of a non-violent drug offense.

2. Tear pages of regulations out of the federal register.

3. Bring U.S. troops home from abroad and announce that the U.S. will no longer meddle in other countries' affairs.

"Why won't you take federal election money?"

I don't believe you should be forced to support my campaign. And you certainly can't believe that anyone who feeds at the federal trough is serious about reducing government.

The Harris Poll today released presidential polling figures for a number of individual states. In each case, they listed four candidates — Bush, Gore, Nader, and Buchanan — but not me. The states included some of those in which I'm running ahead of Buchanan and/or Nader. And in some of the states, Buchanan was listed at 0%, but still no attempt was made to find out how much support we Libertarians have.

Tuesday, September 26, 2000 — Detroit

The day begins with a half-hour interview with Chris Jagger at KDGE-FM in Dallas. I do it on my cell phone, as we are on the way to a TV studio. She begins by saying that she voted for me in 1996, but then she heard I want to repeal all the gun laws — which she can't understand. We discuss that and many other issues, but I'm not sure whether she intends to vote for me again.

Steve and I arrive at WXYZ-TV, the ABC affiliate, for an interview with Chuck Stokes. His father is Carl Stokes, a Democratic Congressman, but his interviewing style doesn't betray any political viewpoint. We tape about 15 minutes, which will be aired in its entirety on Sunday. Bill Shotey, the press liaison for the Michigan LP, has made a special arrangement with Carl to tape this on Tuesday while I'm here, rather than his normal Thursday. On every trip I've made to Michigan, Bill has come up with some good press contacts.

At one point I say the only defense we need is protection against missiles and a border patrol to protect us from those rampaging Canadians coming from Windsor (across the river from Detroit). He doesn't appear to be listening, and so I go on. But then I notice a slight smile creeping across his face. He heard it and now he gets it. He says something about the Canadians, and I say that of course I was joking about them; I love Canadians, and I lived in Vancouver for five years.

The interview overall seems to go particularly well. I think I'm discovering how to be passionate without being scary. I now can present our views in a logical, benefit-oriented way — and yet be passionate without seeming a threat to someone hearing them for the first time. In this interview, all of that seems to come together.

Next is an hour in studio with Mark Scott, a Libertarian talk-show host on WXYT. Mark has always been very good to me and to Michigan Libertarians, and this hour goes very well and very quickly. All the callers are supportive.

After getting a haircut (my first in too long), I meet with the Detroit News editorial board. In addition to Nolan Finley, there are writers Shikha Dalmia, Jeffrey Hadden, and Bill Johnson. Also present is Henry Payne, the syndicated cartoonist whose work appears in newspapers across America, as well as in Reason magazine.

The meeting lasts an hour. Sometimes we get too far into the details of government programs and free-market alternatives. But we also cover the political aspects of why people should vote Libertarian.

In the evening we have a public meeting at the hotel. Barbara Goushaw led a group of activists in putting leaflets on cars in the parking lot of the adjacent office complex — and that seems to have brought in some people who otherwise wouldn't have known about the event. In addition, a dozen or more people say they wouldn't have known of the event if they hadn't heard about it on Mark Scott's radio show. Kathy Gray, a reporter for the Detroit Free Press, is there. In all, about 250 people are in attendance — around 40% of whom are at their first Libertarian event. The event goes very well.

Hardy Macia of Vermont has constructed a Harry Browne Action Page — an excellent website that provides links to many different ways you can help the campaign.

A week or so ago, Human Events, a conservative national weekly newspaper, published an article by syndicated columnist Ann Coulter. In it, she told how she had tried to run for Congress in Connecticut as a Libertarian — only to have the Connecticut LP refuse to endorse her. In the article she tried to make us Libertarians look like a bunch of amateurs who would cut off their collective noses to spite their collective faces.

Tonight I finish a counter article and email it to Human Events. I have no idea whether it will be published — either as an article or as a letter to the editor. I don't try to respond to every negative article that comes along — only when an attack provides an opportunity to present our message to people who wouldn't otherwise hear it. The purpose of such an article isn't to respond to the false accusations (as most readers will have long since forgotten them), but to get a platform to present our positive ideas.

Wednesday, September 27, 2000 — Minneapolis

This morning the campaign released an email on LibertyWire, telling supporters that we've been rebuffed by Meet the Press. The program has scheduled a debate for this Sunday between Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan, and didn't include me. When Jim Babka, our very able press secretary, called Meet the Press to plead our case, he was rebuffed by the show's producer — who said it just wasn't "in the cards" that I would ever be on the show, even though I'm running even with Buchanan in the polls. When Jim asked what we had to do to qualify to be on the show, she said she resented the question.

Our email message asked people to blitz the show with emails and phone calls, requesting my presence. The first day at least 600 emails reached the show, and the phone calls overloaded the voice mail system.

Michael, Steve, and I fly to Minneapolis. We stay at the Embassy Suites, across the way from the Mall of America, the world's largest mall. Unfortunately, I won't have time to check it out.

In the afternoon, I have an interview with Julie Foster of WorldNetDaily. She's writing articles on each of the third-party candidates. We spend some of the time talking about the difficulty of getting the media's attention, since most reporters seem to consider only celebrities like Nader and Buchanan to be worthy of coverage, no matter how their support compares with mine.

In addition, national reporters don't see Libertarian proposals as serious. When there's a social problem, the obvious solution is a new government program. Gore, Bush, Buchanan, and Nader all have plenty of new government programs to load on us. But I'm proposing that we solve problems by getting government out of the way. That just doesn't fit the typical national reporter's mindset. Hence, it just "isn't in the cards" for me to taken as seriously as Pat Buchanan or Ralph Nader.

Afterward, I talk with Peter Orvetti, who is writing a profile for his website Web White & Blue. His primary focus is on why the media isn't covering me. I tell him he should call the producer of Meet the Press to get an answer. (I don't think he does.) Orvetti's article appears on the Internet a couple of hours later. It contains some misunderstandings about what I said to him, but it is otherwise a fair article and should do some good.

(The article is republished later on CNSNews.com.

The Village Voice, a liberal New York newspaper, published an article today by James Ridgeway entitled "Forget the Nader Threat; Libertarian Candidate May Tip Election — to Gore." In it, the author says that I may be the deciding factor in the presidential race by taking sufficient votes from George Bush in states where the race with Al Gore is very close.

Ridgeway may be wrong about that. My anecdotal experience suggests that roughly one third of the new support I'm getting has come from former Democrats, one third from former Republicans, and one third from people who haven't been voting. But I'm quite happy to have the press think I could be the spoiler.

Emiliano Antunez, chair of the Miami LP, wrote a letter to the Miami Herald, responding to an editorial that referred to 3rd-party presidential candidates as sideshows. The letters editor was so impressed that he suggested that Emiliano write a 650-word article for the Op-Ed page of the paper. Today Emiliano's article appeared in the Herald. It is witty and persuasive, arguing that third parties, if publicized, could do a lot to extinguish voter apathy.

Today the website set a new record with 17,606 different visitors, and with 21,578 visitor sessions overall.

Thursday, September 28, 2000 — Minneapolis

The day begins at 8:30 with an interview with Hallerin Hill at WNOX in Knoxville, Tennessee. Normally, no matter how early the interview, no matter how hard it is to wake up, I come to life as soon as the interview starts — and I'm clear-headed and reasonably articulate.

But this morning I can't seem to get going properly (maybe it was getting a good night's sleep that hurt me), and I find myself continually stumbling over my words. However, I think the content of my statements is good — trying to bring the conversation back to the benefits we Libertarians are offering you.

After that I'm on KREF in Norman, Oklahoma, with Ben Odom. For some reason, I start out with the impression that he's a conservative. Even when he refers to the local Congressman disparagingly, calling him a right-wing Republican, I don't catch on that he's a liberal. My mind really isn't working properly.

Not only that, I get caught up in a virtual shouting match with him. He believes government has done many wonderful things — such as bringing electricity to rural areas or financing his father's college education through the G.I. Bill — without worrying about who had to pay for these benefits.

But at the end, he graciously gives me the final three minutes to tell my story my way — which I do. Realizing that whatever the host's views are, there should be people listening who ought to vote for us. So I emphasize that anyone who wants smaller government is giving up if he votes for someone he knows will make government bigger.

With two interviews in which I don't feel I've handled myself up to par, I'm starting to get worried. Tonight there will be a debate, televised on C-SPAN, with Howard Phillips and John Hagelin, hosted (presumably) by Jesse Ventura. Will my mind, my heart, and my tongue be in sync by this evening?

After lunch I have an hour on KNTA in Rockford, Illinois, with Chris Bowman and Mark Mayhew — to plug our event there this Saturday. They are very friendly, and now my words seem to be flowing more easily. It may help that they're not as contentious as the last host was, but my mind and mouth are now operating on the same wave length. The interview goes very well, and we get some good calls.

We frequently hear some Republican or Democrat say that the debates have to be limited to just those with 15% support in the polls because there are over 200 people running for President officially, and you couldn't possibly have them all on the stage. But I receive a note from Jack Dean (our hard-working Internet guru), calling my attention to information from Richard Winger (America's ballot-access expert). Winger points out that there are only 13 candidates who are on the ballot in even one state this year. Only 7 candidates are on enough states to theoretically win a majority in the Electoral College. Of the 6 candidates who can't win mathematically, the most active is on only ten state ballots.

The first debate should have been held in early September, well before voters had made up their minds on the basis of what little information was available. That first debate should have included everyone with a mathematical ability to win the election — in other words, seven candidates (Bush, Gore, Browne, Nader, Buchanan, Hagelin, and Phillips).

There probably should have been two such debates, so that every voter would have an opportunity to view each of these candidates. Having seven candidates would have been no more unwieldy than the early Republican primary debates.

By late September, the field should have been trimmed to, perhaps, the top five in the polls. At that point perhaps only those with 5% or more in the polls should be included. And one or more of those candidates who don't have 5% now might have earned that much support through the exposure of the earlier debates.

The current debate system will always be rigged because the Republicans and Democrats operate the Debate Commission. They raise corporate money to sponsor these political-advocacy debates by legally allowing the corporations to violate the campaign finance laws and to deduct the donations from their income tax — something you and I are prohibited by laws from doing. The Debate Commission is not something that sprung up in the free market; it is a creature of government.

I spend part of the afternoon filling out issue surveys coming from various organizations. And there are two press interviews handled by phone.

The first is with Patrick Howe, an AP reporter in Minneapolis. His questions revolve mostly around the third-party debate tonight. I tell him that I'll gladly debate anyone, provided the debate is carried on national television. He's very friendly, but who knows what he'll write. He releases his article later in the day and, happily, it includes my stands on the issues — along with those of Howard Phillips and John Hagelin.

Then I speak with Adrienne Drell of the Chicago Sun-Times. We talk for about 45 minutes in two conversations. Although we cover many matters, she's particularly interested in the Meet the Press situation.

In the evening there's a third-party debate with Howard Phillips of the Constitution Party and John Hagelin of the Natural Law Party. I've said I would debate anyone, provided it's covered on national television. This debate is on C-SPAN.

Jesse Ventura is there, and he gives an introductory speech — praising third parties and stressing the importance of having them included in debates. The moderator is Shawn Towle, who operates a political website. The turnout is only about 200 people, a disappointment to everyone. But, again, it will be on C-SPAN. A couple of TV stations are there with cameras, and there are reporters from the two daily newspapers.

Howard Phillips gives the first opening statement, and he presents his case in his usual philosophical, academic style. John Hagelin follows him, and makes virtually the same statements he made throughout his 1996 campaign.

I'm not at my very best. I feel a little awkward at the outset, things smooth out in the middle, and then I feel my closing statement is a bit weak. But overall the debate goes well for me. Many of my statements elicit an enthusiastic response from the audience — even from supporters of the other candidates. My one big mistake is in forgetting to give the website address. Since I'm the first to give a closing statement, it's too late for me when Howard follows me and gives his website address. Overall, I'd rate my performance as a B-minus. After the slow start I seemed to get this morning, I'm satisfied.

There is a group of teenagers in the audience. They've been invited specifically to ask questions. At the end of the debate, they come to me and express their enthusiasm — saying they hadn't been aware of the Libertarians, and find themselves in agreement. (I've received many emails from teenagers who say they wish they were old enough to vote for us.) These teenagers ask to have a picture taken with me — and they get a Browne yard sign to hold up in the picture.

Today Jill Labbe published an article, syndicated by Knight-Ridder, entitled "Libertarians Are Starting to Look Good." The article is a strong endorsement of gun rights. It says, in part, "The more I read about these so-called crime initiatives, the more I start to look seriously at Libertarian Party candidates for Congress. What the Democrats want is obvious: more laws, because somehow 20,001 will be more effective than the 20,000 that the country already has. The Republicans keep harping on enforcement of those existing laws, but in reality, those laws do more to keep citizens of good intent from being able to protect themselves than they keep criminals from getting guns."

Friday, September 29, 2000 — Chicago

The two daily newspapers report on last night's debate. The Minneapolis Star-Tribune, after attributing to me one of John Hagelin's statements, goes on to report, "Browne said he wants to be a leader, not ‘a dictator of the world,' while supporting a citizen's right to bear arms, working for affordable health insurance and devising a strategy to stop the ‘war on drugs.'" (Excuse me, I have to get back to work devising a strategy to stop the "war on drugs" and figuring out how we can have affordable health insurance.)

The St. Paul Pioneer-Press begins its report with, "Less than a week after third-party presidential candidate Ralph Nader attracted an estimated 12,000 people to Target Center in Minneapolis, three other third-party presidential candidates debated Thursday night before a tiny audience at the Roy Wilkins Auditorium in St. Paul." (Hmmm, I wonder whom the reporter is going to vote for.)

Do you wonder why I think radio and TV — where I speak directly to the audience — is so much more valuable than press coverage?

The AP report by Patrick Howe (who interviewed me yesterday) is more accurate, with no spin.

My day begins at 4:45. In the midst of getting dressed, I have a phone interview with Phil Paleologos on the Talk America Radio Network. He's very supportive, referring to me as "a true statesman."

We take a couple of calls — including one from "Ruth of New Orleans," who used to call into my radio show. She is an elderly woman, who is an old-time liberal Democrat. During the 18 months I had my own radio show, she would call in once or twice a month, and we would talk in a cordial way about something on which we disagreed. However, she is one of the true liberals of old who truly support civil liberties, and so she is strongly opposed to the Drug War.

At the beginning of 2000, as we neared the time when I would announce my candidacy and devote full-time to the campaign, she said she'd donate to my campaign if I promised to stress my opposition to the Drug War. I told her I intended to make a big issue of it.

Today she says she couldn't sleep, went into the kitchen, turned on the radio, and there I was — at 5:15 in the morning. She says she wants to make her donation, but she doesn't know where to send it. Since she doesn't have a computer, I tell her to call 1-800-777-2000 for a packet that will contain a donation form. She asks me to repeat the number; I do. The host says we'll move on to the next call, and Ruth says, "Wait a minute, I need that number." Phil and I each repeat it a couple of more times, and finally we move on.

Michael, Steve, and I head for the airport to catch a 7:10 plane to Chicago.

When we arrive, I get on the cell phone to talk with Ron Newman at WBIG radio in Aurora, just outside of Chicago. I'm on with him for about 45 minutes, until we arrive at the hotel in downtown Chicago. He is very nice to me, and quite complimentary. He also implies that other presidential candidates would appear on his show only if certain topics were kept off-limits.

Then I'm on with Hoppy Kercheval and Stephen Reed on West Virginia Radio, a network of 17 stations. We talk for 25 minutes about the issues and why you should vote Libertarian.

Steve and I head over to the Chicago Sun-Times building. While waiting in the lobby, I talk on my cell phone with Perry Willis, who gives me the good news that today's Zogby-Reuters poll has me at 1.6% and Pat Buchanan at only 0.6%. More fuel to heap on the fire at Meet the Press. (Ralph Nader is at 3.3%.) A Reuters article on the poll mentioned my lead over Buchanan, and so will probably bring my support to the attention of a lot of newspaper readers across America.

Perry also tells me that yesterday's press release about the "Meet the Press" exclusion was read in its entirety on the air by at least three radio talk-show hosts. One of them announced that he's voting for me. In addition, the Tallahassee Democrat newspaper is using the release as the basis for an op-ed piece. It's tough going sometimes when we seem to be continually denied our due, but then suddenly a bunch of good news will pour in.

At the Sun-Times building, we meet reporter Adrienne Drell, who interviewed me yesterday. She has arranged for a photographer to take pictures of me. First she reads to me a draft of the article she's written about me, so I can correct any factual errors or misquotations. This in itself is amazing, as reporters tend to think they're infallibly right about what they heard someone say. And the article is very flattering, so I'm doubly amazed. (The article will appear in print tomorrow; it might remain at http://www.suntimes.com/output/news/lib30.html.)

The Fox TV News Network studio is in the same building and we go there for me to have a 5-minute interview with David Asman (my third interview with him). Although the interview is brief, I manage to get in all my main points. I mention the fact that Meet the Press doesn't want me on, despite the poll numbers. David mentions that yesterday he interviewed Ralph Nader, who said I should be in the Debate Commission debates, along with him and Pat Buchanan.

After the interview, I'm back on the cell phone — this time with Lee Rubin at KQED-FM, the National Public Radio affiliate in San Francisco. Art Olivier has already been on the show for a half-hour before I join the conversation. He answers some of the questions and does an excellent job.

In the afternoon, I have phone interviews with Bill Anthony at WKZO in Kalamazoo, Michigan, and with Shane McBride at WNTM in Mobile, Alabama. Unfortunately, things are so hectic and confused today that I lose my notes and won't remember what was said in the interviews.

At the evening's event, there are around 150 people — about 40% of which are at their first Libertarian event. Julia Beckman did a good job of encouraging people to bring their friends. Jim Tobin, chairman of Tax Accountability 2000 (TAC '00), gives a brief speech, endorsing me for president. The fund-raising goes quite well. A couple of TV stations do brief interviews with me and tape parts of the speech, and Harold Henderson of the Chicago Reader asks a few questions. Also, Kari Neumeyer of the Medill News Service is there taking notes.

I have to leave the meeting earlier than normal to head back over to the Fox TV News Network for a segment on Hannity & Colmes. To keep from repeating myself and wearing out my welcome, I focus on the wasted vote issue. The interview seems to go very well.

My article "The Media Know Best" appeared today on WorldNetDaily, a large Internet publication (at http://www.worldnetdaily.com/bluesky_browne/20000929_xchbr_media_know.shtml). The article criticizes Meet the Press for excluding me from this Sunday's broadcast with Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan.

Today WorldNetDaily also conducted a poll asking which third-party candidates should appear in the presidential debates. There were 13,372 votes cast. The results were:

Browne 55.7%
All 23.3%
None 8.2%
Buchanan & Nader 7.3%
Buchanan 2.4%
Nader 1.7%
Phillips 0.7%
Other 0.5%
Hagelin 0.2%

Last week, Eric Bailey of the Los Angeles Times spent a couple of days with us in Wisconsin. Today his article appeared on the front page of the paper. It highlights the trials and tribulations of running a 3rd-party presidential campaign, using me as the main example. It's a very sympathetic article, but not the kind that will get us a lot of votes. The proposals we make aren't mentioned until half-way through the long article.

Today Oliver North released an article syndicated by Creators Syndicate, entitled "What are they afraid of?" It criticizes the Presidential Debate Commission for excluding Ralph Nader, Pat Buchanan, and me from the debates.

Also today the University of Hawaii newspaper Ka Leo O Hawaii
published an article by Pablo Wegesend entitled, "Vote Browne to Reduce Big Government." The title says it all.

Saturday, September 30, 2000 — Rockford & Arlington Heights, Illinois

Jack Dean reports that we're getting between 15,000 and 20,000 different visitors to our website every day now.

In the morning we drive to Rockford for a campaign rally. There are about 75 people at the event — roughly a third of whom say they're at their first Libertarian event. Larry Stafford has done an excellent job in rounding up an audience — and, in fact, helped with all three events in Illinois. The fund-raising is sub-par, but the audience is enthusiastic. Before and after the event I'm interviewed by Jim Wolf of the Rockford Daily Herald and Chuck Sweeny of the Rockford Register Star. Also present is Jon Bystrom from the Rock River Times.

Robert Ryder of WTVO, channel 17, is also there for an interview. His report will air on the 6 o'clock news this evening. It will include pictures of me addressing the audience, and a pre-speech soundbite in which I say "Libertarians want you to be free — free to live your life as you want to live it, not as Al Gore or George Bush thinks you should."

After the Rockford event we drive to Arlington Heights for this evening's event. At the event, Iris Bryan of the Crystal Lake Town Crier asks me a few questions. We have a little over 100 people there, Again, about a third are new people. We're indebted to Ken Prazac for his help in making this event a success.

Michael and I each have wireless microphones. After he introduces me at the beginning of the meeting, he leaves the room. Shortly after I start speaking, I hear from my right a loud noise, and then another. At first I think there's a problem with speakers at the event in the next room. But then I realize it's coming from the speaker in our room: Michael's microphone is still on and he's sneezing. I say "Gesundheit!" to the speaker, and then call out to Michael to turn his mike off or take some Claritin.

The fund-raising result is way above normal — making a nice conclusion to this leg of the tour.

Sunday, October 1, 2000 — Denver

Michael Cloud, Steve Willis, and I are in Chicago. We have the luxury of sleeping in today, as our plane to Denver doesn't leave until early afternoon.

When we get to Denver, there are 25-30 Libertarians at the airport gate to greet us. It is a wonderful group, organized by BetteRose Smith, the Colorado LP chair. We leave the airport in a small convoy and stop at a state prison that is building a new addition because of over-crowding. A photo is taken of me pointing to the new construction, and we'll see whether we can find a use for the picture.

In the evening I'm on the Jeffery Fieger show in Detroit for 15 minutes. He begins by introducing me as "the man I've endorsed." We talk about the media blackout, and I'm able to slip in our main issues. At the end, he asks whether I think the Religious Right is the greatest threat to America. I say "No. The greatest threat to America is the politicians' lack of any regard for the limits the Constitution is supposed to impose on the federal government."

While trying to catch up on paperwork, I discover that the mouse for my infamous laptop computer has stopped working properly. I call the technical support department for the computer company, and am told that a new one will be sent to me.

Monday, October 2, 2000 — Denver & Grand Junction, Colorado

The day begins at 7am with a 20-minute interview with Robby Noel at KHNC and KTMG in the Denver area. He seems to be with us on every issue brought up — as we cover the income tax, Social Security, limiting government to the Constitution, the Drug War, and gun rights. I also talk a bit about the media blackout.

Shortly thereafter I'm on for 25 minutes with Mancow Muller at WKQX-FM in Chicago. He is a very upbeat, intense talk-show host. He says that during my last appearance I made a strong impression on him — giving him reasons that he should vote Libertarian instead of for George W. Bush. But he's afraid of Al Gore. We spend virtually the whole time talking about the wasted-vote issue. But in the course of it, he mentions many of his pet terrors — asset forfeiture, snooping in your email, and so on. I ask him whether he believes George Bush will do anything to alleviate any of these intrusions, and he acknowledges that it's highly unlikely.

By the end of the show he's moved closer to voting Libertarian, and I think one more interview will do it. But I hope there are people listening who were already close enough to voting Libertarian at the start of the interview — and who have moved across the line to our side.

Steve and I drive into Denver for a one-hour interview on the Mike Rosen show at KOA. Mike says he agrees with most of the Libertarian philosophy. But he calls himself a realist, saying he'll vote only for what's possible. The entire hour is spent on the wasted-vote issue, but that's okay with me. His show is undoubtedly heard by a lot of people who might succumb to Rosen's idea that we must vote only for someone who might possibly win this time.

Rosen says that people won't accept Libertarian ideas. I keep coming back over and over to the idea that he's given up, that he'll never get freedom, that he underestimates the desire of people to be free to live their lives as they want to. I hope we moved some more people across the line.

On the way out of the studio I'm accosted by Bill Owens, Republican governor of Colorado. He says he's been aware of my work and wanted to meet me. I thank him and we move on. (I don't think he's going to vote for me.)

From the radio station we drive to the airport to fly to Grand Junction. It's a one-hour flight on a prop plane. On arrival we're greeted by a half-dozen high school students, organized by Ty Bailey and Ryan Zarkesh. They've also arranged for two reporters to be there — Gary Harmon of the Grand Junction Daily Sentinel and Rich Moreno of Channel 8, the local ABC station. Moreno videotapes a couple of minutes for the evening news.

Steve and I take a taxi to KKCO, the NBC-TV affiliate. Jean Reynolds, the news anchor, has arranged for any presidential candidate to tape a 90-second campaign statement. The statement I've prepared urges people to raise their sights — to quit voting against someone and instead vote for freedom — to be free of the income tax, to be released from Social Security, to end the nightmare of drug Prohibition, and to restore the unconditional right to defend oneself. I'm able to deliver it without mistake in one take; we do it again just in case, but the second run-through isn't quite as good.

I then tape a 2-minute interview with Rick Wagner, the station's legal analyst. My remarks are pure boilerplate — wanting you to be free.

The station owner says he'll provide a broadcast-quality tape for us to use however we want. We probably will offer copies of the tape to TV stations, urging them to run it as a public service.

Jean Reynolds drives Steve and me to the airport, showing us the sights of Grand Junction on the way. We fly back to Denver — this time on a smaller prop plane. The day is calm, so there's no turbulence flying over the Colorado mountains — until the last 15 minutes or so, when we're suddenly tossed hither and yon.

Back in Denver, we drive downtown for a "Constitution Monday Rally" on the steps of the state Capitol building. We're running late, but we get there before the rally is over. There are about 200-300 people there (I'm not an expert crowd estimator), and I'm told that about half are Libertarians and the other half gun-rights enthusiasts. Ari Armstrong, a Colorado Libertarian, has organized the rally, which focuses on the 2nd Amendment.

Shawn Glazer precedes me at the podium. She's a Libertarian running for a local office, and she makes a very good presentation. She then introduces me. I suddenly find myself a bit tongue-tied, stumbling over words in my speech. Fortunately, the material is so familiar to me that I can plow through it. I cover the reason we have a Constitution (to keep the government in chains), why we must "restore" the 2nd Amendment (not "protect" it, as the Republicans say), the fact that Supreme Court justices apparently can't read (because they ignore such simple phrases as "Congress shall make no law"), and a lot more in 10-15 minutes.

Talk-show hosts Robby Noel (from this morning's interview) and Mark Coll are there. After my speech, Steve Paulson of the AP interviews me briefly; he seems to like some of my one-liners. I'm also interviewed by Evan Herzoff for Independent Media, an Internet news site, and for The Denver Free Press, the Colorado University daily paper.

Steve and I race back to the hotel, where the evening's event is due to start. On the way, I have a 15-minute interview on my cell phone with Tom Kamb at KHOW in Denver. Although the evening's rally is due to start within a half-hour, I plug the event. At the end of the interview, Tom says that he's voting for me and he joined the LP just a month ago.

I get to the meeting room only a few minutes before we're scheduled to begin. There are about 150 people in attendance, around a third of which are at their first Libertarian event.

The evening goes very well. In contrast to my stumbling at the gun-rights rally, I feel completely in command and the speech goes smoothly. The fund-raising goes particularly well. As usual, we introduce the local candidates — and there must be at least 15 at this event.

Tomorrow evening, the first presidential debate is scheduled to be held at the University of Massachusetts in Boston. Mike Conway, a Massachusetts Libertarian has discovered that a Massachusetts law prohibits the state from giving money to a political party unless an equal amount is given to all recognized parties in the state. It happens that there are only three officially recognized parties — the Republicans, Democrats, and Libertarians.

The Massachusetts legislature gave $900,000 of taxpayer money to the University of Massachusetts to stage the debate, and this benefits only the Republicans and Democrats. So Mike Conway filed suit to get an injunction requiring that I be included in the debate. The judge said the suit was worthy but it needed to be filed in a court with the proper jurisdiction. And so Mike has turned the suit over to David Euchner to ask for the injunction in a different court.

Tuesday, October 3, 2000 — Boston

The phone rings, waking me up. I look at the clock, and notice with relief that it's only 4:45am, so I'll be able to go back to sleep. Then I realize this is my wake-up call, and it is time to get up. We have to leave the hotel by 6, to catch a 7:50 flight at the Denver airport — which is so far away it might as well be in Wyoming.

After arriving at the airport, I get a call from KOA in Denver for a 10-minute interview on the morning news. With two newscasters (whose names I don't catch), I go over the situation regarding the debates and my position in the polls. They are astounded to learn that I'm even with Pat Buchanan, as their news sources have never mentioned that. I'm able to use the discussion of the debates to work in my stands on the issues.

While still at the airport, I have a 10-minute interview with "Louis & Floorwax" — two men who do a morning drive-time comedy show. One of them introduces me as "a man who is an intellectual and a stud." I say I've never been called either before; I'm just someone who wants to be free to live my life as I want to live it — not as Al Gore or George Bush thinks is best for me.

Steve, Michael, and I board a plane for Boston. Upon our arrival in the early afternoon at the Boston airport, our cell phones start ringing. David Euchner's suit is to be heard at 2pm, Jim Babka sent out a press release last night, and the media are very interested. From the airport I have a phone interview with Alyson McAdam at WBUR in Boston.

We drive to a downtown hotel where we have an open house for the press. My wife Pamela arrives just before we do. She has flown to Providence, Rhode Island, and driven to Boston. I haven't seen her since I last left home, three weeks ago today. What a sight for sore eyes she is. As I see her and go to kiss her, I'm interrupted by Gary Baumgarten of CNN Radio, who wants to interview me.

Gary has interviewed me before when we were in New York. He is very sympathetic to Libertarian ideas, and eager to see me in the debate tonight.

A photographer from the Boston Globe is there to take pictures. And Scott Tucker from the Daily Free Press at Boston University asks questions.

Doug McGrath of WLVI, channel 56, in Boston interviews me. He asks, "If people want to be free, and most of the ones I talk to do want to be free, why isn't the LP a major party now?" I point out that, given the power of the Republicans and Democrats to control state ballots, campaign financing, and the debate process, we have to grow to a size where we're too big to ignore and too big to exclude — and we're not there yet. But if I can just get into the millions of votes this year, it should lay the groundwork to run strong campaigns in 2002, 2004, and beyond.

Scot Yount of the New England Cable News TV network interviews me. He has just received a call on his cell phone from a clerk at the courthouse, telling him that our suit has been denied. The judge said we have a very good case, but that we filed it too late to give our opponents an opportunity to remedy the situation.

(Apparently, no one noticed until yesterday the state law that was the basis of the suit. And if we had given the defendants time to remedy the situation, the appropriated money would have been returned to the state and we still would have been shut out.)

On the phone I talk with Colleen Riley in the news department at KQV in Pittsburgh. It's a live news interview, and leading into it I hear that our suit is the lead story on that hour's news. I explain on the air why we brought the suit and point out that people won't be able to hear small-government views because I won't be in the debates.

While still in the city, I go to WRKO for a half-hour interview with Howie Carr, a big talk-show host in Boston. He's very sympathetic to libertarian ideas, but he plans to vote Republican. A good part of the time I'm pointing out that he'll never get what he wants by voting for people who are making government bigger. The interview goes well, but I'm a little tired and undisciplined.

Steve, Pamela, and I drive to Salem, a suburb of Boston. By mistake we've been booked into a bed & breakfast, rather than a normal hotel. There are no elevators, no data ports on the phones to get email, no way to function as we're used to.

We watch the presidential debate between Gore and Bush. I can live with having to get up earlier than I like each day, I can live with going to an airport virtually every day. But I don't know whether I can stand watching two more of those debates. It is excruciatingly boring to watch the two candidates arguing over and over about what is in each of their big government proposals. "You said . . ." "No I didn't." "Yes you did." "No I didn't."

After the debate I have a short interview with Harrell Carter at WNWS-FM in Jackson, Tennessee. He's not familiar with Libertarian ideas, but we go over the basics in a 20-minute interview.

Jim Turney, a long-time Libertarian activist, is in Boston with professional video equipment. He tapes answers from me for each of the questions that were put to Gore and Bush in the debate. They provide an opportunity to make the case that the viewer will be far better off in a Libertarian America. The answers will be available in a few days on FreedomChannel.com, along with answers provided by Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan. There will be a link from our campaign website to the Freedom Channel.

Although the lawsuit didn't succeed in getting me into the debate, it did generate a bit of publicity — some good, some bad, and some meaningless. Some of the publicity mentioned what we stand for (good), some just said I wanted to stop the debate (bad), and some said I wanted in the debate but didn't mention any of what we stand for (meaningless).

Wednesday, October 4, 2000 — Boston

Pamela and I arise at 8:30, and I do my first show of the day — 20 minutes with Jerry Bowyer at WPTT in Pittsburgh. He says he's a libertarian who votes Republican. A good deal of the interview is spent with me trying to show him that he'll never get what he wants by voting Republican. He believes the combination of President George Bush and a Republican Congress will cause the Republicans to start reducing government — no matter how contrary that is to what they've been doing up to now. I ask him what excuses he'll make if after he gets the President and Congress he wants, government is bigger, more expensive, more intrusive, and more oppressive four years from now.

I find myself stumbling all over the place in this interview. The words that usually come pouring out of my mouth just don't seem to be there.

But it's better in the second interview — a half-hour with Dave Elswick at KARN in Little Rock. I seem to be much more articulate and coherent. Dave says "I'm voting for you." And he mentions that Larry Elder (the popular L.A. radio talk-show host) was on his show yesterday (plugging his new book), and said he was voting for me, too.

Then it's 10 minutes on KPFK-FM in Los Angeles with Karen Oakum and John Beaupre. KPFK is a left-wing station, but the two hosts are very polite and not the least bit contentious. They seem generally interested in how I propose to achieve various ends, and they've checked out the website.

I say goodbye to Pamela, who's headed back to Providence to catch a plane for home. And Steve and I get in the car to head to the University of Massachusetts for a TV interview.

On the way I spend 5 minutes with Phil Anthony at WKZO in Kalamazoo, Michigan. As with all the earlier shows, Phil is interested in the debate challenge we made yesterday, and asks what I would have asked Bush and Gore if I'd been in the debates.

Then I talk with Mark Scott at WXYT in Detroit. We talk about the debates and contrast Libertarian positions with those that Gore and Bush presented. We talk a bit about foreign policy, and I point out that each of them said he would use military force where national interests are at stake, and that means whenever the President thinks he can score some political points (as George Bush the senior did in the Gulf War and Panama) and Bill Clinton did when he bombed Serbia, the Sudan, and Afghanistan).

Still in the car, I talk for 30 minutes with Neal Boortz at WSB in Atlanta. A Libertarian, Neal says he has one bone to pick with me. He thinks we should take the federal matching funds and use it to get the message out. I say that turning down taxpayer money is one of the best ways we have to prove that we mean what we say when we call for smaller government. And he agrees, saying, "I'm properly chastised."

We arrive at the University of Massachusetts for an interview with Jim Gibson on the Fox News TV Network. The interview lasts only about 5 minutes, but we cover all the bases. Fox News has been very good to us — by far the most accommodating network.

Right after that, I have an interview in the car with Kevin McCarthy at KLIF in Dallas. Not surprisingly, he wants to talk about last night's debate, and what was left out of it.

Then I talk with John David Wells, filling in for Armstrong Williams on the Talk America Radio Network. We talk for just a few minutes, going over the income tax, health care, and education, but not covering Social Security or the Drug War.

Still in the car, I talk for 7 minutes with Shawn Anderson and Mary Jo Powell at WTOP, the all-news station in Washington, D.C. They ask me what I would have asked Al Gore and George Bush if I had been in the debate. I give them several questions, including my favorite: "Would you be a better person today if, for your youthful drug use, you had spent ten years in prison?"

Steve and I go by the office of Newman Communications, our public relations firm. We discuss what can be done to generate coverage during the final five weeks of the campaign, plus some plans I have to continue promoting libertarian ideas after the election.

From there, we drive to the airport to board a plane for Cleveland. The plane sits on the runway for about 40 minutes before taking off. When we land in Cleveland, we head for the rental car office. The computer is down and it takes about 25 minutes to finally get the car. We then head for Akron, about 40 minutes away. We arrive at a Holiday Inn in Akron at about 9pm.

At 10pm, I have a 30-minute interview with Paul Schiffer on the Radio America radio network. This is a new show, and he appears to be very conservative. But he's supportive of libertarian ideas and of my being in the debates. We agree that George Bush did nothing in the debate to promote the ideas of smaller government.

I spend the next two hours using my computer to catch up on paperwork, and then head to Dreamland, USA.

Thursday, October 5, 2000 — Akron & Cleveland

The day begins in Akron at 8:40am with a 20-minute interview with Tuttle & Kline at WXSR-FM in Tallahassee. They seem unfamiliar with the Libertarian Party, but are obviously skeptical of government and sympathetic to the idea of downsizing it. One of them says every time one of the candidates in Tuesday's debate opened his mouth, it cost us a lot of money.

Next is an interview with Steve Gill and Terry Hopkins at WLAC in Nashville. They were among the talk-show hosts who successfully fought off the imposition of a Tennessee state income tax. They are very sympathetic, and the interview goes very well.

Then it's a 25-minute interview with John Lanigan and Jimmy Malone at WMJI-FM in Cleveland. Since we're only about 30 minutes from Cleveland, I plug the campaign rally we'll have tonight in Akron. The host keep challenging me using false premises. They believe repealing the income tax would be inflationary — that people spending their own money is more inflationary than politicians spending it for them. They also are big on gun control. They do like a lot of my proposals, but they think the overall package is too extreme. It gets very contentious. However, I think the interview helps reach the people who should be voting for us.

I have a 30-minute interview with Jamie Pietras of the Columbus Alive newspaper. In response to one of my statements, he says, "I sure agree with that. Whoops, there goes my journalistic objectivity." He seems very sympathetic to all our positions.

Steve and I get in the rental car and head for Cleveland, stopping for breakfast at a restaurant that isn't Denny's (the official campaign bistro for discriminating diners). We also stop at an office supply store, where I pick up a new mouse for my laptop.

In the car, I have a 10-minute interview with Bill Gordon at WERE in Cleveland. He says the last presidential candidate he interviewed was Henry Wallace in 1948(!). He also says, "What an honor it is to interview you, because I plan to vote for you."

Then I spend 10 minutes with Paul Schmidt, a reporter with the Chronicle of Higher Education, a weekly magazine. He asks how my plans for education differ from those of George Bush and Al Gore. I mention that when I graduated from high school in 1950, the rule of thumb was that it cost about $1,000 a year to go to a middle-class college; today it's $20,000 or more — at least triple after adjusting for inflation. I want to bring down the price of education by ending all the federal subsidies, rules, and regulations. Bush and Gore want to expand the federal role in education, making things worse.

We arrive at a Cleveland TV station for me to be on CNN's Talk Back Live! The subject is whether third parties should be in the debates. Ezola Foster, Pat Buchanan's vice-presidential candidate, is on with me — as is Winona LaDuke, Ralph Nader's running mate. Miss LaDuke is on the phone from home, and there's a baby crying in the background as she talks.

Unfortunately, today there is rioting and revolution in Serbia, and the program is interrupted several times for late-breaking news. Out of the entire hour, we have probably only 20 minutes of air time. However, I'm able to work in our issues a few times, and I get to make an impassioned speech concerning how the Republicans and Democrats have used the power of government to impose a two-party system on America.

After the CNN show, I use a studio telephone for a 5-minute interview with Bill Cohen of Ohio Public Radio. We cover all the issues quickly. At the end, he says, "If all the other candidates were as straightforward and easy to understand as you are, interviewing would be a breeze."

The evening event in Akron goes quite well. There are about 140 people present, and about 40% of those are new to Libertarian events. The fund-raising goes well. Around a dozen Libertarian candidates are in attendance and introduced. U.S. Senate candidate John McAllister gives a rousing 3-minute speech (as he will at the next two events). This year the Ohio LP is running 73 candidates, compared to 2 in 1996.

Friday, October 6, 2000 — Chicago & Columbus

I'm up early (so what else is new?) to catch a flight to Chicago. That's the nearest place the Fox TV News Network has a studio suitable for a remote connection, and I'll have an interview with them in mid-morning.

Unfortunately, the flight is on Southwest — meaning no seat selection, no leg room, and no room to use my computer. But I manage to sleep a little to pass the time.

The flight arrives about 45 minutes late. Fox has said there would be a car at the airport to pick me up, but I don't see it. And I have to wait outside about 20 minutes until I finally make contact with it.

The weather has turned cold and there's a frigid wind today. I had hoped winter wouldn't arrive until November 8 this year, but it seems to be here already. Snow is already falling in some parts of the country. When I left home over three weeks ago, the weather was sunny and warm — so it never occurred to me to bring a top coat on the trip.

In late January of 1996, I was campaigning in West Palm Beach, Florida. At a Rotary Club luncheon, Libertarian Don Fenton introduced my speech by saying, "While Republicans Steve Forbes, Phil Gramm, Pat Buchanan, and Robert Dole are slogging through the snows of Iowa or New Hampshire, Libertarian Harry Browne is basking in 75-degree weather here in Florida. Is there any doubt which one is smart enough to be President?"

Of course, I wound up campaigning in New Hampshire and a lot of other cold places that winter. But this time it's a race to see whether winter or November 7 will arrive first. I wish Global Warming would hurry up and get here.

In the car I talk with Mike Hawkins, a radio reporter for the Ohio News Network. He begins by saying, "It's good to have someone other than a Republican or Democrat to talk to." We get along fine.

Because the driver takes me to the wrong building first, I get to Fox News just in time for the interview. All this for just 5 minutes on the air. But it's national TV, a few hundred thousand people should see it. As we begin, I'm a little off stride. While starting to make a point, I forget what the point was. But I get back on track. And because the host David Asman asks me what I would do about the current Yugoslavian turmoil, I get the chance to make a strong statement against intervening in other countries' affairs. I ask how we would feel if the Chinese blockaded our ports, preventing us from getting food and medicines, until we overthrew Bill Clinton (the U.S. government has blocked trade with Serbia until the Serbs overthrow Slobodan Milosevic).

That's my 5 minutes of fame in Chicago. So I'm back in the car headed to the airport. On the way, I call on my cell phone for a 30-minute interview with John David Wells, filling in for Armstrong Williams on the Talk America Radio Network. I just talked with him two days ago, but he wants me back on again — perhaps because he'll have Pat Buchanan on for the second half of the hour.

We talk about the income tax, and I find myself stumbling again. At one point, we discuss Yugoslavia and American military policy. I say we have a strong national offense but a vulnerable national defense. He says we must have a strong offense, and raises a hypothetical situation of Chinese troops attacking the U.S. mainland. In the midst of this, I arrive at the airport and my cell phone signal gets weaker. I tell him I'll call him back.

I get to a pay phone in the airport. The noise around me is deafening, but we resume the interview. John is ready to talk about the economy, but I take him back to his Chinese invasion. I point out that I would tell the Chinese dictator that I would offer a $100 million reward for anyone who assassinates him if he goes ahead with the invasion of America. If he calls off the invasion, I call off the reward. This seems to satisfy John for the moment.

The airport is overflowing with huddled masses yearning to be free — or at least to get on a plane or find a place to sit down. I've just about decided that today won't be awarded Day of the Week.

As I finish the interview at the pay phone, David Mitchell of Investors Business Daily comes up to me to say hello. He says his paper had a favorable article on me a couple of days ago. I make a mental note to reconsider my vote for the Day of the Week.

Then I talk with Jim Bradshaw at the Columbus Dispatch. He's obviously very sympathetic, agreeing with me on most of my points. (His article will appear tomorrow and it will provide a very accurate description of what we stand for.)

I fly from the Chicago Midway airport to Columbus, where tonight's event will be held.

About 160 people are in attendance at the rally. Easily 60% of them identify themselves as being at their first Libertarian event — most of those being college students from Ohio State University. A Libertarian named Kenny drove a long way to get here, arrived early, and went to the University to encourage students to attend the event. I don't know how many of the students were already libertarian or libertarian-leaning, but they all seem to respond very well to the message.

Also at the event is a former Republican who quit his party on February 29, and says "I gave them six years after they took over Congress, and they never made good on anything that would reduce government." Another Republican at the event turns in his party card to Michael.

A columnist and photographer from the Columbus Dispatch are present. So is Steve Stephens, a columnist for the Dispatch who snuck in unannounced with his two children. On Monday his column will compare me with Sergei Khrushchev (son of former Soviet dictator Nikita Khrushchev), pointing out that today both of us are seeking liberty for our countrymen. It is a lovely tribute, for which I'm very grateful.

After the event, I talk by phone for 40 minutes with John Grayson at KMOX in St. Louis. He begins by saying that recently he asked his listeners to take the SelectSmart test on the Internet (www.SelectSmart.com) to find out which presidential candidate was closest to their views. A majority agreed most with my views, and so he wanted to have me on. He is mostly, but not entirely, in agreement with my views. The few calls we take all sound like Libertarian plants — someone asks for the campaign website address, someone else asks what I would do on my first day in office, and so on.

Today WorldNetDaily published my article, "The Top 10 Questions Left out of the Debate" — listing ten questions that should have been asked of Al Gore and George Bush in their debate last Tuesday. I receive an email from Tom Howe saying that a talk-show host on WPTF in Raleigh, North Carolina, read the article on the air — and most of the next hour was monopolized by callers who wanted to talk about the article.

Saturday, October 7, 2000 — Dayton

Today WorldNetDaily, the large Internet publication, ran an article "A Voter's Right to Choose" by Stuart A. Swirsky advocating that all opponents of the Republicans and Democrats vote for me.

I awake with a bit of a sore throat — the first physical discomfort of the campaign. In 1996 I had to take three days off at one point to recover from a mild flu, but this time I've been quite healthy throughout the campaign.

Almost two years ago, I started taking vitamins in liquid form, a product called Life Force, and it seems to have made me remarkably immune to any of life's periodic ailments. I have always been extremely skeptical of cure-alls, but I've slowly but surely come to think these vitamins might actually be making a difference to my health.

They come in a plastic jar containing a supply for about a month, and I have been taking a full jar with me whenever I leave home. Twice, however, the jar was suddenly empty after a few days, and I finally realized that the liquid was evaporating in a plane's luggage compartment. So Pamela sent me a mason jar full of the liquid. That lasted only a few days before it exploded in a suitcase.

So I've been without the vitamins for a few days — and my sore throat further encourages the idea that the vitamins have been protecting me. So I'll have to start carrying the plastic jar again, keeping it in my carry-on bag.

Steve, Michael, and I drive from Columbus to Dayton for today's rally. We arrive at 11:30am, just as people are starting to arrive for the event — which today is being held in the early afternoon.

The media are there in full force. Cameramen from the local ABC and CBS stations are present to interview me and tape some of my speech. Dan Edwards of WHIO interviews me before the event. There's also a reporter-photographer from the Dayton Daily Record, and her article and picture will appear tomorrow on page 3 of the Sunday paper.

There are a little over a hundred people present, roughly 40% of whom are first-timers. This is probably the most enthusiastic audience we've had in some time. They respond emphatically to everything. The fund-raising goes very well.

At the close of the event, I meet Amy Strong — a young, very articulate woman who drove three hours from Indiana to be here. She's entering law school next spring because she wants to be a Libertarian Supreme Court justice who will adhere strictly to the words of the Constitution. I intend to live long enough to see her on the bench.

In the evening Michael, Steve, and I have a leisurely dinner in the hotel restaurant, celebrating the end of a long, productive trip.

Tomorrow I go home, and I get to be with Pamela for three days before resuming the political Odyssey.

Sunday, October 8, 2000 — Heading Home

Michael Cloud, Steve Willis, and I each get up at about 4:30am for a 200-mile drive from Dayton to the Cleveland airport — each to catch a plane home after several days in Ohio.

It is a bitterly cold morning. Yesterday I had a mild sore throat, and today it is worse.

During most of the drive, the temperature outside is just above freezing. But as we approach Cleveland we run into fairly heavy snow (in early October!). We reach the airport and each of us catches a plane for his own destination.

I arrive in Nashville at noon and Pamela greets me at the airport. It's been 26 days since I left Nashville, and I'm very glad to be here. However, because of my sore throat the reunion isn't as joyous as I'd looked forward to.

In the evening, I have a one-hour radio interview with Bruce Dumont at WLS in Chicago. He has two guests in the studio who also asks questions. Most of the callers are supportive, while the host and his guests are friendly but skeptical.

I will take tomorrow off, spending it with Pamela. On Tuesday, there will be a full day of interviews — and then Wednesday it's back on the road again. The schedule has been very heavy and this probably will be my last respite of the campaign. So I'm glad for the chance to reenergize myself.

Monday, October 9, 2000 — Nashville

Or so I thought.

I get the best night's sleep in a long time — but when I awaken my throat is much worse, my chest hurts, and I have very little energy.

Pamela takes me to a walk-in clinic. I explain to the doctor that I can't afford a long recuperation. She gives me two shots and three prescriptions.

Pamela and I eat out and then return home to watch a couple of movies. I go to bed fairly early for being at home.

A report came in today from Charles Mellon, the New Mexico Volunteer Coordinator. He has been trying to set up a meeting for me to meet Governor Gary Johnson, who has been opposing the Drug War, but so far schedule conflicts have prevented it. The local Libertarians are running $2,000 worth of radio ads to promote the presidential campaign. They've put up 100 signs, distributed 500 bumper stickers, and passed out a couple thousand brochures. They have volunteer groups active in Albuquerque, Los Alamos, Farmington, Ruidoso and Rio Rancho. They are trying to get me on a local radio station. They need me to get at least 0.5% of the New Mexico vote for them to hold minor party status. Charles says, "This is the most active campaign for a Libertarian presidential candidate that has ever taken place in New Mexico."

I just see for the first time a good article by Joshua S. Burek that appeared in the Christian Science Monitor on September 28. It is entitled "For Harry Browne, the Pursuit of Happiness Is Life, Liberty, and No Income Tax," and it presents our views very nicely.

Tuesday, October 10, 2000 — Nashville

At 11am I begin the longest day of the campaign.

I awaken feeling noticeably better, but still with little energy. I seem to have post-nasal drip — or pre-nasal trip, or antebellum drip, or post hoc ergo propter hoc drip. Or something.

Jim Babka and Robert Brunner have cancelled all but one of the dozen interviews on today's schedule. But I feel well enough to tackle a number of writing projects. I also have to prepare my 1999 tax data for my accountant, as my absolute, no-chance-for-extension, final deadline is October 15.

Sometimes when I awaken, my mind is racing with an idea for an article. That's the case today. I have an idea for an article to point out the false premises that underlie many of the proposals Al Gore and George Bush are making in their debates — such as that there is a federal budget surplus, or that the politicians are "saving" Social Security when in fact they're stealing from Social Security to paper over the actual deficit in the federal budget.

The purpose of the article is to prepare viewers in advance to identify the false premises as they arise in tomorrow evening's Bush-Gore debate. Thus to be effective I need to write the article today and have it appear tomorrow on our website and WorldNetDaily — as well as distribute it by LibertyWire.

So I work on it for several hours before I even begin to tackle the projects I'd intended to handle today. Because my energy level is low, the work goes slowly. And my nose is running like the Mississippi River.

My one interview is an important one — with Jay Marvin on WLS in Chicago. This is a big station with a wide signal that transmits at night throughout a large part of the United States. I haven't been on with Jay in this campaign, but I remember vaguely being on his show in 1996 — and I know he's quite popular.

He reminds me off the air that he's a socialist and proud of it. So we go round and round on a number of issues. But he's very affable and the conversation is friendly. Although the first caller plans to vote for me, the rest are more like Jay. Despite my low physical state, I seem to be in good form — lively, coherent, and with my sense of humor intact.

At the end of the show Jay tells me off the air that I'm the greatest guest he's ever had on the show. I know that hosts and producers often compliment guests to make them feel good. But while he most likely is exaggerating, it's obvious that we had a very good show. He says he wants me back once or twice before the election, and that certainly will be good for the campaign. Although I don't expect to convert Jay, his audience is very large and undoubtedly includes thousands of people who should be voting for us.

It is now 10pm and I still haven't started on my taxes or the smaller other projects I need to finish before leaving again tomorrow morning. I notice my nose didn't run during the radio interview and I'm feeling a bit better.

I go to work on the taxes, and manage to finish compiling the data in about five hours. I then get the most essential other tasks done.

I'm finally finished for the night. But I look at my watch and realize it's already Wednesday — and it's time to get dressed and go to the airport.

Wednesday, October 11, 2000 — Winston-Salem, North Carolina

I take a shower and get ready. Before leaving, I have a 30-minute phone interview with Gregg Napp at WSKY-FM in Gainesville, Florida. He says we Libertarians have good ideas, but that our proposals are too extreme for the average American. He's with the Republicans because they're changing America incrementally. I say, "Yes they are, but all the increments are toward more government, just as with the Democrats. How do we get to smaller government by making government bigger?"

Pamela drives me to the airport. On the way I have a 3-minute cell-phone interview with Ben Foxworth for a live newscast at KXLY in Spokane, where we have an event scheduled tomorrow night. I manage to hit all the highlights, including plugging the event, and Pamela reminds me to plug the website.

I catch a plane to Charlotte, where another one takes me on to Greensboro. I manage to doze a little on each flight, but years ago I lost the ability to get a deep sleep on an airplane.

Steve Willis meets me at the gate. With him is Jim Turney, long-time libertarian activist who tonight will videotape my answers to the questions posed in the Bush-Gore debate. The video will be shown on FreedomChannel.com, a political Internet site.

Steve rents a car and the three of us start off for Winston-Salem, where the debate will be held. But the first highway we attempt to enter is blocked by policemen. We're forced to drive in the opposite direction from our destination. As we do, we see a convoy of cars, lights flashing, coming from the other way. Some debate VIP and his entourage have the highway all to themselves — inconveniencing drivers — just to assure that the VIP won't be slowed up.

At the next off-ramp, we turn around and head back in the right direction. When we get to Winston-Salem, the place is swarming with police cars. In some residential areas there's a police car at every corner.

I can't help thinking that some "civic leaders" must have decided it would be a great boost for Winston-Salem to host a presidential debate. Who cares about the traffic jams, lost productivity, or inconvenience to the average citizen — who gets no benefit from two politicians coming to town to tell lies?

We finally make it to the hotel, which is right next to Wake Forest University, the debate site. I had assumed I'd have a little time for a nap before the first interview of the day, but the traffic jams ate up so much time that we have to move on immediately.

Steve and I drive to the Wake Forest campus, where I have a 30-minute live TV interview on "The Advocates," a campus political show. Because of the heightened security, a guard meets us outside the campus and drives us to the TV station.

At the studio I use a phone in the control booth to do a half-hour radio interview with Jerry Agar of WPTF in Raleigh. He's friendly, but makes no attempt to agree with anything I say. He tells me Pat Buchanan was on the show during the previous half-hour, and Buchanan said he would step up the Drug War. As the saying goes, why am I not surprised? When the interview ends, he thanks me off the air and says he likes the Libertarians — and especially our gubernatorial candidate Barbara Howe.

While I was doing the radio interview, a young man was at a nearby console preparing the graphics for the TV interview. On his screen was an opening graphic to introduce the show and say that I'm the guest. Nearer to me was another monitor containing the "super" (superimposure) — saying "Harry Browne, Libertarian presidential candidate" — to go on the screen when I'm talking. I point out to the young man that the opening graphic has my name misspelled; he says he's in the process of correcting it. I say, "The super looks good, although you misspelled ‘presidential.'" He leaps out of his seat in horror before I have a chance to tell him I'm kidding.

The TV show begins. Jonathan Willingham and Whitaker Grannis interview me, alternating questions. It goes very well. I get plenty of opportunities to talk about what I hope will be important to college students.

Afterward we get driving directions to the Coliseum, the basketball arena where a "Rock the Vote" concert will be held tonight. I'm to be on TV now — live as the lead story on the 5 o'clock news at WCTI, Channel 12, in Newburn. As we approach the area where we're to meet the camera crew, we see it is enclosed by a wrought iron fence. We can see the channel 12 sound truck inside the area, but we can't find any way to get in. We drive completely around the area, but all the entrances have been blocked. It's now getting close to 4:55 and we're not even out of the car yet.

On my cell phone I talk to Stacy Davis, the channel 12 reporter. She can't figure out where we are now and I can't figure out where the gate is that she's saying we can enter.

We finally decide to park the car, enter the enclosed area through a pedestrian gate, and walk to the sound truck — reluctantly, as the truck is well inside the area and a long walk. Still on the phone with Stacy, we try to see each other but don't succeed.

As we walk through the enclosed area, there are cops everywhere — some of them with dogs. We pass bunches of police who are either standing around or walking somewhere in groups. Many of them are friendly and say hello as we pass. No one asks what we're doing there. And I don't ask what they are doing there — even though this is more than a mile away from where the debate will be held.

It's now after 5 o'clock. Walking through the area, we finally find an open gate where we think we might meet up with Stacy. Steve moves outside the gate to look for her, but I decide to stay inside the area — for fear I won't be able to reenter it.

And I'm right. A policeman comes up to me and tells me to get out, as this is a "secured" area. I point to the sound truck and tell him we're trying to get there for an interview, and we have only a few seconds before going on the air. He says that doesn't matter, we have no business there. We argue about this, and he gets more and more emphatic. I begin to wonder whether he's going to pull his gun and handcuffs, so I give up and reluctantly pass through the gate.

It's now about 5:15. We walk along the sidewalk in the general direction of the truck, hoping to find another entrance. Just then we finally encounter Stacy. She says they had to skip the interview, but they'll put me on at 6.

We walk back to the gate we just exited, and the three of us encounter the same policeman. Stacy tells him she's with Channel 12 and needs to interview me. He says, "In that case go on in." She has shown him no credentials. No more secured area, I guess.

We get over to the sound truck, and we have to stand and wait for 6 o'clock to come. While waiting, I get a call from David Postman of the Seattle Times. He wants to know about my scheduled meeting with anti-trust lawyers at Microsoft on Friday. We talk about how the court ruling could damage the computer revolution if it stands. He asks what I will say to the Microsoft people. I say, "I'll tell them to take heart: the Libertarian Party is growing rapidly and help is on the way." And more.

Finally, Stacy and I do a short interview to lead off the 6 o'clock news. It lasts about 3 or 4 minutes, and I cover the main points. For this I had a confrontation with an angry cop.

I'm scheduled to speak at the Rock the Vote concert, and it's now so late there's no point going back to the hotel. So we repark the car near the arena. As we're walking through the parking lot at the Coliseum, a car containing a black family approaches. As it reaches us, the man driving says to me, "I sure hope you win." I ask, "How do you know me?" He says, "How could I help but know you? I see you so much on TV." He introduces me to his wife and daughter who also wish me well.

We find our way into the arena and immediately encounter another family. The mother says they listen to me every night on the Internet. Steve takes a picture of me with the family and promises to email it to them.

The Rock the Vote concert is part of a drive to get young people to register and vote. It is a traveling entertainment, going from city to city giving concerts. There are musical acts interspersed with exhortations to participate in the democratic process. Tonight Hootie and the Blowfish are the featured act, and even staid old me has heard of them (although I don't know whether their specialty is baroque concertos or neo-Romantic opera).

I've been given ten minutes to speak, with no reservations on the subject matter. The students at Wake Forest said there would probably be 10,000 or so in attendance, but it looks more like a thousand to me. I don't really know how they'll react to me.

Before my speech, Steve and I go into the press room. There are a number of reporters there. Ed McNeal of WXLV-TV in Winston-Salem conducts a rather extensive on-camera interview. There are several other reporters asking me questions, but I don't get their names.

One of them asks why I'm speaking here. I say, "I know I'm supposed to say ‘because the youth of America are our future' or some such claptrap. But I'm here because young people are good prospects; they aren't wedded to the same old political parties, the way their parents are. I hope to get a lot of votes tonight."

Out in the auditorium, I notice a number of "Bush-Cheney" signs being held up in the audience, along with a few "Gore-Lieberman" signs. I wonder whether these people will resist my message. But when the time comes to speak, I dive in. I start by saying, "Welcome to the adult world. If you think your parents have been trying to run your life, wait until the politicians get their hands on you."

I run through all the things the politicians have in store for them: "You'll get up early every morning and go to work — 8, 10, 12 hours a day — only to find out that the politicians have first claim on your paycheck, and you get only the crumbs they're willing to leave for you." I go over Social Security, the monitoring of email, the Treasury agents snooping in your bank account, looking for suspicious transactions.

I get into the Drug War, and say, "If you make just one silly mistake, you could wind up in prison for 10 or 20 years. Do you think George Bush or Al Gore would be better people today if, for their youthful indiscretions, they had served 10 years in prison?"

The audience reaction is much better than I expected. There's a lot of cheering. I close by saying, "I hope you won't follow in the footsteps of your parents — who are stampeded over and over again into voting against someone. They'll vote for Bush because they're afraid of Al Gore, or they'll vote for Gore because they're afraid of the Religious Right. I hope you'll rise above that and vote for what you want — the freedom to live your life as you think best, not as the politicians think is best for you or best for the Fatherland. Don't vote against anyone. Vote for yourself, vote for what you want, vote for freedom, vote Libertarian."

After the speech, Steve and I walk through the audience to the exit. Young people crowd around me to ask questions. I know meeting any presidential candidate would seem like fun to them, but I'm surprised to see them ask serious and sophisticated questions.

One young girl asks for more specifics on the Drug War. I say a few words — including the point that the streets are less safe because imprisoning drug offenders has left too little room in the prisons for the more dangerous criminals. A black woman in her 30s breaks in to say that her 10-year-old daughter was brutally raped by a man in his 40s — who was convicted but received a sentence of only 41 months and will be out of prison in 23 months.

I sign a lot of autographs. A young man gives me a $15 check for the campaign.

Steve and I work our way out to the exhibit area and to the table where North Carolina Libertarians are displaying their wares. They have been working hard, distributing literature and talking to prospective converts. Gubernatorial candidate Barbara Howe is there with a dozen other Libertarians.

Before leaving the arena, I talk for 30 minutes on my cell phone with Larry Elder — our great libertarian champion at KABC in Los Angeles. He runs through the questions I posed in my article last week — "The Top 10 Questions Left out of the Presidential Debate." As always, we get along very well, but in the middle of the interview my cell phone goes dead. I eventually get back on the line with him by using a pay phone in the arena.

Finally, Steve and I head back to the hotel. But there are still two more events for the day. The Bush-Gore debate begins at 9, and I'm participating in a "mirror" debate for Lycos.com. On the phone in my hotel room I dictate my own answers to the debate questions to a typist while the debate is in progress. She transmits them to a "chat room" online. When the debate ends, I take some more questions from people in the chat room.

The process is cumbersome. I have to talk slowly so the typist can keep up, and that makes it harder to express myself — especially as she asks for clarification of something she didn't understand. It would have been faster for me to type the answers myself, but it wasn't set up that way.

I ask how many people are in the chat room, and am told it's around 500. I have spent 90 minutes talking to 500 people, who are required to wait a few minutes between the answers. It isn't a convenient medium. I could have talked to thousands of people on the radio.

Someday this may be a very efficient way to communicate on a real-time basis with people, but now this medium is still in its infancy. It probably won't take off until either sound is used or voice recognition matures to the point that messages can be typed automatically.

After the Lycos.com chat is done, I go to Jim Turney's room, where he has his video equipment and bright lights set up. For FreedomChannel.com, I again answer the debate questions — as I did after last week's debate. (A link to these videos is on our campaign website.) Jim has consolidated the questions into a half-dozen or so main topics, which I cover. It goes very quickly, and we're done in about 25 minutes.

I return to my room. I spend about 20 minutes on the phone with Pamela and then get ready for bed. It's now midnight, and I've been up for 36 hours — since yesterday morning.

Strangely, I felt no fatigue until we got to the final event of the day — the videotaping of the debate questions. But now I really feel it. I climb into bed, put my head on the pillow, and I'm asleep within a minute — ending the longest day of the campaign.

Thursday, October 12, 2000 — Spokane, Washington

The day begins in Winston-Salem. I arise after about 7 hours sleep, and Steve Willis and I head for the airport. We have three flights today in order to get to Spokane. First we fly from Greensboro to Detroit.

At Detroit, we walk the 327 miles (well, not quite that far) to get to the gate for our next flight. When we enter the proper concourse, we hear a terrible, shrill alarm. It is coming out of speakers throughout the concourse, and it just doesn't stop. It continues throughout our one-hour layover. And only at about ten minutes before boarding the next flight do I remember I have earplugs in my computer case.

Detroit is one of the three "Bad D" airports of America — Detroit, Dallas, and Denver. All are terribly inconvenient. Perhaps when the campaign is over I should write a travel guide to America — covering fast food, cheap hotels, and bad airports.

Actually, I like fast food — whether from McDonald's or Taco Bell, or from the more sophisticated Denny's and Cracker Barrel. And the hotels we've stayed at in this campaign have been moderately comfortable — whereas in the last campaign Pamela and stayed in the ‘Motel 4' too many times. However, there's not much good I can say about airports — whose government owners are always so far behind the demand for air travel that there's never enough room at the ticket counters for the airlines to process passenger volume quickly, never an efficient baggage system, never enough gate slots to handle all the planes.

The long flight from Detroit to Seattle is productive, as I get about 3½ hours' work done with my computer (which has been working okay lately). When we get to Seattle, we meet up with Michael Cloud.

While waiting for the flight to Spokane, I have a short radio interview with Chad Scott at WAPI in Birmingham and a phone interview with Michael Lewis of the Seattle Post-Intelligencer. (His article will appear on Saturday. It focuses on the compatibility between the high-tech workers and the Libertarian Party.)

Michael, Steve, and I fly on to Spokane. As soon as we arrive I phone Ed Heaphey in Daytona Beach, Florida, who's hosting a Libertarian meeting in his home. Unfortunately, by the time I've arrived in Spokane, the meeting is over and most of the people have left. But apparently the meeting was successful in organizing a new local affiliate in Daytona Beach.

There are around a hundred people at the evening's event in Spokane. The fund-raising is a little below average, but the audience is very receptive. About 40% are at their first Libertarian event. Afterward I have a short interview with Brian Rhodes of the Spokane Valley Community College Communicator.

Jim Camden of The Spokesman-Review is there. (His article will appear tomorrow, and it provides a detailed list of our proposals. It can be read at www.spokesmanreview.com/news-story.asp?date=101300&ID=s865251.)

Today WorldNetDaily published my article "Beware of These Fallacies in Gore-Bush Debates" — pointing out several false assumptions underlying the debate discussions between Gore and Bush. The article is available at our campaign website.

Yesterday's Question of the Day on MSNBC's website was "If The election were held today, who would get your vote? As of midnight last night Central time, 5,580 people had voted. The results were:

Harry Browne: 59%
George W. Bush: 30%
Al Gore: 8%
Ralph Nader: 1%
Pat Buchanan: 1%
John Hagelin: 0%
Howard Phillips: 0%
David McReynolds: 0%

If the URL  is still active, you may be able to learn what the final result was for the day.

Friday, October 13, 2000 — Seattle

This morning I'm up at 6am for a half-hour radio interview with Kirby Wilbur on KVI, Seattle's big talk station. He is very friendly and allows me to say pretty much whatever I want. I give the website address, but forget to plug tomorrow's event in Seattle. (I'm told later that someone called in right after my interview to mention the event.)

Shortly afterward, we catch a plane back to Seattle. We're met at the airport by Jay Mills, who guides us to all of today's locations. The first is a meeting during lunchtime with Microsoft employees, set up by Jay through Mick Egan of Microsoft. There are about 100 people present at the meeting, lasting about an hour. I talk for about 20 minutes, followed by an extended question period. The audience seems very receptive.

Afterward, we head for downtown Seattle, where I tape a 10-minute interview at KCTS-TV, channel 9. I fail to make a note of the reporter's name. He lets me say whatever I want, but he has a skeptical look on his face throughout the interview.

Then we head across Lake Washington to Redmond for an evening reception at the home of Dan Knudson. His house is self-designed, unusual, and sitting in a beautiful setting in the woods. Around 25-30 people are there. I speak for about 25 minutes and then take questions. Michael fund-raises and we reap a larger total than we get at most events with 100-200 people.

Saturday, October 14, 2000 — Seattle

Today's event starts at noon. About 250 people are in attendance, roughly 35-40% of whom are at their first Libertarian event. I awoke today somewhat out of sorts — which seems to occur when a good night's sleep follows a couple of short-sleep nights. But I'm in good voice and the speech goes quite well. Even better, however, is the fund-raising — which brings in the second largest total for any of these events.

Afterward in the meeting room I have a couple of TV interviews for cable-access channels.

Later in the afternoon, I have a phone interview with Richard Fields of the Scarlet, the campus newspaper for Clark University in Worcester, Massachusetts. He is a Libertarian, and so the interview is quite easy — as there is a lot I don't have to explain.

In the evening, I have a one-hour interview with Marlin McElvy at WMC in Memphis. It goes well. Since I had assumed the host was something of a conservative, I'm surprised when he begins the show by trashing the Drug War. He disagrees with one or two things, but on the whole he's quite supportive.

Today Scott Davison, a columnist with the Wichita Falls (Texas) Times-Record News, published an article complaining about the media blackout of our campaign. It is an excellent article, detailing the Libertarian proposals that are being ignored by poor press coverage and by my not being in the debates.

Tomorrow, Steve and I will head to Washington, D.C.

Sunday, October 15, 2000 — Seattle

I'm awakened at 6:15am by the phone ringing. There's no one there, but I get a message that a reporter has been trying to reach me. I find I can't get back to sleep. My mind starts racing with the elements of an article — prompted by occasional interview questions of how I would feel if my candidacy somehow took the election away from George Bush and gave it to Al Gore.

Although I get the impression that we only a small part of our support comes from Republicans, I go ahead and write the article.

When I'm finished, I call the reporter back. He is Bob Weinstein of FortuneSB.com, a website set up by Fortune magazine for small business owners. We focus part of the interview on the fact that neither Gore nor Bush is offering anything that would make small businesspeople's lives dramatically better. But we Libertarians are offering to end their income tax, end the income tax for their customers, get the enormous burden of regulation off their shoulders, and quit making them the unpaid enforcers of so many political fantasies for social improvement.

Later in the morning, Steve Willis and I head to the airport to fly to Washington, D.C. — with a plane change in Dallas along the way. Unfortunately, when we approach Dallas, a storm is causing planes to circle the field endlessly before landing. Because our plane is short of fuel, we can't wait — and so we land at Love Field inside the city of Dallas, instead of at Dallas Fort Worth (DFW) airport.

We can't get off the plane because — well, I'm not sure why we can't get off the plane. The pilot relays conflicting stories from the Air Traffic Controllers as the time passes and we sit on the plane. Needless to say, we've missed our connection to Washington. Meanwhile, thunder and lightning are flashing and crashing outside the plane. The inside of the plane is extremely warm and close.

We sit on the runway for about three hours. Finally, the plane takes off and flies 21 miles to DFW airport. When we arrive, we're told the only remaining flight to Washington is full — with stand-bys already waiting. So, even though our luggage is irretrievably on its way to Washington, Steve and I forego the stand-by approach and get rooms at a nearby hotel. It's now nearly 11pm on the east coast, but Laura Carno — our tireless scheduler — goes to work to track down our luggage and get it back to Dallas as soon as possible.

When we reach the hotel, Steve and I head into the restaurant to get something to eat. I still feel much too warm, I seem to have a fever, and my body is aching. Is it just from sitting so long on that plane — or have I not yet recovered from last week's cold — or am I coming down with something new?

I finish my dinner quickly and go up to my room — eager to get some rest. Jim Babka agrees to take the radio shows I have scheduled for the rest of the evening and early tomorrow morning. I climb into bed about 10pm and go to sleep quickly.

Monday, October 16, 2000 — Dallas

The phone awakens me at 9am. I've slept for 11 hours and I feel like a new man. No fever, no ache. Apparently, all I needed was a good night's sleep. I'm relieved to know I'm still in one piece — and ready for a day's work.

The only problem is that there's not much I can do. My luggage hasn't arrived. My computer has an hour or so of battery power left, and the AC power cord is in my luggage — which is somewhere in the western hemisphere. I have no clean clothes, nor any of the paperwork I could be attending to. So Steve and I go to the mall and I get a haircut.

Our travel plans are changed. Since we've missed a day in Washington, tomorrow we'll go straight to St. Louis where the third Bush-Gore debate will take place.

In the evening, our luggage still hasn't shown up. So I go to bed early, hoping the luggage will be here by early morning — so I can get some work done before leaving for the airport.

A while back, I mentioned in this Journal that the airlines get blamed for problems caused by government. I'd say about 75% of the problems with air travel are caused either by government-owned airports (lack of gates and ticket-counter space, as well as poor baggage-handling facilities) or by the federal Air Traffic Controller System (flight delays).

Even the other 25% of problems probably would be reduced considerably if it were possible for new competitors to come into the market and pressure existing airlines to improve their service. But a lack of gates at the government airports makes it virtually impossible for a new airline to get started in the business.

One of the worst failings of the airlines themselves is poor training in public relations. Employees apologize inappropriately in a general way, while almost never apologizing in a personal way.

When flights are late, when passengers are kept sitting on a runway for hours, when passengers are inconvenienced in other ways by the poor government facilities, the airlines issue abject apologies (and pay enormous costs in restitution). They never point out that it wasn't their fault. It's almost as though they think they'll be punished if they say anything bad about the airports or the Air Traffic Control system.

And those apologies are always issued in a general, collective way — a single declaration to the multitude of passengers. What you almost never get from an airline is an individual apology — or even sympathy — to you personally for any problem you encounter. When you wait forever in line at the ticket counter, no one says, "I'm sorry you had to wait so long." When you can't get the seat selection you ask for, no one says, "I'm sorry we can't accommodate you." When your baggage is lost or late getting rerouted back to you, no one says, "I'm sorry you're having to put up with this."

An airline employee needs to learn only two simple lessons: (1) No one likes to be inconvenienced; (2) if inconvenienced, anyone will feel a lot better if you just show a little sympathy. It amazes me that, in such a "people" business, I'm not aware of any airline whose employees are noticeably well-trained in public relations.

Perhaps if the government airports didn't make it impossible for new competition to enter the field, more airlines would worry about their employees' public-relations skills.

WorldNetDaily published a letter to the editor today from Ed Croker under the heading, "Trouble in America?" The letter said only, "The solution is simple: Harry Browne."

The traffic at our website continues to climb. Today we had 22,697 different visitors.

Today, the Daily Campus, the newspaper of the University of Connecticut, published an article by Jonathan McMurry, in which he urged fellow students to vote for me — on the grounds that Al Gore will win Connecticut no matter whom they vote for.

The article says in part, "All of the other presidential candidates are arguing over which one is best qualified to run your life. They all claim to know the proper manner in which you should live, how much of your own money you should be allowed to keep, where and how your children should be educated, which health insurance plan you should have, and how to manage your retirement savings. Through "targeted" tax cuts, drug wars, "reform" of education, and much more, Bush, Gore, Nader and Buchanan all seek to expand the power government has over you. They are intent upon taking your freedoms away one at a time. They are quite arrogant, aren't they?

"But Harry Browne and the Libertarians want you to be free. Libertarians say that you own yourself and that you are best qualified to make decisions about your own life. . . . 

"A million votes for Browne could scare the bejeepers out of the Republicans. It might even force them to shape up and become the party of small government, personal liberty and defense of the Constitution. Please be one of those votes. If you want small government, vote Browne. (For more info check out www.harrybrowne.com and www.lp.org)."

Yesterday Darrell E. McGuire had an excellent article published in the North County Times, a daily newspaper published just north of San Diego. The article points out that the presidential debate demonstrated that only pro-government views can be heard in the national media, and it urges readers to vote Libertarian.

On 10/15, Lycos.com asked the following question: "Whom would you rather have handle the Middle East crisis?" The poll elicited 17,896 votes, with the following result:

Harry Browne 45%
George W. Bush 41%
Al Gore 10%
Ralph Nader 3%
Pat Buchanan 1%

Tuesday, October 17, 2000 — Dallas & St. Louis

I awaken at 6am. I call downstairs and learn that the luggage arrived in the middle of the night. It's sent up, and I immediately plug in my computer to get it recharged.

I have a 20-minute radio interview with C.J. Russell and Chris Schaeffer at WUPS-FM in Mt. Pleasant, Michigan. The two of them seem to agree with everything I say. We run through Social Security, abortion, the Drug War, and welfare — and they're with me on all of it. So I bear down on the wasted-vote issue, pointing out that you'll never get smaller government by voting for people who are proposing more government.

Then it's 25 minutes with Jerry Bowyer at WPTT in Pittsburgh. I was on with him recently, and we talked about the issues. But because he's a staunch Republican, he wants to talk about the wasted-vote issue and the danger of splitting what he imaginatively calls "the anti-government coalition" — as though anyone but Libertarians are proposing anything specific to reduce government.

However, he begins the interview by asking what we Libertarians stand for, and tries to commit me to the most extreme positions possible — such as abolishing drunk-driving laws. I point out that we're trying to limit the federal government to the Constitution, not settle all the problems of society for evermore. He says, "So you do believe in compromise then?" I say, "That's no compromise, it's a simple recognition that you can only do one thing at a time. The difference between a Libertarian and a Republican is that a Libertarian would never accept a compromise that would make government larger, while a Republican will accept anything he thinks will help him get elected."

We then turn to the wasted-vote issue. I say, "You'll never get smaller government by rewarding someone for making government bigger; it's an impossibility." So the rest of the interview is an argument over whether George Bush is proposing to make government smaller. To him, Bush's 2% idea for Social Security is smaller government. I tell him that the 2% won't be your money; it's just a small part of the 15% Social Security tax in the hands of the government, subject to government rules.

He tries to defend it by saying, "You mean if this plan goes through, you won't take advantage of it by investing your own money in something better than Social Security?" I say, "How can I answer that? George Bush refuses to tell us what options will be available. He refuses to discuss any of the details. But you're so eager to defend him, you'll believe the best even though you know he has no intention of making government smaller." There's just one caller, who also defends the Republicans.

Steve and I head for the airport, and catch a plane to St. Louis — a flight that transpires uneventfully.

Upon arrival in St. Louis, we rent a car and drive to Jefferson City, the Missouri state capital. On the way, we stop for lunch at Denny's — the official Oasis of the Browne for President campaign. This is our first meal at a Denny's in a month, and the withdrawal symptoms have become intense.

At the state Capitol, Missouri LP Communications Director Jeanne Bojarski has set up a press conference for me to state my objections to my exclusion from tonight's debate. But last night the Missouri Governor died in a plane accident. So the turnout is less than the invitation responses had promised.

Jessica Finn of KLIK radio is there and records my remarks, along with those of Phil Horras, the Missouri Lieutenant Governor candidate. Also present is Josh Flory of the Columbia Daily Tribune, plus reporters from the Jefferson City News-Tribune and the Missouri News Service.

Another reporter in attendance is Jim Wolfe, who has his own news bureau. Afterward, he invites me into his office in the Capitol building. He says he read The Great Libertarian Offer and agreed with all of it. We talk for about 20 minutes about the campaign.

Steve and I drive back to St. Louis and check into a hotel. In the evening I have a 40-minute interview with Gary Nolan on the Radio America network. He tells me his wife was called by a pollster who asked whom she was voting for — Bush, Gore, Buchanan, or Nader. When she said "Harry Browne," the caller said her vote would be entered as "other." We spend a good deal of the time in the interview talking about the wasted-vote issue.

Today WorldNetDaily ran my article "The Character of George Bush," in which I point out that Bush's character doesn't give him an edge on Al Gore.

A Christian Science Monitor/TIPP poll released today has me at 1% along with Pat Buchanan. Ralph Nader is at 3%.

Wednesday, October 18, 2000 — St. Louis

Back to a full day of interviews. I will stress the wasted-vote issue in each of them. We are at the point in the campaign where some people who had intended to vote for me may weaken in their resolve because of an intense dislike for either Al Gore or George Bush. And there may be others who know of us and agree with us but who have assumed all along that they'd vote Republican or Democratic in order to influence the outcome. I must try to persuade all these people that the only vote that will further what they want is a Libertarian vote.

The first interview is with John Quaintance at WJCW in the Tri-Cities in Tennessee. He is very supportive, although he doesn't say he's voting for me. Over and over I come back to the importance of voting for what you want; otherwise, you give up all chance of ever getting it.

Next is a half-hour with "Lionel" on his Internet show (on www.eyada.com). We talk about how politicians treat the concept of the "national interest" as a blank check for the President to use the U.S. military whenever it suits him politically. I make sure to make a strong close to the interview, stressing the importance of voting Libertarian if you really want smaller government.

Then it's ten minutes with J.Z. and Cheryl on WLHR-FM in Panama City, Florida. They are friendly, but she knows nothing about Libertarians and asks a lot of basic questions. I get time to emphasize the importance of not wasting your vote.

My next interview is with Larry Ahrens at KKOB in Albuquerque. He is very friendly, although non-committal. He asks what the greatest misconception people have about Libertarians might be. In effect, I say it's the misconception that you can get to a Libertarian America by voting for anyone other than a Libertarian.

Steve and I drive to Washington University in St. Louis. At the scene of last night's Bush-Gore debate, I am to be on the Fox TV News network for a brief interview outside the debate building — as though I were standing among the wreckage in the aftermath of a disaster. Come to think of it . . . 

While waiting for the interview to begin, I listen through my earpiece as a couple of U.S. senators discuss the performance of the candidates in the debate. One of them says (and I'm not making this up), "The real winners of the debate were the American people." Almost immediately afterward, a news report says the American people are selling their stocks en masse, driving the Dow Jones downward several hundred points. I guess the American people don't like the prize they won.

When the interview begins, I'm on with David Asman. The interview is only five minutes, but it goes very well. I end with a passionate plea to make America a free country again, and to quit settling for the crumbs that people like Al Gore or George Bush offer us. This is my fourth interview with David Asman. Fox TV News has been very good to us. Fox and C-SPAN have been by far the most accommodating TV networks.

On the way back to the hotel, I try to have an interview with Glenn Klein at WTAN in Tampa. Unfortunately, my cell phone's signal keeps dropping out and we have to postpone the interview.

Back at the hotel, I'm on for 30 minutes with Kirby Anderson, Penna Dexter, and John Driggs — who are filling in for Marlin Maddux on the 300 stations of the USA Radio Network. They run down some of the issues. On each one I try to point out that neither the Republicans or Democrats are offering anything we should want. A caller asks whether I support vouchers, and I explain that I think they're a way of letting government take over the private school system. When Kirby Anderson says he guesses I would favor Bush over Gore, I point out that I didn't vote for 30 years — precisely because there was nothing to choose between Republicans and Democrats. And by voting for either of them, I would be endorsing their big-government proposals — the last thing I would want to do.

Next is an interview with Eric von Wade at KEYS in Corpus Christi, Texas. Before the show, his producer tells me that Eric is a Republican. When the interview begins, he seems to find my proposals for Social Security, the income tax, and restoring constitutional government intriguing. He agrees with a great deal of what I say and gives me every opportunity to say all that I want.

Steve and I head for the airport. On the way I have an interview on my cell phone with Michael Goetz who broadcasts from his website www.you-on-tv.com. He asks a lot about how I came to decide to run for President. At the end of the interview we get into the Drug War, and the hypocrisy of former drug users like Al Gore and George Bush wanting current drug users to spend time in prison. He agrees that it's wrong.

He asks whether I "party" — that is, whether I do drugs. I say no. He asks if I've ever used drugs. I say that I smoked marijuana four times in the late 1960s but nothing since. By this time I'm on a rental-car bus at the airport and some people on the bus are listening my statements.

I try to bring the interview to a halt, but Michael plows on. "Why did you quit smoking marijuana? Because you were going to run for President?" Of course not, that was 30 years ago; I had no idea I'd ever run for President. "Do you smoke or drink?" I like wine. I don't smoke now, but I enjoyed smoking for 25 years. Finally, I get him to wrap it up and end the interview.

We're going to New York, but the flight is about 90 minutes late taking off. We arrive in New York about 11:30pm. We're supposed to be picked up by a car provided by the History Channel, on whose network I will do an interview this Friday. However, we can't find the driver. We finally hire another car and driver, and we head for downtown Manhattan — to a hotel where the History Channel has provided rooms.

Unfortunately, the street on which the hotel is located is closed for construction. Our driver takes us all around the area, looking for a way to get close to the hotel. Finally, we call the hotel and a bellman meets us about two blocks from the hotel — and wheels our bags to the hotel. We arrive at the hotel at about 1am, and I get to sleep about 2am.

Thursday, October 19, 2000 — New York City

I'm in New York and have a full morning of interviews. The first is with Doug Stephan on the Radio America Network. He introduces me by saying, "I'm not voting for George; I'm not voting for Al; I'm voting for Harry." A little later, referring to Libertarians in general, he says, "What you stand for is where most Americans are." We talk mostly about the lack of coverage the campaign has received from the national political pundits, but I try to emphasize the immediate importance of voting Libertarian.

Next is a 20-minute interview with Tom Reagan and Ted Shredd at WEDG-FM in Buffalo. This is another show with a pair of drive-time comedy hosts who are more open-minded about politics — and who would love to get government out of their lives. One of them begins by saying that the debates were a lovefest in which the two candidates agreed with each other on all the essentials; they argued only over the details. As the interview progresses, I see that they're for legalizing drugs and getting the government out of as many areas as possible. I close with a strong plea to quit voting for those who are making government bigger.

Shortly afterward I have a taped interview with Laurie Voorman on WTPN-FM in Portland, Maine. She says she's pretty much of a Democrat, and knows little about Libertarians — but she becomes intrigued when she hears what we want. She says, kiddingly, "You're not as wacko as I've heard," and goes on to agree with a lot of what I say.

Then I have a 20-minute taped interview with Jacolyn Jones Ford at WUTK-FM, the campus station at the University of Tennessee in Knoxville. She asks a lot of pertinent questions, and I get to cover everything I want to say. After the interview, she says she voted for me in 1996 and plans to do so again this year, and so she was especially eager to do this interview.

In the afternoon I'm on for 40 minutes with Glenn Klein at WTAN in Tampa. He's a Libertarian who does a terrific job as a talk-show host, entertaining and explaining the benefits of liberty. Again, we push the importance of voting Libertarian this year. Glenn tells me he's a body-builder and the latest issue of Muscle Media contains an article that's an excerpt from my book How I Found Freedom in an Unfree World. Imagine: Harry Browne in a body-builder magazine.

Later I have a phone interview with Ethan of the Daily Vidette, the campus newspaper at Illinois State University. We cover all the basics, including why people should vote Libertarian.

In the evening I'm on for an hour with Susan Bray on WWDB-FM in Philadelphia. She announces on the air that she's been voting Libertarian since 1980, and will vote for me this year. We have a good discussion of the issues and why voting Libertarian is important.

Friday, October 20, 2000 — New York City & Washington

After a good night's sleep, the day begins at 9:30 with a 10-minute interview with M.J. and B.J. on WFLZ-FM in Tampa Bay. They are two morning comedians covering the western Florida area. They respond well to my message of wanting them to be free. We talk about what happens when you endorse big government by voting for a Republican or Democrat. They are very cordial, abandoning their jokes after the first minute or so.

Then it's 35 minutes with Larry Lanoue on WSUB in New London, Connecticut. He is very sympathetic — obviously a Constitutionalist who also likes Howard Phillips and Pat Buchanan, and who wishes we'd all get together. The callers are all sympathetic as well, and the show gives me an opportunity to push the importance of voting Libertarian.

In the afternoon I go to a midtown TV studio for a taping of History Center on the History Channel TV network. It is a half-hour show, hosted by Steve Gillon. The other guests are John Anderson, who ran for President as an independent in 1980 (and somehow got on all 50 state ballots) and David McReynolds, the Socialist Party presidential candidate.

This episode is a discussion of problems facing third parties and third-party candidates. But I get the opportunity to press my issues. Especially valuable is the last segment, when the host invites each of us to make the 90-second closing statement he would have made had he been in the Bush-Gore debates. I use my time to emphasize that voting Republican or Democrat is giving up, while voting Libertarian helps make it more likely you'll get smaller government in the future.

The History Channel has provided a car for us, which now rushes Steve and me to LaGuardia airport to catch a plane to Washington, D.C. We arrive about 3 minutes too late to catch the flight but we're rebooked for another flight an hour later.

At the Washington airport, we're met by Perry Willis, Jennifer Willis, and Stephanie Yanik. We then try to hurry through bad Friday-evening traffic to the Ronald Reagan building in downtown Washington. When we get to the building we go through basements, corridors, and hallways to get to the scene of the Judicial Watch third-party debate. This building must have cost a billion dollars or more. When we finally arrive at the debate scene, Laura Carno, Robert Flohr, and Jim Babka are there to meet us.

This debate is the one that Al Gore originally agreed to attend but now has withdrawn from. George Bush never did accept the invitation. With Gore and Bush both out of it, Pat Buchanan reneged on his acceptance and Ralph Nader doesn't show up for anything. So that leaves just Howard Phillips, John Hagelin, and me.

I have said from the outset that I'll debate anyone — above or below me on the ladder — as long as the debate is carried on national television. And since C-SPAN is here to televise the debate, I'm glad I'm here. (The debate isn't being carried live, but will be shown on Sunday.)

The moderator is Jim Bohannon, a liberal talk-show host. The questioners are Blanquita Collum, a talk-show host on the Radio America network; Paul Rodriquez of Insight Magazine; Joseph Farah, publisher of WorldNetDaily; and Armstrong Williams and Ellen Ratner of America's Voice Television.

I believe the debate goes very well. I have the opportunity to make several impassioned speeches.

When Howard Phillips makes a stirring diatribe saying he'll order U.S. attorneys to close down all the abortion clinics and arrest abortionists for murder, he gets a standing ovation from some of the audience. When the noise dies down, I say, "Well, there goes federalism. Is Howard going to send U.S. attorneys out to enforce murder laws, robbery laws, and other laws that are no business of the federal government?" I then go on to reiterate a point I've made several times during the debate — that government never delivers what you want. If you want to end abortions, you're going to have to find a more satisfying way than by depending on government.

After the debate, several people approach me to say that they found themselves looking at government in a new way as a result of my statements.

Saturday, October 21, 2000 — Washington, D.C. & Macon, Georgia

I'm up early, so that Jim Babka and Laura Carno can take me to C-SPAN for the Washington Journal. I have an entire hour for an interview with George Hager. It goes very well. We take a lot of calls — 15 or so — giving me an opportunity to keep coming back to the importance of voting Libertarian if you want to get smaller government.

From C-SPAN, Jim and Laura take me to the airport, where I meet up with Steve Willis. We catch a plane for Atlanta, where we'll meet Michael Cloud.

At the Atlanta airport there are about 30 Libertarians to greet us with signs and banners. It's a wonderful welcome. Steve gets a rental car, and we join about a dozen cars of Libertarians to drive to Macon in a convoy for today's rally.

The trip takes about 90 minutes. When we arrive at the auditorium in Macon, the program is already in progress. Local Libertarian candidates have been speaking. When it's our turn, Michael opens the proceedings. There are around 200 people present, over half of which are at their first Libertarian event.

My speech goes well and the audience is very enthusiastic. The fund-raising is a bit below par, but we're glad to be there in Macon for the first time. There are reporters from two TV stations present, as well as two print reporters.

Steve and I drive back to Atlanta — stopping along the way to eat at a Denny's — the Official Dine-and-Dash restaurant of the Browne for President campaign. We arrive at the Atlanta airport in the early evening and eventually board a plane to return to Washington, D.C.

We arrive in Washington at 11:30pm. Steve heads for home and I take a taxi to my hotel in Rosslyn. I get to bed around 1:30am.

I've found that I've lost all track of time during the past few weeks. Someone mentions a recent event on the campaign trail and I can't remember whether it was a day ago, a week ago, or a month ago. Some events that seemed to have happened some time back may actually have occurred yesterday or the day before.

I also find that time seems almost frozen lately. For a long time I had mixed emotions about the time remaining until election day. I wanted the election to be as far away as possible, in order to give us time to implement additional tactics and projects — but at the same time I was looking forward to the end of the campaign and the resumption of my normal life.

Now it is too late to implement much of anything new, and so I can't help but look forward to the conclusion. But time seems to be standing almost still. It seems like months ago that I realized we had only four weeks left, and here we are still with over two weeks to go.

Sunday, October 22, 2000 — Washington, D.C.

Today the Santa Barbara News Press ran an excellent article by Randy Alcorn entitled "Tired of gray in presidential models? Try Browne." It presents all our arguments for voting for freedom, rather than choosing between what Alcorn calls the "dull gray" models available from the two major parties.

Today the Austin American-Statesman runs a very nice staff article on my candidacy, listing my proposals very objectively. The paper also runs an article on Nader, Buchanan, and Browne — again listing my proposals in a good light.

I get up at 7am. Steve and Jim Babka pick me up at 8am to take me to Meet the Press. Unfortunately, today a marathon race is being run in the Washington area, and so it's difficult to find an open path to the studio in downtown Washington.

We take a very round-about way. We're supposed to be at the studio by 8:30, as the show begins at 9 (although I probably won't be on the air until 9:30). About 8:40, the producer calls Jim on his cell phone to find out where we are. It turns out we're closer than we thought, and we arrive at the studio a few minutes later.

But, of course, it's "hurry up and wait" (as we used to say in the Army). We're ushered into the Green Room. The first half of the show will have William Bennett and Jesse Jackson arguing about the Gore-Bush campaign. I meet them, and they go out to the set to argue for a half-hour about the same stupid things that Gore and Bush argued about in their debates. Is Texas a slum? Does Al Gore lie a lot? Is the Pope a Catholic?

You probably remember the campaign we inflicted upon Meet the Press over their excluding me from their "Third Party Debate," having only Ralph Nader and Pat Buchanan on the show. We immobilized the show's voice-mail and email system with thousands of phone calls and emails.

On top of that, a week ago Tim Russert was on C-SPAN's Washington Journal. During the show, Brian Lamb mentioned that C-SPAN had received over 150 emails from viewers wanting to ask Tim Russert why he didn't have me on his show. He gave the usual lame explanation that they couldn't have all 255 registered presidential candidates on, and so they focused on the two with the most support. Then a caller pointed out that only seven candidates were on enough state ballots to win, and that I had as much support as Buchanan does.

Apparently, the powers-that-be decided to throw in the towel — sort of. Two days later, the producer called Jim Babka and invited me on the show. But instead of having a half-hour to myself, as Nader and Buchanan have each had during the campaign, and instead of being on with Nader and/or Buchanan, I would be on with Howard Phillips and John Hagelin. This allows Meet the Press to say they've given me a platform, while at the same time making the point that I'm in the bottom tier of candidates — making their decision to have Buchanan and Nader on alone seem justified.

So here I am. Although I've done two debates with Hagelin and Phillips this year, this is the first show that's treated me as one of three lower-level candidates — something that happened regularly in 1996.

The show itself goes okay. I don't feel I'm completely fluent in the English language today. I do manage to turn some questions to my points — why voting Republican/Democratic is giving up, that I'm the only candidate that believes you can run your own life, and the big issues I always stress. I would give myself a B+ for content and a C+ for delivery. (While watching Bennett and Jackson ahead of my segment, I mentally gave each of them a D.)

Having just listened on Friday evening to John Hagelin droning on about "proven solutions to national problems," listening to all that again doesn't set too well with me. But this is the price of representing a growing party. I look forward to the day when our candidate doesn't have to pay such a price.

When the show ends, for some reason all four of us remain seated at the table on the set. A waiter brings in orange juice and several selections of food. Russert starts eating and there's some small talk. I decide to light into Russert, asking him "So why didn't you have me on with Nader and Buchanan — knowing that I had as much support as Buchanan?"

In the give and take that follows, I get the expected responses from Russert: "You're here now, aren't you?" "We can't have five guests on at once." (Courtesy restrains me from saying that he knows and I know that Phillips and Hagelin don't count.) "I'm the only Sunday host who's given any attention to third parties." And so on.

I say he's overlooking the one authentic man-bites-dog story of this campaign. A celebrity candidate, Pat Buchanan, has received $16 million in taxpayer money and wide press coverage, while a complete unknown who turned down federal money and has about 1/50 the press coverage is running even with him in the polls. Isn't that news? Russert says it is, and that's why I'm here. (It isn't why I'm here; if it were, he would have said something about it on the air.)

Finally, I ask him why he doesn't point out publicly that the only reason America seems to be a two-party country is because the two parties in power have maintained that power by using the force of government to impose ballot-access laws, limit campaign donations, raid the government treasury to run their campaigns, and exempt the Debate Commission from campaign and income-tax laws so it can promote the politics of the two main parties. Russert agrees whole-heartedly but doesn't answer my question as to why he never points this out on the air.

I tell him that I bear no hard feelings but that I'm baffled as to how Meet the Press makes its decisions regarding what is news.

A little later in the day, Stephanie Yanik takes Steve and me to the Washington National Airport (a.k.a. Ronald Reagan Airport) to catch a flight to Louisville. I've written before about the government airports whose facilities are overly congested because they're so far behind the demand for air travel. But at least today we'll be flying out of a brand new, up-to-date terminal at the Washington airport.

We arrive at the airport to find a very long line of people waiting to check their luggage with the curbside skycaps. I go inside to see whether the lines are shorter at the ticket counter. Alas, the lines there are over twice as long.

We finally get to the front of the curbside line. But when the skycap enters our names in the computer, we're told we have been selected "at random" to go through special security procedures. This means our bags must go through an X-ray machine inside the terminal, and our bags must be earmarked and kept off the plane until the airline verifies that we have boarded the plane (in case we're trying to plant a bomb on the plane).

Although passengers are supposedly selected "at random" for this procedure, lately it seems to be happening to us quite frequently. Apparently it is because so many of our flights are booked just a day or two in advance. This supposedly fits the profile of a bomb-planter (just as you fit the profile of a money courier if you deplane from the flight first — or last — or in the middle).

After it's been decided that we aren't terrorists, we head for the gate. The concourse is overflowing with people. Andrew Galambos once said that a traffic jam is a collision between the abundance of cars built by free enterprise and the limited roads built by government. We seem to have a similar situation with airports.

Our flight to Louisville doesn't have a regular gate. We have to take a bus from the terminal to the area where the plane is waiting on the tarmac. But the bus can't go now, because a helicopter is due to take off nearby with an emergency medical patient. However, nothing happens — either with the helicopter or the bus.

Eventually the bus moves anyway, even though the helicopter hasn't taken off. We make it to the plane — a small one, very claustrophobic. And we're off to Louisville.

What a good weekend — with four national TV appearances. We didn't have weekends like this in 1996. Our press staff has done an admirable job. And all the TV interviews seemed to go well.

When I get into my Louisville hotel room, I turn on the television and see Friday's third-party debate on C-SPAN. It seems to go as well as it did at the time Friday evening. But when I give my impassioned closing statement — telling people why they must vote only for smaller government — the screen shows my name as "John Hagelin, Natural Law Party presidential candidate."

The Gods must be crazy.

Or angry.

Monday, October 23, 2000 — Louisville

At 9:30am, I have a one-hour interview with Dimitri Vassillaros at WWVA in Wheeling, West Virginia. He begins by saying, "I'm a Libertarian, I'm voting Libertarian, and I urge everyone to vote Libertarian." The first part of the discussion is centered mostly on the lack of press coverage for Libertarians. But we finally get more to the issues and the importance of voting Libertarian.

Several last-minute Louisville interviews are arranged. We drive to Channel 11 for a brief soundbite plugging tonight's event. Then we return to the hotel and I have a 5-minute interview with Jesse Malone on WFPL-FM, the local NPR station. Both plug the evening's event.

Then I'm on the phone for a radio interview with Jim Dexter on KTKK in Salt Lake City. Also on is a local Libertarian candidate whose name I don't catch. We cover all the basics and take some calls.

Pamela arrives at the hotel. She has driven up to Louisville from Nashville, so we can have a day together.

Or at least be in the same room, since it will be a busy day. I have an interview in front of the hotel with Tony Hyatt of WAVE-TV, Channel 3. We talk for about 5 minutes, and I get to plug tonight's event.

Then Steve, Pamela, and I drive downtown to WHAS, where I have two interviews. the first is ten minutes of soundbites with Caleb Browne of the Kentucky News Network, which feeds news items to radio stations around the state. The second interview is 15 minutes in-studio with Terry Meiners of WHAS. Although he offers no opinions during the interview, off the air he seems very supportive of Libertarians. The interview goes well and we learn later that it brought several extra people to the evening's event.

The evening rally draws about a hundred people, 60-70% of whom appear to be brand new. The fund-raising is below average — most likely because of the high percentage of new people. Butch John of the Louisville Courier-Journal is there and interviews me before the program begins.

This afternoon CNN's Talk Back Live! show debated the relative merits of the Gore and Bush tax plans. However, the show ended by displaying an email from a viewer who said the only decent tax plan was that of Libertarian presidential candidate Harry Browne — who wants to make government so small we don't need an income tax at all.

Tuesday, October 24, 2000 — Baltimore

Steve, Michael, and I fly (uneventfully) to Baltimore from Louisville. Pamela drives back to Nashville.

We check into the Hyatt Regency by the harbor. For a change, my room has a beautiful view — a wonderful panorama of the waterfront.

After we arrive I have a 20-minute interview with Glen Klein on KTAN in Tampa Bay. He has made it clear that he's voting for me, and he spends a good part of the interview urging his listeners to do the same. He's a very entertaining host, and is undoubtedly doing us a lot of good.

Then it's close to a whole hour with Joe Hueter at KBOI in Boise, Idaho. Joe is very supportive, the interview goes very well, and all the callers are very friendly to our positions.

Later I have an hour with Reggie Rivers at KHOW in Denver. This is the first time I've been on his show, and it moves along nicely. He gives no opinions on what I say, but I have the opportunity to cover everything I want. We take a lot of calls. None are hostile, but some are unsure about some areas of Libertarian positions.

(According to Doug Scribner, immediately after my interview is over, Reggie Rivers says on the air that he wishes he could vote for me, but that he's already cast an absentee ballot for Al Gore. Another station host enters Reggie's studio and asks, "Are you the same guy who said earlier that Harry was too ‘far out' and you wouldn't vote for him?" Reggie acknowledges that he has much more in common with the LP than with other parties. The other host says he's 35 and has never voted before, but he's excited about the LP and will be voting for me.)

Then it's a half-hour with Charles Goyette on KFYI in Phoenix. Charles begins by saying he's not sure who he'll vote for but that he's positive he won't be voting for Harry Browne. I ask him why not, and then he reminds me that I'm not on the ballot in Arizona. We discuss that briefly and then go on with the show. It's obvious that he wishes he could vote for me.

(In the Journal form September 27, I mentioned that Peter Orvetti interviewed me for Web White & Blue. That was incorrect; the interview was for Peter's online political publication, Orvetti.com.)

Today the San Francisco Examiner ran an article by Scott Winokur that begins, "What can you say about former Lafayette resident Harry Browne, the Libertarian Party's candidate for president, except that he's a likable fellow with terrible ideas that would send this country hurtling backward 200 years?" It goes on from there, attempting to make me look like a loony. (On Friday, the Examiner will run four letters criticizing the article and supporting me — from Gerald T. Cullen, Jerry Pico, Stephen J. Holly, and Jim Lesczynski.)

Wednesday, October 25, 2000 — Baltimore

The day begins with an interview with Jack Murphy at WKZL-FM in Greensboro, North Carolina. He is friendly and genial, as this is a morning drive-time show. He challenges some of my positions, but is generally sympathetic.

Then I have a speech before the Maryland TrainingServer User's Group, arranged by Libertarian Ted Bayer. I speak to about 150 people for a half-hour or so on the subject "The Government's Role in E-Training." I begin by saying, "Our subject is the government's proper role in e-training. There is no proper role for the government in e-training. And now I'd like to open up the meeting to questions." Of course, I didn't end my speech there. I went on to compare advancements in the free-market computer industry with the downhill slide in government-run education. When the question period arrives, there are two critics who speak up for big government. The rest of the audience seems pleased with my presentation.

In the afternoon I have a 30-minute interview with Zoh Hieronimus. She is an LP member with a popular show on WCBM in Baltimore. We spend a good part of the interview bearing down on the wasted-vote issue — pointing out that you not only waste your vote when you give it to Republicans or Democrats, it's actually self-destructive. You're encouraging the very opposite of what you want.

Then it's a 30-minute interview in the hotel room with Jay Apperson of the Baltimore Sun, writing an article on the campaign for tomorrow's paper. He attended the noon speech, and intends to be at the event here tonight. We talk mostly about the difficulties of overcoming the legal problems Republicans and Democrats put in the way of third parties.

Later I have a 30-minute interview with Tim Constadine at WGUF-FM in Naples, Florida. He is very sympathetic to all our positions, as are most of the callers. The wasted-vote issue becomes very important, and so I bear down on that.

After that I have a 30-minute interview in the hotel room with Lou Panos, a gracious, 75-year-old gentleman from Patuxent Publishing, which owns a string of newspapers in Maryland. I have no idea what he'll write but he scrupulously takes down the things I say.

My last interview is by phone with Maria Recio of the Knight Ridder News Service. She is very impressed with the showing that we've made and with the fact that we're doing as well as Pat Buchanan — despite having far less money, less name recognition, and less press coverage. She says her article will appear within the next week.

Our evening event goes very well. There are about 130 people present, of which at least 50% are first-timers. The fund-raising goes very well. Steve Willis has driven home to the Washington area to spend an evening with his wife, and so Laura Carno and Jim Babka have driven to Baltimore to fill in for him at the event.

Today the Wall Street Journal published my article "Do You Want Smaller Government?" on its editorial page. It also published an article by Ralph Nader. It offered the same privilege to Pat Buchanan but he declined it. (My article will be reprinted on www.LewRockwell.com tomorrow. The link may still be alive at http://opinionjournal.com/extra/?id=65000469.)

Today we received an email from Bob Loop of Wichita. He said,

I have gotten 10 people to vote for Harry. I know its not a lot but every little bit helps. Harry is correct that his voters come from all walks of life. Two of the converts were Republicans, two Democrats, two were Green, one Independent, and the last three were non-voting punk rockers (like myself). The punkers are the most excited and are telling everyone they know about Harry and his ideas. I think the more non-voters we reach, the stronger our message becomes. Keep speaking the truth Harry, it can't be ignored forever.

Brit Hume of Fox TV News ran our IRS ad on his political news show today. He trimmed the website address off the end of the ad, however.

Jack Dean reports that yesterday we had 31,585 different visitors to the website. Today the figure was 31,369. It wasn't very long ago that we broke 20,000 for the first time.

According to Joe Lolli, Grover Norquist of Americans for Tax Reform (a large conservative organization) said on the air this evening that "The Libertarian Party is 2½ times the size it was just four years ago. If I lived in one of those ‘firm and secure' states — the ones that neither Gore or Bush is fighting over — I'd vote for Harry Browne!" He apparently said this on Dave Ramsey's syndicated radio show that Joe heard on WTMA in Charleston, South Carolina.

Thursday, October 26, 2000 — Philadelphia

The day starts at 9am with a 20-minute interview with Pete Michaels and Tory Gates on WCOJ in Coatsville, a suburb of Philadelphia. The hosts apparently are unfamiliar with libertarian ideas, and so they give me free rein to talk about what the government has done to health care and education. I ask, "Does anyone listening to this show really believe that if Al Gore or George Bush is elected that in four years our schools will be safer, or your child will be learning more, or that the cost of education will go down?" At the end I get a chance to plug tonight's event and plead with listeners not to give up and vote Republican or Democratic.

Laura Carno drives Michael and me to Philadelphia. We stop to eat breakfast at Denny's — the Official Home-Cooking-Away-from-Home venue of the Browne for President campaign.

On the way I start an interview with Bill Steigerwald of the Pittsburgh Tribune-Review. However, the signal on my cell phone keeps fading and we postpone the rest of the interview until I get to the Philadelphia hotel. Once there, we resume the interview. At the end, he says he's been a libertarian for about 25 years and wishes me well. His article is to appear either this Sunday or the following Sunday. (In another article, published today, Bill refers to me as "the official presidential candidate of this column.")

In the car I also have an interview with Jill Balderas of Feature Story News, which is distributing a feature on third-party candidates to South African Broadcasting, and will also put the interview on the Public Newsroom page of the www.PublicInteractive.com website. However, we too get way-laid by a weak cell signal, and we have to finish the interview after I get to my hotel room.

The evening's event attracts about 150 people — an enthusiastic crowd, of which about 70% are new to Libertarian events. The fund-raising goes well, especially considering the large proportion of newcomers.

The Wisconsin Libertarian (the newsletter of the Wisconsin LP) reports that Richard Steuven of the Egan Brewing Company in DePere has renamed his Brown Ale beer Harry Browne Ale for the duration of the campaign. Next door to his brewery, a restaurant has included the following on its list of beers:

HARRY BROWNE ALE: Tired of the same old song from both sides of Big Government? Tired of handing over nearly half of your income in taxes, and getting virtually nothing in return? Then it's time to vote for a real change: the Libertarian Party. Presidential Candidate Harry Browne has a plan that will reduce the federal government to its constitutional limits, eliminate the federal income tax, and replace it with nothing, and generally get government off our backs. For more information, visit http://www.lp.org or call (800) 236-9236, or talk to your friendly neighborhood brewer at Egan's. Oh, about the beer . . . its our regular Nut Brown Ale renamed for the duration of the election season.

Today Llewellyn H. Rockwell, Jr. published an article on WorldNetDaily that includes the statement, "Harry Browne may not get the votes, but his radical platform represents mainstream thinking far more than conventional political opinion is willing to admit."

Friday, October 27, 2000 — Philadelphia

Jack Dean informs me that our LibertyWire subscriptions are now over 17,000.

A big line-up of interviews today — six before noon.

The first is at 8am — about 15 minutes with Larry Wachs and Eric von Hessler. I was on their show a couple of times during 1996 when they were in Los Angeles. Now they broadcast from WKLS-FM in Atlanta. Their show is for young people, with rock music and comedy. In 1996 they were both enthusiastic supporters of my campaign. Now, however, Larry has turned negative. He still wishes I would become President, but he sees no hope — and he's not voting. (He says it's because he's a felon, but it's never clear whether he's joking.) Larry also says the Libertarians can't win because they don't promise enough goodies for the voters — failing to recognize that the Republicans and Democrats have lost the power to promise anything significant, while Libertarians are offering to set people free from the income tax and Social Security. Eric is still a strong supporter.

Larry says that one vote can't possibly change the outcome of an election. I point out that this is a good reason to vote for what you really want — getting government out of your life — and that voting provides an emotional release, a chance to feel you've made a statement for what you want.

The next show is 10 minutes or so with Tim Right and Amy Sinclair at WMGX-FM in Portland, Maine. I've never spoken with them before, and I'm happy to discover that they are very supportive. They both seem to think Gore and Bush are no choices at all. They want to ask questions about my favorite movies and such, but it's easy to keep pulling the conversation back to the importance of voting Libertarian. Tim says he knew little about me until he looked at our website and discovered how much he agreed with us. Off the air after the interview, Tim shows further support and says he'll continue to plug the campaign.

Then it's an hour with Andy Johnson on WJGR in Jacksonville, Florida. Andy's attitude, as well as that of most of the callers, is that Al Gore and George Bush are generally worthless. All of the callers are supportive, although a couple are still on the fence about voting Libertarian; some of have just made the decision to vote Libertarian and call in to announce it.

In the studio with Andy is Doug Klippel, a Jacksonville Libertarian. He talks about the voter outreach the local Libertarians have done. He says they went to a George Bush rally and passed out Harry Browne brochures to the people standing in line, waiting to get in. Andy asks him if the Republicans resented this, but Doug says the people were very receptive — saying they'd seen me on television and agreed with a lot of what I propose.

Next it's a half-hour with Neal Boortz, the popular Libertarian talk-show host on WSB in Atlanta. He has been plugging our campaign tirelessly on his local and national shows. We talk about reaching young people, and why it's important to vote for what you want.

Immediately following, I'm on for 25 minutes with Ron Stewart on WDAY in Sioux Falls, South Dakota. He is supportive of every Libertarian position raised in the conversation — except perhaps on immigration. The callers seem more conservative than libertarian, but none of them wants to argue with me.

The final show of the morning is 25 minutes with John Stokes on KGEZ in Kallispell, Montana. Without saying he'll vote for me, he's very supportive. There are no callers, but we cover a lot of issues in a brief period. We both stress the fact that George Bush will win the state easily, so a vote for Bush or Gore has no meaning whatsoever. But a vote for Browne will count just as much as a vote from California or New York in helping us get the million votes that could make the press and public pay more attention to us in the future.

In the afternoon, I have a 45-minute interview with Herb Shaindlin on KFQD in Anchorage, Alaska. He's the first contentious host of the day. He sounds like an elderly, old-time Democrat. He says that if he'd been allowed to keep his Social Security tax and invest it himself, he wouldn't have put away a dime for his old age. I tell him he has my sympathy for his weaknesses, but that this is no excuse for locking responsible people into a financial swindle like Social Security.

I point out that politicians operate on a "worst case" basis. Because some people won't take care of their own retirements, all of us must be locked into a bankrupt scheme like Social Security. Because some people will abuse drugs, all of us must lose the protections of the Bill of Rights. Because some people will misuse guns, no one can will be allowed to have a gun to protect himself.

I then have a free hour — giving me the opportunity to go to a nearby mall and pick up a couple of gifts for Pamela's birthday tomorrow.

In the early evening, Steve, Michael, and I drive to Haverford to the home of Mrs. And Mrs. Jeffrey Yass for a private fund-raiser.

We get there early, and they've set aside a room for me — so that I can talk for an hour with Michael Reagan on his syndicated show. He has always been very good to me. But in the opening segment he seems obsessed with the question of why I would go through the travails of running for President when I have no chance to win. I can't get him off the subject. At the first commercial break, he comes on the line to say hello to me privately. I say, "I can see you've decided to vote for Bush." He asks why I think that. "Because you're treating me much differently from ever before. You're trying to make people think a vote for me is an exercise in futility." He doesn't confirm or deny my suspicion. But he does get off the futility kick for the rest of the show, and we have a good conversation.

The fund-raiser goes very well. There are about 30 people present. They walk in with checks in hand. We raise $28,000 — almost $1,000 per person. This is the sort of fund-raiser — private meetings where wealthy people invite their friends and business associates — I had hoped at the outset of the campaign that we would have far more frequently. One of the unfortunate failings of the campaign was that we just didn't have the manpower to arrange more of these.

Tomorrow Steve, Michael, and I will go our separate ways. I will fly home to spend Pamela's birthday with her (and also celebrate our 15th wedding anniversary, which actually is November 2nd, when we'll be apart). Sunday I'll get some work done at home, and be back on the road again on Monday.

Monday, October 30, 2000 — Indianapolis

After two days at home, celebrating Pamela's birthday and getting some paperwork done, I'm up today at 6:45 for two early shows. I'm not aware as yet that today may be one of the most frustrating days of the campaign.

The first is a half-hour interview with Laura LeBeau at WAAV in Wilmington, North Carolina. She says she's strongly against the Drug War, but otherwise is non-committal in her comments. She gives me every opportunity to state my views and to urge people to vote Libertarian.

The second interview I do as Pamela drives me to the airport. It's about 15 minutes with Mancow Muller at WKQX-FM in Chicago. He says that every time I'm on his show he thinks he should vote for me instead of Bush, but later wavers. At one point he launches into a tirade about Bill Clinton's recent statements that the Republicans have never apologized for impeaching him. He goes on and on about what a louse Clinton is. I say that Bill Clinton is the best thing that ever happened for the Republicans, because Clinton diverts everyone's attention from the fact that the Republicans are doing nothing to reduce government. Because of Clinton, the Republicans have the perfect excuse for their own failings. And all they have to do is point to Bill Clinton and you'll get mad enough to vote Republican. Meanwhile, government continues to get bigger, more expensive, more intrusive, and more oppressive. He agrees that I'm right.

I catch a prop plane from Nashville to Indianapolis. At the airport I'm greeted by a dozen Indiana Libertarians. Also there are cameramen and reporters from the local NBC and CBS TV stations. I have a very brief press conference on the spot, answering a half-dozen questions from the two reporters.

Mark Rutherford, the Indiana State Chair, and Brad Klopfenstein have done a good job of making the day worthwhile. They enticed the two reporters to the airport, and they've arranged other media for the day. In addition, they've already appeared on some shows themselves — plugging my coming to Indianapolis.

We then head into Indianapolis for a full day of media. In the car I get a call on my cell phone from a producer at the Fox News TV network, wanting to do a "pre-interview" for an interview on Fox News TV tonight. I didn't know I had such an interview, but I'm glad to hear of it. I ask what show it will be, and she tells me I'll be on with Bill O'Reilly on The O'Reilly Factor, a big show. (I was on it once before with guest host Michael Reagan.) This is a real coup, and it makes the day doubly attractive — as I'm already scheduled to be on Nightline tonight, although I'll have to share the spotlight with Howard Phillips and John Hagelin. The Fox producer asks me a number of questions about the campaign and seems especially pleased with my brief, sound-bite answers.

In the city, I have a 10-minute, in-studio interview with Steve Simpson at WIBC. Although the time is brief, we cover a lot of ground.

We then go to eat lunch at the Press Club, where we're joined by John Fritze of the Indianapolis Star, the leading daily. He asks questions while I eat. He says the newspaper will have someone at tonight's event.

Then Steve Willis, Michael Cloud, and I check in at our hotel. I have to spend an hour on the phone with the computer company, as my laptop stopped working again Saturday morning on my way home to Nashville. The company finally agrees to replace the computer, and will send a technician and computer to me in Portland tomorrow. However, since I don't know where I'll be staying in Portland tomorrow, the support technician is to call me back in an hour to get the address to which to send the replacement computer.

I then have a half-hour phone interview with Stan Solomon at WZL in Indianapolis. He's always been very friendly to Libertarians, although he's non-committal about his voting intentions. I point out that Indiana is solidly for Bush and so your vote for Gore or Bush will have no effect on the outcome, while a Libertarian vote will help us get the million votes we need to get the attention of the press and the public.

Then it's a short interview in the lobby of the hotel with Anthony Swinger of Metro Source Radio News — a service providing news to Indiana radio stations. We go through all the usual topics — the issues, why you should vote Libertarian, and what it's like to run for President.

At 4:50pm, a car arrives to take Steve and me to the ABC-TV station in Indianapolis for a taping of Nightline.

It's now a half-hour past the time I was supposed to hear from the computer company, and so I call back using my cell phone in the car. I, of course, get a different support technician — and he finds no record in the company's database of my earlier conversation with the other support technician. This one says the computer is out of warranty and couldn't possibly be replaced at this late date. I go round and round with him, and he advises me to wait for the first technician to call back as scheduled (which never happens). Another day of computer work lost.

I go into the TV studio for the Nightline interview. I will be appearing "remote" from Indianapolis, John Hagelin will be on from Seattle, Howard Phillips from South Carolina, and host Chris Bury will be in New York. I'm outfitted with a lapel mike and an earpiece — over which the producer explains that we'll be on for one segment of about 7 minutes, minus 30-60 seconds for Chris Bury's introductory statement. That means I'll have about 2 minutes.

And even though I'm even with Pat Buchanan in the polls today (each at 1.0%), I'm about to be wedged into a segment with two candidates who have penetrated the public consciousness far less than I have (in fact, each is at 0.1% in the Rasmussen Poll). I don't mind the idea of appearing in a full-fledged debate on national TV with Phillips and Hagelin, where I can make extended statements and let the world know what we're offering. But to squeeze in a few sentences in what could easily be labeled "The Loser Segment" seems to me to be both demeaning and a waste of time.

To add insult to injury, there's a technical problem in New York — and I have to sit here and wait. Howard, John, and I engage in chit-chat as the minutes pass. On Meet the Press last week, John Hagelin said his party had almost a thousand candidates running nationwide. I ask him how he arrived at that figure. It turns out there are only about 200 Natural Law Party candidates, the rest are from the Independent Party of New York and other parties with whom Hagelin hopes to create a coalition. And, even then, the total is far less than a thousand.

The wait goes on, and it's now getting close to the time I should be at the Fox station for the O'Reilly interview. I'm beginning to think I should forego my 2 minutes of fame with Hagelin and Phillips in favor of 7 minutes of combat with Bill O'Reilly.

Suddenly I hear Chris Bury's voice in my earpiece, as he introduces the segment. Then he says, "Gentlemen, we'll get to your platforms in a moment, but first I'd like to get a sense from each of you of what it's like to be a third-party presidential candidate on the road, without an entourage, without any standing in the polls, without any recognition." Oh Lord, half the time will be wasted talking about what losers we are.

He starts with Howard Phillips, who goes on and on about the reception he's getting as the only candidate who is solidly pro-life, pro-Constitution, and so on. Bury tries to interrupt him, but no one interrupts Howard. Finally, Bury calls a halt to the taping and says we'll start over. He tells Howard to stick to the question at hand, that we'll get to his platform later. Another couple of minutes have been wasted and I'm still not at Fox for the O'Reilly show.

We begin again — and again with Howard. When they get to me, I point out that I'm doing as well in the polls as Buchanan, but I don't make as much out of my one-minute answer as I should. The interview goes on from there, with very little accomplished. I notice, however, that the segment lasts longer than the scheduled 7 minutes.

Finally it's over — and Steve and I race out of the studio to a second car and driver waiting to take us to Fox. We get to the Fox station a block or two down the street, but the front door is locked and we can't get in. Steve calls the producer in New York and we discover that we're supposed to be at a different station. Fortunately, it's only a half-block away, and someone is waiting for us at the door.

I rush into the studio, get a mike and an earpiece, and we begin the interview almost immediately — just after the producer tells me that we'll be covering Social Security and the Drug War. What happened to the pre-interview questions about my campaign?

We cover Social Security quickly and then turn to the Drug War. As usual, Bill O'Reilly is overbearing — never letting me finish two complete sentences in a row. He says that 70% of child abuse involves drug use. I have no idea what he's talking about, as I've never heard such a statistic. There's no point in arguing it with him, however, because I have no statistics at hand with which to refute him. Whatever I say, he keeps coming back to child abuse. Finally, I say, "Well, 100% of drunk-driving involves a car. So should we outlaw all cars?" He says, "Of course not," as though I've said something irrelevant to his child-abuse point.

Suddenly, the interview is over. He thanks me for being on. I say, "Thank you. And if you want the real story on drugs and other issues — rather than this comic-book version — come to my website at HarryBrowne.org." The comic-book reference apparently catches him off guard, and he says, "Er, yes, go to his website."

Two big national TV programs, and I don't feel I have much to show for either of them. (Later in the evening, I see the Nightline interview and discover that they've edited it — cutting off each of the three guests in mid-thought. The only lines I was satisfied with seem to have landed on the cutting-room floor.)

(Many Libertarians have complimented me on giving as good as I got with O'Reilly. But the problem is that I never turned the conversation to the current campaign. The interview could have taken place in 1998 or 2001, as it didn't have anything to do with voting Libertarian — possibly intentionally on O'Reilly's part.)

From the TV studio, Steve and I drive to the hotel for the evening's event. It's a big evening. About 200 people are present — 40-50% of whom identify themselves as attending their first Libertarian event. The fund-raising is below average for the size of the audience, but the crowd is quite enthusiastic.

Tuesday, October 31, 2000 — Portland, Oregon

Steve, Michael, and I are each up early to catch a plane to Portland. When we arrive at the airport I have a half-hour interview with Gene Roberts at WWCN in Estero, Florida. He is quite friendly and sympathetic, but he wants to dwell too long on the question of whether the American people really want what Libertarians are offering.

We get on the plane and take off for Minneapolis (where we'll change planes for Portland). I immediately go to sleep — and, for once on a plane, it's a deep sleep. I awaken a little later, aware that the plane is descending. It turns out that something's wrong with the plane and we're returning to Indianapolis. We land, and take off again about 30 minutes later. Finally, we reach Minneapolis.

While there, I have a 30-minute interview on my cell phone with Tom Fudge at KPBS-FM, an NPR station in San Diego. He is apparently a liberal, and we get bogged down talking about issues rather than the campaign itself. My cell phone keeps losing its signal and I have to call him back three times.

Fudge says we Libertarians seem to think we're the intellectual heirs to the Founding Fathers. I say we're a lot closer to them than the other parties are. I also point out that the passage of the income tax amendment gave the politicians the resources necessary to convert the government from its original conception to an all-purpose government that can meddle in our lives.

A caller says I seem to be nostalgic for a time of slavery and other inequalities, and asks whether I would do away with Affirmative Action and the Civil Rights Acts. I say I'm not nostalgic for any time, but that the real issue is whether we're going to live in a free time — or whether we're going to be owned by people like Al Gore and George Bush, who can decide how much of our earnings they're entitled to, who can have free access to snoop in our bank accounts and email, who can regulate the size of our toilets and force us into swindles like Social Security.

The interview is cut short prematurely by another failure of the cell-phone signal. I haven't given out my website or any reasons to vote Libertarian.

We get on the plane for the 4-hour flight to Portland. We've accumulated enough Frequent Flyer miles for all three of us to fly first-class, which we try to do on transcontinental flights but too often don't succeed. The trip is uneventful.

Upon arriving in Portland we rent a car and head for the hotel. In the car, I call the computer company to resume my struggle to get my laptop replaced. I'm fortunate in connecting with a sympathetic technician. I'll wind up talking with him off and on throughout the day. He gets authorization for a replacement computer. But since the model I have is no longer produced, it will have to be custom-made, requiring 30-60 days. That obviously won't do. So the final decision is that they'll fix it again — this time replacing virtually every part in the computer. And it will be done on Thursday. If that doesn't fix it for good, the authorization for a replacement will still stand — and I can wait on the replacement until after the campaign is over.

The lack of a functioning computer is an enormous drawback. I can't send and receive email with the campaign staff. I can't write articles for WorldNetDaily and other venues. I can't write this Journal. I have no access to a tremendous amount of reference information locked inside my non-working computer. That material is also in my desktop computer at home, but that doesn't help me on the road.

Interspersed with my conversations with the computer company, I have a number of interviews. The first is with Mark Coll, a gun-rights activist on KHNC in Denver. We talk about more than just gun rights, however. And I point out that you can't trust people like George Bush or Al Gore to restore your right to bear arms for two reasons. First, they've already made it clear that the government has a right to restrict gun ownership — differing only on the specific restrictions. Second, they don't believe in any of the rest of the Bill of Rights, and so they can't be trusted to guard any of your freedoms.

I then have an Internet "chat" on America Online. The host relays questions to me over the phone, and I reply orally — as a typist puts my remarks online. This time I have a very speedy typist, and it's very easy for me to provide succinct, punchy soundbite answers.

In the early evening I have an hour on the air with Bill Manders at KMJ in Fresno. He's a genial host and we get along well. He appears to be quite libertarian but unwilling to call himself such. We get calls from supporters and also from people questioning my views — but everyone is civil and respectful. I keep pushing the importance of voting Libertarian. At the end of the hour, there are still calls backed up that we didn't get to. I tell him he's libertarian enough to take care of the rest of the callers.

Later in the evening I have a half-hour conversation with Brian Wilson at KSFO in San Francisco. Brian is a forthright Libertarian who is quite popular in the Bay Area. He touts Libertarian candidates at every turn. The show goes quite well.

Wednesday, November 1, 2000 — Portland

The day begins at 7:35am with a 10-minute interview with Paul Hansen on KVAN in nearby Vancouver, Washington. The interview goes well. I'm able to plug tonight's event, and we cover the main issues. He asks why Ralph Nader has received so much attention. I say because he's the darling of the political pundits — Mr. Big Government himself. And yet, despite so much press attention, he's not very far ahead of me in the polls.

The second interview catches me by surprise a bit. Elisa Sonneland at KTSA in San Antonio begins the interview by telling her listeners how disgusted she is with the two main presidential candidates — who won't say anything that isn't carefully scripted, who have no ideas of their own, who pander to every conceivable group with promises they can't possibly keep. She goes on to say that hope returns to her when she hears Harry Browne — speaking from the heart, speaking in plain language, speaking on behalf of people who want to be free of government. I'm quite taken aback by this tribute. In the short 20-minute interview, we take several questions from callers, and I get the opportunity to bear down on the reasons for voting Libertarian.

Next is a 5-minute interview with Jim Fagin at KFAB in Omaha. He says he has referred flippantly to the Libertarians as the "Only the strong will survive" party. I point out that this is what we have now — as only the strong can influence government and use government to get what they want. What we need is a government so small that it can't be used for the strong to impose their way on the weak.

I then have a 20-minute conversation with Jeff Mays of the Oregonian, Portland's major daily newspaper. He doesn't seem too excited about the idea that most people would like to have smaller government. He does recognize the logic in my preferring to talk directly to voters through talk radio and TV, rather than having my thoughts rewritten by print reporters and journalists.

After that I have a 40-minute interview with Lars Larson at KXL in Portland. I had been warned that he's a conservative who strongly supports George Bush. However, he is very friendly and gives me every opportunity to state my views. We take a number of calls, and I use as many as I can to push the importance of voting Libertarian. Larson doesn't seem eager to contradict me.

Next is a brief conversation with Matt Millhouse, the News Director at WYBR, a music station for young people in Big Rapids, Michigan. He is taping the presidential candidates giving 30-second answers to 10 questions, to be played the night before the election. The questions are all useful to me, and I'm able to give succinct, punchy answers directed at young people.

I have a phone interview with Amy Green of the Associated Press in Nashville. She asks a number of questions that, frankly, I find tiresome — how I decided to run for president, what it's like to be a third-party candidate, and so on. In any interview, I can convert such a question into a topic of my choosing. But while my answer goes directly to the audience in a radio or TV interview, it's unlikely that a print reporter will publish my answer if it isn't what the reporter wanted to hear. So I feel a great sense of futility answering a series of questions that don't have anything to do with why someone should vote Libertarian.

Next is a phone interview with Jack Mullen at WKLP in Keyser, West Virginia. This interview was scheduled for yesterday. But in yesterday's chaos, it got lost. But Jack is a Libertarian — and a patient one at that. So today we tape a series of soundbites to go into newscasts over the weekend. This is a music station for young people, and so I'm grateful for the opportunity. The interview goes well, as I'm able to provide a series of short answers to questions.

Steve and I drive to Vancouver, Washington, just over the state border from Portland. There we go to the Washington State Police station, where we meet Ryan L'Epicier of AT&T Cable Services. In front of the police station we videotape an interview to be broadcast three times this evening on a news cable channel. (The police station doesn't show up in the picture; it's just a convenient outdoor location at which to meet the camera crew.) The questions are relevant and so the interview goes well. It is now raining lightly, and it is cold and damp. I'm glad to run back to the car as soon as the interview ends.

From there we drive back into Portland for a 5-minute TV interview with Mary Tillotson (formerly a political reporter for CNN) at Northwest Cable News. She asks good questions and I give good answers. The interview ends a little sooner than I expected, so I interrupt her closing to give my website address.

Back at the hotel I have a one-hour interview with Joseph Machelli at KVOR in Colorado Springs, Colorado. He is quite friendly and provides best wishes for us to get a million votes this year. We take many, many calls — and all but one of them is supportive. A good part of the show deals with the question of whether to vote Libertarian. One caller says my answer has convinced him to vote Libertarian.

Then I have a 10-minute interview with our good libertarian friend Larry Elder — the popular talk-show host at KABC, Los Angeles. He begins by railing against Bill Maher, the host of Politically Incorrect, who calls himself a libertarian but has announced that he's voting for Ralph Nader. I point out that Jesse Ventura, who many people think is a libertarian, said on CNN's Inside Politics yesterday that he's leaning toward John Hagelin of the Natural Law Party — whom Ventura called "a smart man with a lot of good ideas."

Larry and I talk about the need to vote for what you really want — and not be stampeded into voting against someone. There will always be someone to vote against. So if you let the Republicans talk you into voting against Al Gore or let the Democrats talk you into voting against the Religious Right, you'll face the same kind of choices in 2004, 2008, and for the rest of your life — and you'll never vote for (or get) what you really want.

The evening's event attracts an audience of around 150, of whom about 30% are apparently at their first Libertarian event. Channel 12 has a camera crew there, and we have a brief interview before the event. More important, C-SPAN has a camera crew taping the entire event. I presume the show will run over the weekend. I feel very fluent and passionate, and I'm pleased that, of all my stump speeches, this is the one C-SPAN is taping. I don't understand at first why the speech runs longer than usual, but then I realize it's because it's interrupted so often by applause.

Thursday, November 2, 2000 — Portland & San Rafael, California

The day begins very early in Portland. Steve and I drive to a local TV station, arriving at 7am for a "remote" interview on CNN-FN, the financial network of CNN. The interview with Wanda Scheflet is only 5 minutes, but I'm able to get in all the points I want to make.

Back at the hotel I receive a call from a computer technician in Nashville. The replacement parts for my laptop were sent to Nashville by mistake, instead of to California. More phone calls with the computer company — Dell — are necessary. Now there's no way to get the parts to California today or before I leave California tomorrow morning. It is finally arranged that I will ship the computer home by overnight service, and the replacement parts will be installed at my office tomorrow. I will get the computer when I return home tomorrow night. That will make seven full days without the computer.

Next I have a 5-minute taped interview with Dan Raviv on CBS Radio. I think this is the third interview I've had this year with CBS Radio. It goes well, and I get plenty of opportunities to stress the importance of voting Libertarian.

Then I deliver a 3-minute statement by phone to WYSO at Antioch University in Ohio. The rules are strict: deliver the statement in one take, no correction of mistakes, no starting over. I have several such statements in my computer — but, alas, my computer isn't working. So I wing it, and it goes surprisingly well. I use parts of my stump speech — pointing out that the most important question in politics today is "Do you want smaller government?," and going on from there to show that it's impossible to get smaller government by supporting people who are making government bigger.

Next it's back to the same TV station as earlier, for another remote interview on the same CNN-FN network. This time it's for the Business Unusual program. The good news is that we are taping two 6-minute segments for airing on Friday evening; the bad news is that I will be joined by Howard Phillips and John Hagelin. Once again, I feel it's demeaning to be lumped in with two candidates who have achieved far less than we have in this campaign.

Phillips is in Minneapolis, I'm in Portland, and Hagelin is to be in the New York studio with the host (a woman whose name I don't catch). But Hagelin hasn't arrived, and the producer decides to start without him. The interview begins and the host asks Phillips what his party stands for. Howard goes on and on — in his booming voice, talking about the Declaration of Independence and other scholarly concerns. He uses up about 4 minutes of the first 6-minute segment. The host finally interrupts him and then asks me the same question. I speak much more rapidly than Howard, and of course I talk directly to the viewer about the ways Libertarians want to improve his life. With my 2-minute presentation the first segment comes to a close and there's a commercial break.

Then the second segment begins with another question for Howard. He says he'll answer the question in a moment, but first he wants to point out something else. He goes on and on. The host tries — without success — to interrupt him. Finally, the host shouts over his voice and tells him to stop. She says that John Hagelin has arrived and so we'll start the second segment again. Howard asks whether he'll get another chance to speak, and is told he will. He says, "Good, because I didn't get much of a chance to speak in the first segment."

The second segment begins again. For the umpteenth time I hear John Hagelin talking about "taking back our stolen democracy" and "proven solutions to critically important national problems" and "building the most exciting third-party coalition in the nation's history." Then it's Howard again. I finally get a few seconds at the end of the segment.

As I leave the studio, I'm grateful that CNN-FN isn't shown on very many cable systems around the nation.

Michael, Steve, and I head for the airport. Once there I have a 15-minute interview with Bill Wozniak and Ray Hall at WJTM in Jamestown, New York. They are very much in tune with Libertarian ideas and especially the thought of limiting the federal government to just what's authorized in the Constitution.

We have an uneventful flight to San Francisco. But it takes forever (it seems) for Steve to get the rental car, and the drive through San Francisco to get to San Rafael takes another forever (it seems). In fact, it is about two hours from the time we get off the plane until we get to the hotel.

Upon arrival at the hotel, I have a phone interview with Spires and Krantz at WBT in Charlotte. They are very supportive, and Spires makes it plain that he's voting for me.

I take my laptop to a nearby postal service store for shipment by UPS to Nashville. In order to guarantee delivery by 8:30am tomorrow, I have to pay $146. Better that than take a chance that it will arrive too late for the computer technician to schedule the work for tomorrow.

In the evening we have a campaign rally at the hotel. The room is set up for about 150 people, but over 250 show up. The start of the program is delayed to set up additional chairs. Even then, there is Standing Room Only. The crowd is very enthusiastic. The fund-raising goes very well. As this is our last campaign rally, I'm particularly pleased that it was such a success.

Today the Jewish World Review published talk-show host Larry Elder's article "Why I'm Wasting My Vote," in which he tells why he's voting for me. The article is also reprinted on the WorldNetDaily and Town Hall websites..

Friday, November 3, 2000 — Going Home

At 8:30am I get a call from Debbie Greeson in my office, telling me that my laptop computer hasn't arrive as scheduled (it's now 10:30 in Nashville). A series of phone calls eventually elicits the information that the UPS plane had a malfunction. The computer will arrive later in the day, and the helpful computer technician rearranges his schedule to make sure the computer is fixed by the end of the day.

Michael has left for home on a very early flight, and now Steve and I head for the airport. We will fly together to St. Louis, from where he'll fly to Washington and I'll fly home to Nashville. When we arrive at the curbside check-in, we find that the FAA has ordered that there be no curbside luggage check-in for this flight; everyone must check his baggage at the ticket counter as a special security precaution. Needless to say, there's an enormous line at the counter. Fortunately, we were able to upgrade to first class relatively cheaply, and so our check-in is expedited.

Near the flight gate, I have a 15-minute taped interview with Rochelle Brenner at WRTI-FM, an NPR station in Philadelphia. The airport is so noisy that I have difficulty hearing her questions, but we finally make it through the interview. She asks whether I'm trying to influence the debate among the two major parties, and I say that I'm trying to help build a party that will be big enough, strong enough, and well-enough financed to elect a Libertarian president and a Libertarian Congress before the end of the decade.

We take off for St. Louis, and the flight is comfortable and otherwise uneventful — as is the flight from St. Louis to Nashville. Pamela meets me at the airport at 8pm and I'm happy to head home for two days. Unfortunately, I'm so behind on paperwork, I have to spend the rest of the evening working in my office.

There's a note awaiting me from the computer repairman who worked on my laptop. He says the computer is unrepairable and he's arranged with Dell to replace the computer entirely. So the final 10 days of the campaign I will have been without access to my laptop computer.

Today we had 27,043 different visitors to the website.

Tomorrow and Sunday I will be at home, before heading for New York for the final day of campaigning.

Saturday, November 4, 2000 — Nashville

I'm at home today and tomorrow, I have three phone interviews today. The first is with Mike Ferguson at KCWJ in Kansas City, Missouri. He's a Libertarian and poses questions that give me an opportunity to say everything I want to get across.

Then it's a conversation with Ed Schofield and Lou Wilson on KMAX in Spokane. They are at opposite ends of the right-left spectrum, but they are both very friendly — and they seem very satisfied with my answers to their questions.

In the early afternoon, an Associated Press photographer comes to my house to take a picture. There's a light drizzle, but we walk around the outside, taking pictures in various poses. Although I'm smiling in 90% of the shots, I can imagine that what is published will somehow show me scowling.

In the evening I have an interview with long-time Libertarian Lowell Ponte on the Talk Radio Network. As always, he augments my answers to questions with interesting perspectives on why people should vote Libertarian.

My article "Spoiler for Gore?" appeared today on WorldNetDaily). It attempts to demolish the fear that a Libertarian vote could help Al Gore get elected.

Today Time magazine's website ran an article by Frank Pellegrini entitled "Throwing Your Vote Away? The Case For the Libertarians." It begins, "The third party that really is for smaller government is based on principle, not personality, and it's no fly-by-night operation either." It is very complimentary.

The Mother Jones website has an online poll today. As Mother Jones is a left-wing publication, it isn't surprising that Al Gore and Ralph Nader are the leaders. But we did quite well:

Gore — Democrat, 32.6 %
Nader — Green, 30.3 %
Bush — Republican, 17.7 %
Browne — Libertarian, 15.0 %
McReynolds — Socialist, 2.2 %
Hagelin — Natural Law, 1.1 %
Buchanan — Reform, 0.6 %
Other, 0.6 %

Today an article by Maria Recio is published by Knight Ridder in newspapers around the country. (One is in the San Jose Mercury News. It is entitled "Libertarian Presidential Candidate Quietly Overtakes Better-Known Rivals," and is surprisingly complimentary. My heavens! Someone has actually recognized what we've achieved.

Today's Rasmussen Poll shows:

Bush, 48.0%
Gore, 41.2%
Nader, 3.7%
Buchanan, 1.1%
Browne, 1.0%
Hagelin, 0.2%
Phillips, 0.0%
Not Sure, 4.8%

The Zogby Reuters/MSNBC poll shows:

Bush, 46%
Gore, 44%
Nader, 5%
Browne, 1%
Buchanan, 1%
Undecided, 3%

Jack Dean reports that our website had 842,068 different visitors during October. Overall, there were 3,953,920 hits.

Sunday, November 5, 2000 — Nashville

Two shows today. The first is a 15-minute interview with John Melichar, who has a comedy show. Once we get into the issues, he holds back the jokes and becomes serious. He winds up by saying he's going to vote Libertarian this year.

The second show is 30 minutes with Roger Bentley Arnold on the Business Talk Radio Network, syndicated to 50 stations. He says on the air that he's a Libertarian and voting for me. We cover all the principal issues and especially why you should vote Libertarian.

Today's Los Angeles Times has a special section called "Voter Guide 2000." It has the five major candidates, including me, with equal coverage — pictures, positions on the major issues, and such. John Hagelin and Howard Phillips are mentioned at the bottom of the page as "Other
Candidates."

Today's Chicago Tribune syndicate has a column by Stephen Chapman on the Drug War. It begins:

Here's our quiz for today: Was it Al Gore or George W. Bush who said, ‘On my first day in office, I will pardon everyone who has been convicted of a non-violent federal drug offense. I will empty the federal prisons of the marijuana smokers and make room for the truly violent criminals who are terrorizing our citizens'? No, it wasn't Gore or Bush. It was another presidential candidate — Harry Browne of the Libertarian Party. Browne, who favors free markets, limited government, and deep tax cuts, . . .

The article goes on to lament the absence of the Drug War as an issue in the current election campaign.

In the evening Pamela drives me to the airport and I catch a plane for New York, where I will spend tomorrow campaigning.

As this long campaign comes to a close, I realize how often I'm surprised at how much our campaign staff accomplishes. Everyone has done a first-class job — working long hours under very difficult conditions, while achieving amazing results.

Each person is earning an income that's way below market levels. And several staffers are behind on receiving their pay — willing to delay payment in order to get as much income as possible poured into advertising.

Although it might seem that the Democrats and Republicans get much more advertising for their dollars than we do, the reverse is actually true. Salaries comprise a much higher percentage of the money raised for them than they do in our campaign, and we spend a much higher percentage on advertising. The others do so much advertising only because they have received so much of the taxpayers' money. They are truly welfare queens.

Meanwhile, we have ideological kings and queens.

Jim Babka is our Press Secretary, and he has achieved wonders in that capacity. But he also performs many management responsibilities for the campaign, he's an important strategic planner, and he is our liaison with other organizations, pollsters, and anyone with whom we needed to have a relationship.

Robert Brunner is a tireless booker of radio and TV shows. A number of show producers have told me what a pleasure it has been to work with Robert, and we're fortunate to have him on the staff.

Robert Flohr is our Utility Infielder — doing data entry, booking media, and arranging for free advertising on stations around the country — and doing it all quickly and efficiently.

Stephanie Yanik is the Jill of All Trades — handling bookkeeping, bill-paying, tours, graphics work, and much else. In the process she takes work that is in some cases entirely new to her and handles it expertly.

Laura Carno is a tireless worker, doing almost all the scheduling and making arrangements for all our campaign events. Because she moved her residence last year, she has delayed taking another "regular" job until the campaign is over. She is a business executive who is willing to perform any task to help the campaign succeed.

Debbie Greeson has performed a number of jobs for the campaign — scheduler, booker, computer projects, and much else. We have profited greatly from her efficiency.

Kristin Overn has done a phenomenal job producing the 30-minute Infomercial and the 1-minute ads. They have ushered in a new era of Libertarian advertising.

Geoff Braun is our Webmaster. He has created a site that's received numerous compliments and made it possible for hundreds of thousands of people to gain quick access to Libertarian ideas that have changed their thinking. He also has acted as associate producer for our Infomercial and ads.

Jack Dean edits LibertyWire, as well as doing extensive research and consulting on Internet activities. The prompt, up-to-date information you receive on the campaign is primarily due to Jack's abilities.

Michael Cloud is the world's greatest fund-raiser, not just the top Libertarian fund-raiser. As emcee of our campaign events, he is entertaining, informative, and able to show thousands of people the importance of funding this campaign. He also helps with strategic planning. And he does all this at the same time as he manages the Carla Howell Senate campaign in Massachusetts.

Steve Willis is a life-saver. As our Road Manager, he makes life incomparably easier for me. He handles all the nagging details that come up on tour, stage-manages the campaign rallies, drives the rental cars, and is excellent company.

Jennifer Willis not only runs the volunteer network, she handles the bulk of the enormous non-financial data processing that's necessary in such a campaign. Like most of the others, she learned a new job quickly and has made the most of it.

Stuart Reges oversees all the financial data processing apparatus and takes care of Federal Election Commission compliance. He has been doing this for LP campaigns for a long time and is a treasured asset of the party.

Rob DeVoil processes all the incoming money efficiently, and keeps the money flowing rapidly to the campaign.

Sharon Ayres has performed a number of task for the campaign, doing them as a volunteer — cheerfully and with her usual precise efficiency.

Jack Williams answers every message received at the website — sometimes as many as a hundred in a single day. He not only gets the job done, he does it in a way that has brought us many new friends and undoubtedly many, many more votes. He has done this full-time job as an unpaid volunteer.

Although Art Matsko is an outside contractor, he's devoting his entire business to the campaign — handling all our fulfillment orders, and handling them in a much speedier way than any Libertarian campaign in history.

Last and foremost, Perry Willis manages this entire enterprise. He has coped with what I would consider insurmountable problems — and achieved surprisingly successful results. His ability to keep us focused on the most important projects has been the key to our success. I can't imagine our doing even half as well with anyone else at the helm.

Of course, the campaign wouldn't have been possible for me without the cooperation and support of my wife, Pamela. She has stood by me through six years of campaigning and party-building. I think campaigning is much harder for her than for me. I am continually exhilarated by the support we receive, and she doesn't always get to see that. But she has never wavered in her desire to see this campaign succeed.

I have been able to see many of the achievements of our campaign staff. But I've been able to see first-hand only a small part of what volunteers all over America have done to make this campaign more visible and respected than any previous campaign. Whatever the vote total we receive, their energetic, innovative, effective, and anonymous work has elevated us to new levels. I am deeply grateful for the work of thousands of people.

I've always said this campaign operates with a specialization of labor: these people do all the work and I get all the credit.

I will remember their efforts as long as I live.

Monday, November 6, 2000 — New York City

Last night Steve Willis and I arrived in New York and checked into the Hudson Hotel in Manhattan. We weren't able to stay at the Excelsior, which has been a comfortable haven in past trips, because its prices have risen to a prohibitive level.

The Hudson is something else again. I have never been in a weirder hotel. There is no sign at the entrance. Just a simple door at the street that allows you entrance to an escalator taking you up to the hotel lobby. The light in the lobby is quite dim. Just off the lobby is a very, very noisy discotheque. The deafening noise and the dim light make checking in a real trial.

The hotel room is about the size of an inexpensive stateroom on a cruise ship — which is to say very small. There are about 18 inches from the bed to the wall on either side. There is little light in the room — which is also the case in the hallways. This seems to be a hotel designed for young people who might favor "coolness" over comfort.

Today I have a full schedule of shows — the final chance to persuade more people to vote Libertarian.

The first interview is at 7:10am, and it's 15 minutes with Phil Paleologos and Ellen Ratner on the Talk America Radio Network. Phil has been very supportive, while Ellen is a full-fledged liberal (who does favor ending the Drug War). It's a short interview, and I allow the end to catch me by surprise, because I've been caught in a discussion of vouchers with Phil. He says he favors them because he wants people to have a choice. I say vouchers will cause you to lose your last remaining choice, because they'll allow the federal government to hook private schools on vouchers — and then impose the same mandates on them they've applied to government schools.

Then it's 15 minutes with Mike Young at WWLO in Gainesville, Florida. He has some Libertarian friends in the studio, and he makes the point that all of them are voting Libertarian. He brings up George Bush's drunk-driving charge and asks whether this shows he doesn't have the character to be President. I say that he has much worse character flaws — such as lying about the budget surplus, claiming to be the candidate of smaller government while making proposals to enlarge government, and being so arrogant as to think he should be able to give your money to charities of his choice.

The next show is 15 minutes with our friend Neal Boortz at WSB, the big talk station in Atlanta. He's been pushing for Libertarian votes all year, and many people have told me they've been influenced by him. The conversation is almost entirely on why you should vote Libertarian, and why the national media have ignored the Libertarian alternative.

Steve Willis and I head for an in-person interview in mid-town Manhattan. On the way I talk with Armstrong Williams on the Talk America Radio Network. He's a Republican who has definite libertarian tendencies, but is loyal to his party. In our conversation I'm very passionate about the desire to make America a free country again — pointing out that we can't possibly get there as long as we continue to support people like Al Gore or George Bush. As I talk about the politicians having no right to confiscate whatever they want from your earnings, he says, "Wow!" I don't think he'll vote for me tomorrow, but I may have convinced a few of his listeners that they'll never get what they want by voting for people who are making government bigger.

We arrive at WOR in Manhattan for a one-hour interview with the Dolans — Ken and Daria — a husband and wife team who give investment advice. They're syndicated to 200 stations with a huge audience. We're all familiar with each other and there's great respect all the way around. They invited Pat Buchanan and Ralph Nader to be on the show, but neither would appear with me. The Dolans treat me very well and offer to help air libertarian ideas after the election. The show goes swimmingly, and I'm able to keep coming back to the importance of voting Libertarian tomorrow.

Back at the hotel, I have a 5-minute interview with Bruce Stephens and Colin MacEnroe at WTIC in Hartford, Connecticut. Only one of them talks with me (I don't know which one), and he's obviously a liberal. He thinks the government schools are doing a great job (even after I compare their decline with the ever-improving free-market computer industry), and doesn't want smaller government. So I go over his head and make an appeal to the audience. But I don't expect much to come out of this interview.

I then have a 15-minute interview with Ken Hamblin ("The Black Avenger") on the America View Radio Network. He's a conservative but is always very nice to me. He's concerned about the borders and says he'd gladly invade Mexico to stop the country from dumping its lower-class citizens on us. We go round and round on that one, but he gives me an opportunity at the end to push for Libertarian votes, and asks me to stay over following the news break. Unfortunately, I can't do so. So he asks me to stay in touch after the election. Off the air after the interview, the show's producer tells me that she and her husband have already voted — and voted Libertarian as a result of my last appearance on the show.

Then it's another comedy show — about 10 minutes with Ken Ober on an Internet show. Like all the other comedians I've been on with, he's very nice to me. He almost sounds as though he's going to vote Libertarian, but he never commits himself.

During a break between shows, I talk with Dell Computer Company and make arrangements to get a new computer to replace the dysfunctional laptop that's been giving me so much trouble. Without my prodding them, the company has decided to supply the current model — a cut above what I had — rather than make me wait 30-60 days for a custom replacement of the model I've been using (which is now out of production).

In the evening I talk with Gary Nolan, who's in Atlanta and will be broadcasting from our election day party tomorrow night. We talk for about 15 minutes — largely about the wasted vote issue.

Next is an in-studio appearance on Hannity & Colmes. Sean and Alan have been very good to me this year — as has the Fox TV News Network on which they air. They've allowed me to appear as a solo guest each time up until now, treating me with respect. However, tonight Howard Phillips is also on the show, appearing by remote from some other city.

Before the interview, I voice to Alan my displeasure about sharing the time with Phillips — predicting that he'll hog the show, interrupting and making it difficult for anyone else to voice a viewpoint. Alan says he didn't know there was going to be anyone else.

Sure enough, Howard carries on as always. As usual, he states that as President he'll command the U.S. attorneys to shut down the abortion clinics. Unfortunately, Sean asks me what I think of that, and carries the subject over into the second of the two segments. As I try to get onto a more meaningful topic for me, Howard interrupts and carries on with his tirade about the 5th amendment guaranteeing that no person should be deprived of life, liberty, or property without due process of law — even though this applies only to governments, not to abortion clinics or other private entities. At the end of the interview, Sean asks me a question and Howard interrupts to give his website address.

Afterward, back at the hotel I talk with Pamela on the phone. She says that I looked as though I were giving up in the interview — which I guess I was. It seems pointless to me to try to talk when someone else is talking, even if I'm the one who's supposed to have the floor. It doesn't look civil and no one can hear what I'm saying anyway.

The final show of the day is from 11 to 12 midnight on Alan Colmes' radio show. I do it from the hotel, rather than in Alan's studio in Manhattan, so that I can get to bed a little earlier. Alan is a real gentleman and an excellent example of what a talk-show host can be. He asks challenging questions, but he does so in the spirit of inquiry and not in a combative way. Consequently, his show is interesting without being noisy. We go over a great deal of ground and take a number of calls.

After the show I finish up some work and pack, getting to bed a little after 1am.

Tuesday, November 7, 2000 — Atlanta

I get up at 4:15am to catch a plane to Atlanta. The early plane is necessary so that I can appear on Fox TV News at noon today.

On the plane I experience the ever-present feeling that there's something I should be doing for the campaign — writing an article, working on something for the web page, or something else. But I realize that it's too late for all that. There's nothing more that can be done. This is it — election day — the end of several years of effort. And now nothing I might do can change the outcome.

In a campaign the participants do everything they think might produce the best outcome. And there's no question that proper strategy, good people, and persuasive presentations will produce a better outcome than ill-advised strategy, less talented people, and unsalesmanlike harangues.

But there also is so much over which we have no control. Once into the campaign, we can't make the party larger and create a larger fund-raising base. We can't force the press to cover us, no matter how much real news we might generate. And we can't control what the other candidates might do.

For example, in these final days the press has continually hammered home the idea that the race between Gore and Bush is very close. That's bad for us, because some people who might otherwise have voted for us can think it's important that they vote for Bush or Gore, if only to keep the other one out of the White House. In the past few weeks, I've emphasized the importance of voting Libertarian rather than worrying about whether Gore or Bush is going to win, and I'm sure that's persuaded some voters. But the apparent closeness of the race could easily cost us a few hundred thousand votes.

We will have much more control over Libertarian races when we have a much larger party — able to produce the resources necessary to command the attention of the public and the press. I believe our message is far more appealing than that of the other parties. But the message is irrelevant to those who never hear it.

Once in Atlanta, Steve and I drive to a video studio for a remote connection with the Fox TV News Network. I'm on once again with David Asman — probably the fourth time in the campaign. He begins by complimenting me on doing well in the polls despite the lack of media coverage. I take the opportunity to point out that only Fox and C-SPAN have given us the time of day — that the commercial networks have ignored me, even when I've been ahead of Pat Buchanan in the polls. I tell him how grateful we Libertarians are for the coverage Fox has given us.

In the evening we have a huge election-night party at the Fox Theatre in Atlanta. We don't have an official count, but it appears that 900 - 1,000 people are in attendance. It is a wonderful opportunity for me to meet many people I didn't encounter on the campaign trail.